diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
296 files changed, 9384 insertions, 3855 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX index 8dfc6708a257..f607367e642f 100644 --- a/Documentation/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX @@ -328,8 +328,6 @@ sysrq.txt - info on the magic SysRq key. telephony/ - directory with info on telephony (e.g. voice over IP) support. -time_interpolators.txt - - info on time interpolators. uml/ - directory with information about User Mode Linux. unicode.txt @@ -346,8 +344,6 @@ vm/ - directory with info on the Linux vm code. volatile-considered-harmful.txt - Why the "volatile" type class should not be used -voyager.txt - - guide to running Linux on the Voyager architecture. w1/ - directory with documents regarding the 1-wire (w1) subsystem. watchdog/ diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-firmware-efi-vars b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-firmware-efi-vars new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5def20b9019e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-firmware-efi-vars @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +What: /sys/firmware/efi/vars +Date: April 2004 +Contact: Matt Domsch <Matt_Domsch@dell.com> +Description: + This directory exposes interfaces for interactive with + EFI variables. For more information on EFI variables, + see 'Variable Services' in the UEFI specification + (section 7.2 in specification version 2.3 Errata D). + + In summary, EFI variables are named, and are classified + into separate namespaces through the use of a vendor + GUID. They also have an arbitrary binary value + associated with them. + + The efivars module enumerates these variables and + creates a separate directory for each one found. Each + directory has a name of the form "<key>-<vendor guid>" + and contains the following files: + + attributes: A read-only text file enumerating the + EFI variable flags. Potential values + include: + + EFI_VARIABLE_NON_VOLATILE + EFI_VARIABLE_BOOTSERVICE_ACCESS + EFI_VARIABLE_RUNTIME_ACCESS + EFI_VARIABLE_HARDWARE_ERROR_RECORD + EFI_VARIABLE_AUTHENTICATED_WRITE_ACCESS + + See the EFI documentation for an + explanation of each of these variables. + + data: A read-only binary file that can be read + to attain the value of the EFI variable + + guid: The vendor GUID of the variable. This + should always match the GUID in the + variable's name. + + raw_var: A binary file that can be read to obtain + a structure that contains everything + there is to know about the variable. + For structure definition see "struct + efi_variable" in the kernel sources. + + This file can also be written to in + order to update the value of a variable. + For this to work however, all fields of + the "struct efi_variable" passed must + match byte for byte with the structure + read out of the file, save for the value + portion. + + **Note** the efi_variable structure + read/written with this file contains a + 'long' type that may change widths + depending on your underlying + architecture. + + size: As ASCII representation of the size of + the variable's value. + + + In addition, two other magic binary files are provided + in the top-level directory and are used for adding and + removing variables: + + new_var: Takes a "struct efi_variable" and + instructs the EFI firmware to create a + new variable. + + del_var: Takes a "struct efi_variable" and + instructs the EFI firmware to remove any + variable that has a matching vendor GUID + and variable key name. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/thermal-notification b/Documentation/ABI/stable/thermal-notification new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9723e8b7aeb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/thermal-notification @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +What: A notification mechanism for thermal related events +Description: + This interface enables notification for thermal related events. + The notification is in the form of a netlink event. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/pstore b/Documentation/ABI/testing/pstore new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f1fb2a004264 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/pstore @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +Where: /dev/pstore/... +Date: January 2011 +Kernel Version: 2.6.38 +Contact: tony.luck@intel.com +Description: Generic interface to platform dependent persistent storage. + + Platforms that provide a mechanism to preserve some data + across system reboots can register with this driver to + provide a generic interface to show records captured in + the dying moments. In the case of a panic the last part + of the console log is captured, but other interesting + data can also be saved. + + # mount -t pstore - /dev/pstore + + $ ls -l /dev/pstore + total 0 + -r--r--r-- 1 root root 7896 Nov 30 15:38 dmesg-erst-1 + + Different users of this interface will result in different + filename prefixes. Currently two are defined: + + "dmesg" - saved console log + "mce" - architecture dependent data from fatal h/w error + + Once the information in a file has been read, removing + the file will signal to the underlying persistent storage + device that it can reclaim the space for later re-use. + + $ rm /dev/pstore/dmesg-erst-1 + + The expectation is that all files in /dev/pstore + will be saved elsewhere and erased from persistent store + soon after boot to free up space ready for the next + catastrophe. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci index f979d825d112..36bf454ba855 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci @@ -145,9 +145,11 @@ Date: July 2010 Contact: Narendra K <narendra_k@dell.com>, linux-bugs@dell.com Description: Reading this attribute will provide the firmware - given name(SMBIOS type 41 string) of the PCI device. - The attribute will be created only if the firmware - has given a name to the PCI device. + given name (SMBIOS type 41 string or ACPI _DSM string) of + the PCI device. The attribute will be created only + if the firmware has given a name to the PCI device. + ACPI _DSM string name will be given priority if the + system firmware provides SMBIOS type 41 string also. Users: Userspace applications interested in knowing the firmware assigned name of the PCI device. @@ -157,12 +159,27 @@ Date: July 2010 Contact: Narendra K <narendra_k@dell.com>, linux-bugs@dell.com Description: Reading this attribute will provide the firmware - given instance(SMBIOS type 41 device type instance) - of the PCI device. The attribute will be created - only if the firmware has given a device type instance - to the PCI device. + given instance (SMBIOS type 41 device type instance) of the + PCI device. The attribute will be created only if the firmware + has given an instance number to the PCI device. Users: Userspace applications interested in knowing the firmware assigned device type instance of the PCI device that can help in understanding the firmware intended order of the PCI device. + +What: /sys/bus/pci/devices/.../acpi_index +Date: July 2010 +Contact: Narendra K <narendra_k@dell.com>, linux-bugs@dell.com +Description: + Reading this attribute will provide the firmware + given instance (ACPI _DSM instance number) of the PCI device. + The attribute will be created only if the firmware has given + an instance number to the PCI device. ACPI _DSM instance number + will be given priority if the system firmware provides SMBIOS + type 41 device type instance also. +Users: + Userspace applications interested in knowing the + firmware assigned instance number of the PCI + device that can help in understanding the firmware + intended order of the PCI device. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led index 9e4541d71cb6..edff6630c805 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led @@ -26,3 +26,12 @@ Description: scheduler is chosen. Trigger specific parameters can appear in /sys/class/leds/<led> once a given trigger is selected. +What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/inverted +Date: January 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.6.38 +Contact: Richard Purdie <rpurdie@rpsys.net> +Description: + Invert the LED on/off state. This parameter is specific to + gpio and backlight triggers. In case of the backlight trigger, + it is usefull when driving a LED which is intended to indicate + a device in a standby like state. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..38dd762def4b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ + +What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/batman-adv/mesh_iface +Date: May 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + The /sys/class/net/<iface>/batman-adv/mesh_iface file + displays the batman mesh interface this <iface> + currently is associated with. + +What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/batman-adv/iface_status +Date: May 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Indicates the status of <iface> as it is seen by batman. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..748fe1701d25 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/aggregated_ogms +Date: May 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Indicates whether the batman protocol messages of the + mesh <mesh_iface> shall be aggregated or not. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/bonding +Date: June 2010 +Contact: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> +Description: + Indicates whether the data traffic going through the + mesh will be sent using multiple interfaces at the + same time (if available). + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/fragmentation +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Andreas Langer <an.langer@gmx.de> +Description: + Indicates whether the data traffic going through the + mesh will be fragmented or silently discarded if the + packet size exceeds the outgoing interface MTU. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_bandwidth +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Defines the bandwidth which is propagated by this + node if gw_mode was set to 'server'. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_mode +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Defines the state of the gateway features. Can be + either 'off', 'client' or 'server'. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_sel_class +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Defines the selection criteria this node will use + to choose a gateway if gw_mode was set to 'client'. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/orig_interval +Date: May 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Defines the interval in milliseconds in which batman + sends its protocol messages. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/hop_penalty +Date: Oct 2010 +Contact: Linus Lüssing <linus.luessing@web.de> +Description: + Defines the penalty which will be applied to an + originator message's tq-field on every hop. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/vis_mode +Date: May 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Each batman node only maintains information about its + own local neighborhood, therefore generating graphs + showing the topology of the entire mesh is not easily + feasible without having a central instance to collect + the local topologies from all nodes. This file allows + to activate the collecting (server) mode. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-mmc b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-mmc new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5a50ab655843 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-mmc @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +What: /sys/devices/.../mmc_host/mmcX/mmcX:XXXX/enhanced_area_offset +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Chuanxiao Dong <chuanxiao.dong@intel.com> +Description: + Enhanced area is a new feature defined in eMMC4.4 standard. + eMMC4.4 or later card can support such feature. This kind of + area can help to improve the card performance. If the feature + is enabled, this attribute will indicate the start address of + enhanced data area. If not, this attribute will be -EINVAL. + Unit Byte. Format decimal. + +What: /sys/devices/.../mmc_host/mmcX/mmcX:XXXX/enhanced_area_size +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Chuanxiao Dong <chuanxiao.dong@intel.com> +Description: + Enhanced area is a new feature defined in eMMC4.4 standard. + eMMC4.4 or later card can support such feature. This kind of + area can help to improve the card performance. If the feature + is enabled, this attribute will indicate the size of enhanced + data area. If not, this attribute will be -EINVAL. + Unit KByte. Format decimal. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power index 7628cd1bc36a..8ffbc25376a0 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power @@ -29,9 +29,8 @@ Description: "disabled" to it. For the devices that are not capable of generating system wakeup - events this file contains "\n". In that cases the user space - cannot modify the contents of this file and the device cannot be - enabled to wake up the system. + events this file is not present. In that case the device cannot + be enabled to wake up the system from sleep states. What: /sys/devices/.../power/control Date: January 2009 @@ -85,7 +84,7 @@ Description: The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_count attribute contains the number of signaled wakeup events associated with the device. This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up - the system from sleep states, this attribute is empty. + the system from sleep states, this attribute is not present. What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_active_count Date: September 2010 @@ -95,7 +94,7 @@ Description: number of times the processing of wakeup events associated with the device was completed (at the kernel level). This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up the - system from sleep states, this attribute is empty. + system from sleep states, this attribute is not present. What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_hit_count Date: September 2010 @@ -105,7 +104,8 @@ Description: number of times the processing of a wakeup event associated with the device might prevent the system from entering a sleep state. This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to - wake up the system from sleep states, this attribute is empty. + wake up the system from sleep states, this attribute is not + present. What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_active Date: September 2010 @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Description: or 0, depending on whether or not a wakeup event associated with the device is being processed (1). This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep - states, this attribute is empty. + states, this attribute is not present. What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_total_time_ms Date: September 2010 @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Description: the total time of processing wakeup events associated with the device, in milliseconds. This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep states, - this attribute is empty. + this attribute is not present. What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_max_time_ms Date: September 2010 @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Description: the maximum time of processing a single wakeup event associated with the device, in milliseconds. This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep - states, this attribute is empty. + states, this attribute is not present. What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_last_time_ms Date: September 2010 @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Description: signaling the last wakeup event associated with the device, in milliseconds. This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep states, this - attribute is empty. + attribute is not present. What: /sys/devices/.../power/autosuspend_delay_ms Date: September 2010 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b6490e14fe83 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +What: For USB devices : /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/report_descriptor + For BT devices : /sys/class/bluetooth/hci<addr>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/report_descriptor + Symlink : /sys/class/hidraw/hidraw<num>/device/report_descriptor +Date: Jan 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.0.39 +Contact: Alan Ott <alan@signal11.us> +Description: When read, this file returns the device's raw binary HID + report descriptor. + This file cannot be written. +Users: HIDAPI library (http://www.signal11.us/oss/hidapi) diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-arvo b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-arvo new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..55e281b0071a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-arvo @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/arvo/roccatarvo<minor>/actual_profile +Date: Januar 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-5. + When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual + profile which is also the profile that's active on device startup. + When written this attribute activates the selected profile + immediately. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/arvo/roccatarvo<minor>/button +Date: Januar 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The keyboard can store short macros with consist of 1 button with + several modifier keys internally. + When written, this file lets one set the sequence for a specific + button for a specific profile. Button and profile numbers are + included in written data. The data has to be 24 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/arvo/roccatarvo<minor>/info +Date: Januar 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read, this file returns some info about the device like the + installed firmware version. + The size of the data is 8 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/arvo/roccatarvo<minor>/key_mask +Date: Januar 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The keyboard lets the user deactivate 5 certain keys like the + windows and application keys, to protect the user from the outcome + of accidentally pressing them. + The integer value of this attribute has bits 0-4 set depending + on the state of the corresponding key. + When read, this file returns the current state of the buttons. + When written, the given buttons are activated/deactivated + immediately. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/arvo/roccatarvo<minor>/mode_key +Date: Januar 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The keyboard has a condensed layout without num-lock key. + Instead it uses a mode-key which activates a gaming mode where + the assignment of the number block changes. + The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0 (OFF) to 1 (ON). + When read, this file returns the actual state of the key. + When written, the key is activated/deactivated immediately. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone index 063bda7fe707..b4c4f158ab9c 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_dpi +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/actual_dpi Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: It is possible to switch the dpi setting of the mouse with the @@ -16,14 +16,16 @@ Description: It is possible to switch the dpi setting of the mouse with the 6 3200 This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_profile +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/actual_profile Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile. This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/firmware_version +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/firmware_version Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the @@ -32,8 +34,9 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38 This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile[1-5] +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/profile[1-5] Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the @@ -47,8 +50,9 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the The mouse will reject invalid data, whereas the profile number stored in the profile doesn't need to fit the number of the store. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/settings +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/settings Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse. @@ -57,8 +61,9 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse. When written, this file lets write settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 36 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid data. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/startup_profile +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/startup_profile Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1 to 5. @@ -66,8 +71,9 @@ Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1 to 5. that's active when the mouse is powered on. When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile and the mouse activates this profile immediately. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/tcu +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/tcu Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse has a "Tracking Control Unit" which lets the user @@ -77,8 +83,9 @@ Description: The mouse has a "Tracking Control Unit" which lets the user Writing 0 in this file will switch the TCU off. Writing 1 in this file will start the calibration which takes around 6 seconds to complete and activates the TCU. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/weight +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/weight Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can be equipped with one of four supplied weights @@ -96,3 +103,4 @@ Description: The mouse can be equipped with one of four supplied weights 4 20g This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..00efced73969 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/actual_profile +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in + range 0-4. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/firmware_version +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the + firmware reported by the mouse. Using the integer value eases + further usage in other programs. To receive the real version + number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the + left. E.g. a returned value of 121 means 1.21 + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/macro +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store a macro with max 500 key/button strokes + internally. + When written, this file lets one set the sequence for a specific + button for a specific profile. Button and profile numbers are + included in written data. The data has to be 2082 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_buttons +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + When written, this file lets one write the respective profile + buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 77 bytes long. + The mouse will reject invalid data. + Which profile to write is determined by the profile number + contained in the data. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. + The returned data is 77 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_settings +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + and light effects. + When written, this file lets one write the respective profile + settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 43 bytes long. + The mouse will reject invalid data. + Which profile to write is determined by the profile number + contained in the data. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + and light effects. + When read, these files return the respective profile settings. + The returned data is 43 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/sensor +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse has a tracking- and a distance-control-unit. These + can be activated/deactivated and the lift-off distance can be + set. The data has to be 6 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/startup_profile +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4. + When read, this attribute returns the number of the profile + that's active when the mouse is powered on. + When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile + and the mouse activates this profile immediately. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written a calibration process for the tracking control unit + can be initiated/cancelled. + The data has to be 3 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu_image +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read the mouse returns a 30x30 pixel image of the + sampled underground. This works only in the course of a + calibration process initiated with tcu. + The returned data is 1028 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fdfa16f8189b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_cpi +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-4. + When read, this attribute returns the number of the active + cpi level. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_profile +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4. + When read, this attribute returns the number of the active + profile. + When written, the mouse activates this profile immediately. + The profile that's active when powered down is the same that's + active when the mouse is powered on. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_sensitivity_x +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-10. + When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual + sensitivity in x direction. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_sensitivity_y +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-10. + When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual + sensitivity in y direction. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/firmware_version +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the + firmware reported by the mouse. Using the integer value eases + further usage in other programs. To receive the real version + number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the + left. E.g. a returned value of 121 means 1.21 + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile_buttons +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + When written, this file lets one write the respective profile + buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 23 bytes long. + The mouse will reject invalid data. + Which profile to write is determined by the profile number + contained in the data. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. + The returned data is 23 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile_settings +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + and light effects. + When written, this file lets one write the respective profile + settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 16 bytes long. + The mouse will reject invalid data. + Which profile to write is determined by the profile number + contained in the data. + This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings +Date: January 2011 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + and light effects. + When read, these files return the respective profile settings. + The returned data is 16 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra index ad1125b02ff4..5fab71af3c46 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_cpi +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/actual_cpi Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: It is possible to switch the cpi setting of the mouse with the @@ -13,15 +13,17 @@ Description: It is possible to switch the cpi setting of the mouse with the 4 1600 This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_profile +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/actual_profile Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in range 0-4. This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/firmware_version +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/firmware_version Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the @@ -30,8 +32,9 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38 This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile_settings +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_settings Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the @@ -44,8 +47,9 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the Which profile to write is determined by the profile number contained in the data. This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile[1-5]_settings +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the @@ -55,8 +59,9 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the When read, these files return the respective profile settings. The returned data is 13 bytes in size. This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile_buttons +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_buttons Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the @@ -68,8 +73,9 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the Which profile to write is determined by the profile number contained in the data. This file is writeonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile[1-5]_buttons +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the @@ -78,16 +84,18 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. The returned data is 19 bytes in size. This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/startup_profile +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/startup_profile Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4. When read, this attribute returns the number of the profile that's active when the mouse is powered on. This file is readonly. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/settings +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/settings Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse. @@ -96,3 +104,4 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse. When written, this file lets write settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 3 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid data. +Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ba9da9503c23 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +What: /sys/firmware/dmi/ +Date: February 2011 +Contact: Mike Waychison <mikew@google.com> +Description: + Many machines' firmware (x86 and ia64) export DMI / + SMBIOS tables to the operating system. Getting at this + information is often valuable to userland, especially in + cases where there are OEM extensions used. + + The kernel itself does not rely on the majority of the + information in these tables being correct. It equally + cannot ensure that the data as exported to userland is + without error either. + + DMI is structured as a large table of entries, where + each entry has a common header indicating the type and + length of the entry, as well as 'handle' that is + supposed to be unique amongst all entries. + + Some entries are required by the specification, but many + others are optional. In general though, users should + never expect to find a specific entry type on their + system unless they know for certain what their firmware + is doing. Machine to machine will vary. + + Multiple entries of the same type are allowed. In order + to handle these duplicate entry types, each entry is + assigned by the operating system an 'instance', which is + derived from an entry type's ordinal position. That is + to say, if there are 'N' multiple entries with the same type + 'T' in the DMI tables (adjacent or spread apart, it + doesn't matter), they will be represented in sysfs as + entries "T-0" through "T-(N-1)": + + Example entry directories: + + /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-0 + /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-1 + /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-2 + /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-3 + ... + + Instance numbers are used in lieu of the firmware + assigned entry handles as the kernel itself makes no + guarantees that handles as exported are unique, and + there are likely firmware images that get this wrong in + the wild. + + Each DMI entry in sysfs has the common header values + exported as attributes: + + handle : The 16bit 'handle' that is assigned to this + entry by the firmware. This handle may be + referred to by other entries. + length : The length of the entry, as presented in the + entry itself. Note that this is _not the + total count of bytes associated with the + entry_. This value represents the length of + the "formatted" portion of the entry. This + "formatted" region is sometimes followed by + the "unformatted" region composed of nul + terminated strings, with termination signalled + by a two nul characters in series. + raw : The raw bytes of the entry. This includes the + "formatted" portion of the entry, the + "unformatted" strings portion of the entry, + and the two terminating nul characters. + type : The type of the entry. This value is the same + as found in the directory name. It indicates + how the rest of the entry should be + interpreted. + instance: The instance ordinal of the entry for the + given type. This value is the same as found + in the parent directory name. + position: The position of the entry within the entirety + of the entirety. + + === Entry Specialization === + + Some entry types may have other information available in + sysfs. + + --- Type 15 - System Event Log --- + + This entry allows the firmware to export a log of + events the system has taken. This information is + typically backed by nvram, but the implementation + details are abstracted by this table. This entries data + is exported in the directory: + + /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/15-0/system_event_log + + and has the following attributes (documented in the + SMBIOS / DMI specification under "System Event Log (Type 15)": + + area_length + header_start_offset + data_start_offset + access_method + status + change_token + access_method_address + header_format + per_log_type_descriptor_length + type_descriptors_supported_count + + As well, the kernel exports the binary attribute: + + raw_event_log : The raw binary bits of the event log + as described by the DMI entry. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-pstore b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-pstore new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8e659d854805 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-pstore @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +What: /sys/fs/pstore/kmsg_bytes +Date: January 2011 +Kernel Version: 2.6.38 +Contact: "Tony Luck" <tony.luck@intel.com> +Description: + Controls amount of console log that will be saved + to persistent store on oops/panic. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop index 1d775390e856..41ff8ae4dee0 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop @@ -47,6 +47,20 @@ Date: January 2007 KernelVersion: 2.6.20 Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> Description: - Control the bluetooth device. 1 means on, 0 means off. + Control the wlan device. 1 means on, 0 means off. This may control the led, the device or both. Users: Lapsus + +What: /sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/wimax +Date: October 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.37 +Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> +Description: + Control the wimax device. 1 means on, 0 means off. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/wwan +Date: October 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.37 +Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> +Description: + Control the wwan (3G) device. 1 means on, 0 means off. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-at91 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-at91 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4cc6a865ae66 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-at91 @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +What: /sys/devices/platform/at91_can/net/<iface>/mb0_id +Date: January 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.6.38 +Contact: Marc Kleine-Budde <kernel@pengutronix.de> +Description: + Value representing the can_id of mailbox 0. + + Default: 0x7ff (standard frame) + + Due to a chip bug (errata 50.2.6.3 & 50.3.5.3 in + "AT91SAM9263 Preliminary 6249H-ATARM-27-Jul-09") the + contents of mailbox 0 may be send under certain + conditions (even if disabled or in rx mode). + + The workaround in the errata suggests not to use the + mailbox and load it with an unused identifier. + + In order to use an extended can_id add the + CAN_EFF_FLAG (0x80000000U) to the can_id. Example: + + - standard id 0x7ff: + echo 0x7ff > /sys/class/net/can0/mb0_id + + - extended id 0x1fffffff: + echo 0x9fffffff > /sys/class/net/can0/mb0_id diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-wmi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-wmi new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e4b5fef5fadd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-wmi @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +What: /sys/devices/platform/eeepc-wmi/cpufv +Date: Oct 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.37 +Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> +Description: + Change CPU clock configuration (write-only). + There are three available clock configuration: + * 0 -> Super Performance Mode + * 1 -> High Performance Mode + * 2 -> Power Saving Mode diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..807fca2ae2a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-ideapad-laptop @@ -0,0 +1,6 @@ +What: /sys/devices/platform/ideapad/camera_power +Date: Dec 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.37 +Contact: "Ike Panhc <ike.pan@canonical.com>" +Description: + Control the power of camera module. 1 means on, 0 means off. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-kim b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-kim new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c1653271872a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-kim @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +What: /sys/devices/platform/kim/dev_name +Date: January 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.38 +Contact: "Pavan Savoy" <pavan_savoy@ti.com> +Description: + Name of the UART device at which the WL128x chip + is connected. example: "/dev/ttyS0". + The device name flows down to architecture specific board + initialization file from the SFI/ATAGS bootloader + firmware. The name exposed is read from the user-space + dameon and opens the device when install is requested. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/kim/baud_rate +Date: January 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.38 +Contact: "Pavan Savoy" <pavan_savoy@ti.com> +Description: + The maximum reliable baud-rate the host can support. + Different platforms tend to have different high-speed + UART configurations, so the baud-rate needs to be set + locally and also sent across to the WL128x via a HCI-VS + command. The entry is read and made use by the user-space + daemon when the ldisc install is requested. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/kim/flow_cntrl +Date: January 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.38 +Contact: "Pavan Savoy" <pavan_savoy@ti.com> +Description: + The WL128x makes use of flow control mechanism, and this + entry most often should be 1, the host's UART is required + to have the capability of flow-control, or else this + entry can be made use of for exceptions. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/kim/install +Date: January 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.38 +Contact: "Pavan Savoy" <pavan_savoy@ti.com> +Description: + When one of the protocols Bluetooth, FM or GPS wants to make + use of the shared UART transport, it registers to the shared + transport driver, which will signal the user-space for opening, + configuring baud and install line discipline via this sysfs + entry. This entry would be polled upon by the user-space + daemon managing the UART, and is notified about the change + by the sysfs_notify. The value would be '1' when UART needs + to be opened/ldisc installed, and would be '0' when UART + is no more required and needs to be closed. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-tty b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-tty new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b138b663bf54 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-tty @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +What: /sys/class/tty/console/active +Date: Nov 2010 +Contact: Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@vrfy.org> +Description: + Shows the list of currently configured + console devices, like 'tty1 ttyS0'. + The last entry in the file is the active + device connected to /dev/console. + The file supports poll() to detect virtual + console switches. + +What: /sys/class/tty/tty0/active +Date: Nov 2010 +Contact: Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@vrfy.org> +Description: + Shows the currently active virtual console + device, like 'tty1'. + The file supports poll() to detect virtual + console switches. diff --git a/Documentation/CodingStyle b/Documentation/CodingStyle index 8bb37237ebd2..1cd3478e5834 100644 --- a/Documentation/CodingStyle +++ b/Documentation/CodingStyle @@ -659,7 +659,7 @@ There are a number of driver model diagnostic macros in <linux/device.h> which you should use to make sure messages are matched to the right device and driver, and are tagged with the right level: dev_err(), dev_warn(), dev_info(), and so forth. For messages that aren't associated with a -particular device, <linux/kernel.h> defines pr_debug() and pr_info(). +particular device, <linux/printk.h> defines pr_debug() and pr_info(). Coming up with good debugging messages can be quite a challenge; and once you have them, they can be a huge help for remote troubleshooting. Such @@ -819,6 +819,3 @@ language C, URL: http://www.open-std.org/JTC1/SC22/WG14/ Kernel CodingStyle, by greg@kroah.com at OLS 2002: http://www.kroah.com/linux/talks/ols_2002_kernel_codingstyle_talk/html/ --- -Last updated on 2007-July-13. - diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl index 19a1210c2530..8906648f962b 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl @@ -146,6 +146,7 @@ !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_rx_mgmt !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_mgmt_tx_status !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_cqm_rssi_notify +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_cqm_pktloss_notify !Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_michael_mic_failure </chapter> <chapter> @@ -267,10 +268,6 @@ !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ops !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_alloc_hw !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_register_hw -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_tx_led_name -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_rx_led_name -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_radio_led_name !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_unregister_hw !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_free_hw </chapter> @@ -332,10 +329,16 @@ <title>functions/definitions</title> !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_status !Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rx_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_tx_control_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rate_control_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_rate !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_info +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_ni !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_irqsafe !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_ni !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rts_get !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rts_duration @@ -346,6 +349,7 @@ !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queue !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queues !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_queue_stopped </sect1> </chapter> @@ -354,6 +358,13 @@ !Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Frame filtering !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_filter_flags </chapter> + + <chapter id="workqueue"> + <title>The mac80211 workqueue</title> +!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211 workqueue +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_queue_work +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_queue_delayed_work + </chapter> </part> <part id="advanced"> @@ -367,6 +378,23 @@ </para> </partintro> + <chapter id="led-support"> + <title>LED support</title> + <para> + Mac80211 supports various ways of blinking LEDs. Wherever possible, + device LEDs should be exposed as LED class devices and hooked up to + the appropriate trigger, which will then be triggered appropriately + by mac80211. + </para> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_tx_led_name +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_rx_led_name +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_radio_led_name +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tpt_blink +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger + </chapter> + <chapter id="hardware-crypto-offload"> <title>Hardware crypto acceleration</title> !Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Hardware crypto acceleration @@ -374,6 +402,9 @@ !Finclude/net/mac80211.h set_key_cmd !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_conf !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tkip_key_type +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_tkip_key +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_removed </chapter> <chapter id="powersave"> @@ -417,6 +448,18 @@ supported by mac80211, add notes about supporting hw crypto with it. </para> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic + </chapter> + + <chapter id="station-handling"> + <title>Station handling</title> + <para>TODO</para> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h sta_notify_cmd +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_find_sta +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_block_awake </chapter> <chapter id="hardware-scan-offload"> @@ -424,6 +467,28 @@ <para>TBD</para> !Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_scan_completed </chapter> + + <chapter id="aggregation"> + <title>Aggregation</title> + <sect1> + <title>TX A-MPDU aggregation</title> +!Pnet/mac80211/agg-tx.c TX A-MPDU aggregation +!Cnet/mac80211/agg-tx.c + </sect1> + <sect1> + <title>RX A-MPDU aggregation</title> +!Pnet/mac80211/agg-rx.c RX A-MPDU aggregation +!Cnet/mac80211/agg-rx.c + </sect1> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action + </chapter> + + <chapter id="smps"> + <title>Spatial Multiplexing Powersave (SMPS)</title> +!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Spatial multiplexing power save +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_request_smps +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_smps_mode + </chapter> </part> <part id="rate-control"> @@ -435,9 +500,16 @@ interface and how it relates to mac80211 and drivers. </para> </partintro> - <chapter id="dummy"> - <title>dummy chapter</title> + <chapter id="ratecontrol-api"> + <title>Rate Control API</title> <para>TBD</para> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h rate_control_changed +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_rate_control +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h rate_control_send_low </chapter> </part> @@ -485,6 +557,13 @@ </sect1> </chapter> + <chapter id="aggregation-internals"> + <title>Aggregation</title> +!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h sta_ampdu_mlme +!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h tid_ampdu_tx +!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h tid_ampdu_rx + </chapter> + <chapter id="synchronisation"> <title>Synchronisation</title> <para>TBD</para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl index 22edcbb9ddaf..36f63d4a0a06 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl @@ -217,8 +217,8 @@ X!Isound/sound_firmware.c <chapter id="uart16x50"> <title>16x50 UART Driver</title> !Iinclude/linux/serial_core.h -!Edrivers/serial/serial_core.c -!Edrivers/serial/8250.c +!Edrivers/tty/serial/serial_core.c +!Edrivers/tty/serial/8250.c </chapter> <chapter id="fbdev"> @@ -304,6 +304,10 @@ X!Idrivers/video/console/fonts.c !Edrivers/input/ff-core.c !Edrivers/input/ff-memless.c </sect1> + <sect1><title>Multitouch Library</title> +!Iinclude/linux/input/mt.h +!Edrivers/input/input-mt.c + </sect1> <sect1><title>Polled input devices</title> !Iinclude/linux/input-polldev.h !Edrivers/input/input-polldev.c diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 2861055afd7a..c27915893974 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -73,8 +73,8 @@ services. </para> <para> - The core of every DRM driver is struct drm_device. Drivers - will typically statically initialize a drm_device structure, + The core of every DRM driver is struct drm_driver. Drivers + will typically statically initialize a drm_driver structure, then pass it to drm_init() at load time. </para> @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ <title>Driver initialization</title> <para> Before calling the DRM initialization routines, the driver must - first create and fill out a struct drm_device structure. + first create and fill out a struct drm_driver structure. </para> <programlisting> static struct drm_driver driver = { diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/dvbapi.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/dvbapi.xml index e3a97fdd62a6..ad8678d48916 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/dvbapi.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/dvbapi.xml @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ <holder>Convergence GmbH</holder> </copyright> <copyright> - <year>2009-2010</year> + <year>2009-2011</year> <holder>Mauro Carvalho Chehab</holder> </copyright> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl index 5e87ad58c0b5..f51f28531b8d 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/filesystems.tmpl @@ -82,6 +82,11 @@ </sect1> </chapter> + <chapter id="fs_events"> + <title>Events based on file descriptors</title> +!Efs/eventfd.c + </chapter> + <chapter id="sysfs"> <title>The Filesystem for Exporting Kernel Objects</title> !Efs/sysfs/file.c diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/media.tmpl index f11048d4053f..a99088aae1aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media.tmpl @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ <title>LINUX MEDIA INFRASTRUCTURE API</title> <copyright> - <year>2009-2010</year> + <year>2009-2011</year> <holder>LinuxTV Developers</holder> </copyright> @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Foundation. A copy of the license is included in the chapter entitled </author> </authorgroup> <copyright> - <year>2009-2010</year> + <year>2009-2011</year> <holder>Mauro Carvalho Chehab</holder> </copyright> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl index 020ac80d4682..620eb3f6a90a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ static void board_hwcontrol(struct mtd_info *mtd, int cmd) <title>Device ready function</title> <para> If the hardware interface has the ready busy pin of the NAND chip connected to a - GPIO or other accesible I/O pin, this function is used to read back the state of the + GPIO or other accessible I/O pin, this function is used to read back the state of the pin. The function has no arguments and should return 0, if the device is busy (R/B pin is low) and 1, if the device is ready (R/B pin is high). If the hardware interface does not give access to the ready busy pin, then diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-rds.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-rds.xml index 360d2737e649..2427f54397e7 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-rds.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-rds.xml @@ -75,6 +75,7 @@ as follows:</para> </section> <section> + <title>RDS datastructures</title> <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-rds-data"> <title>struct <structname>v4l2_rds_data</structname></title> @@ -129,10 +130,11 @@ as follows:</para> <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-rds-block-codes"> <title>Block defines</title> - <tgroup cols="3"> + <tgroup cols="4"> <colspec colname="c1" colwidth="1*" /> <colspec colname="c2" colwidth="1*" /> - <colspec colname="c3" colwidth="5*" /> + <colspec colname="c3" colwidth="1*" /> + <colspec colname="c4" colwidth="5*" /> <tbody valign="top"> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_MSK</entry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/func-ioctl.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/func-ioctl.xml index 00f9690e1c28..b60fd37a6295 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/func-ioctl.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/func-ioctl.xml @@ -34,8 +34,7 @@ <varlistentry> <term><parameter>request</parameter></term> <listitem> - <para>V4L2 ioctl request code as defined in the <link -linkend="videodev">videodev.h</link> header file, for example + <para>V4L2 ioctl request code as defined in the <filename>videodev2.h</filename> header file, for example VIDIOC_QUERYCAP.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -57,7 +56,7 @@ file descriptor. An ioctl <parameter>request</parameter> has encoded in it whether the argument is an input, output or read/write parameter, and the size of the argument <parameter>argp</parameter> in bytes. Macros and defines specifying V4L2 ioctl requests are located -in the <link linkend="videodev">videodev.h</link> header file. +in the <filename>videodev2.h</filename> header file. Applications should use their own copy, not include the version in the kernel sources on the system they compile on. All V4L2 ioctl requests, their respective function and parameters are specified in <xref diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml index d7c467187095..cfffc88d7383 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml @@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ leftmost pixel of the second row from the top, and so on. The last row has just as many pad bytes after it as the other rows.</para> <para>In V4L2 each format has an identifier which looks like -<constant>PIX_FMT_XXX</constant>, defined in the <link -linkend="videodev">videodev.h</link> header file. These identifiers +<constant>PIX_FMT_XXX</constant>, defined in the <filename>videodev2.h</filename> +header file. These identifiers represent <link linkend="v4l2-fourcc">four character codes</link> which are also listed below, however they are not the same as those used in the Windows world.</para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/v4l2.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/v4l2.xml index 839e93e875ae..9288af96de34 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/v4l2.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/v4l2.xml @@ -100,6 +100,7 @@ Remote Controller chapter.</contrib> <year>2008</year> <year>2009</year> <year>2010</year> + <year>2011</year> <holder>Bill Dirks, Michael H. Schimek, Hans Verkuil, Martin Rubli, Andy Walls, Muralidharan Karicheri, Mauro Carvalho Chehab</holder> </copyright> @@ -381,7 +382,7 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list.</revremark> </partinfo> <title>Video for Linux Two API Specification</title> - <subtitle>Revision 2.6.33</subtitle> + <subtitle>Revision 2.6.38</subtitle> <chapter id="common"> &sub-common; diff --git a/Documentation/IPMI.txt b/Documentation/IPMI.txt index 69dd29ed824e..b2bea15137d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/IPMI.txt +++ b/Documentation/IPMI.txt @@ -533,6 +533,33 @@ completion during sending a panic event. Other Pieces ------------ +Get the detailed info related with the IPMI device +-------------------------------------------------- + +Some users need more detailed information about a device, like where +the address came from or the raw base device for the IPMI interface. +You can use the IPMI smi_watcher to catch the IPMI interfaces as they +come or go, and to grab the information, you can use the function +ipmi_get_smi_info(), which returns the following structure: + +struct ipmi_smi_info { + enum ipmi_addr_src addr_src; + struct device *dev; + union { + struct { + void *acpi_handle; + } acpi_info; + } addr_info; +}; + +Currently special info for only for SI_ACPI address sources is +returned. Others may be added as necessary. + +Note that the dev pointer is included in the above structure, and +assuming ipmi_smi_get_info returns success, you must call put_device +on the dev pointer. + + Watchdog -------- diff --git a/Documentation/Makefile b/Documentation/Makefile index 6fc7ea1d1f9d..9b4bc5c76f33 100644 --- a/Documentation/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/Makefile @@ -1,3 +1,3 @@ obj-m := DocBook/ accounting/ auxdisplay/ connector/ \ filesystems/ filesystems/configfs/ ia64/ laptops/ networking/ \ - pcmcia/ spi/ timers/ video4linux/ vm/ watchdog/src/ + pcmcia/ spi/ timers/ vm/ watchdog/src/ diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt index a851118775d8..6a8c73f55b80 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt @@ -1,18 +1,22 @@ CONFIG_RCU_TRACE debugfs Files and Formats -The rcutree implementation of RCU provides debugfs trace output that -summarizes counters and state. This information is useful for debugging -RCU itself, and can sometimes also help to debug abuses of RCU. -The following sections describe the debugfs files and formats. +The rcutree and rcutiny implementations of RCU provide debugfs trace +output that summarizes counters and state. This information is useful for +debugging RCU itself, and can sometimes also help to debug abuses of RCU. +The following sections describe the debugfs files and formats, first +for rcutree and next for rcutiny. -Hierarchical RCU debugfs Files and Formats +CONFIG_TREE_RCU and CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU debugfs Files and Formats -This implementation of RCU provides three debugfs files under the +These implementations of RCU provides five debugfs files under the top-level directory RCU: rcu/rcudata (which displays fields in struct -rcu_data), rcu/rcugp (which displays grace-period counters), and -rcu/rcuhier (which displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy). +rcu_data), rcu/rcudata.csv (which is a .csv spreadsheet version of +rcu/rcudata), rcu/rcugp (which displays grace-period counters), +rcu/rcuhier (which displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy), and +rcu/rcu_pending (which displays counts of the reasons that the +rcu_pending() function decided that there was core RCU work to do). The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" looks as follows: @@ -130,7 +134,8 @@ o "ci" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been invoked for been registered in absence of CPU-hotplug activity. o "co" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been orphaned due to - this CPU going offline. + this CPU going offline. These orphaned callbacks have been moved + to an arbitrarily chosen online CPU. o "ca" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been adopted due to other CPUs going offline. Note that ci+co-ca+ql is the number of @@ -168,12 +173,12 @@ o "gpnum" is the number of grace periods that have started. It is The output of "cat rcu/rcuhier" looks as follows, with very long lines: -c=6902 g=6903 s=2 jfq=3 j=72c7 nfqs=13142/nfqsng=0(13142) fqlh=6 oqlen=0 +c=6902 g=6903 s=2 jfq=3 j=72c7 nfqs=13142/nfqsng=0(13142) fqlh=6 1/1 .>. 0:127 ^0 3/3 .>. 0:35 ^0 0/0 .>. 36:71 ^1 0/0 .>. 72:107 ^2 0/0 .>. 108:127 ^3 3/3f .>. 0:5 ^0 2/3 .>. 6:11 ^1 0/0 .>. 12:17 ^2 0/0 .>. 18:23 ^3 0/0 .>. 24:29 ^4 0/0 .>. 30:35 ^5 0/0 .>. 36:41 ^0 0/0 .>. 42:47 ^1 0/0 .>. 48:53 ^2 0/0 .>. 54:59 ^3 0/0 .>. 60:65 ^4 0/0 .>. 66:71 ^5 0/0 .>. 72:77 ^0 0/0 .>. 78:83 ^1 0/0 .>. 84:89 ^2 0/0 .>. 90:95 ^3 0/0 .>. 96:101 ^4 0/0 .>. 102:107 ^5 0/0 .>. 108:113 ^0 0/0 .>. 114:119 ^1 0/0 .>. 120:125 ^2 0/0 .>. 126:127 ^3 rcu_bh: -c=-226 g=-226 s=1 jfq=-5701 j=72c7 nfqs=88/nfqsng=0(88) fqlh=0 oqlen=0 +c=-226 g=-226 s=1 jfq=-5701 j=72c7 nfqs=88/nfqsng=0(88) fqlh=0 0/1 .>. 0:127 ^0 0/3 .>. 0:35 ^0 0/0 .>. 36:71 ^1 0/0 .>. 72:107 ^2 0/0 .>. 108:127 ^3 0/3f .>. 0:5 ^0 0/3 .>. 6:11 ^1 0/0 .>. 12:17 ^2 0/0 .>. 18:23 ^3 0/0 .>. 24:29 ^4 0/0 .>. 30:35 ^5 0/0 .>. 36:41 ^0 0/0 .>. 42:47 ^1 0/0 .>. 48:53 ^2 0/0 .>. 54:59 ^3 0/0 .>. 60:65 ^4 0/0 .>. 66:71 ^5 0/0 .>. 72:77 ^0 0/0 .>. 78:83 ^1 0/0 .>. 84:89 ^2 0/0 .>. 90:95 ^3 0/0 .>. 96:101 ^4 0/0 .>. 102:107 ^5 0/0 .>. 108:113 ^0 0/0 .>. 114:119 ^1 0/0 .>. 120:125 ^2 0/0 .>. 126:127 ^3 @@ -212,11 +217,6 @@ o "fqlh" is the number of calls to force_quiescent_state() that exited immediately (without even being counted in nfqs above) due to contention on ->fqslock. -o "oqlen" is the number of callbacks on the "orphan" callback - list. RCU callbacks are placed on this list by CPUs going - offline, and are "adopted" either by the CPU helping the outgoing - CPU or by the next rcu_barrier*() call, whichever comes first. - o Each element of the form "1/1 0:127 ^0" represents one struct rcu_node. Each line represents one level of the hierarchy, from root to leaves. It is best to think of the rcu_data structures @@ -326,3 +326,115 @@ o "nn" is the number of times that this CPU needed nothing. Alert readers will note that the rcu "nn" number for a given CPU very closely matches the rcu_bh "np" number for that same CPU. This is due to short-circuit evaluation in rcu_pending(). + + +CONFIG_TINY_RCU and CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU debugfs Files and Formats + +These implementations of RCU provides a single debugfs file under the +top-level directory RCU, namely rcu/rcudata, which displays fields in +rcu_bh_ctrlblk, rcu_sched_ctrlblk and, for CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU, +rcu_preempt_ctrlblk. + +The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" is as follows: + +rcu_preempt: qlen=24 gp=1097669 g197/p197/c197 tasks=... + ttb=. btg=no ntb=184 neb=0 nnb=183 j=01f7 bt=0274 + normal balk: nt=1097669 gt=0 bt=371 b=0 ny=25073378 nos=0 + exp balk: bt=0 nos=0 +rcu_sched: qlen: 0 +rcu_bh: qlen: 0 + +This is split into rcu_preempt, rcu_sched, and rcu_bh sections, with the +rcu_preempt section appearing only in CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU builds. +The last three lines of the rcu_preempt section appear only in +CONFIG_RCU_BOOST kernel builds. The fields are as follows: + +o "qlen" is the number of RCU callbacks currently waiting either + for an RCU grace period or waiting to be invoked. This is the + only field present for rcu_sched and rcu_bh, due to the + short-circuiting of grace period in those two cases. + +o "gp" is the number of grace periods that have completed. + +o "g197/p197/c197" displays the grace-period state, with the + "g" number being the number of grace periods that have started + (mod 256), the "p" number being the number of grace periods + that the CPU has responded to (also mod 256), and the "c" + number being the number of grace periods that have completed + (once again mode 256). + + Why have both "gp" and "g"? Because the data flowing into + "gp" is only present in a CONFIG_RCU_TRACE kernel. + +o "tasks" is a set of bits. The first bit is "T" if there are + currently tasks that have recently blocked within an RCU + read-side critical section, the second bit is "N" if any of the + aforementioned tasks are blocking the current RCU grace period, + and the third bit is "E" if any of the aforementioned tasks are + blocking the current expedited grace period. Each bit is "." + if the corresponding condition does not hold. + +o "ttb" is a single bit. It is "B" if any of the blocked tasks + need to be priority boosted and "." otherwise. + +o "btg" indicates whether boosting has been carried out during + the current grace period, with "exp" indicating that boosting + is in progress for an expedited grace period, "no" indicating + that boosting has not yet started for a normal grace period, + "begun" indicating that boosting has bebug for a normal grace + period, and "done" indicating that boosting has completed for + a normal grace period. + +o "ntb" is the total number of tasks subjected to RCU priority boosting + periods since boot. + +o "neb" is the number of expedited grace periods that have had + to resort to RCU priority boosting since boot. + +o "nnb" is the number of normal grace periods that have had + to resort to RCU priority boosting since boot. + +o "j" is the low-order 12 bits of the jiffies counter in hexadecimal. + +o "bt" is the low-order 12 bits of the value that the jiffies counter + will have at the next time that boosting is scheduled to begin. + +o In the line beginning with "normal balk", the fields are as follows: + + o "nt" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting because there were no blocked tasks to boost. + Note that the system will balk from boosting even if the + grace period is overdue when the currently running task + is looping within an RCU read-side critical section. + There is no point in boosting in this case, because + boosting a running task won't make it run any faster. + + o "gt" is the number of times that the system balked + from boosting because, although there were blocked tasks, + none of them were preventing the current grace period + from completing. + + o "bt" is the number of times that the system balked + from boosting because boosting was already in progress. + + o "b" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting because boosting had already completed for + the grace period in question. + + o "ny" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting because it was not yet time to start boosting + the grace period in question. + + o "nos" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting for inexplicable ("not otherwise specified") + reasons. This can actually happen due to races involving + increments of the jiffies counter. + +o In the line beginning with "exp balk", the fields are as follows: + + o "bt" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting because there were no blocked tasks to boost. + + o "nos" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting for inexplicable ("not otherwise specified") + reasons. diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt index cfaac34c4557..6ef692667e2f 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt @@ -849,6 +849,37 @@ All: lockdep-checked RCU-protected pointer access See the comment headers in the source code (or the docbook generated from them) for more information. +However, given that there are no fewer than four families of RCU APIs +in the Linux kernel, how do you choose which one to use? The following +list can be helpful: + +a. Will readers need to block? If so, you need SRCU. + +b. What about the -rt patchset? If readers would need to block + in an non-rt kernel, you need SRCU. If readers would block + in a -rt kernel, but not in a non-rt kernel, SRCU is not + necessary. + +c. Do you need to treat NMI handlers, hardirq handlers, + and code segments with preemption disabled (whether + via preempt_disable(), local_irq_save(), local_bh_disable(), + or some other mechanism) as if they were explicit RCU readers? + If so, you need RCU-sched. + +d. Do you need RCU grace periods to complete even in the face + of softirq monopolization of one or more of the CPUs? For + example, is your code subject to network-based denial-of-service + attacks? If so, you need RCU-bh. + +e. Is your workload too update-intensive for normal use of + RCU, but inappropriate for other synchronization mechanisms? + If so, consider SLAB_DESTROY_BY_RCU. But please be careful! + +f. Otherwise, use RCU. + +Of course, this all assumes that you have determined that RCU is in fact +the right tool for your job. + 8. ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c index a2976a6de033..e9c77788a39d 100644 --- a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c +++ b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c @@ -516,6 +516,7 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) default: fprintf(stderr, "Unknown nla_type %d\n", na->nla_type); + case TASKSTATS_TYPE_NULL: break; } na = (struct nlattr *) (GENLMSG_DATA(&msg) + len); diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/apei/output_format.txt b/Documentation/acpi/apei/output_format.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9146952c612a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/acpi/apei/output_format.txt @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + APEI output format + ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +APEI uses printk as hardware error reporting interface, the output +format is as follow. + +<error record> := +APEI generic hardware error status +severity: <integer>, <severity string> +section: <integer>, severity: <integer>, <severity string> +flags: <integer> +<section flags strings> +fru_id: <uuid string> +fru_text: <string> +section_type: <section type string> +<section data> + +<severity string>* := recoverable | fatal | corrected | info + +<section flags strings># := +[primary][, containment warning][, reset][, threshold exceeded]\ +[, resource not accessible][, latent error] + +<section type string> := generic processor error | memory error | \ +PCIe error | unknown, <uuid string> + +<section data> := +<generic processor section data> | <memory section data> | \ +<pcie section data> | <null> + +<generic processor section data> := +[processor_type: <integer>, <proc type string>] +[processor_isa: <integer>, <proc isa string>] +[error_type: <integer> +<proc error type strings>] +[operation: <integer>, <proc operation string>] +[flags: <integer> +<proc flags strings>] +[level: <integer>] +[version_info: <integer>] +[processor_id: <integer>] +[target_address: <integer>] +[requestor_id: <integer>] +[responder_id: <integer>] +[IP: <integer>] + +<proc type string>* := IA32/X64 | IA64 + +<proc isa string>* := IA32 | IA64 | X64 + +<processor error type strings># := +[cache error][, TLB error][, bus error][, micro-architectural error] + +<proc operation string>* := unknown or generic | data read | data write | \ +instruction execution + +<proc flags strings># := +[restartable][, precise IP][, overflow][, corrected] + +<memory section data> := +[error_status: <integer>] +[physical_address: <integer>] +[physical_address_mask: <integer>] +[node: <integer>] +[card: <integer>] +[module: <integer>] +[bank: <integer>] +[device: <integer>] +[row: <integer>] +[column: <integer>] +[bit_position: <integer>] +[requestor_id: <integer>] +[responder_id: <integer>] +[target_id: <integer>] +[error_type: <integer>, <mem error type string>] + +<mem error type string>* := +unknown | no error | single-bit ECC | multi-bit ECC | \ +single-symbol chipkill ECC | multi-symbol chipkill ECC | master abort | \ +target abort | parity error | watchdog timeout | invalid address | \ +mirror Broken | memory sparing | scrub corrected error | \ +scrub uncorrected error + +<pcie section data> := +[port_type: <integer>, <pcie port type string>] +[version: <integer>.<integer>] +[command: <integer>, status: <integer>] +[device_id: <integer>:<integer>:<integer>.<integer> +slot: <integer> +secondary_bus: <integer> +vendor_id: <integer>, device_id: <integer> +class_code: <integer>] +[serial number: <integer>, <integer>] +[bridge: secondary_status: <integer>, control: <integer>] + +<pcie port type string>* := PCIe end point | legacy PCI end point | \ +unknown | unknown | root port | upstream switch port | \ +downstream switch port | PCIe to PCI/PCI-X bridge | \ +PCI/PCI-X to PCIe bridge | root complex integrated endpoint device | \ +root complex event collector + +Where, [] designate corresponding content is optional + +All <field string> description with * has the following format: + +field: <integer>, <field string> + +Where value of <integer> should be the position of "string" in <field +string> description. Otherwise, <field string> will be "unknown". + +All <field strings> description with # has the following format: + +field: <integer> +<field strings> + +Where each string in <fields strings> corresponding to one set bit of +<integer>. The bit position is the position of "string" in <field +strings> description. + +For more detailed explanation of every field, please refer to UEFI +specification version 2.3 or later, section Appendix N: Common +Platform Error Record. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX b/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX index ecf7d04bca26..91c24a1e8a9e 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX @@ -34,3 +34,5 @@ memory.txt - description of the virtual memory layout nwfpe/ - NWFPE floating point emulator documentation +swp_emulation + - SWP/SWPB emulation handler/logging description diff --git a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm index 5389440aade3..9012bb039094 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm +++ b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm @@ -127,3 +127,28 @@ implementation needs: 10. (*pdata->cpu_set_freq)(unsigned long f) 11. (*pdata->cpu_get_freq)(void) + +Customizing OPP for platform +============================ +Defining CONFIG_PM should enable OPP layer for the silicon +and the registration of OPP table should take place automatically. +However, in special cases, the default OPP table may need to be +tweaked, for e.g.: + * enable default OPPs which are disabled by default, but which + could be enabled on a platform + * Disable an unsupported OPP on the platform + * Define and add a custom opp table entry +in these cases, the board file needs to do additional steps as follows: +arch/arm/mach-omapx/board-xyz.c + #include "pm.h" + .... + static void __init omap_xyz_init_irq(void) + { + .... + /* Initialize the default table */ + omapx_opp_init(); + /* Do customization to the defaults */ + .... + } +NOTE: omapx_opp_init will be omap3_opp_init or as required +based on the omap family. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/Makefile b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8771d832cf8c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +BIN := vrl4 + +.PHONY: all +all: $(BIN) + +.PHONY: clean +clean: + rm -f *.o $(BIN) diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/vrl4.c b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/vrl4.c new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e8a191358ad2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/vrl4.c @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ +/* + * vrl4 format generator + * + * Copyright (C) 2010 Simon Horman + * + * This file is subject to the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public + * License. See the file "COPYING" in the main directory of this archive + * for more details. + */ + +/* + * usage: vrl4 < zImage > out + * dd if=out of=/dev/sdx bs=512 seek=1 # Write the image to sector 1 + * + * Reads a zImage from stdin and writes a vrl4 image to stdout. + * In practice this means writing a padded vrl4 header to stdout followed + * by the zImage. + * + * The padding places the zImage at ALIGN bytes into the output. + * The vrl4 uses ALIGN + START_BASE as the start_address. + * This is where the mask ROM will jump to after verifying the header. + * + * The header sets copy_size to min(sizeof(zImage), MAX_BOOT_PROG_LEN) + ALIGN. + * That is, the mask ROM will load the padded header (ALIGN bytes) + * And then MAX_BOOT_PROG_LEN bytes of the image, or the entire image, + * whichever is smaller. + * + * The zImage is not modified in any way. + */ + +#define _BSD_SOURCE +#include <endian.h> +#include <unistd.h> +#include <stdint.h> +#include <stdio.h> +#include <errno.h> + +struct hdr { + uint32_t magic1; + uint32_t reserved1; + uint32_t magic2; + uint32_t reserved2; + uint16_t copy_size; + uint16_t boot_options; + uint32_t reserved3; + uint32_t start_address; + uint32_t reserved4; + uint32_t reserved5; + char reserved6[308]; +}; + +#define DECLARE_HDR(h) \ + struct hdr (h) = { \ + .magic1 = htole32(0xea000000), \ + .reserved1 = htole32(0x56), \ + .magic2 = htole32(0xe59ff008), \ + .reserved3 = htole16(0x1) } + +/* Align to 512 bytes, the MMCIF sector size */ +#define ALIGN_BITS 9 +#define ALIGN (1 << ALIGN_BITS) + +#define START_BASE 0xe55b0000 + +/* + * With an alignment of 512 the header uses the first sector. + * There is a 128 sector (64kbyte) limit on the data loaded by the mask ROM. + * So there are 127 sectors left for the boot programme. But in practice + * Only a small portion of a zImage is needed, 16 sectors should be more + * than enough. + * + * Note that this sets how much of the zImage is copied by the mask ROM. + * The entire zImage is present after the header and is loaded + * by the code in the boot program (which is the first portion of the zImage). + */ +#define MAX_BOOT_PROG_LEN (16 * 512) + +#define ROUND_UP(x) ((x + ALIGN - 1) & ~(ALIGN - 1)) + +ssize_t do_read(int fd, void *buf, size_t count) +{ + size_t offset = 0; + ssize_t l; + + while (offset < count) { + l = read(fd, buf + offset, count - offset); + if (!l) + break; + if (l < 0) { + if (errno == EAGAIN || errno == EWOULDBLOCK) + continue; + perror("read"); + return -1; + } + offset += l; + } + + return offset; +} + +ssize_t do_write(int fd, const void *buf, size_t count) +{ + size_t offset = 0; + ssize_t l; + + while (offset < count) { + l = write(fd, buf + offset, count - offset); + if (l < 0) { + if (errno == EAGAIN || errno == EWOULDBLOCK) + continue; + perror("write"); + return -1; + } + offset += l; + } + + return offset; +} + +ssize_t write_zero(int fd, size_t len) +{ + size_t i = len; + + while (i--) { + const char x = 0; + if (do_write(fd, &x, 1) < 0) + return -1; + } + + return len; +} + +int main(void) +{ + DECLARE_HDR(hdr); + char boot_program[MAX_BOOT_PROG_LEN]; + size_t aligned_hdr_len, alligned_prog_len; + ssize_t prog_len; + + prog_len = do_read(0, boot_program, sizeof(boot_program)); + if (prog_len <= 0) + return -1; + + aligned_hdr_len = ROUND_UP(sizeof(hdr)); + hdr.start_address = htole32(START_BASE + aligned_hdr_len); + alligned_prog_len = ROUND_UP(prog_len); + hdr.copy_size = htole16(aligned_hdr_len + alligned_prog_len); + + if (do_write(1, &hdr, sizeof(hdr)) < 0) + return -1; + if (write_zero(1, aligned_hdr_len - sizeof(hdr)) < 0) + return -1; + + if (do_write(1, boot_program, prog_len) < 0) + return 1; + + /* Write out the rest of the kernel */ + while (1) { + prog_len = do_read(0, boot_program, sizeof(boot_program)); + if (prog_len < 0) + return 1; + if (prog_len == 0) + break; + if (do_write(1, boot_program, prog_len) < 0) + return 1; + } + + return 0; +} diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/zboot-rom-mmcif.txt b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/zboot-rom-mmcif.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..efff8ae2713d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/zboot-rom-mmcif.txt @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +ROM-able zImage boot from MMC +----------------------------- + +An ROM-able zImage compiled with ZBOOT_ROM_MMCIF may be written to MMC and +SuperH Mobile ARM will to boot directly from the MMCIF hardware block. + +This is achieved by the mask ROM loading the first portion of the image into +MERAM and then jumping to it. This portion contains loader code which +copies the entire image to SDRAM and jumps to it. From there the zImage +boot code proceeds as normal, uncompressing the image into its final +location and then jumping to it. + +This code has been tested on an AP4EB board using the developer 1A eMMC +boot mode which is configured using the following jumper settings. +The board used for testing required a patched mask ROM in order for +this mode to function. + + 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 + x|x|x|x|x| |x| +S4 -+-+-+-+-+-+-+- + | | | | |x| |x on + +The zImage must be written to the MMC card at sector 1 (512 bytes) in +vrl4 format. A utility vrl4 is supplied to accomplish this. + +e.g. + vrl4 < zImage | dd of=/dev/sdX bs=512 seek=1 + +A dual-voltage MMC 4.0 card was used for testing. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/ADC-LH7-Touchscreen b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/ADC-LH7-Touchscreen deleted file mode 100644 index dc460f055647..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/ADC-LH7-Touchscreen +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ -README on the ADC/Touchscreen Controller -======================================== - -The LH79524 and LH7A404 include a built-in Analog to Digital -controller (ADC) that is used to process input from a touchscreen. -The driver only implements a four-wire touch panel protocol. - -The touchscreen driver is maintenance free except for the pen-down or -touch threshold. Some resistive displays and board combinations may -require tuning of this threshold. The driver exposes some of its -internal state in the sys filesystem. If the kernel is configured -with it, CONFIG_SYSFS, and sysfs is mounted at /sys, there will be a -directory - - /sys/devices/platform/adc-lh7.0 - -containing these files. - - -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Jan 1 00:00 samples - -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Jan 1 00:00 threshold - -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Jan 1 00:00 threshold_range - -The threshold is the current touch threshold. It defaults to 750 on -most targets. - - # cat threshold - 750 - -The threshold_range contains the range of valid values for the -threshold. Values outside of this range will be silently ignored. - - # cat threshold_range - 0 1023 - -To change the threshold, write a value to the threshold file. - - # echo 500 > threshold - # cat threshold - 500 - -The samples file contains the most recently sampled values from the -ADC. There are 12. Below are typical of the last sampled values when -the pen has been released. The first two and last two samples are for -detecting whether or not the pen is down. The third through sixth are -X coordinate samples. The seventh through tenth are Y coordinate -samples. - - # cat samples - 1023 1023 0 0 0 0 530 529 530 529 1023 1023 - -To determine a reasonable threshold, press on the touch panel with an -appropriate stylus and read the values from samples. - - # cat samples - 1023 676 92 103 101 102 855 919 922 922 1023 679 - -The first and eleventh samples are discarded. Thus, the important -values are the second and twelfth which are used to determine if the -pen is down. When both are below the threshold, the driver registers -that the pen is down. When either is above the threshold, it -registers then pen is up. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/CompactFlash b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/CompactFlash deleted file mode 100644 index 8616d877df9e..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/CompactFlash +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ -README on the Compact Flash for Card Engines -============================================ - -There are three challenges in supporting the CF interface of the Card -Engines. First, every IO operation must be followed with IO to -another memory region. Second, the slot is wired for one-to-one -address mapping *and* it is wired for 16 bit access only. Second, the -interrupt request line from the CF device isn't wired. - -The IOBARRIER issue is covered in README.IOBARRIER. This isn't an -onerous problem. Enough said here. - -The addressing issue is solved in the -arch/arm/mach-lh7a40x/ide-lpd7a40x.c file with some awkward -work-arounds. We implement a special SELECT_DRIVE routine that is -called before the IDE driver performs its own SELECT_DRIVE. Our code -recognizes that the SELECT register cannot be modified without also -writing a command. It send an IDLE_IMMEDIATE command on selecting a -drive. The function also prevents drive select to the slave drive -since there can be only one. The awkward part is that the IDE driver, -even though we have a select procedure, also attempts to change the -drive by writing directly the SELECT register. This attempt is -explicitly blocked by the OUTB function--not pretty, but effective. - -The lack of interrupts is a more serious problem. Even though the CF -card is fast when compared to a normal IDE device, we don't know that -the CF is really flash. A user could use one of the very small hard -drives being shipped with a CF interface. The IDE code includes a -check for interfaces that lack an IRQ. In these cases, submitting a -command to the IDE controller is followed by a call to poll for -completion. If the device isn't immediately ready, it schedules a -timer to poll again later. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/IOBarrier b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/IOBarrier deleted file mode 100644 index 2e953e228f4d..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/IOBarrier +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ -README on the IOBARRIER for CardEngine IO -========================================= - -Due to an unfortunate oversight when the Card Engines were designed, -the signals that control access to some peripherals, most notably the -SMC91C9111 ethernet controller, are not properly handled. - -The symptom is that some back to back IO with the peripheral returns -unreliable data. With the SMC chip, you'll see errors about the bank -register being 'screwed'. - -The cause is that the AEN signal to the SMC chip does not transition -for every memory access. It is driven through the CPLD from the CS7 -line of the CPU's static memory controller which is optimized to -eliminate unnecessary transitions. Yet, the SMC requires a transition -for every write access. The Sharp website has more information about -the effect this power-conserving feature has on peripheral -interfacing. - -The solution is to follow every write access to the SMC chip with an -access to another memory region that will force the CPU to release the -chip select line. It is important to guarantee that this access -forces the CPU off-chip. We map a page of SDRAM as if it were an -uncacheable IO device and read from it after every SMC IO write -operation. - - SMC IO - BARRIER IO - -Only this sequence is important. It does not matter that there is no -BARRIER IO before the access to the SMC chip because the AEN latch -only needs occurs after the SMC IO write cycle. The routines that -implement this work-around make an additional concession which is to -disable interrupts during the IO sequence. Other hardware devices -(the LogicPD CPLD) have registers in the same physical memory -region as the SMC chip. An interrupt might allow an access to one of -those registers while SMC IO is being performed. - -You might be tempted to think that we have to access another device -attached to the static memory controller, but the empirical evidence -indicates that this is not so. Mapping 0x00000000 (flash) and -0xc0000000 (SDRAM) appear to have the same effect. Using SDRAM seems -to be faster. Choosing to access an undecoded memory region is not -desirable as there is no way to know how that chip select will be used -in the future. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/KEV7A400 b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/KEV7A400 deleted file mode 100644 index be32b14cd535..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/KEV7A400 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -README on Implementing Linux for Sharp's KEV7a400 -================================================= - -This product has been discontinued by Sharp. For the time being, the -partially implemented code remains in the kernel. At some point in -the future, either the code will be finished or it will be removed -completely. This depends primarily on how many of the development -boards are in the field. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LCDPanels b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LCDPanels deleted file mode 100644 index fb1b21c2f2f4..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LCDPanels +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ -README on the LCD Panels -======================== - -Configuration options for several LCD panels, available from Logic PD, -are included in the kernel source. This README will help you -understand the configuration data and give you some guidance for -adding support for other panels if you wish. - - -lcd-panels.h ------------- - -There is no way, at present, to detect which panel is attached to the -system at runtime. Thus the kernel configuration is static. The file -arch/arm/mach-ld7a40x/lcd-panels.h (or similar) defines all of the -panel specific parameters. - -It should be possible for this data to be shared among several device -families. The current layout may be insufficiently general, but it is -amenable to improvement. - - -PIXEL_CLOCK ------------ - -The panel data sheets will give a range of acceptable pixel clocks. -The fundamental LCDCLK input frequency is divided down by a PCD -constant in field '.tim2'. It may happen that it is impossible to set -the pixel clock within this range. A clock which is too slow will -tend to flicker. For the highest quality image, set the clock as high -as possible. - - -MARGINS -------- - -These values may be difficult to glean from the panel data sheet. In -the case of the Sharp panels, the upper margin is explicitly called -out as a specific number of lines from the top of the frame. The -other values may not matter as much as the panels tend to -automatically center the image. - - -Sync Sense ----------- - -The sense of the hsync and vsync pulses may be called out in the data -sheet. On one panel, the sense of these pulses determine the height -of the visible region on the panel. Most of the Sharp panels use -negative sense sync pulses set by the TIM2_IHS and TIM2_IVS bits in -'.tim2'. - - -Pel Layout ----------- - -The Sharp color TFT panels are all configured for 16 bit direct color -modes. The amba-lcd driver sets the pel mode to 565 for 5 bits of -each red and blue and 6 bits of green. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A400 b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A400 deleted file mode 100644 index 3275b453bfdf..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A400 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -README on Implementing Linux for the Logic PD LPD7A400-10 -========================================================= - -- CPLD memory mapping - - The board designers chose to use high address lines for controlling - access to the CPLD registers. It turns out to be a big waste - because we're using an MMU and must map IO space into virtual - memory. The result is that we have to make a mapping for every - register. - -- Serial Console - - It may be OK not to use the serial console option if the user passes - the console device name to the kernel. This deserves some exploration. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A40X b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A40X deleted file mode 100644 index 8c29a27e208f..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A40X +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -README on Implementing Linux for the Logic PD LPD7A40X-10 -========================================================= - -- CPLD memory mapping - - The board designers chose to use high address lines for controlling - access to the CPLD registers. It turns out to be a big waste - because we're using an MMU and must map IO space into virtual - memory. The result is that we have to make a mapping for every - register. - -- Serial Console - - It may be OK not to use the serial console option if the user passes - the console device name to the kernel. This deserves some exploration. - diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/SDRAM b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/SDRAM deleted file mode 100644 index 93ddc23c2faa..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/SDRAM +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ -README on the SDRAM Controller for the LH7a40X -============================================== - -The standard configuration for the SDRAM controller generates a sparse -memory array. The precise layout is determined by the SDRAM chips. A -default kernel configuration assembles the discontiguous memory -regions into separate memory nodes via the NUMA (Non-Uniform Memory -Architecture) facilities. In this default configuration, the kernel -is forgiving about the precise layout. As long as it is given an -accurate picture of available memory by the bootloader the kernel will -execute correctly. - -The SDRC supports a mode where some of the chip select lines are -swapped in order to make SDRAM look like a synchronous ROM. Setting -this bit means that the RAM will present as a contiguous array. Some -programmers prefer this to the discontiguous layout. Be aware that -may be a penalty for this feature where some some configurations of -memory are significantly reduced; i.e. 64MiB of RAM appears as only 32 -MiB. - -There are a couple of configuration options to override the default -behavior. When the SROMLL bit is set and memory appears as a -contiguous array, there is no reason to support NUMA. -CONFIG_LH7A40X_CONTIGMEM disables NUMA support. When physical memory -is discontiguous, the memory tables are organized such that there are -two banks per nodes with a small gap between them. This layout wastes -some kernel memory for page tables representing non-existent memory. -CONFIG_LH7A40X_ONE_BANK_PER_NODE optimizes the node tables such that -there are no gaps. These options control the low level organization -of the memory management tables in ways that may prevent the kernel -from booting or may cause the kernel to allocated excessively large -page tables. Be warned. Only change these options if you know what -you are doing. The default behavior is a reasonable compromise that -will suit all users. - --- - -A typical 32MiB system with the default configuration options will -find physical memory managed as follows. - - node 0: 0xc0000000 4MiB - 0xc1000000 4MiB - node 1: 0xc4000000 4MiB - 0xc5000000 4MiB - node 2: 0xc8000000 4MiB - 0xc9000000 4MiB - node 3: 0xcc000000 4MiB - 0xcd000000 4MiB - -Setting CONFIG_LH7A40X_ONE_BANK_PER_NODE will put each bank into a -separate node. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/VectoredInterruptController b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/VectoredInterruptController deleted file mode 100644 index 23047e9861ee..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/VectoredInterruptController +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ -README on the Vectored Interrupt Controller of the LH7A404 -========================================================== - -The 404 revision of the LH7A40X series comes with two vectored -interrupts controllers. While the kernel does use some of the -features of these devices, it is far from the purpose for which they -were designed. - -When this README was written, the implementation of the VICs was in -flux. It is possible that some details, especially with priorities, -will change. - -The VIC support code is inspired by routines written by Sharp. - - -Priority Control ----------------- - -The significant reason for using the VIC's vectoring is to control -interrupt priorities. There are two tables in -arch/arm/mach-lh7a40x/irq-lh7a404.c that look something like this. - - static unsigned char irq_pri_vic1[] = { IRQ_GPIO3INTR, }; - static unsigned char irq_pri_vic2[] = { - IRQ_T3UI, IRQ_GPIO7INTR, - IRQ_UART1INTR, IRQ_UART2INTR, IRQ_UART3INTR, }; - -The initialization code reads these tables and inserts a vector -address and enable for each indicated IRQ. Vectored interrupts have -higher priority than non-vectored interrupts. So, on VIC1, -IRQ_GPIO3INTR will be served before any other non-FIQ interrupt. Due -to the way that the vectoring works, IRQ_T3UI is the next highest -priority followed by the other vectored interrupts on VIC2. After -that, the non-vectored interrupts are scanned in VIC1 then in VIC2. - - -ISR ---- - -The interrupt service routine macro get_irqnr() in -arch/arm/kernel/entry-armv.S scans the VICs for the next active -interrupt. The vectoring makes this code somewhat larger than it was -before using vectoring (refer to the LH7A400 implementation). In the -case where an interrupt is vectored, the implementation will tend to -be faster than the non-vectored version. However, the worst-case path -is longer. - -It is worth noting that at present, there is no need to read -VIC2_VECTADDR because the register appears to be shared between the -controllers. The code is written such that if this changes, it ought -to still work properly. - - -Vector Addresses ----------------- - -The proper use of the vectoring hardware would jump to the ISR -specified by the vectoring address. Linux isn't structured to take -advantage of this feature, though it might be possible to change -things to support it. - -In this implementation, the vectoring address is used to speed the -search for the active IRQ. The address is coded such that the lowest -6 bits store the IRQ number for vectored interrupts. These numbers -correspond to the bits in the interrupt status registers. IRQ zero is -the lowest interrupt bit in VIC1. IRQ 32 is the lowest interrupt bit -in VIC2. Because zero is a valid IRQ number and because we cannot -detect whether or not there is a valid vectoring address if that -address is zero, the eigth bit (0x100) is set for vectored interrupts. -The address for IRQ 0x18 (VIC2) is 0x118. Only the ninth bit is set -for the default handler on VIC1 and only the tenth bit is set for the -default handler on VIC2. - -In other words. - - 0x000 - no active interrupt - 0x1ii - vectored interrupt 0xii - 0x2xx - unvectored interrupt on VIC1 (xx is don't care) - 0x4xx - unvectored interrupt on VIC2 (xx is don't care) - diff --git a/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation b/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..af903d22fd93 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +Software emulation of deprecated SWP instruction (CONFIG_SWP_EMULATE) +--------------------------------------------------------------------- + +ARMv6 architecture deprecates use of the SWP/SWPB instructions, and recommeds +moving to the load-locked/store-conditional instructions LDREX and STREX. + +ARMv7 multiprocessing extensions introduce the ability to disable these +instructions, triggering an undefined instruction exception when executed. +Trapped instructions are emulated using an LDREX/STREX or LDREXB/STREXB +sequence. If a memory access fault (an abort) occurs, a segmentation fault is +signalled to the triggering process. + +/proc/cpu/swp_emulation holds some statistics/information, including the PID of +the last process to trigger the emulation to be invocated. For example: +--- +Emulated SWP: 12 +Emulated SWPB: 0 +Aborted SWP{B}: 1 +Last process: 314 +--- + +NOTE: when accessing uncached shared regions, LDREX/STREX rely on an external +transaction monitoring block called a global monitor to maintain update +atomicity. If your system does not implement a global monitor, this option can +cause programs that perform SWP operations to uncached memory to deadlock, as +the STREX operation will always fail. + diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt index d6da611f8f63..4ed7b5ceeed2 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt @@ -89,6 +89,33 @@ Throttling/Upper Limit policy Limits for writes can be put using blkio.write_bps_device file. +Hierarchical Cgroups +==================== +- Currently none of the IO control policy supports hierarhical groups. But + cgroup interface does allow creation of hierarhical cgroups and internally + IO policies treat them as flat hierarchy. + + So this patch will allow creation of cgroup hierarhcy but at the backend + everything will be treated as flat. So if somebody created a hierarchy like + as follows. + + root + / \ + test1 test2 + | + test3 + + CFQ and throttling will practically treat all groups at same level. + + pivot + / | \ \ + root test1 test2 test3 + + Down the line we can implement hierarchical accounting/control support + and also introduce a new cgroup file "use_hierarchy" which will control + whether cgroup hierarchy is viewed as flat or hierarchical by the policy.. + This is how memory controller also has implemented the things. + Various user visible config options =================================== CONFIG_BLK_CGROUP diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c index 8c2bfc4a6358..3e082f96dc12 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ int main(int argc, char **argv) if (ret == -1) { perror("cgroup.event_control " - "is not accessable any more"); + "is not accessible any more"); break; } diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt index 190018b0c649..cbdfb7d9455b 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt @@ -349,19 +349,23 @@ To mount a cgroup hierarchy with all available subsystems, type: The "xxx" is not interpreted by the cgroup code, but will appear in /proc/mounts so may be any useful identifying string that you like. +Note: Some subsystems do not work without some user input first. For instance, +if cpusets are enabled the user will have to populate the cpus and mems files +for each new cgroup created before that group can be used. + To mount a cgroup hierarchy with just the cpuset and memory subsystems, type: # mount -t cgroup -o cpuset,memory hier1 /dev/cgroup To change the set of subsystems bound to a mounted hierarchy, just remount with different options: -# mount -o remount,cpuset,ns hier1 /dev/cgroup +# mount -o remount,cpuset,blkio hier1 /dev/cgroup -Now memory is removed from the hierarchy and ns is added. +Now memory is removed from the hierarchy and blkio is added. -Note this will add ns to the hierarchy but won't remove memory or +Note this will add blkio to the hierarchy but won't remove memory or cpuset, because the new options are appended to the old ones: -# mount -o remount,ns /dev/cgroup +# mount -o remount,blkio /dev/cgroup To Specify a hierarchy's release_agent: # mount -t cgroup -o cpuset,release_agent="/sbin/cpuset_release_agent" \ @@ -426,6 +430,14 @@ You can attach the current shell task by echoing 0: # echo 0 > tasks +Note: Since every task is always a member of exactly one cgroup in each +mounted hierarchy, to remove a task from its current cgroup you must +move it into a new cgroup (possibly the root cgroup) by writing to the +new cgroup's tasks file. + +Note: If the ns cgroup is active, moving a process to another cgroup can +fail. + 2.3 Mounting hierarchies by name -------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt index 5d0d5692a365..98a30829af7a 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt @@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ There are ways to query or modify cpusets: - via the C library libcgroup. (http://sourceforge.net/projects/libcg/) - via the python application cset. - (http://developer.novell.com/wiki/index.php/Cpuset) + (http://code.google.com/p/cpuset/) The sched_setaffinity calls can also be done at the shell prompt using SGI's runon or Robert Love's taskset. The mbind and set_mempolicy @@ -725,13 +725,14 @@ Now you want to do something with this cpuset. In this directory you can find several files: # ls -cpuset.cpu_exclusive cpuset.memory_spread_slab -cpuset.cpus cpuset.mems -cpuset.mem_exclusive cpuset.sched_load_balance -cpuset.mem_hardwall cpuset.sched_relax_domain_level -cpuset.memory_migrate notify_on_release -cpuset.memory_pressure tasks -cpuset.memory_spread_page +cgroup.clone_children cpuset.memory_pressure +cgroup.event_control cpuset.memory_spread_page +cgroup.procs cpuset.memory_spread_slab +cpuset.cpu_exclusive cpuset.mems +cpuset.cpus cpuset.sched_load_balance +cpuset.mem_exclusive cpuset.sched_relax_domain_level +cpuset.mem_hardwall notify_on_release +cpuset.memory_migrate tasks Reading them will give you information about the state of this cpuset: the CPUs and Memory Nodes it can use, the processes that are using diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt index b7eececfb195..fc8fa97a09ac 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y. written to move_charge_at_immigrate. 9.10 Memory thresholds - Memory controler implements memory thresholds using cgroups notification + Memory controller implements memory thresholds using cgroups notification API. You can use Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c to test it. diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt index 7781857dc940..b6ed61c95856 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt @@ -485,8 +485,9 @@ The feature can be disabled by # echo 0 > memory.use_hierarchy -NOTE1: Enabling/disabling will fail if the cgroup already has other - cgroups created below it. +NOTE1: Enabling/disabling will fail if either the cgroup already has other + cgroups created below it, or if the parent cgroup has use_hierarchy + enabled. NOTE2: When panic_on_oom is set to "2", the whole system will panic in case of an OOM event in any cgroup. diff --git a/Documentation/coccinelle.txt b/Documentation/coccinelle.txt index 4a276ea7001c..96b690348ba1 100644 --- a/Documentation/coccinelle.txt +++ b/Documentation/coccinelle.txt @@ -36,6 +36,10 @@ as a regular user, and install it with sudo make install +The semantic patches in the kernel will work best with Coccinelle version +0.2.4 or later. Using earlier versions may incur some parse errors in the +semantic patch code, but any results that are obtained should still be +correct. Using Coccinelle on the Linux kernel ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt index 737988fca64d..e74d0a2eb1cf 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt @@ -158,6 +158,17 @@ intensive calculation on your laptop that you do not care how long it takes to complete as you can 'nice' it and prevent it from taking part in the deciding process of whether to increase your CPU frequency. +sampling_down_factor: this parameter controls the rate at which the +kernel makes a decision on when to decrease the frequency while running +at top speed. When set to 1 (the default) decisions to reevaluate load +are made at the same interval regardless of current clock speed. But +when set to greater than 1 (e.g. 100) it acts as a multiplier for the +scheduling interval for reevaluating load when the CPU is at its top +speed due to high load. This improves performance by reducing the overhead +of load evaluation and helping the CPU stay at its top speed when truly +busy, rather than shifting back and forth in speed. This tunable has no +effect on behavior at lower speeds/lower CPU loads. + 2.5 Conservative ---------------- diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt index 524de926290d..6b5c42dbbe84 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Parameters: <cipher> <key> <iv_offset> <device path> <offset> <cipher> Encryption cipher and an optional IV generation mode. - (In format cipher-chainmode-ivopts:ivmode). + (In format cipher[:keycount]-chainmode-ivopts:ivmode). Examples: des aes-cbc-essiv:sha256 @@ -20,6 +20,11 @@ Parameters: <cipher> <key> <iv_offset> <device path> <offset> Key used for encryption. It is encoded as a hexadecimal number. You can only use key sizes that are valid for the selected cipher. +<keycount> + Multi-key compatibility mode. You can define <keycount> keys and + then sectors are encrypted according to their offsets (sector 0 uses key0; + sector 1 uses key1 etc.). <keycount> must be a power of two. + <iv_offset> The IV offset is a sector count that is added to the sector number before creating the IV. @@ -36,7 +41,7 @@ Example scripts =============== LUKS (Linux Unified Key Setup) is now the preferred way to set up disk encryption with dm-crypt using the 'cryptsetup' utility, see -http://clemens.endorphin.org/cryptography +http://code.google.com/p/cryptsetup/ [[ #!/bin/sh diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-raid.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-raid.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..33b6b7071ac8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-raid.txt @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +Device-mapper RAID (dm-raid) is a bridge from DM to MD. It +provides a way to use device-mapper interfaces to access the MD RAID +drivers. + +As with all device-mapper targets, the nominal public interfaces are the +constructor (CTR) tables and the status outputs (both STATUSTYPE_INFO +and STATUSTYPE_TABLE). The CTR table looks like the following: + +1: <s> <l> raid \ +2: <raid_type> <#raid_params> <raid_params> \ +3: <#raid_devs> <meta_dev1> <dev1> .. <meta_devN> <devN> + +Line 1 contains the standard first three arguments to any device-mapper +target - the start, length, and target type fields. The target type in +this case is "raid". + +Line 2 contains the arguments that define the particular raid +type/personality/level, the required arguments for that raid type, and +any optional arguments. Possible raid types include: raid4, raid5_la, +raid5_ls, raid5_rs, raid6_zr, raid6_nr, and raid6_nc. (raid1 is +planned for the future.) The list of required and optional parameters +is the same for all the current raid types. The required parameters are +positional, while the optional parameters are given as key/value pairs. +The possible parameters are as follows: + <chunk_size> Chunk size in sectors. + [[no]sync] Force/Prevent RAID initialization + [rebuild <idx>] Rebuild the drive indicated by the index + [daemon_sleep <ms>] Time between bitmap daemon work to clear bits + [min_recovery_rate <kB/sec/disk>] Throttle RAID initialization + [max_recovery_rate <kB/sec/disk>] Throttle RAID initialization + [max_write_behind <sectors>] See '-write-behind=' (man mdadm) + [stripe_cache <sectors>] Stripe cache size for higher RAIDs + +Line 3 contains the list of devices that compose the array in +metadata/data device pairs. If the metadata is stored separately, a '-' +is given for the metadata device position. If a drive has failed or is +missing at creation time, a '-' can be given for both the metadata and +data drives for a given position. + +NB. Currently all metadata devices must be specified as '-'. + +Examples: +# RAID4 - 4 data drives, 1 parity +# No metadata devices specified to hold superblock/bitmap info +# Chunk size of 1MiB +# (Lines separated for easy reading) +0 1960893648 raid \ + raid4 1 2048 \ + 5 - 8:17 - 8:33 - 8:49 - 8:65 - 8:81 + +# RAID4 - 4 data drives, 1 parity (no metadata devices) +# Chunk size of 1MiB, force RAID initialization, +# min recovery rate at 20 kiB/sec/disk +0 1960893648 raid \ + raid4 4 2048 min_recovery_rate 20 sync\ + 5 - 8:17 - 8:33 - 8:49 - 8:65 - 8:81 + +Performing a 'dmsetup table' should display the CTR table used to +construct the mapping (with possible reordering of optional +parameters). + +Performing a 'dmsetup status' will yield information on the state and +health of the array. The output is as follows: +1: <s> <l> raid \ +2: <raid_type> <#devices> <1 health char for each dev> <resync_ratio> + +Line 1 is standard DM output. Line 2 is best shown by example: + 0 1960893648 raid raid4 5 AAAAA 2/490221568 +Here we can see the RAID type is raid4, there are 5 devices - all of +which are 'A'live, and the array is 2/490221568 complete with recovery. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/00-INDEX b/Documentation/devicetree/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b78f691fd847 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +Documentation for device trees, a data structure by which bootloaders pass +hardware layout to Linux in a device-independent manner, simplifying hardware +probing. This subsystem is maintained by Grant Likely +<grant.likely@secretlab.ca> and has a mailing list at +https://lists.ozlabs.org/listinfo/devicetree-discuss + +00-INDEX + - this file +booting-without-of.txt + - Booting Linux without Open Firmware, describes history and format of device trees. diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/sata.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/fsl-sata.txt index b46bcf46c3d8..b46bcf46c3d8 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/sata.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/fsl-sata.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4342c10de1bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +EEPROMs (I2C) + +Required properties: + + - compatible : should be "<manufacturer>,<type>" + If there is no specific driver for <manufacturer>, a generic + driver based on <type> is selected. Possible types are: + 24c00, 24c01, 24c02, 24c04, 24c08, 24c16, 24c32, 24c64, + 24c128, 24c256, 24c512, 24c1024, spd + + - reg : the I2C address of the EEPROM + +Optional properties: + + - pagesize : the length of the pagesize for writing. Please consult the + manual of your device, that value varies a lot. A wrong value + may result in data loss! If not specified, a safety value of + '1' is used which will be very slow. + + - read-only: this parameterless property disables writes to the eeprom + +Example: + +eeprom@52 { + compatible = "atmel,24c32"; + reg = <0x52>; + pagesize = <32>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/8xxx_gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/8xxx_gpio.txt index b0019eb5330e..b0019eb5330e 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/8xxx_gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/8xxx_gpio.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt index edaa84d288a1..edaa84d288a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/led.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt index 064db928c3c1..064db928c3c1 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/led.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ce4100-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ce4100-i2c.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..569b16248514 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ce4100-i2c.txt @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +CE4100 I2C +---------- + +CE4100 has one PCI device which is described as the I2C-Controller. This +PCI device has three PCI-bars, each bar contains a complete I2C +controller. So we have a total of three independent I2C-Controllers +which share only an interrupt line. +The driver is probed via the PCI-ID and is gathering the information of +attached devices from the devices tree. +Grant Likely recommended to use the ranges property to map the PCI-Bar +number to its physical address and to use this to find the child nodes +of the specific I2C controller. This were his exact words: + + Here's where the magic happens. Each entry in + ranges describes how the parent pci address space + (middle group of 3) is translated to the local + address space (first group of 2) and the size of + each range (last cell). In this particular case, + the first cell of the local address is chosen to be + 1:1 mapped to the BARs, and the second is the + offset from be base of the BAR (which would be + non-zero if you had 2 or more devices mapped off + the same BAR) + + ranges allows the address mapping to be described + in a way that the OS can interpret without + requiring custom device driver code. + +This is an example which is used on FalconFalls: +------------------------------------------------ + i2c-controller@b,2 { + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "pci8086,2e68.2", + "pci8086,2e68", + "pciclass,ff0000", + "pciclass,ff00"; + + reg = <0x15a00 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0>; + interrupts = <16 1>; + + /* as described by Grant, the first number in the group of + * three is the bar number followed by the 64bit bar address + * followed by size of the mapping. The bar address + * requires also a valid translation in parents ranges + * property. + */ + ranges = <0 0 0x02000000 0 0xdffe0500 0x100 + 1 0 0x02000000 0 0xdffe0600 0x100 + 2 0 0x02000000 0 0xdffe0700 0x100>; + + i2c@0 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + compatible = "intel,ce4100-i2c-controller"; + + /* The first number in the reg property is the + * number of the bar + */ + reg = <0 0 0x100>; + + /* This I2C controller has no devices */ + }; + + i2c@1 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + compatible = "intel,ce4100-i2c-controller"; + reg = <1 0 0x100>; + + /* This I2C controller has one gpio controller */ + gpio@26 { + #gpio-cells = <2>; + compatible = "ti,pcf8575"; + reg = <0x26>; + gpio-controller; + }; + }; + + i2c@2 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + compatible = "intel,ce4100-i2c-controller"; + reg = <2 0 0x100>; + + gpio@26 { + #gpio-cells = <2>; + compatible = "ti,pcf8575"; + reg = <0x26>; + gpio-controller; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-i2c.txt index 1eacd6b20ed5..1eacd6b20ed5 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/i2c.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/fsl-i2c.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/marvell.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/marvell.txt index f1533d91953a..f1533d91953a 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/marvell.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/marvell.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/esdhc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt index 64bcb8be973c..64bcb8be973c 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/esdhc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/mmc-spi-slot.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt index c39ac2891951..89a0084df2f7 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/mmc-spi-slot.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt @@ -7,8 +7,13 @@ Required properties: - voltage-ranges : two cells are required, first cell specifies minimum slot voltage (mV), second cell specifies maximum slot voltage (mV). Several ranges could be specified. -- gpios : (optional) may specify GPIOs in this order: Card-Detect GPIO, + +Optional properties: +- gpios : may specify GPIOs in this order: Card-Detect GPIO, Write-Protect GPIO. +- interrupts : the interrupt of a card detect interrupt. +- interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that + services interrupts for this device. Example: @@ -20,4 +25,6 @@ Example: &qe_pio_d 15 0>; voltage-ranges = <3300 3300>; spi-max-frequency = <50000000>; + interrupts = <42>; + interrupt-parent = <&PIC>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/upm-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-upm-nand.txt index a48b2cadc7f0..a48b2cadc7f0 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/upm-nand.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-upm-nand.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/mtd-physmap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt index 80152cb567d9..80152cb567d9 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/mtd-physmap.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/mtd-physmap.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/can.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/mpc5xxx-mscan.txt index 2fa4fcd38fd6..2fa4fcd38fd6 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/can.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/mpc5xxx-mscan.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/can/sja1000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt index d6d209ded937..d6d209ded937 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/can/sja1000.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt index edb7ae19e868..edb7ae19e868 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/mdio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-gpio.txt index bc9549529014..bc9549529014 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/mdio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-gpio.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt index bb8c742eb8c5..bb8c742eb8c5 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/open-pic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/open-pic.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..909a902dff85 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/open-pic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +* Open PIC Binding + +This binding specifies what properties must be available in the device tree +representation of an Open PIC compliant interrupt controller. This binding is +based on the binding defined for Open PIC in [1] and is a superset of that +binding. + +Required properties: + + NOTE: Many of these descriptions were paraphrased here from [1] to aid + readability. + + - compatible: Specifies the compatibility list for the PIC. The type + shall be <string> and the value shall include "open-pic". + + - reg: Specifies the base physical address(s) and size(s) of this + PIC's addressable register space. The type shall be <prop-encoded-array>. + + - interrupt-controller: The presence of this property identifies the node + as an Open PIC. No property value shall be defined. + + - #interrupt-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + interrupt source. The type shall be a <u32> and the value shall be 2. + + - #address-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + address. The type shall be <u32> and the value shall be 0. As such, + 'interrupt-map' nodes do not have to specify a parent unit address. + +Optional properties: + + - pic-no-reset: The presence of this property indicates that the PIC + shall not be reset during runtime initialization. No property value shall + be defined. The presence of this property also mandates that any + initialization related to interrupt sources shall be limited to sources + explicitly referenced in the device tree. + +* Interrupt Specifier Definition + + Interrupt specifiers consists of 2 cells encoded as + follows: + + - <1st-cell>: The interrupt-number that identifies the interrupt source. + + - <2nd-cell>: The level-sense information, encoded as follows: + 0 = low-to-high edge triggered + 1 = active low level-sensitive + 2 = active high level-sensitive + 3 = high-to-low edge triggered + +* Examples + +Example 1: + + /* + * An Open PIC interrupt controller + */ + mpic: pic@40000 { + // This is an interrupt controller node. + interrupt-controller; + + // No address cells so that 'interrupt-map' nodes which reference + // this Open PIC node do not need a parent address specifier. + #address-cells = <0>; + + // Two cells to encode interrupt sources. + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + + // Offset address of 0x40000 and size of 0x40000. + reg = <0x40000 0x40000>; + + // Compatible with Open PIC. + compatible = "open-pic"; + + // The PIC shall not be reset. + pic-no-reset; + }; + +Example 2: + + /* + * An interrupt generating device that is wired to an Open PIC. + */ + serial0: serial@4500 { + // Interrupt source '42' that is active high level-sensitive. + // Note that there are only two cells as specified in the interrupt + // parent's '#interrupt-cells' property. + interrupts = <42 2>; + + // The interrupt controller that this device is wired to. + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + }; + +* References + +[1] Power.org (TM) Standard for Embedded Power Architecture (TM) Platform + Requirements (ePAPR), Version 1.0, July 2008. + (http://www.power.org/resources/downloads/Power_ePAPR_APPROVED_v1.0.pdf) + diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/83xx-512x-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/83xx-512x-pci.txt index 35a465362408..35a465362408 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/83xx-512x-pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/83xx-512x-pci.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/cpm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/cpm.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ee459806d35e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/cpm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +PPC4xx Clock Power Management (CPM) node + +Required properties: + - compatible : compatible list, currently only "ibm,cpm" + - dcr-access-method : "native" + - dcr-reg : < DCR register range > + +Optional properties: + - er-offset : All 4xx SoCs with a CPM controller have + one of two different order for the CPM + registers. Some have the CPM registers + in the following order (ER,FR,SR). The + others have them in the following order + (SR,ER,FR). For the second case set + er-offset = <1>. + - unused-units : specifier consist of one cell. For each + bit in the cell, the corresponding bit + in CPM will be set to turn off unused + devices. + - idle-doze : specifier consist of one cell. For each + bit in the cell, the corresponding bit + in CPM will be set to turn off unused + devices. This is usually just CPM[CPU]. + - standby : specifier consist of one cell. For each + bit in the cell, the corresponding bit + in CPM will be set on standby and + restored on resume. + - suspend : specifier consist of one cell. For each + bit in the cell, the corresponding bit + in CPM will be set on suspend (mem) and + restored on resume. Note, for standby + and suspend the corresponding bits can + be different or the same. Usually for + standby only class 2 and 3 units are set. + However, the interface does not care. + If they are the same, the additional + power saving will be seeing if support + is available to put the DDR in self + refresh mode and any additional power + saving techniques for the specific SoC. + +Example: + CPM0: cpm { + compatible = "ibm,cpm"; + dcr-access-method = "native"; + dcr-reg = <0x160 0x003>; + er-offset = <0>; + unused-units = <0x00000100>; + idle-doze = <0x02000000>; + standby = <0xfeff0000>; + suspend = <0xfeff791d>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/emac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/emac.txt index 2161334a7ca5..2161334a7ca5 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/emac.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/emac.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/ndfc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/ndfc.txt index 869f0b5f16e8..869f0b5f16e8 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/ndfc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/ndfc.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/ppc440spe-adma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/ppc440spe-adma.txt index 515ebcf1b97d..515ebcf1b97d 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/ppc440spe-adma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/ppc440spe-adma.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/reboot.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/reboot.txt index d7217260589c..d7217260589c 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/reboot.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/reboot.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/board.txt index 39e941515a36..39e941515a36 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/board.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cache_sram.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cache_sram.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..781955f5217d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cache_sram.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +* Freescale PQ3 and QorIQ based Cache SRAM + +Freescale's mpc85xx and some QorIQ platforms provide an +option of configuring a part of (or full) cache memory +as SRAM. This cache SRAM representation in the device +tree should be done as under:- + +Required properties: + +- compatible : should be "fsl,p2020-cache-sram" +- fsl,cache-sram-ctlr-handle : points to the L2 controller +- reg : offset and length of the cache-sram. + +Example: + +cache-sram@fff00000 { + fsl,cache-sram-ctlr-handle = <&L2>; + reg = <0 0xfff00000 0 0x10000>; + compatible = "fsl,p2020-cache-sram"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm.txt index 160c752484b4..160c752484b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/brg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/brg.txt index 4c7d45eaf025..4c7d45eaf025 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/brg.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/brg.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/i2c.txt index 87bc6048667e..87bc6048667e 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/i2c.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/i2c.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/pic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/pic.txt index 8e3ee1681618..8e3ee1681618 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/pic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/pic.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/usb.txt index 74bfda4bb824..74bfda4bb824 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/cpm/usb.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt index 349f79fd7076..349f79fd7076 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/network.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/network.txt index 0e4269446580..0e4269446580 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/network.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/network.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe.txt index 4f8930263dd9..4f8930263dd9 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/firmware.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/firmware.txt index 249db3a15d15..249db3a15d15 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/firmware.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/firmware.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/par_io.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/par_io.txt index 60984260207b..60984260207b 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/par_io.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/par_io.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/pincfg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/pincfg.txt index c5b43061db3a..c5b43061db3a 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/pincfg.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/pincfg.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/ucc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/ucc.txt index e47734bee3f0..e47734bee3f0 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/ucc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/ucc.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt index 9ccd5f30405b..9ccd5f30405b 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt index 2ea76d9d137c..2ea76d9d137c 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/diu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/diu.txt index b66cb6d31d69..b66cb6d31d69 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/diu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/diu.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dma.txt index 2a4b4bce6110..2a4b4bce6110 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dma.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/ecm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ecm.txt index f514f29c67d6..f514f29c67d6 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/ecm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ecm.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/gtm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/gtm.txt index 9a33efded4bc..9a33efded4bc 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/gtm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/gtm.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/guts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/guts.txt index 9e7a2417dac5..9e7a2417dac5 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/guts.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/guts.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/lbc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/lbc.txt index 3300fec501c5..3300fec501c5 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/lbc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/lbc.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mcm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mcm.txt index 4ceda9b3b413..4ceda9b3b413 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mcm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mcm.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mcu-mpc8349emitx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mcu-mpc8349emitx.txt index 0f766333b6eb..0f766333b6eb 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mcu-mpc8349emitx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mcu-mpc8349emitx.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpc5121-psc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpc5121-psc.txt index 8832e8798912..8832e8798912 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpc5121-psc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpc5121-psc.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpc5200.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpc5200.txt index 4ccb2cd5df94..4ccb2cd5df94 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpc5200.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpc5200.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8aa10f45ebe6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ +===================================================================== +Freescale MPIC Interrupt Controller Node +Copyright (C) 2010,2011 Freescale Semiconductor Inc. +===================================================================== + +The Freescale MPIC interrupt controller is found on all PowerQUICC +and QorIQ processors and is compatible with the Open PIC. The +notable difference from Open PIC binding is the addition of 2 +additional cells in the interrupt specifier defining interrupt type +information. + +PROPERTIES + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Shall include "fsl,mpic". Freescale MPIC + controllers compatible with this binding have Block + Revision Registers BRR1 and BRR2 at offset 0x0 and + 0x10 in the MPIC. + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical + offset and length of the device's registers within the + CCSR address space. + + - interrupt-controller + Usage: required + Value type: <empty> + Definition: Specifies that this node is an interrupt + controller + + - #interrupt-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Shall be 2 or 4. A value of 2 means that interrupt + specifiers do not contain the interrupt-type or type-specific + information cells. + + - #address-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Shall be 0. + + - pic-no-reset + Usage: optional + Value type: <empty> + Definition: The presence of this property specifies that the + MPIC must not be reset by the client program, and that + the boot program has initialized all interrupt source + configuration registers to a sane state-- masked or + directed at other cores. This ensures that the client + program will not receive interrupts for sources not belonging + to the client. The presence of this property also mandates + that any initialization related to interrupt sources shall + be limited to sources explicitly referenced in the device tree. + +INTERRUPT SPECIFIER DEFINITION + + Interrupt specifiers consists of 4 cells encoded as + follows: + + <1st-cell> interrupt-number + + Identifies the interrupt source. The meaning + depends on the type of interrupt. + + Note: If the interrupt-type cell is undefined + (i.e. #interrupt-cells = 2), this cell + should be interpreted the same as for + interrupt-type 0-- i.e. an external or + normal SoC device interrupt. + + <2nd-cell> level-sense information, encoded as follows: + 0 = low-to-high edge triggered + 1 = active low level-sensitive + 2 = active high level-sensitive + 3 = high-to-low edge triggered + + <3rd-cell> interrupt-type + + The following types are supported: + + 0 = external or normal SoC device interrupt + + The interrupt-number cell contains + the SoC device interrupt number. The + type-specific cell is undefined. The + interrupt-number is derived from the + MPIC a block of registers referred to as + the "Interrupt Source Configuration Registers". + Each source has 32-bytes of registers + (vector/priority and destination) in this + region. So interrupt 0 is at offset 0x0, + interrupt 1 is at offset 0x20, and so on. + + 1 = error interrupt + + The interrupt-number cell contains + the SoC device interrupt number for + the error interrupt. The type-specific + cell identifies the specific error + interrupt number. + + 2 = MPIC inter-processor interrupt (IPI) + + The interrupt-number cell identifies + the MPIC IPI number. The type-specific + cell is undefined. + + 3 = MPIC timer interrupt + + The interrupt-number cell identifies + the MPIC timer number. The type-specific + cell is undefined. + + <4th-cell> type-specific information + + The type-specific cell is encoded as follows: + + - For interrupt-type 1 (error interrupt), + the type-specific cell contains the + bit number of the error interrupt in the + Error Interrupt Summary Register. + +EXAMPLE 1 + /* + * mpic interrupt controller with 4 cells per specifier + */ + mpic: pic@40000 { + compatible = "fsl,mpic"; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <4>; + #address-cells = <0>; + reg = <0x40000 0x40000>; + }; + +EXAMPLE 2 + /* + * The MPC8544 I2C controller node has an internal + * interrupt number of 27. As per the reference manual + * this corresponds to interrupt source configuration + * registers at 0x5_0560. + * + * The interrupt source configuration registers begin + * at 0x5_0000. + * + * To compute the interrupt specifier interrupt number + * + * 0x560 >> 5 = 43 + * + * The interrupt source configuration registers begin + * at 0x5_0000, and so the i2c vector/priority registers + * are at 0x5_0560. + */ + i2c@3000 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + cell-index = <0>; + compatible = "fsl-i2c"; + reg = <0x3000 0x100>; + interrupts = <43 2>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + dfsrr; + }; + + +EXAMPLE 3 + /* + * Definition of a node defining the 4 + * MPIC IPI interrupts. Note the interrupt + * type of 2. + */ + ipi@410a0 { + compatible = "fsl,mpic-ipi"; + reg = <0x40040 0x10>; + interrupts = <0 0 2 0 + 1 0 2 0 + 2 0 2 0 + 3 0 2 0>; + }; + +EXAMPLE 4 + /* + * Definition of a node defining the MPIC + * global timers. Note the interrupt + * type of 3. + */ + timer0: timer@41100 { + compatible = "fsl,mpic-global-timer"; + reg = <0x41100 0x100>; + interrupts = <0 0 3 0 + 1 0 3 0 + 2 0 3 0 + 3 0 3 0>; + }; + +EXAMPLE 5 + /* + * Definition of an error interrupt (interupt type 1). + * SoC interrupt number is 16 and the specific error + * interrupt bit in the error interrupt summary register + * is 23. + */ + memory-controller@8000 { + compatible = "fsl,p4080-memory-controller"; + reg = <0x8000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <16 2 1 23>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/msi-pic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt index bcc30bac6831..70558c3f3682 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/msi-pic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt @@ -5,14 +5,21 @@ Required properties: first is "fsl,CHIP-msi", where CHIP is the processor(mpc8610, mpc8572, etc.) and the second is "fsl,mpic-msi" or "fsl,ipic-msi" depending on the parent type. + - reg : should contain the address and the length of the shared message interrupt register set. + - msi-available-ranges: use <start count> style section to define which msi interrupt can be used in the 256 msi interrupts. This property is optional, without this, all the 256 MSI interrupts can be used. + Each available range must begin and end on a multiple of 32 (i.e. + no splitting an individual MSI register or the associated PIC interrupt). + - interrupts : each one of the interrupts here is one entry per 32 MSIs, and routed to the host interrupt controller. the interrupts should - be set as edge sensitive. + be set as edge sensitive. If msi-available-ranges is present, only + the interrupts that correspond to available ranges shall be present. + - interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller that services interrupts for this device. for 83xx cpu, the interrupts are routed to IPIC, and for 85xx/86xx cpu the interrupts are routed diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/pmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/pmc.txt index 07256b7ffcaa..07256b7ffcaa 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/pmc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/pmc.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/sec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/sec.txt index 2b6f2d45c45a..2b6f2d45c45a 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/sec.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/sec.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ssi.txt index 5ff76c9c57d2..5ff76c9c57d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/ssi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ssi.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/nintendo/gamecube.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/nintendo/gamecube.txt index b558585b1aaf..b558585b1aaf 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/nintendo/gamecube.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/nintendo/gamecube.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/nintendo/wii.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/nintendo/wii.txt index a7e155a023b8..a7e155a023b8 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/nintendo/wii.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/nintendo/wii.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-cmos.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-cmos.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7382989b3052 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-cmos.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + Motorola mc146818 compatible RTC +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Required properties: + - compatible : "motorola,mc146818" + - reg : should contain registers location and length. + +Optional properties: + - interrupts : should contain interrupt. + - interrupt-parent : interrupt source phandle. + - ctrl-reg : Contains the initial value of the control register also + called "Register B". + - freq-reg : Contains the initial value of the frequency register also + called "Regsiter A". + +"Register A" and "B" are usually initialized by the firmware (BIOS for +instance). If this is not done, it can be performed by the driver. + +ISA Example: + + rtc@70 { + compatible = "motorola,mc146818"; + interrupts = <8 3>; + interrupt-parent = <&ioapic1>; + ctrl-reg = <2>; + freq-reg = <0x26>; + reg = <1 0x70 2>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c152f65f9a28 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +Altera JTAG UART + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "ALTR,juart-1.0" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..71cae3f70100 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +Altera UART + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "ALTR,uart-1.0" + +Optional properties: +- clock-frequency : frequency of the clock input to the UART diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4d9eecc2ef7d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +Altera UP PS/2 controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "ALTR,ps2-1.0". diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt index 777abd7399d5..777abd7399d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/spi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/spi-bus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt index e782add2e457..e782add2e457 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/spi-bus.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dda375943506 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +Altera SPI + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "ALTR,spi-1.0". diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_oc_tiny.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_oc_tiny.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d95c0b367a04 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_oc_tiny.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +OpenCores tiny SPI + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "opencores,tiny-spi-rtlsvn2". +- gpios : should specify GPIOs used for chipselect. +Optional properties: +- clock-frequency : input clock frequency to the core. +- baud-width: width, in bits, of the programmable divider used to scale + the input clock to SCLK. + +The clock-frequency and baud-width properties are needed only if the divider +is programmable. They are not needed if the divider is fixed. diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/fsl-usb.txt index bd5723f0b67e..bd5723f0b67e 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/fsl-usb.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/usb-ehci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ehci.txt index fa18612f757b..fa18612f757b 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/usb-ehci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-ehci.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/ce4100.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/ce4100.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b49ae593a60b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/ce4100.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +CE4100 Device Tree Bindings +--------------------------- + +The CE4100 SoC uses for in core peripherals the following compatible +format: <vendor>,<chip>-<device>. +Many of the "generic" devices like HPET or IO APIC have the ce4100 +name in their compatible property because they first appeared in this +SoC. + +The CPU node +------------ + cpu@0 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "intel,ce4100"; + reg = <0>; + lapic = <&lapic0>; + }; + +The reg property describes the CPU number. The lapic property points to +the local APIC timer. + +The SoC node +------------ + +This node describes the in-core peripherals. Required property: + compatible = "intel,ce4100-cp"; + +The PCI node +------------ +This node describes the PCI bus on the SoC. Its property should be + compatible = "intel,ce4100-pci", "pci"; + +If the OS is using the IO-APIC for interrupt routing then the reported +interrupt numbers for devices is no longer true. In order to obtain the +correct interrupt number, the child node which represents the device has +to contain the interrupt property. Besides the interrupt property it has +to contain at least the reg property containing the PCI bus address and +compatible property according to "PCI Bus Binding Revision 2.1". diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/interrupt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/interrupt.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7d19f494f19a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/interrupt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +Interrupt chips +--------------- + +* Intel I/O Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (IO APIC) + + Required properties: + -------------------- + compatible = "intel,ce4100-ioapic"; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + + Device's interrupt property: + + interrupts = <P S>; + + The first number (P) represents the interrupt pin which is wired to the + IO APIC. The second number (S) represents the sense of interrupt which + should be configured and can be one of: + 0 - Edge Rising + 1 - Level Low + 2 - Level High + 3 - Edge Falling + +* Local APIC + Required property: + + compatible = "intel,ce4100-lapic"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/timer.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c688af58e3bd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/timer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6 @@ +Timers +------ + +* High Precision Event Timer (HPET) + Required property: + compatible = "intel,ce4100-hpet"; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/xilinx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/xilinx.txt index 299d0923537b..299d0923537b 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/xilinx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/xilinx.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt index 302db5da49b3..55fd2623445b 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Table of Contents I - Introduction 1) Entry point for arch/powerpc - 2) Board support + 2) Entry point for arch/x86 II - The DT block format 1) Header @@ -41,13 +41,6 @@ Table of Contents VI - System-on-a-chip devices and nodes 1) Defining child nodes of an SOC 2) Representing devices without a current OF specification - a) PHY nodes - b) Interrupt controllers - c) 4xx/Axon EMAC ethernet nodes - d) Xilinx IP cores - e) USB EHCI controllers - f) MDIO on GPIOs - g) SPI busses VII - Specifying interrupt information for devices 1) interrupts property @@ -123,7 +116,7 @@ Revision Information I - Introduction ================ -During the recent development of the Linux/ppc64 kernel, and more +During the development of the Linux/ppc64 kernel, and more specifically, the addition of new platform types outside of the old IBM pSeries/iSeries pair, it was decided to enforce some strict rules regarding the kernel entry and bootloader <-> kernel interfaces, in @@ -131,7 +124,7 @@ order to avoid the degeneration that had become the ppc32 kernel entry point and the way a new platform should be added to the kernel. The legacy iSeries platform breaks those rules as it predates this scheme, but no new board support will be accepted in the main tree that -doesn't follows them properly. In addition, since the advent of the +doesn't follow them properly. In addition, since the advent of the arch/powerpc merged architecture for ppc32 and ppc64, new 32-bit platforms and 32-bit platforms which move into arch/powerpc will be required to use these rules as well. @@ -146,7 +139,7 @@ section III, but, for example, the kernel does not require you to create a node for every PCI device in the system. It is a requirement to have a node for PCI host bridges in order to provide interrupt routing informations and memory/IO ranges, among others. It is also -recommended to define nodes for on chip devices and other busses that +recommended to define nodes for on chip devices and other buses that don't specifically fit in an existing OF specification. This creates a great flexibility in the way the kernel can then probe those and match drivers to device, without having to hard code all sorts of tables. It @@ -158,7 +151,7 @@ it with special cases. 1) Entry point for arch/powerpc ------------------------------- - There is one and one single entry point to the kernel, at the start + There is one single entry point to the kernel, at the start of the kernel image. That entry point supports two calling conventions: @@ -210,12 +203,6 @@ it with special cases. with all CPUs. The way to do that with method b) will be described in a later revision of this document. - -2) Board support ----------------- - -64-bit kernels: - Board supports (platforms) are not exclusive config options. An arbitrary set of board supports can be built in a single kernel image. The kernel will "know" what set of functions to use for a @@ -234,48 +221,30 @@ it with special cases. containing the various callbacks that the generic code will use to get to your platform specific code - c) Add a reference to your "ppc_md" structure in the - "machines" table in arch/powerpc/kernel/setup_64.c if you are - a 64-bit platform. - - d) request and get assigned a platform number (see PLATFORM_* - constants in arch/powerpc/include/asm/processor.h - -32-bit embedded kernels: - - Currently, board support is essentially an exclusive config option. - The kernel is configured for a single platform. Part of the reason - for this is to keep kernels on embedded systems small and efficient; - part of this is due to the fact the code is already that way. In the - future, a kernel may support multiple platforms, but only if the + A kernel image may support multiple platforms, but only if the platforms feature the same core architecture. A single kernel build cannot support both configurations with Book E and configurations with classic Powerpc architectures. - 32-bit embedded platforms that are moved into arch/powerpc using a - flattened device tree should adopt the merged tree practice of - setting ppc_md up dynamically, even though the kernel is currently - built with support for only a single platform at a time. This allows - unification of the setup code, and will make it easier to go to a - multiple-platform-support model in the future. - -NOTE: I believe the above will be true once Ben's done with the merge -of the boot sequences.... someone speak up if this is wrong! - - To add a 32-bit embedded platform support, follow the instructions - for 64-bit platforms above, with the exception that the Kconfig - option should be set up such that the kernel builds exclusively for - the platform selected. The processor type for the platform should - enable another config option to select the specific board - supported. - -NOTE: If Ben doesn't merge the setup files, may need to change this to -point to setup_32.c +2) Entry point for arch/x86 +------------------------------- + There is one single 32bit entry point to the kernel at code32_start, + the decompressor (the real mode entry point goes to the same 32bit + entry point once it switched into protected mode). That entry point + supports one calling convention which is documented in + Documentation/x86/boot.txt + The physical pointer to the device-tree block (defined in chapter II) + is passed via setup_data which requires at least boot protocol 2.09. + The type filed is defined as - I will describe later the boot process and various callbacks that - your platform should implement. + #define SETUP_DTB 2 + This device-tree is used as an extension to the "boot page". As such it + does not parse / consider data which is already covered by the boot + page. This includes memory size, reserved ranges, command line arguments + or initrd address. It simply holds information which can not be retrieved + otherwise like interrupt routing or a list of devices behind an I2C bus. II - The DT block format ======================== @@ -300,8 +269,8 @@ the block to RAM before passing it to the kernel. 1) Header --------- - The kernel is entered with r3 pointing to an area of memory that is - roughly described in arch/powerpc/include/asm/prom.h by the structure + The kernel is passed the physical address pointing to an area of memory + that is roughly described in include/linux/of_fdt.h by the structure boot_param_header: struct boot_param_header { @@ -339,7 +308,7 @@ struct boot_param_header { All values in this header are in big endian format, the various fields in this header are defined more precisely below. All "offset" values are in bytes from the start of the header; that is - from the value of r3. + from the physical base address of the device tree block. - magic @@ -437,7 +406,7 @@ struct boot_param_header { ------------------------------ - r3 -> | struct boot_param_header | + base -> | struct boot_param_header | ------------------------------ | (alignment gap) (*) | ------------------------------ @@ -457,7 +426,7 @@ struct boot_param_header { -----> ------------------------------ | | - --- (r3 + totalsize) + --- (base + totalsize) (*) The alignment gaps are not necessarily present; their presence and size are dependent on the various alignment requirements of @@ -500,7 +469,7 @@ the device-tree structure. It is typically used to represent "path" in the device-tree. More details about the actual format of these will be below. -The kernel powerpc generic code does not make any formal use of the +The kernel generic code does not make any formal use of the unit address (though some board support code may do) so the only real requirement here for the unit address is to ensure uniqueness of the node unit name at a given level of the tree. Nodes with no notion @@ -518,20 +487,21 @@ path to the root node is "/". Every node which actually represents an actual device (that is, a node which isn't only a virtual "container" for more nodes, like "/cpus" -is) is also required to have a "device_type" property indicating the -type of node . +is) is also required to have a "compatible" property indicating the +specific hardware and an optional list of devices it is fully +backwards compatible with. Finally, every node that can be referenced from a property in another -node is required to have a "linux,phandle" property. Real open -firmware implementations provide a unique "phandle" value for every -node that the "prom_init()" trampoline code turns into -"linux,phandle" properties. However, this is made optional if the -flattened device tree is used directly. An example of a node +node is required to have either a "phandle" or a "linux,phandle" +property. Real Open Firmware implementations provide a unique +"phandle" value for every node that the "prom_init()" trampoline code +turns into "linux,phandle" properties. However, this is made optional +if the flattened device tree is used directly. An example of a node referencing another node via "phandle" is when laying out the interrupt tree which will be described in a further version of this document. -This "linux, phandle" property is a 32-bit value that uniquely +The "phandle" property is a 32-bit value that uniquely identifies a node. You are free to use whatever values or system of values, internal pointers, or whatever to generate these, the only requirement is that every node for which you provide that property has @@ -694,7 +664,7 @@ made of 3 cells, the bottom two containing the actual address itself while the top cell contains address space indication, flags, and pci bus & device numbers. -For busses that support dynamic allocation, it's the accepted practice +For buses that support dynamic allocation, it's the accepted practice to then not provide the address in "reg" (keep it 0) though while providing a flag indicating the address is dynamically allocated, and then, to provide a separate "assigned-addresses" property that @@ -711,7 +681,7 @@ prom_parse.c file of the recent kernels for your bus type. The "reg" property only defines addresses and sizes (if #size-cells is non-0) within a given bus. In order to translate addresses upward (that is into parent bus addresses, and possibly into CPU physical -addresses), all busses must contain a "ranges" property. If the +addresses), all buses must contain a "ranges" property. If the "ranges" property is missing at a given level, it's assumed that translation isn't possible, i.e., the registers are not visible on the parent bus. The format of the "ranges" property for a bus is a list @@ -727,9 +697,9 @@ example, for a PCI host controller, that would be a CPU address. For a PCI<->ISA bridge, that would be a PCI address. It defines the base address in the parent bus where the beginning of that range is mapped. -For a new 64-bit powerpc board, I recommend either the 2/2 format or +For new 64-bit board support, I recommend either the 2/2 format or Apple's 2/1 format which is slightly more compact since sizes usually -fit in a single 32-bit word. New 32-bit powerpc boards should use a +fit in a single 32-bit word. New 32-bit board support should use a 1/1 format, unless the processor supports physical addresses greater than 32-bits, in which case a 2/1 format is recommended. @@ -754,7 +724,7 @@ of their actual names. While earlier users of Open Firmware like OldWorld macintoshes tended to use the actual device name for the "name" property, it's nowadays considered a good practice to use a name that is closer to the device -class (often equal to device_type). For example, nowadays, ethernet +class (often equal to device_type). For example, nowadays, Ethernet controllers are named "ethernet", an additional "model" property defining precisely the chip type/model, and "compatible" property defining the family in case a single driver can driver more than one @@ -772,7 +742,7 @@ is present). 4) Note about node and property names and character set ------------------------------------------------------- -While open firmware provides more flexible usage of 8859-1, this +While Open Firmware provides more flexible usage of 8859-1, this specification enforces more strict rules. Nodes and properties should be comprised only of ASCII characters 'a' to 'z', '0' to '9', ',', '.', '_', '+', '#', '?', and '-'. Node names additionally @@ -792,7 +762,7 @@ address which can extend beyond that limit. -------------------------------- These are all that are currently required. However, it is strongly recommended that you expose PCI host bridges as documented in the - PCI binding to open firmware, and your interrupt tree as documented + PCI binding to Open Firmware, and your interrupt tree as documented in OF interrupt tree specification. a) The root node @@ -802,20 +772,12 @@ address which can extend beyond that limit. - model : this is your board name/model - #address-cells : address representation for "root" devices - #size-cells: the size representation for "root" devices - - device_type : This property shouldn't be necessary. However, if - you decide to create a device_type for your root node, make sure it - is _not_ "chrp" unless your platform is a pSeries or PAPR compliant - one for 64-bit, or a CHRP-type machine for 32-bit as this will - matched by the kernel this way. - - Additionally, some recommended properties are: - - compatible : the board "family" generally finds its way here, for example, if you have 2 board models with a similar layout, that typically get driven by the same platform code in the - kernel, you would use a different "model" property but put a - value in "compatible". The kernel doesn't directly use that - value but it is generally useful. + kernel, you would specify the exact board model in the + compatible property followed by an entry that represents the SoC + model. The root node is also generally where you add additional properties specific to your board like the serial number if any, that sort of @@ -841,8 +803,11 @@ address which can extend beyond that limit. So under /cpus, you are supposed to create a node for every CPU on the machine. There is no specific restriction on the name of the - CPU, though It's common practice to call it PowerPC,<name>. For + CPU, though it's common to call it <architecture>,<core>. For example, Apple uses PowerPC,G5 while IBM uses PowerPC,970FX. + However, the Generic Names convention suggests that it would be + better to simply use 'cpu' for each cpu node and use the compatible + property to identify the specific cpu core. Required properties: @@ -923,7 +888,7 @@ compatibility. e) The /chosen node - This node is a bit "special". Normally, that's where open firmware + This node is a bit "special". Normally, that's where Open Firmware puts some variable environment information, like the arguments, or the default input/output devices. @@ -940,11 +905,7 @@ compatibility. console device if any. Typically, if you have serial devices on your board, you may want to put the full path to the one set as the default console in the firmware here, for the kernel to pick - it up as its own default console. If you look at the function - set_preferred_console() in arch/ppc64/kernel/setup.c, you'll see - that the kernel tries to find out the default console and has - knowledge of various types like 8250 serial ports. You may want - to extend this function to add your own. + it up as its own default console. Note that u-boot creates and fills in the chosen node for platforms that use it. @@ -955,23 +916,23 @@ compatibility. f) the /soc<SOCname> node - This node is used to represent a system-on-a-chip (SOC) and must be - present if the processor is a SOC. The top-level soc node contains - information that is global to all devices on the SOC. The node name - should contain a unit address for the SOC, which is the base address - of the memory-mapped register set for the SOC. The name of an soc + This node is used to represent a system-on-a-chip (SoC) and must be + present if the processor is a SoC. The top-level soc node contains + information that is global to all devices on the SoC. The node name + should contain a unit address for the SoC, which is the base address + of the memory-mapped register set for the SoC. The name of an SoC node should start with "soc", and the remainder of the name should represent the part number for the soc. For example, the MPC8540's soc node would be called "soc8540". Required properties: - - device_type : Should be "soc" - ranges : Should be defined as specified in 1) to describe the - translation of SOC addresses for memory mapped SOC registers. - - bus-frequency: Contains the bus frequency for the SOC node. + translation of SoC addresses for memory mapped SoC registers. + - bus-frequency: Contains the bus frequency for the SoC node. Typically, the value of this field is filled in by the boot loader. + - compatible : Exact model of the SoC Recommended properties: @@ -1025,7 +986,7 @@ dtc source code can be found at WARNING: This version is still in early development stage; the resulting device-tree "blobs" have not yet been validated with the -kernel. The current generated bloc lacks a useful reserve map (it will +kernel. The current generated block lacks a useful reserve map (it will be fixed to generate an empty one, it's up to the bootloader to fill it up) among others. The error handling needs work, bugs are lurking, etc... @@ -1098,7 +1059,7 @@ supported currently at the toplevel. * an arbitrary array of bytes */ - childnode@addresss { /* define a child node named "childnode" + childnode@address { /* define a child node named "childnode" * whose unit name is "childnode at * address" */ @@ -1155,12 +1116,13 @@ while all this has been defined and implemented. - An example of code for iterating nodes & retrieving properties directly from the flattened tree format can be found in the kernel - file arch/ppc64/kernel/prom.c, look at scan_flat_dt() function, + file drivers/of/fdt.c. Look at the of_scan_flat_dt() function, its usage in early_init_devtree(), and the corresponding various early_init_dt_scan_*() callbacks. That code can be re-used in a GPL bootloader, and as the author of that code, I would be happy to discuss possible free licensing to any vendor who wishes to integrate all or part of this code into a non-GPL bootloader. + (reference needed; who is 'I' here? ---gcl Jan 31, 2011) @@ -1203,18 +1165,19 @@ MPC8540. 2) Representing devices without a current OF specification ---------------------------------------------------------- -Currently, there are many devices on SOCs that do not have a standard -representation pre-defined as part of the open firmware -specifications, mainly because the boards that contain these SOCs are -not currently booted using open firmware. This section contains -descriptions for the SOC devices for which new nodes have been -defined; this list will expand as more and more SOC-containing -platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model. +Currently, there are many devices on SoCs that do not have a standard +representation defined as part of the Open Firmware specifications, +mainly because the boards that contain these SoCs are not currently +booted using Open Firmware. Binding documentation for new devices +should be added to the Documentation/devicetree/bindings directory. +That directory will expand as device tree support is added to more and +more SoCs. + VII - Specifying interrupt information for devices =================================================== -The device tree represents the busses and devices of a hardware +The device tree represents the buses and devices of a hardware system in a form similar to the physical bus topology of the hardware. diff --git a/Documentation/dontdiff b/Documentation/dontdiff index d9bcffd59433..470d3dba1a69 100644 --- a/Documentation/dontdiff +++ b/Documentation/dontdiff @@ -62,6 +62,10 @@ aic7*reg_print.c* aic7*seq.h* aicasm aicdb.h* +altivec1.c +altivec2.c +altivec4.c +altivec8.c asm-offsets.h asm_offsets.h autoconf.h* @@ -76,6 +80,7 @@ btfixupprep build bvmlinux bzImage* +capflags.c classlist.h* comp*.log compile.h* @@ -94,6 +99,7 @@ devlist.h* docproc elf2ecoff elfconfig.h* +evergreen_reg_safe.h fixdep flask.h fore200e_mkfirm @@ -108,9 +114,16 @@ genksyms *_gray256.c ihex2fw ikconfig.h* +inat-tables.c initramfs_data.cpio initramfs_data.cpio.gz initramfs_list +int16.c +int1.c +int2.c +int32.c +int4.c +int8.c kallsyms kconfig keywords.c @@ -140,6 +153,7 @@ mkprep mktables mktree modpost +modules.builtin modules.order modversions.h* ncscope.* @@ -153,14 +167,23 @@ pca200e.bin pca200e_ecd.bin2 piggy.gz piggyback +piggy.S pnmtologo ppc_defs.h* pss_boot.h qconf +r100_reg_safe.h +r200_reg_safe.h +r300_reg_safe.h +r420_reg_safe.h +r600_reg_safe.h raid6altivec*.c raid6int*.c raid6tables.c relocs +rn50_reg_safe.h +rs600_reg_safe.h +rv515_reg_safe.h series setup setup.bin @@ -169,6 +192,7 @@ sImage sm_tbl* split-include syscalltab.h +tables.c tags tftpboot.img timeconst.h @@ -190,6 +214,7 @@ vmlinux vmlinux-* vmlinux.aout vmlinux.lds +voffset.h vsyscall.lds vsyscall_32.lds wanxlfw.inc @@ -200,3 +225,4 @@ wakeup.elf wakeup.lds zImage* zconf.hash.c +zoffset.h diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/lmedm04.txt b/Documentation/dvb/lmedm04.txt index e175784b89bf..641886504201 100644 --- a/Documentation/dvb/lmedm04.txt +++ b/Documentation/dvb/lmedm04.txt @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ and run Other LG firmware can be extracted manually from US280D.sys only found in windows/system32/driver. -dd if=US280D.sys ibs=1 skip=42616 count=3668 of=dvb-usb-lme2510-lg.fw +dd if=US280D.sys ibs=1 skip=42360 count=3924 of=dvb-usb-lme2510-lg.fw for DM04 LME2510C (LG Tuner) --------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt b/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt index 58ea64a96165..e6c4b757025b 100644 --- a/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt +++ b/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt @@ -205,12 +205,20 @@ of the characters: The flags are: +f + Include the function name in the printed message +l + Include line number in the printed message +m + Include module name in the printed message p Causes a printk() message to be emitted to dmesg +t + Include thread ID in messages not generated from interrupt context -Note the regexp ^[-+=][scp]+$ matches a flags specification. +Note the regexp ^[-+=][flmpt]+$ matches a flags specification. Note also that there is no convenient syntax to remove all -the flags at once, you need to use "-psc". +the flags at once, you need to use "-flmpt". Debug messages during boot process diff --git a/Documentation/email-clients.txt b/Documentation/email-clients.txt index 945ff3fda433..a0b58e29f911 100644 --- a/Documentation/email-clients.txt +++ b/Documentation/email-clients.txt @@ -104,6 +104,13 @@ Then from the "Message" menu item, select insert file and choose your patch. As an added bonus you can customise the message creation toolbar menu and put the "insert file" icon there. +Make the the composer window wide enough so that no lines wrap. As of +KMail 1.13.5 (KDE 4.5.4), KMail will apply word wrapping when sending +the email if the lines wrap in the composer window. Having word wrapping +disabled in the Options menu isn't enough. Thus, if your patch has very +long lines, you must make the composer window very wide before sending +the email. See: https://bugs.kde.org/show_bug.cgi?id=174034 + You can safely GPG sign attachments, but inlined text is preferred for patches so do not GPG sign them. Signing patches that have been inserted as inlined text will make them tricky to extract from their 7-bit encoding. @@ -179,26 +186,8 @@ Sylpheed (GUI) ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Thunderbird (GUI) -By default, thunderbird likes to mangle text, but there are ways to -coerce it into being nice. - -- Under account settings, composition and addressing, uncheck "Compose - messages in HTML format". - -- Edit your Thunderbird config settings to tell it not to wrap lines: - user_pref("mailnews.wraplength", 0); - -- Edit your Thunderbird config settings so that it won't use format=flowed: - user_pref("mailnews.send_plaintext_flowed", false); - -- You need to get Thunderbird into preformat mode: -. If you compose HTML messages by default, it's not too hard. Just select - "Preformat" from the drop-down box just under the subject line. -. If you compose in text by default, you have to tell it to compose a new - message in HTML (just as a one-off), and then force it from there back to - text, else it will wrap lines. To do this, use shift-click on the Write - icon to compose to get HTML compose mode, then select "Preformat" from - the drop-down box just under the subject line. +Thunderbird is an Outlook clone that likes to mangle text, but there are ways +to coerce it into behaving. - Allows use of an external editor: The easiest thing to do with Thunderbird and patches is to use an @@ -208,6 +197,27 @@ coerce it into being nice. View->Toolbars->Customize... and finally just click on it when in the Compose dialog. +To beat some sense out of the internal editor, do this: + +- Under account settings, composition and addressing, uncheck "Compose + messages in HTML format". + +- Edit your Thunderbird config settings so that it won't use format=flowed. + Go to "edit->preferences->advanced->config editor" to bring up the + thunderbird's registry editor, and set "mailnews.send_plaintext_flowed" to + "false". + +- Enable "preformat" mode: Shft-click on the Write icon to bring up the HTML + composer, select "Preformat" from the drop-down box just under the subject + line, then close the message without saving. (This setting also applies to + the text composer, but the only control for it is in the HTML composer.) + +- Install the "toggle wordwrap" extension. Download the file from: + https://addons.mozilla.org/thunderbird/addon/2351/ + Then go to "tools->add ons", select "install" at the bottom of the screen, + and browse to where you saved the .xul file. This adds an "Enable + Wordwrap" entry under the Options menu of the message composer. + ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ TkRat (GUI) diff --git a/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7fdde2a02a27 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + +What is udlfb? +=============== + +This is a driver for DisplayLink USB 2.0 era graphics chips. + +DisplayLink chips provide simple hline/blit operations with some compression, +pairing that with a hardware framebuffer (16MB) on the other end of the +USB wire. That hardware framebuffer is able to drive the VGA, DVI, or HDMI +monitor with no CPU involvement until a pixel has to change. + +The CPU or other local resource does all the rendering; optinally compares the +result with a local shadow of the remote hardware framebuffer to identify +the minimal set of pixels that have changed; and compresses and sends those +pixels line-by-line via USB bulk transfers. + +Because of the efficiency of bulk transfers and a protocol on top that +does not require any acks - the effect is very low latency that +can support surprisingly high resolutions with good performance for +non-gaming and non-video applications. + +Mode setting, EDID read, etc are other bulk or control transfers. Mode +setting is very flexible - able to set nearly arbitrary modes from any timing. + +Advantages of USB graphics in general: + + * Ability to add a nearly arbitrary number of displays to any USB 2.0 + capable system. On Linux, number of displays is limited by fbdev interface + (FB_MAX is currently 32). Of course, all USB devices on the same + host controller share the same 480Mbs USB 2.0 interface. + +Advantages of supporting DisplayLink chips with kernel framebuffer interface: + + * The actual hardware functionality of DisplayLink chips matches nearly + one-to-one with the fbdev interface, making the driver quite small and + tight relative to the functionality it provides. + * X servers and other applications can use the standard fbdev interface + from user mode to talk to the device, without needing to know anything + about USB or DisplayLink's protocol at all. A "displaylink" X driver + and a slightly modified "fbdev" X driver are among those that already do. + +Disadvantages: + + * Fbdev's mmap interface assumes a real hardware framebuffer is mapped. + In the case of USB graphics, it is just an allocated (virtual) buffer. + Writes need to be detected and encoded into USB bulk transfers by the CPU. + Accurate damage/changed area notifications work around this problem. + In the future, hopefully fbdev will be enhanced with an small standard + interface to allow mmap clients to report damage, for the benefit + of virtual or remote framebuffers. + * Fbdev does not arbitrate client ownership of the framebuffer well. + * Fbcon assumes the first framebuffer it finds should be consumed for console. + * It's not clear what the future of fbdev is, given the rise of KMS/DRM. + +How to use it? +============== + +Udlfb, when loaded as a module, will match against all USB 2.0 generation +DisplayLink chips (Alex and Ollie family). It will then attempt to read the EDID +of the monitor, and set the best common mode between the DisplayLink device +and the monitor's capabilities. + +If the DisplayLink device is successful, it will paint a "green screen" which +means that from a hardware and fbdev software perspective, everything is good. + +At that point, a /dev/fb? interface will be present for user-mode applications +to open and begin writing to the framebuffer of the DisplayLink device using +standard fbdev calls. Note that if mmap() is used, by default the user mode +application must send down damage notifcations to trigger repaints of the +changed regions. Alternatively, udlfb can be recompiled with experimental +defio support enabled, to support a page-fault based detection mechanism +that can work without explicit notifcation. + +The most common client of udlfb is xf86-video-displaylink or a modified +xf86-video-fbdev X server. These servers have no real DisplayLink specific +code. They write to the standard framebuffer interface and rely on udlfb +to do its thing. The one extra feature they have is the ability to report +rectangles from the X DAMAGE protocol extension down to udlfb via udlfb's +damage interface (which will hopefully be standardized for all virtual +framebuffers that need damage info). These damage notifications allow +udlfb to efficiently process the changed pixels. + +Module Options +============== + +Special configuration for udlfb is usually unnecessary. There are a few +options, however. + +From the command line, pass options to modprobe +modprobe udlfb defio=1 console=1 + +Or for permanent option, create file like /etc/modprobe.d/options with text +options udlfb defio=1 console=1 + +Accepted options: + +fb_defio Make use of the fb_defio (CONFIG_FB_DEFERRED_IO) kernel + module to track changed areas of the framebuffer by page faults. + Standard fbdev applications that use mmap but that do not + report damage, may be able to work with this enabled. + Disabled by default because of overhead and other issues. + +console Allow fbcon to attach to udlfb provided framebuffers. This + is disabled by default because fbcon will aggressively consume + the first framebuffer it finds, which isn't usually what the + user wants in the case of USB displays. + +Sysfs Attributes +================ + +Udlfb creates several files in /sys/class/graphics/fb? +Where ? is the sequential framebuffer id of the particular DisplayLink device + +edid If a valid EDID blob is written to this file (typically + by a udev rule), then udlfb will use this EDID as a + backup in case reading the actual EDID of the monitor + attached to the DisplayLink device fails. This is + especially useful for fixed panels, etc. that cannot + communicate their capabilities via EDID. Reading + this file returns the current EDID of the attached + monitor (or last backup value written). This is + useful to get the EDID of the attached monitor, + which can be passed to utilities like parse-edid. + +metrics_bytes_rendered 32-bit count of pixel bytes rendered + +metrics_bytes_identical 32-bit count of how many of those bytes were found to be + unchanged, based on a shadow framebuffer check + +metrics_bytes_sent 32-bit count of how many bytes were transferred over + USB to communicate the resulting changed pixels to the + hardware. Includes compression and protocol overhead + +metrics_cpu_kcycles_used 32-bit count of CPU cycles used in processing the + above pixels (in thousands of cycles). + +metrics_reset Write-only. Any write to this file resets all metrics + above to zero. Note that the 32-bit counters above + roll over very quickly. To get reliable results, design + performance tests to start and finish in a very short + period of time (one minute or less is safe). + +-- +Bernie Thompson <bernie@plugable.com> diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index 6c2f55e05f13..895330940f5d 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -35,6 +35,17 @@ Who: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> --------------------------- +What: AR9170USB +When: 2.6.40 + +Why: This driver is deprecated and the firmware is no longer + maintained. The replacement driver "carl9170" has been + around for a while, so the devices are still supported. + +Who: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com> + +--------------------------- + What: IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM Check: IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM When: July 2009 @@ -97,36 +108,38 @@ Who: Pavel Machek <pavel@ucw.cz> --------------------------- -What: Video4Linux API 1 ioctls and from Video devices. -When: kernel 2.6.38 -Files: include/linux/videodev.h -Check: include/linux/videodev.h -Why: V4L1 AP1 was replaced by V4L2 API during migration from 2.4 to 2.6 - series. The old API have lots of drawbacks and don't provide enough - means to work with all video and audio standards. The newer API is - already available on the main drivers and should be used instead. - Newer drivers should use v4l_compat_translate_ioctl function to handle - old calls, replacing to newer ones. - Decoder iocts are using internally to allow video drivers to - communicate with video decoders. This should also be improved to allow - V4L2 calls being translated into compatible internal ioctls. - Compatibility ioctls will be provided, for a while, via - v4l1-compat module. -Who: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org> - ---------------------------- - What: Video4Linux obsolete drivers using V4L1 API -When: kernel 2.6.38 -Files: drivers/staging/cpia/* drivers/staging/stradis/* -Check: drivers/staging/cpia/cpia.c drivers/staging/stradis/stradis.c +When: kernel 2.6.39 +Files: drivers/staging/se401/* drivers/staging/usbvideo/* +Check: drivers/staging/se401/se401.c drivers/staging/usbvideo/usbvideo.c Why: There are some drivers still using V4L1 API, despite all efforts we've done to migrate. Those drivers are for obsolete hardware that the old maintainer didn't care (or not have the hardware anymore), and that no other developer could find any hardware to buy. They probably have no practical usage today, and people with such old hardware could probably keep using an older version - of the kernel. Those drivers will be moved to staging on 2.6.37 and, if nobody - care enough to port and test them with V4L2 API, they'll be removed on 2.6.38. + of the kernel. Those drivers will be moved to staging on 2.6.38 and, if nobody + cares enough to port and test them with V4L2 API, they'll be removed on 2.6.39. +Who: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org> + +--------------------------- + +What: Video4Linux: Remove obsolete ioctl's +When: kernel 2.6.39 +Files: include/media/videodev2.h +Why: Some ioctl's were defined wrong on 2.6.2 and 2.6.6, using the wrong + type of R/W arguments. They were fixed, but the old ioctl names are + still there, maintained to avoid breaking binary compatibility: + #define VIDIOC_OVERLAY_OLD _IOWR('V', 14, int) + #define VIDIOC_S_PARM_OLD _IOW('V', 22, struct v4l2_streamparm) + #define VIDIOC_S_CTRL_OLD _IOW('V', 28, struct v4l2_control) + #define VIDIOC_G_AUDIO_OLD _IOWR('V', 33, struct v4l2_audio) + #define VIDIOC_G_AUDOUT_OLD _IOWR('V', 49, struct v4l2_audioout) + #define VIDIOC_CROPCAP_OLD _IOR('V', 58, struct v4l2_cropcap) + There's no sense on preserving those forever, as it is very doubtful + that someone would try to use a such old binary with a modern kernel. + Removing them will allow us to remove some magic done at the V4L ioctl + handler. + Who: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org> --------------------------- @@ -191,6 +204,20 @@ Why: /proc/<pid>/oom_adj allows userspace to influence the oom killer's --------------------------- +What: CS5535/CS5536 obsolete GPIO driver +When: June 2011 +Files: drivers/staging/cs5535_gpio/* +Check: drivers/staging/cs5535_gpio/cs5535_gpio.c +Why: A newer driver replaces this; it is drivers/gpio/cs5535-gpio.c, and + integrates with the Linux GPIO subsystem. The old driver has been + moved to staging, and will be removed altogether around 2.6.40. + Please test the new driver, and ensure that the functionality you + need and any bugfixes from the old driver are available in the new + one. +Who: Andres Salomon <dilinger@queued.net> + +-------------------------- + What: remove EXPORT_SYMBOL(kernel_thread) When: August 2006 Files: arch/*/kernel/*_ksyms.c @@ -232,6 +259,17 @@ Who: Zhang Rui <rui.zhang@intel.com> --------------------------- +What: CONFIG_ACPI_PROCFS_POWER +When: 2.6.39 +Why: sysfs I/F for ACPI power devices, including AC and Battery, + has been working in upstream kenrel since 2.6.24, Sep 2007. + In 2.6.37, we make the sysfs I/F always built in and this option + disabled by default. + Remove this option and the ACPI power procfs interface in 2.6.39. +Who: Zhang Rui <rui.zhang@intel.com> + +--------------------------- + What: /proc/acpi/button When: August 2007 Why: /proc/acpi/button has been replaced by events to the input layer @@ -330,14 +368,6 @@ Who: Dave Jones <davej@redhat.com>, Matthew Garrett <mjg@redhat.com> ----------------------------- -What: __do_IRQ all in one fits nothing interrupt handler -When: 2.6.32 -Why: __do_IRQ was kept for easy migration to the type flow handlers. - More than two years of migration time is enough. -Who: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> - ------------------------------ - What: fakephp and associated sysfs files in /sys/bus/pci/slots/ When: 2011 Why: In 2.6.27, the semantics of /sys/bus/pci/slots was redefined to @@ -555,12 +585,62 @@ Who: NeilBrown <neilb@suse.de> ---------------------------- -What: i2c_adapter.id +What: cancel_rearming_delayed_work[queue]() +When: 2.6.39 + +Why: The functions have been superceded by cancel_delayed_work_sync() + quite some time ago. The conversion is trivial and there is no + in-kernel user left. +Who: Tejun Heo <tj@kernel.org> + +---------------------------- + +What: Legacy, non-standard chassis intrusion detection interface. When: June 2011 -Why: This field is deprecated. I2C device drivers shouldn't change their - behavior based on the underlying I2C adapter. Instead, the I2C - adapter driver should instantiate the I2C devices and provide the - needed platform-specific information. +Why: The adm9240, w83792d and w83793 hardware monitoring drivers have + legacy interfaces for chassis intrusion detection. A standard + interface has been added to each driver, so the legacy interface + can be removed. +Who: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + +---------------------------- + +What: xt_connlimit rev 0 +When: 2012 +Who: Jan Engelhardt <jengelh@medozas.de> +Files: net/netfilter/xt_connlimit.c + +---------------------------- + +What: noswapaccount kernel command line parameter +When: 2.6.40 +Why: The original implementation of memsw feature enabled by + CONFIG_CGROUP_MEM_RES_CTLR_SWAP could be disabled by the noswapaccount + kernel parameter (introduced in 2.6.29-rc1). Later on, this decision + turned out to be not ideal because we cannot have the feature compiled + in and disabled by default and let only interested to enable it + (e.g. general distribution kernels might need it). Therefore we have + added swapaccount[=0|1] parameter (introduced in 2.6.37) which provides + the both possibilities. If we remove noswapaccount we will have + less command line parameters with the same functionality and we + can also cleanup the parameter handling a bit (). +Who: Michal Hocko <mhocko@suse.cz> + +---------------------------- + +What: ipt_addrtype match include file +When: 2012 +Why: superseded by xt_addrtype +Who: Florian Westphal <fw@strlen.de> +Files: include/linux/netfilter_ipv4/ipt_addrtype.h + +---------------------------- + +What: i2c_driver.attach_adapter + i2c_driver.detach_adapter +When: September 2011 +Why: These legacy callbacks should no longer be used as i2c-core offers + a variety of preferable alternative ways to instantiate I2C devices. Who: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> ---------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking index a91f30890011..2e994efe12cb 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking @@ -9,24 +9,30 @@ be able to use diff(1). --------------------------- dentry_operations -------------------------- prototypes: - int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, int); - int (*d_hash) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *); - int (*d_compare) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *, struct qstr *); + int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); + int (*d_hash)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + struct qstr *); + int (*d_compare)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + unsigned int, const char *, const struct qstr *); int (*d_delete)(struct dentry *); void (*d_release)(struct dentry *); void (*d_iput)(struct dentry *, struct inode *); char *(*d_dname)((struct dentry *dentry, char *buffer, int buflen); + struct vfsmount *(*d_automount)(struct path *path); + int (*d_manage)(struct dentry *, bool); locking rules: - none have BKL - dcache_lock rename_lock ->d_lock may block -d_revalidate: no no no yes -d_hash no no no yes -d_compare: no yes no no -d_delete: yes no yes no -d_release: no no no yes -d_iput: no no no yes + rename_lock ->d_lock may block rcu-walk +d_revalidate: no no yes (ref-walk) maybe +d_hash no no no maybe +d_compare: yes no no maybe +d_delete: no yes no no +d_release: no no yes no +d_iput: no no yes no d_dname: no no no no +d_automount: no no yes no +d_manage: no no yes (ref-walk) maybe --------------------------- inode_operations --------------------------- prototypes: @@ -42,18 +48,22 @@ ata *); int (*rename) (struct inode *, struct dentry *, struct inode *, struct dentry *); int (*readlink) (struct dentry *, char __user *,int); - int (*follow_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); + void * (*follow_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); + void (*put_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *, void *); void (*truncate) (struct inode *); - int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, struct nameidata *); + int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, unsigned int); + int (*check_acl)(struct inode *, int, unsigned int); int (*setattr) (struct dentry *, struct iattr *); int (*getattr) (struct vfsmount *, struct dentry *, struct kstat *); int (*setxattr) (struct dentry *, const char *,const void *,size_t,int); ssize_t (*getxattr) (struct dentry *, const char *, void *, size_t); ssize_t (*listxattr) (struct dentry *, char *, size_t); int (*removexattr) (struct dentry *, const char *); + void (*truncate_range)(struct inode *, loff_t, loff_t); + int (*fiemap)(struct inode *, struct fiemap_extent_info *, u64 start, u64 len); locking rules: - all may block, none have BKL + all may block i_mutex(inode) lookup: yes create: yes @@ -66,19 +76,23 @@ rmdir: yes (both) (see below) rename: yes (all) (see below) readlink: no follow_link: no +put_link: no truncate: yes (see below) setattr: yes -permission: no +permission: no (may not block if called in rcu-walk mode) +check_acl: no getattr: no setxattr: yes getxattr: no listxattr: no removexattr: yes +truncate_range: yes +fiemap: no Additionally, ->rmdir(), ->unlink() and ->rename() have ->i_mutex on victim. cross-directory ->rename() has (per-superblock) ->s_vfs_rename_sem. ->truncate() is never called directly - it's a callback, not a -method. It's called by vmtruncate() - library function normally used by +method. It's called by vmtruncate() - deprecated library function used by ->setattr(). Locking information above applies to that call (i.e. is inherited from ->setattr() - vmtruncate() is used when ATTR_SIZE had been passed). @@ -91,7 +105,7 @@ prototypes: struct inode *(*alloc_inode)(struct super_block *sb); void (*destroy_inode)(struct inode *); void (*dirty_inode) (struct inode *); - int (*write_inode) (struct inode *, int); + int (*write_inode) (struct inode *, struct writeback_control *wbc); int (*drop_inode) (struct inode *); void (*evict_inode) (struct inode *); void (*put_super) (struct super_block *); @@ -105,10 +119,10 @@ prototypes: int (*show_options)(struct seq_file *, struct vfsmount *); ssize_t (*quota_read)(struct super_block *, int, char *, size_t, loff_t); ssize_t (*quota_write)(struct super_block *, int, const char *, size_t, loff_t); + int (*bdev_try_to_free_page)(struct super_block*, struct page*, gfp_t); locking rules: All may block [not true, see below] - None have BKL s_umount alloc_inode: destroy_inode: @@ -127,6 +141,7 @@ umount_begin: no show_options: no (namespace_sem) quota_read: no (see below) quota_write: no (see below) +bdev_try_to_free_page: no (see below) ->statfs() has s_umount (shared) when called by ustat(2) (native or compat), but that's an accident of bad API; s_umount is used to pin @@ -139,19 +154,23 @@ be the only ones operating on the quota file by the quota code (via dqio_sem) (unless an admin really wants to screw up something and writes to quota files with quotas on). For other details about locking see also dquot_operations section. +->bdev_try_to_free_page is called from the ->releasepage handler of +the block device inode. See there for more details. --------------------------- file_system_type --------------------------- prototypes: int (*get_sb) (struct file_system_type *, int, const char *, void *, struct vfsmount *); + struct dentry *(*mount) (struct file_system_type *, int, + const char *, void *); void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *); locking rules: - may block BKL -get_sb yes no -kill_sb yes no + may block +mount yes +kill_sb yes -->get_sb() returns error or 0 with locked superblock attached to the vfsmount -(exclusive on ->s_umount). +->mount() returns ERR_PTR or the root dentry; its superblock should be locked +on return. ->kill_sb() takes a write-locked superblock, does all shutdown work on it, unlocks and drops the reference. @@ -173,28 +192,38 @@ prototypes: sector_t (*bmap)(struct address_space *, sector_t); int (*invalidatepage) (struct page *, unsigned long); int (*releasepage) (struct page *, int); + void (*freepage)(struct page *); int (*direct_IO)(int, struct kiocb *, const struct iovec *iov, loff_t offset, unsigned long nr_segs); - int (*launder_page) (struct page *); + int (*get_xip_mem)(struct address_space *, pgoff_t, int, void **, + unsigned long *); + int (*migratepage)(struct address_space *, struct page *, struct page *); + int (*launder_page)(struct page *); + int (*is_partially_uptodate)(struct page *, read_descriptor_t *, unsigned long); + int (*error_remove_page)(struct address_space *, struct page *); locking rules: - All except set_page_dirty may block - - BKL PageLocked(page) i_mutex -writepage: no yes, unlocks (see below) -readpage: no yes, unlocks -sync_page: no maybe -writepages: no -set_page_dirty no no -readpages: no -write_begin: no locks the page yes -write_end: no yes, unlocks yes -perform_write: no n/a yes -bmap: no -invalidatepage: no yes -releasepage: no yes -direct_IO: no -launder_page: no yes + All except set_page_dirty and freepage may block + + PageLocked(page) i_mutex +writepage: yes, unlocks (see below) +readpage: yes, unlocks +sync_page: maybe +writepages: +set_page_dirty no +readpages: +write_begin: locks the page yes +write_end: yes, unlocks yes +bmap: +invalidatepage: yes +releasepage: yes +freepage: yes +direct_IO: +get_xip_mem: maybe +migratepage: yes (both) +launder_page: yes +is_partially_uptodate: yes +error_remove_page: yes ->write_begin(), ->write_end(), ->sync_page() and ->readpage() may be called from the request handler (/dev/loop). @@ -274,9 +303,8 @@ under spinlock (it cannot block) and is sometimes called with the page not locked. ->bmap() is currently used by legacy ioctl() (FIBMAP) provided by some -filesystems and by the swapper. The latter will eventually go away. All -instances do not actually need the BKL. Please, keep it that way and don't -breed new callers. +filesystems and by the swapper. The latter will eventually go away. Please, +keep it that way and don't breed new callers. ->invalidatepage() is called when the filesystem must attempt to drop some or all of the buffers from the page when it is being truncated. It @@ -288,53 +316,44 @@ buffers from the page in preparation for freeing it. It returns zero to indicate that the buffers are (or may be) freeable. If ->releasepage is zero, the kernel assumes that the fs has no private interest in the buffers. + ->freepage() is called when the kernel is done dropping the page +from the page cache. + ->launder_page() may be called prior to releasing a page if it is still found to be dirty. It returns zero if the page was successfully cleaned, or an error value if not. Note that in order to prevent the page getting mapped back in and redirtied, it needs to be kept locked across the entire operation. - Note: currently almost all instances of address_space methods are -using BKL for internal serialization and that's one of the worst sources -of contention. Normally they are calling library functions (in fs/buffer.c) -and pass foo_get_block() as a callback (on local block-based filesystems, -indeed). BKL is not needed for library stuff and is usually taken by -foo_get_block(). It's an overkill, since block bitmaps can be protected by -internal fs locking and real critical areas are much smaller than the areas -filesystems protect now. - ----------------------- file_lock_operations ------------------------------ prototypes: - void (*fl_insert)(struct file_lock *); /* lock insertion callback */ - void (*fl_remove)(struct file_lock *); /* lock removal callback */ void (*fl_copy_lock)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *); void (*fl_release_private)(struct file_lock *); locking rules: - BKL may block -fl_insert: yes no -fl_remove: yes no -fl_copy_lock: yes no -fl_release_private: yes yes + file_lock_lock may block +fl_copy_lock: yes no +fl_release_private: maybe no ----------------------- lock_manager_operations --------------------------- prototypes: int (*fl_compare_owner)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *); void (*fl_notify)(struct file_lock *); /* unblock callback */ + int (*fl_grant)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *, int); void (*fl_release_private)(struct file_lock *); void (*fl_break)(struct file_lock *); /* break_lease callback */ + int (*fl_change)(struct file_lock **, int); locking rules: - BKL may block -fl_compare_owner: yes no -fl_notify: yes no -fl_release_private: yes yes -fl_break: yes no - - Currently only NFSD and NLM provide instances of this class. None of the -them block. If you have out-of-tree instances - please, show up. Locking -in that area will change. + file_lock_lock may block +fl_compare_owner: yes no +fl_notify: yes no +fl_grant: no no +fl_release_private: maybe no +fl_break: yes no +fl_change yes no + --------------------------- buffer_head ----------------------------------- prototypes: void (*b_end_io)(struct buffer_head *bh, int uptodate); @@ -359,17 +378,17 @@ prototypes: void (*swap_slot_free_notify) (struct block_device *, unsigned long); locking rules: - BKL bd_mutex -open: no yes -release: no yes -ioctl: no no -compat_ioctl: no no -direct_access: no no -media_changed: no no -unlock_native_capacity: no no -revalidate_disk: no no -getgeo: no no -swap_slot_free_notify: no no (see below) + bd_mutex +open: yes +release: yes +ioctl: no +compat_ioctl: no +direct_access: no +media_changed: no +unlock_native_capacity: no +revalidate_disk: no +getgeo: no +swap_slot_free_notify: no (see below) media_changed, unlock_native_capacity and revalidate_disk are called only from check_disk_change(). @@ -408,34 +427,22 @@ prototypes: unsigned long (*get_unmapped_area)(struct file *, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long); int (*check_flags)(int); + int (*flock) (struct file *, int, struct file_lock *); + ssize_t (*splice_write)(struct pipe_inode_info *, struct file *, loff_t *, + size_t, unsigned int); + ssize_t (*splice_read)(struct file *, loff_t *, struct pipe_inode_info *, + size_t, unsigned int); + int (*setlease)(struct file *, long, struct file_lock **); + long (*fallocate)(struct file *, int, loff_t, loff_t); }; locking rules: - All may block. - BKL -llseek: no (see below) -read: no -aio_read: no -write: no -aio_write: no -readdir: no -poll: no -unlocked_ioctl: no -compat_ioctl: no -mmap: no -open: no -flush: no -release: no -fsync: no (see below) -aio_fsync: no -fasync: no -lock: yes -readv: no -writev: no -sendfile: no -sendpage: no -get_unmapped_area: no -check_flags: no + All may block except for ->setlease. + No VFS locks held on entry except for ->fsync and ->setlease. + +->fsync() has i_mutex on inode. + +->setlease has the file_list_lock held and must not sleep. ->llseek() locking has moved from llseek to the individual llseek implementations. If your fs is not using generic_file_llseek, you @@ -445,17 +452,10 @@ mutex or just to use i_size_read() instead. Note: this does not protect the file->f_pos against concurrent modifications since this is something the userspace has to take care about. -Note: ext2_release() was *the* source of contention on fs-intensive -loads and dropping BKL on ->release() helps to get rid of that (we still -grab BKL for cases when we close a file that had been opened r/w, but that -can and should be done using the internal locking with smaller critical areas). -Current worst offender is ext2_get_block()... - -->fasync() is called without BKL protection, and is responsible for -maintaining the FASYNC bit in filp->f_flags. Most instances call -fasync_helper(), which does that maintenance, so it's not normally -something one needs to worry about. Return values > 0 will be mapped to -zero in the VFS layer. +->fasync() is responsible for maintaining the FASYNC bit in filp->f_flags. +Most instances call fasync_helper(), which does that maintenance, so it's +not normally something one needs to worry about. Return values > 0 will be +mapped to zero in the VFS layer. ->readdir() and ->ioctl() on directories must be changed. Ideally we would move ->readdir() to inode_operations and use a separate method for directory @@ -466,8 +466,6 @@ components. And there are other reasons why the current interface is a mess... ->read on directories probably must go away - we should just enforce -EISDIR in sys_read() and friends. -->fsync() has i_mutex on inode. - --------------------------- dquot_operations ------------------------------- prototypes: int (*write_dquot) (struct dquot *); @@ -502,12 +500,12 @@ prototypes: int (*access)(struct vm_area_struct *, unsigned long, void*, int, int); locking rules: - BKL mmap_sem PageLocked(page) -open: no yes -close: no yes -fault: no yes can return with page locked -page_mkwrite: no yes can return with page locked -access: no yes + mmap_sem PageLocked(page) +open: yes +close: yes +fault: yes can return with page locked +page_mkwrite: yes can return with page locked +access: yes ->fault() is called when a previously not present pte is about to be faulted in. The filesystem must find and return the page associated @@ -534,6 +532,3 @@ VM_IO | VM_PFNMAP VMAs. (if you break something or notice that it is broken and do not fix it yourself - at least put it here) - -ipc/shm.c::shm_delete() - may need BKL. -->read() and ->write() in many drivers are (probably) missing BKL. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/dentry-locking.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/dentry-locking.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 79334ed5daa7..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/dentry-locking.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,174 +0,0 @@ -RCU-based dcache locking model -============================== - -On many workloads, the most common operation on dcache is to look up a -dentry, given a parent dentry and the name of the child. Typically, -for every open(), stat() etc., the dentry corresponding to the -pathname will be looked up by walking the tree starting with the first -component of the pathname and using that dentry along with the next -component to look up the next level and so on. Since it is a frequent -operation for workloads like multiuser environments and web servers, -it is important to optimize this path. - -Prior to 2.5.10, dcache_lock was acquired in d_lookup and thus in -every component during path look-up. Since 2.5.10 onwards, fast-walk -algorithm changed this by holding the dcache_lock at the beginning and -walking as many cached path component dentries as possible. This -significantly decreases the number of acquisition of -dcache_lock. However it also increases the lock hold time -significantly and affects performance in large SMP machines. Since -2.5.62 kernel, dcache has been using a new locking model that uses RCU -to make dcache look-up lock-free. - -The current dcache locking model is not very different from the -existing dcache locking model. Prior to 2.5.62 kernel, dcache_lock -protected the hash chain, d_child, d_alias, d_lru lists as well as -d_inode and several other things like mount look-up. RCU-based changes -affect only the way the hash chain is protected. For everything else -the dcache_lock must be taken for both traversing as well as -updating. The hash chain updates too take the dcache_lock. The -significant change is the way d_lookup traverses the hash chain, it -doesn't acquire the dcache_lock for this and rely on RCU to ensure -that the dentry has not been *freed*. - - -Dcache locking details -====================== - -For many multi-user workloads, open() and stat() on files are very -frequently occurring operations. Both involve walking of path names to -find the dentry corresponding to the concerned file. In 2.4 kernel, -dcache_lock was held during look-up of each path component. Contention -and cache-line bouncing of this global lock caused significant -scalability problems. With the introduction of RCU in Linux kernel, -this was worked around by making the look-up of path components during -path walking lock-free. - - -Safe lock-free look-up of dcache hash table -=========================================== - -Dcache is a complex data structure with the hash table entries also -linked together in other lists. In 2.4 kernel, dcache_lock protected -all the lists. We applied RCU only on hash chain walking. The rest of -the lists are still protected by dcache_lock. Some of the important -changes are : - -1. The deletion from hash chain is done using hlist_del_rcu() macro - which doesn't initialize next pointer of the deleted dentry and - this allows us to walk safely lock-free while a deletion is - happening. - -2. Insertion of a dentry into the hash table is done using - hlist_add_head_rcu() which take care of ordering the writes - the - writes to the dentry must be visible before the dentry is - inserted. This works in conjunction with hlist_for_each_rcu(), - which has since been replaced by hlist_for_each_entry_rcu(), while - walking the hash chain. The only requirement is that all - initialization to the dentry must be done before - hlist_add_head_rcu() since we don't have dcache_lock protection - while traversing the hash chain. This isn't different from the - existing code. - -3. The dentry looked up without holding dcache_lock by cannot be - returned for walking if it is unhashed. It then may have a NULL - d_inode or other bogosity since RCU doesn't protect the other - fields in the dentry. We therefore use a flag DCACHE_UNHASHED to - indicate unhashed dentries and use this in conjunction with a - per-dentry lock (d_lock). Once looked up without the dcache_lock, - we acquire the per-dentry lock (d_lock) and check if the dentry is - unhashed. If so, the look-up is failed. If not, the reference count - of the dentry is increased and the dentry is returned. - -4. Once a dentry is looked up, it must be ensured during the path walk - for that component it doesn't go away. In pre-2.5.10 code, this was - done holding a reference to the dentry. dcache_rcu does the same. - In some sense, dcache_rcu path walking looks like the pre-2.5.10 - version. - -5. All dentry hash chain updates must take the dcache_lock as well as - the per-dentry lock in that order. dput() does this to ensure that - a dentry that has just been looked up in another CPU doesn't get - deleted before dget() can be done on it. - -6. There are several ways to do reference counting of RCU protected - objects. One such example is in ipv4 route cache where deferred - freeing (using call_rcu()) is done as soon as the reference count - goes to zero. This cannot be done in the case of dentries because - tearing down of dentries require blocking (dentry_iput()) which - isn't supported from RCU callbacks. Instead, tearing down of - dentries happen synchronously in dput(), but actual freeing happens - later when RCU grace period is over. This allows safe lock-free - walking of the hash chains, but a matched dentry may have been - partially torn down. The checking of DCACHE_UNHASHED flag with - d_lock held detects such dentries and prevents them from being - returned from look-up. - - -Maintaining POSIX rename semantics -================================== - -Since look-up of dentries is lock-free, it can race against a -concurrent rename operation. For example, during rename of file A to -B, look-up of either A or B must succeed. So, if look-up of B happens -after A has been removed from the hash chain but not added to the new -hash chain, it may fail. Also, a comparison while the name is being -written concurrently by a rename may result in false positive matches -violating rename semantics. Issues related to race with rename are -handled as described below : - -1. Look-up can be done in two ways - d_lookup() which is safe from - simultaneous renames and __d_lookup() which is not. If - __d_lookup() fails, it must be followed up by a d_lookup() to - correctly determine whether a dentry is in the hash table or - not. d_lookup() protects look-ups using a sequence lock - (rename_lock). - -2. The name associated with a dentry (d_name) may be changed if a - rename is allowed to happen simultaneously. To avoid memcmp() in - __d_lookup() go out of bounds due to a rename and false positive - comparison, the name comparison is done while holding the - per-dentry lock. This prevents concurrent renames during this - operation. - -3. Hash table walking during look-up may move to a different bucket as - the current dentry is moved to a different bucket due to rename. - But we use hlists in dcache hash table and they are - null-terminated. So, even if a dentry moves to a different bucket, - hash chain walk will terminate. [with a list_head list, it may not - since termination is when the list_head in the original bucket is - reached]. Since we redo the d_parent check and compare name while - holding d_lock, lock-free look-up will not race against d_move(). - -4. There can be a theoretical race when a dentry keeps coming back to - original bucket due to double moves. Due to this look-up may - consider that it has never moved and can end up in a infinite loop. - But this is not any worse that theoretical livelocks we already - have in the kernel. - - -Important guidelines for filesystem developers related to dcache_rcu -==================================================================== - -1. Existing dcache interfaces (pre-2.5.62) exported to filesystem - don't change. Only dcache internal implementation changes. However - filesystems *must not* delete from the dentry hash chains directly - using the list macros like allowed earlier. They must use dcache - APIs like d_drop() or __d_drop() depending on the situation. - -2. d_flags is now protected by a per-dentry lock (d_lock). All access - to d_flags must be protected by it. - -3. For a hashed dentry, checking of d_count needs to be protected by - d_lock. - - -Papers and other documentation on dcache locking -================================================ - -1. Scaling dcache with RCU (http://linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=7124). - -2. http://lse.sourceforge.net/locking/dcache/dcache.html - - - diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt index bc0b9cfe095b..983e14abe7e9 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt @@ -46,3 +46,10 @@ data server cache file driver devices refer to data servers, which are kept in a module level cache. Its reference is held over the lifetime of the deviceid pointing to it. + +lseg +---- +lseg maintains an extra reference corresponding to the NFS_LSEG_VALID +bit which holds it in the pnfs_layout_hdr's list. When the final lseg +is removed from the pnfs_layout_hdr's list, the NFS_LAYOUT_DESTROYED +bit is set, preventing any new lsegs from being added. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt index ac2a261c5f7d..933bc66ccff1 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt @@ -457,6 +457,11 @@ ChangeLog Note, a technical ChangeLog aimed at kernel hackers is in fs/ntfs/ChangeLog. +2.1.30: + - Fix writev() (it kept writing the first segment over and over again + instead of moving onto subsequent segments). + - Fix crash in ntfs_mft_record_alloc() when mapping the new extent mft + record failed. 2.1.29: - Fix a deadlock when mounting read-write. 2.1.28: diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..eb59c8b44be9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt @@ -0,0 +1,382 @@ +Path walking and name lookup locking +==================================== + +Path resolution is the finding a dentry corresponding to a path name string, by +performing a path walk. Typically, for every open(), stat() etc., the path name +will be resolved. Paths are resolved by walking the namespace tree, starting +with the first component of the pathname (eg. root or cwd) with a known dentry, +then finding the child of that dentry, which is named the next component in the +path string. Then repeating the lookup from the child dentry and finding its +child with the next element, and so on. + +Since it is a frequent operation for workloads like multiuser environments and +web servers, it is important to optimize this code. + +Path walking synchronisation history: +Prior to 2.5.10, dcache_lock was acquired in d_lookup (dcache hash lookup) and +thus in every component during path look-up. Since 2.5.10 onwards, fast-walk +algorithm changed this by holding the dcache_lock at the beginning and walking +as many cached path component dentries as possible. This significantly +decreases the number of acquisition of dcache_lock. However it also increases +the lock hold time significantly and affects performance in large SMP machines. +Since 2.5.62 kernel, dcache has been using a new locking model that uses RCU to +make dcache look-up lock-free. + +All the above algorithms required taking a lock and reference count on the +dentry that was looked up, so that may be used as the basis for walking the +next path element. This is inefficient and unscalable. It is inefficient +because of the locks and atomic operations required for every dentry element +slows things down. It is not scalable because many parallel applications that +are path-walk intensive tend to do path lookups starting from a common dentry +(usually, the root "/" or current working directory). So contention on these +common path elements causes lock and cacheline queueing. + +Since 2.6.38, RCU is used to make a significant part of the entire path walk +(including dcache look-up) completely "store-free" (so, no locks, atomics, or +even stores into cachelines of common dentries). This is known as "rcu-walk" +path walking. + +Path walking overview +===================== + +A name string specifies a start (root directory, cwd, fd-relative) and a +sequence of elements (directory entry names), which together refer to a path in +the namespace. A path is represented as a (dentry, vfsmount) tuple. The name +elements are sub-strings, seperated by '/'. + +Name lookups will want to find a particular path that a name string refers to +(usually the final element, or parent of final element). This is done by taking +the path given by the name's starting point (which we know in advance -- eg. +current->fs->cwd or current->fs->root) as the first parent of the lookup. Then +iteratively for each subsequent name element, look up the child of the current +parent with the given name and if it is not the desired entry, make it the +parent for the next lookup. + +A parent, of course, must be a directory, and we must have appropriate +permissions on the parent inode to be able to walk into it. + +Turning the child into a parent for the next lookup requires more checks and +procedures. Symlinks essentially substitute the symlink name for the target +name in the name string, and require some recursive path walking. Mount points +must be followed into (thus changing the vfsmount that subsequent path elements +refer to), switching from the mount point path to the root of the particular +mounted vfsmount. These behaviours are variously modified depending on the +exact path walking flags. + +Path walking then must, broadly, do several particular things: +- find the start point of the walk; +- perform permissions and validity checks on inodes; +- perform dcache hash name lookups on (parent, name element) tuples; +- traverse mount points; +- traverse symlinks; +- lookup and create missing parts of the path on demand. + +Safe store-free look-up of dcache hash table +============================================ + +Dcache name lookup +------------------ +In order to lookup a dcache (parent, name) tuple, we take a hash on the tuple +and use that to select a bucket in the dcache-hash table. The list of entries +in that bucket is then walked, and we do a full comparison of each entry +against our (parent, name) tuple. + +The hash lists are RCU protected, so list walking is not serialised with +concurrent updates (insertion, deletion from the hash). This is a standard RCU +list application with the exception of renames, which will be covered below. + +Parent and name members of a dentry, as well as its membership in the dcache +hash, and its inode are protected by the per-dentry d_lock spinlock. A +reference is taken on the dentry (while the fields are verified under d_lock), +and this stabilises its d_inode pointer and actual inode. This gives a stable +point to perform the next step of our path walk against. + +These members are also protected by d_seq seqlock, although this offers +read-only protection and no durability of results, so care must be taken when +using d_seq for synchronisation (see seqcount based lookups, below). + +Renames +------- +Back to the rename case. In usual RCU protected lists, the only operations that +will happen to an object is insertion, and then eventually removal from the +list. The object will not be reused until an RCU grace period is complete. +This ensures the RCU list traversal primitives can run over the object without +problems (see RCU documentation for how this works). + +However when a dentry is renamed, its hash value can change, requiring it to be +moved to a new hash list. Allocating and inserting a new alias would be +expensive and also problematic for directory dentries. Latency would be far to +high to wait for a grace period after removing the dentry and before inserting +it in the new hash bucket. So what is done is to insert the dentry into the +new list immediately. + +However, when the dentry's list pointers are updated to point to objects in the +new list before waiting for a grace period, this can result in a concurrent RCU +lookup of the old list veering off into the new (incorrect) list and missing +the remaining dentries on the list. + +There is no fundamental problem with walking down the wrong list, because the +dentry comparisons will never match. However it is fatal to miss a matching +dentry. So a seqlock is used to detect when a rename has occurred, and so the +lookup can be retried. + + 1 2 3 + +---+ +---+ +---+ +hlist-->| N-+->| N-+->| N-+-> +head <--+-P |<-+-P |<-+-P | + +---+ +---+ +---+ + +Rename of dentry 2 may require it deleted from the above list, and inserted +into a new list. Deleting 2 gives the following list. + + 1 3 + +---+ +---+ (don't worry, the longer pointers do not +hlist-->| N-+-------->| N-+-> impose a measurable performance overhead +head <--+-P |<--------+-P | on modern CPUs) + +---+ +---+ + ^ 2 ^ + | +---+ | + | | N-+----+ + +----+-P | + +---+ + +This is a standard RCU-list deletion, which leaves the deleted object's +pointers intact, so a concurrent list walker that is currently looking at +object 2 will correctly continue to object 3 when it is time to traverse the +next object. + +However, when inserting object 2 onto a new list, we end up with this: + + 1 3 + +---+ +---+ +hlist-->| N-+-------->| N-+-> +head <--+-P |<--------+-P | + +---+ +---+ + 2 + +---+ + | N-+----> + <----+-P | + +---+ + +Because we didn't wait for a grace period, there may be a concurrent lookup +still at 2. Now when it follows 2's 'next' pointer, it will walk off into +another list without ever having checked object 3. + +A related, but distinctly different, issue is that of rename atomicity versus +lookup operations. If a file is renamed from 'A' to 'B', a lookup must only +find either 'A' or 'B'. So if a lookup of 'A' returns NULL, a subsequent lookup +of 'B' must succeed (note the reverse is not true). + +Between deleting the dentry from the old hash list, and inserting it on the new +hash list, a lookup may find neither 'A' nor 'B' matching the dentry. The same +rename seqlock is also used to cover this race in much the same way, by +retrying a negative lookup result if a rename was in progress. + +Seqcount based lookups +---------------------- +In refcount based dcache lookups, d_lock is used to serialise access to +the dentry, stabilising it while comparing its name and parent and then +taking a reference count (the reference count then gives a stable place to +start the next part of the path walk from). + +As explained above, we would like to do path walking without taking locks or +reference counts on intermediate dentries along the path. To do this, a per +dentry seqlock (d_seq) is used to take a "coherent snapshot" of what the dentry +looks like (its name, parent, and inode). That snapshot is then used to start +the next part of the path walk. When loading the coherent snapshot under d_seq, +care must be taken to load the members up-front, and use those pointers rather +than reloading from the dentry later on (otherwise we'd have interesting things +like d_inode going NULL underneath us, if the name was unlinked). + +Also important is to avoid performing any destructive operations (pretty much: +no non-atomic stores to shared data), and to recheck the seqcount when we are +"done" with the operation. Retry or abort if the seqcount does not match. +Avoiding destructive or changing operations means we can easily unwind from +failure. + +What this means is that a caller, provided they are holding RCU lock to +protect the dentry object from disappearing, can perform a seqcount based +lookup which does not increment the refcount on the dentry or write to +it in any way. This returned dentry can be used for subsequent operations, +provided that d_seq is rechecked after that operation is complete. + +Inodes are also rcu freed, so the seqcount lookup dentry's inode may also be +queried for permissions. + +With this two parts of the puzzle, we can do path lookups without taking +locks or refcounts on dentry elements. + +RCU-walk path walking design +============================ + +Path walking code now has two distinct modes, ref-walk and rcu-walk. ref-walk +is the traditional[*] way of performing dcache lookups using d_lock to +serialise concurrent modifications to the dentry and take a reference count on +it. ref-walk is simple and obvious, and may sleep, take locks, etc while path +walking is operating on each dentry. rcu-walk uses seqcount based dentry +lookups, and can perform lookup of intermediate elements without any stores to +shared data in the dentry or inode. rcu-walk can not be applied to all cases, +eg. if the filesystem must sleep or perform non trivial operations, rcu-walk +must be switched to ref-walk mode. + +[*] RCU is still used for the dentry hash lookup in ref-walk, but not the full + path walk. + +Where ref-walk uses a stable, refcounted ``parent'' to walk the remaining +path string, rcu-walk uses a d_seq protected snapshot. When looking up a +child of this parent snapshot, we open d_seq critical section on the child +before closing d_seq critical section on the parent. This gives an interlocking +ladder of snapshots to walk down. + + + proc 101 + /----------------\ + / comm: "vi" \ + / fs.root: dentry0 \ + \ fs.cwd: dentry2 / + \ / + \----------------/ + +So when vi wants to open("/home/npiggin/test.c", O_RDWR), then it will +start from current->fs->root, which is a pinned dentry. Alternatively, +"./test.c" would start from cwd; both names refer to the same path in +the context of proc101. + + dentry 0 + +---------------------+ rcu-walk begins here, we note d_seq, check the + | name: "/" | inode's permission, and then look up the next + | inode: 10 | path element which is "home"... + | children:"home", ...| + +---------------------+ + | + dentry 1 V + +---------------------+ ... which brings us here. We find dentry1 via + | name: "home" | hash lookup, then note d_seq and compare name + | inode: 678 | string and parent pointer. When we have a match, + | children:"npiggin" | we now recheck the d_seq of dentry0. Then we + +---------------------+ check inode and look up the next element. + | + dentry2 V + +---------------------+ Note: if dentry0 is now modified, lookup is + | name: "npiggin" | not necessarily invalid, so we need only keep a + | inode: 543 | parent for d_seq verification, and grandparents + | children:"a.c", ... | can be forgotten. + +---------------------+ + | + dentry3 V + +---------------------+ At this point we have our destination dentry. + | name: "a.c" | We now take its d_lock, verify d_seq of this + | inode: 14221 | dentry. If that checks out, we can increment + | children:NULL | its refcount because we're holding d_lock. + +---------------------+ + +Taking a refcount on a dentry from rcu-walk mode, by taking its d_lock, +re-checking its d_seq, and then incrementing its refcount is called +"dropping rcu" or dropping from rcu-walk into ref-walk mode. + +It is, in some sense, a bit of a house of cards. If the seqcount check of the +parent snapshot fails, the house comes down, because we had closed the d_seq +section on the grandparent, so we have nothing left to stand on. In that case, +the path walk must be fully restarted (which we do in ref-walk mode, to avoid +live locks). It is costly to have a full restart, but fortunately they are +quite rare. + +When we reach a point where sleeping is required, or a filesystem callout +requires ref-walk, then instead of restarting the walk, we attempt to drop rcu +at the last known good dentry we have. Avoiding a full restart in ref-walk in +these cases is fundamental for performance and scalability because blocking +operations such as creates and unlinks are not uncommon. + +The detailed design for rcu-walk is like this: +* LOOKUP_RCU is set in nd->flags, which distinguishes rcu-walk from ref-walk. +* Take the RCU lock for the entire path walk, starting with the acquiring + of the starting path (eg. root/cwd/fd-path). So now dentry refcounts are + not required for dentry persistence. +* synchronize_rcu is called when unregistering a filesystem, so we can + access d_ops and i_ops during rcu-walk. +* Similarly take the vfsmount lock for the entire path walk. So now mnt + refcounts are not required for persistence. Also we are free to perform mount + lookups, and to assume dentry mount points and mount roots are stable up and + down the path. +* Have a per-dentry seqlock to protect the dentry name, parent, and inode, + so we can load this tuple atomically, and also check whether any of its + members have changed. +* Dentry lookups (based on parent, candidate string tuple) recheck the parent + sequence after the child is found in case anything changed in the parent + during the path walk. +* inode is also RCU protected so we can load d_inode and use the inode for + limited things. +* i_mode, i_uid, i_gid can be tested for exec permissions during path walk. +* i_op can be loaded. +* When the destination dentry is reached, drop rcu there (ie. take d_lock, + verify d_seq, increment refcount). +* If seqlock verification fails anywhere along the path, do a full restart + of the path lookup in ref-walk mode. -ECHILD tends to be used (for want of + a better errno) to signal an rcu-walk failure. + +The cases where rcu-walk cannot continue are: +* NULL dentry (ie. any uncached path element) +* Following links + +It may be possible eventually to make following links rcu-walk aware. + +Uncached path elements will always require dropping to ref-walk mode, at the +very least because i_mutex needs to be grabbed, and objects allocated. + +Final note: +"store-free" path walking is not strictly store free. We take vfsmount lock +and refcounts (both of which can be made per-cpu), and we also store to the +stack (which is essentially CPU-local), and we also have to take locks and +refcount on final dentry. + +The point is that shared data, where practically possible, is not locked +or stored into. The result is massive improvements in performance and +scalability of path resolution. + + +Interesting statistics +====================== + +The following table gives rcu lookup statistics for a few simple workloads +(2s12c24t Westmere, debian non-graphical system). Ungraceful are attempts to +drop rcu that fail due to d_seq failure and requiring the entire path lookup +again. Other cases are successful rcu-drops that are required before the final +element, nodentry for missing dentry, revalidate for filesystem revalidate +routine requiring rcu drop, permission for permission check requiring drop, +and link for symlink traversal requiring drop. + + rcu-lookups restart nodentry link revalidate permission +bootup 47121 0 4624 1010 10283 7852 +dbench 25386793 0 6778659(26.7%) 55 549 1156 +kbuild 2696672 10 64442(2.3%) 108764(4.0%) 1 1590 +git diff 39605 0 28 2 0 106 +vfstest 24185492 4945 708725(2.9%) 1076136(4.4%) 0 2651 + +What this shows is that failed rcu-walk lookups, ie. ones that are restarted +entirely with ref-walk, are quite rare. Even the "vfstest" case which +specifically has concurrent renames/mkdir/rmdir/ creat/unlink/etc to excercise +such races is not showing a huge amount of restarts. + +Dropping from rcu-walk to ref-walk mean that we have encountered a dentry where +the reference count needs to be taken for some reason. This is either because +we have reached the target of the path walk, or because we have encountered a +condition that can't be resolved in rcu-walk mode. Ideally, we drop rcu-walk +only when we have reached the target dentry, so the other statistics show where +this does not happen. + +Note that a graceful drop from rcu-walk mode due to something such as the +dentry not existing (which can be common) is not necessarily a failure of +rcu-walk scheme, because some elements of the path may have been walked in +rcu-walk mode. The further we get from common path elements (such as cwd or +root), the less contended the dentry is likely to be. The closer we are to +common path elements, the more likely they will exist in dentry cache. + + +Papers and other documentation on dcache locking +================================================ + +1. Scaling dcache with RCU (http://linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=7124). + +2. http://lse.sourceforge.net/locking/dcache/dcache.html + + diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/porting b/Documentation/filesystems/porting index b12c89538680..0c986c9e8519 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/porting +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/porting @@ -216,7 +216,6 @@ had ->revalidate()) add calls in ->follow_link()/->readlink(). ->d_parent changes are not protected by BKL anymore. Read access is safe if at least one of the following is true: * filesystem has no cross-directory rename() - * dcache_lock is held * we know that parent had been locked (e.g. we are looking at ->d_parent of ->lookup() argument). * we are called from ->rename(). @@ -318,3 +317,87 @@ if it's zero is not *and* *never* *had* *been* enough. Final unlink() and iput( may happen while the inode is in the middle of ->write_inode(); e.g. if you blindly free the on-disk inode, you may end up doing that while ->write_inode() is writing to it. + +--- +[mandatory] + + .d_delete() now only advises the dcache as to whether or not to cache +unreferenced dentries, and is now only called when the dentry refcount goes to +0. Even on 0 refcount transition, it must be able to tolerate being called 0, +1, or more times (eg. constant, idempotent). + +--- +[mandatory] + + .d_compare() calling convention and locking rules are significantly +changed. Read updated documentation in Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt (and +look at examples of other filesystems) for guidance. + +--- +[mandatory] + + .d_hash() calling convention and locking rules are significantly +changed. Read updated documentation in Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt (and +look at examples of other filesystems) for guidance. + +--- +[mandatory] + dcache_lock is gone, replaced by fine grained locks. See fs/dcache.c +for details of what locks to replace dcache_lock with in order to protect +particular things. Most of the time, a filesystem only needs ->d_lock, which +protects *all* the dcache state of a given dentry. + +-- +[mandatory] + + Filesystems must RCU-free their inodes, if they can have been accessed +via rcu-walk path walk (basically, if the file can have had a path name in the +vfs namespace). + + i_dentry and i_rcu share storage in a union, and the vfs expects +i_dentry to be reinitialized before it is freed, so an: + + INIT_LIST_HEAD(&inode->i_dentry); + +must be done in the RCU callback. + +-- +[recommended] + vfs now tries to do path walking in "rcu-walk mode", which avoids +atomic operations and scalability hazards on dentries and inodes (see +Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt). d_hash and d_compare changes +(above) are examples of the changes required to support this. For more complex +filesystem callbacks, the vfs drops out of rcu-walk mode before the fs call, so +no changes are required to the filesystem. However, this is costly and loses +the benefits of rcu-walk mode. We will begin to add filesystem callbacks that +are rcu-walk aware, shown below. Filesystems should take advantage of this +where possible. + +-- +[mandatory] + d_revalidate is a callback that is made on every path element (if +the filesystem provides it), which requires dropping out of rcu-walk mode. This +may now be called in rcu-walk mode (nd->flags & LOOKUP_RCU). -ECHILD should be +returned if the filesystem cannot handle rcu-walk. See +Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt for more details. + + permission and check_acl are inode permission checks that are called +on many or all directory inodes on the way down a path walk (to check for +exec permission). These must now be rcu-walk aware (flags & IPERM_FLAG_RCU). +See Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt for more details. + +-- +[mandatory] + In ->fallocate() you must check the mode option passed in. If your +filesystem does not support hole punching (deallocating space in the middle of a +file) you must return -EOPNOTSUPP if FALLOC_FL_PUNCH_HOLE is set in mode. +Currently you can only have FALLOC_FL_PUNCH_HOLE with FALLOC_FL_KEEP_SIZE set, +so the i_size should not change when hole punching, even when puching the end of +a file off. + +-- +[mandatory] + ->get_sb() is gone. Switch to use of ->mount(). Typically it's just +a matter of switching from calling get_sb_... to mount_... and changing the +function type. If you were doing it manually, just switch from setting ->mnt_root +to some pointer to returning that pointer. On errors return ERR_PTR(...). diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index e73df2722ff3..23cae6548d3a 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -375,6 +375,7 @@ Anonymous: 0 kB Swap: 0 kB KernelPageSize: 4 kB MMUPageSize: 4 kB +Locked: 374 kB The first of these lines shows the same information as is displayed for the mapping in /proc/PID/maps. The remaining lines show the size of the mapping @@ -670,6 +671,8 @@ varies by architecture and compile options. The following is from a > cat /proc/meminfo +The "Locked" indicates whether the mapping is locked in memory or not. + MemTotal: 16344972 kB MemFree: 13634064 kB @@ -1181,6 +1184,30 @@ Table 1-12: Files in /proc/fs/ext4/<devname> mb_groups details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks .............................................................................. +2.0 /proc/consoles +------------------ +Shows registered system console lines. + +To see which character device lines are currently used for the system console +/dev/console, you may simply look into the file /proc/consoles: + + > cat /proc/consoles + tty0 -WU (ECp) 4:7 + ttyS0 -W- (Ep) 4:64 + +The columns are: + + device name of the device + operations R = can do read operations + W = can do write operations + U = can do unblank + flags E = it is enabled + C = it is prefered console + B = it is primary boot console + p = it is used for printk buffer + b = it is not a TTY but a Braille device + a = it is safe to use when cpu is offline + major:minor major and minor number of the device separated by a colon ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Summary @@ -1296,6 +1323,10 @@ scaled linearly with /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj. Writing to /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj or /proc/<pid>/oom_adj will change the other with its scaled value. +The value of /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj may be reduced no lower than the last +value set by a CAP_SYS_RESOURCE process. To reduce the value any lower +requires CAP_SYS_RESOURCE. + NOTICE: /proc/<pid>/oom_adj is deprecated and will be removed, please see Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/romfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/romfs.txt index 2d2a7b2a16b9..e2b07cc9120a 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/romfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/romfs.txt @@ -17,8 +17,7 @@ comparison, an actual rescue disk used up 3202 blocks with ext2, while with romfs, it needed 3079 blocks. To create such a file system, you'll need a user program named -genromfs. It is available via anonymous ftp on sunsite.unc.edu and -its mirrors, in the /pub/Linux/system/recovery/ directory. +genromfs. It is available on http://romfs.sourceforge.net/ As the name suggests, romfs could be also used (space-efficiently) on various read-only media, like (E)EPROM disks if someone will have the diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt index 5d1335faec2d..f806e50aaa63 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt @@ -39,10 +39,12 @@ userspace. Top-level directories in sysfs represent the common ancestors of object hierarchies; i.e. the subsystems the objects belong to. -Sysfs internally stores the kobject that owns the directory in the -->d_fsdata pointer of the directory's dentry. This allows sysfs to do -reference counting directly on the kobject when the file is opened and -closed. +Sysfs internally stores a pointer to the kobject that implements a +directory in the sysfs_dirent object associated with the directory. In +the past this kobject pointer has been used by sysfs to do reference +counting directly on the kobject whenever the file is opened or closed. +With the current sysfs implementation the kobject reference count is +only modified directly by the function sysfs_schedule_callback(). Attributes @@ -208,9 +210,9 @@ Other notes: is 4096. - show() methods should return the number of bytes printed into the - buffer. This is the return value of snprintf(). + buffer. This is the return value of scnprintf(). -- show() should always use snprintf(). +- show() should always use scnprintf(). - store() should return the number of bytes used from the buffer. If the entire buffer has been used, just return the count argument. @@ -229,7 +231,7 @@ A very simple (and naive) implementation of a device attribute is: static ssize_t show_name(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr, char *buf) { - return snprintf(buf, PAGE_SIZE, "%s\n", dev->name); + return scnprintf(buf, PAGE_SIZE, "%s\n", dev->name); } static ssize_t store_name(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr, diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt index 12fedb7834c6..d7b13b01e980 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt @@ -82,12 +82,12 @@ Mount options bulk_read read more in one go to take advantage of flash media that read faster sequentially no_bulk_read (*) do not bulk-read -no_chk_data_crc skip checking of CRCs on data nodes in order to +no_chk_data_crc (*) skip checking of CRCs on data nodes in order to improve read performance. Use this option only if the flash media is highly reliable. The effect of this option is that corruption of the contents of a file can go unnoticed. -chk_data_crc (*) do not skip checking CRCs on data nodes +chk_data_crc do not skip checking CRCs on data nodes compr=none override default compressor and set it to "none" compr=lzo override default compressor and set it to "lzo" compr=zlib override default compressor and set it to "zlib" diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index 55c28b79d8dc..306f0ae8df09 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt @@ -95,10 +95,11 @@ functions: extern int unregister_filesystem(struct file_system_type *); The passed struct file_system_type describes your filesystem. When a -request is made to mount a device onto a directory in your filespace, -the VFS will call the appropriate get_sb() method for the specific -filesystem. The dentry for the mount point will then be updated to -point to the root inode for the new filesystem. +request is made to mount a filesystem onto a directory in your namespace, +the VFS will call the appropriate mount() method for the specific +filesystem. New vfsmount refering to the tree returned by ->mount() +will be attached to the mountpoint, so that when pathname resolution +reaches the mountpoint it will jump into the root of that vfsmount. You can see all filesystems that are registered to the kernel in the file /proc/filesystems. @@ -107,14 +108,14 @@ file /proc/filesystems. struct file_system_type ----------------------- -This describes the filesystem. As of kernel 2.6.22, the following +This describes the filesystem. As of kernel 2.6.39, the following members are defined: struct file_system_type { const char *name; int fs_flags; - int (*get_sb) (struct file_system_type *, int, - const char *, void *, struct vfsmount *); + struct dentry (*mount) (struct file_system_type *, int, + const char *, void *); void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *); struct module *owner; struct file_system_type * next; @@ -128,11 +129,11 @@ struct file_system_type { fs_flags: various flags (i.e. FS_REQUIRES_DEV, FS_NO_DCACHE, etc.) - get_sb: the method to call when a new instance of this + mount: the method to call when a new instance of this filesystem should be mounted kill_sb: the method to call when an instance of this filesystem - should be unmounted + should be shut down owner: for internal VFS use: you should initialize this to THIS_MODULE in most cases. @@ -141,7 +142,7 @@ struct file_system_type { s_lock_key, s_umount_key: lockdep-specific -The get_sb() method has the following arguments: +The mount() method has the following arguments: struct file_system_type *fs_type: describes the filesystem, partly initialized by the specific filesystem code @@ -153,32 +154,39 @@ The get_sb() method has the following arguments: void *data: arbitrary mount options, usually comes as an ASCII string (see "Mount Options" section) - struct vfsmount *mnt: a vfs-internal representation of a mount point +The mount() method must return the root dentry of the tree requested by +caller. An active reference to its superblock must be grabbed and the +superblock must be locked. On failure it should return ERR_PTR(error). -The get_sb() method must determine if the block device specified -in the dev_name and fs_type contains a filesystem of the type the method -supports. If it succeeds in opening the named block device, it initializes a -struct super_block descriptor for the filesystem contained by the block device. -On failure it returns an error. +The arguments match those of mount(2) and their interpretation +depends on filesystem type. E.g. for block filesystems, dev_name is +interpreted as block device name, that device is opened and if it +contains a suitable filesystem image the method creates and initializes +struct super_block accordingly, returning its root dentry to caller. + +->mount() may choose to return a subtree of existing filesystem - it +doesn't have to create a new one. The main result from the caller's +point of view is a reference to dentry at the root of (sub)tree to +be attached; creation of new superblock is a common side effect. The most interesting member of the superblock structure that the -get_sb() method fills in is the "s_op" field. This is a pointer to +mount() method fills in is the "s_op" field. This is a pointer to a "struct super_operations" which describes the next level of the filesystem implementation. -Usually, a filesystem uses one of the generic get_sb() implementations -and provides a fill_super() method instead. The generic methods are: +Usually, a filesystem uses one of the generic mount() implementations +and provides a fill_super() callback instead. The generic variants are: - get_sb_bdev: mount a filesystem residing on a block device + mount_bdev: mount a filesystem residing on a block device - get_sb_nodev: mount a filesystem that is not backed by a device + mount_nodev: mount a filesystem that is not backed by a device - get_sb_single: mount a filesystem which shares the instance between + mount_single: mount a filesystem which shares the instance between all mounts -A fill_super() method implementation has the following arguments: +A fill_super() callback implementation has the following arguments: - struct super_block *sb: the superblock structure. The method fill_super() + struct super_block *sb: the superblock structure. The callback must initialize this properly. void *data: arbitrary mount options, usually comes as an ASCII @@ -325,7 +333,8 @@ struct inode_operations { void * (*follow_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); void (*put_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *, void *); void (*truncate) (struct inode *); - int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, struct nameidata *); + int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, unsigned int); + int (*check_acl)(struct inode *, int, unsigned int); int (*setattr) (struct dentry *, struct iattr *); int (*getattr) (struct vfsmount *mnt, struct dentry *, struct kstat *); int (*setxattr) (struct dentry *, const char *,const void *,size_t,int); @@ -414,6 +423,13 @@ otherwise noted. permission: called by the VFS to check for access rights on a POSIX-like filesystem. + May be called in rcu-walk mode (flags & IPERM_FLAG_RCU). If in rcu-walk + mode, the filesystem must check the permission without blocking or + storing to the inode. + + If a situation is encountered that rcu-walk cannot handle, return + -ECHILD and it will be called again in ref-walk mode. + setattr: called by the VFS to set attributes for a file. This method is called by chmod(2) and related system calls. @@ -534,6 +550,7 @@ struct address_space_operations { sector_t (*bmap)(struct address_space *, sector_t); int (*invalidatepage) (struct page *, unsigned long); int (*releasepage) (struct page *, int); + void (*freepage)(struct page *); ssize_t (*direct_IO)(int, struct kiocb *, const struct iovec *iov, loff_t offset, unsigned long nr_segs); struct page* (*get_xip_page)(struct address_space *, sector_t, @@ -678,6 +695,12 @@ struct address_space_operations { need to ensure this. Possibly it can clear the PageUptodate bit if it cannot free private data yet. + freepage: freepage is called once the page is no longer visible in + the page cache in order to allow the cleanup of any private + data. Since it may be called by the memory reclaimer, it + should not assume that the original address_space mapping still + exists, and it should not block. + direct_IO: called by the generic read/write routines to perform direct_IO - that is IO requests which bypass the page cache and transfer data directly between the storage and the @@ -840,12 +863,17 @@ defined: struct dentry_operations { int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); - int (*d_hash) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *); - int (*d_compare) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *, struct qstr *); - int (*d_delete)(struct dentry *); + int (*d_hash)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + struct qstr *); + int (*d_compare)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + unsigned int, const char *, const struct qstr *); + int (*d_delete)(const struct dentry *); void (*d_release)(struct dentry *); void (*d_iput)(struct dentry *, struct inode *); char *(*d_dname)(struct dentry *, char *, int); + struct vfsmount *(*d_automount)(struct path *); + int (*d_manage)(struct dentry *, bool); }; d_revalidate: called when the VFS needs to revalidate a dentry. This @@ -853,13 +881,45 @@ struct dentry_operations { dcache. Most filesystems leave this as NULL, because all their dentries in the dcache are valid - d_hash: called when the VFS adds a dentry to the hash table + d_revalidate may be called in rcu-walk mode (nd->flags & LOOKUP_RCU). + If in rcu-walk mode, the filesystem must revalidate the dentry without + blocking or storing to the dentry, d_parent and d_inode should not be + used without care (because they can go NULL), instead nd->inode should + be used. + + If a situation is encountered that rcu-walk cannot handle, return + -ECHILD and it will be called again in ref-walk mode. + + d_hash: called when the VFS adds a dentry to the hash table. The first + dentry passed to d_hash is the parent directory that the name is + to be hashed into. The inode is the dentry's inode. - d_compare: called when a dentry should be compared with another + Same locking and synchronisation rules as d_compare regarding + what is safe to dereference etc. - d_delete: called when the last reference to a dentry is - deleted. This means no-one is using the dentry, however it is - still valid and in the dcache + d_compare: called to compare a dentry name with a given name. The first + dentry is the parent of the dentry to be compared, the second is + the parent's inode, then the dentry and inode (may be NULL) of the + child dentry. len and name string are properties of the dentry to be + compared. qstr is the name to compare it with. + + Must be constant and idempotent, and should not take locks if + possible, and should not or store into the dentry or inodes. + Should not dereference pointers outside the dentry or inodes without + lots of care (eg. d_parent, d_inode, d_name should not be used). + + However, our vfsmount is pinned, and RCU held, so the dentries and + inodes won't disappear, neither will our sb or filesystem module. + ->i_sb and ->d_sb may be used. + + It is a tricky calling convention because it needs to be called under + "rcu-walk", ie. without any locks or references on things. + + d_delete: called when the last reference to a dentry is dropped and the + dcache is deciding whether or not to cache it. Return 1 to delete + immediately, or 0 to cache the dentry. Default is NULL which means to + always cache a reachable dentry. d_delete must be constant and + idempotent. d_release: called when a dentry is really deallocated @@ -880,6 +940,43 @@ struct dentry_operations { at the end of the buffer, and returns a pointer to the first char. dynamic_dname() helper function is provided to take care of this. + d_automount: called when an automount dentry is to be traversed (optional). + This should create a new VFS mount record and return the record to the + caller. The caller is supplied with a path parameter giving the + automount directory to describe the automount target and the parent + VFS mount record to provide inheritable mount parameters. NULL should + be returned if someone else managed to make the automount first. If + the vfsmount creation failed, then an error code should be returned. + If -EISDIR is returned, then the directory will be treated as an + ordinary directory and returned to pathwalk to continue walking. + + If a vfsmount is returned, the caller will attempt to mount it on the + mountpoint and will remove the vfsmount from its expiration list in + the case of failure. The vfsmount should be returned with 2 refs on + it to prevent automatic expiration - the caller will clean up the + additional ref. + + This function is only used if DCACHE_NEED_AUTOMOUNT is set on the + dentry. This is set by __d_instantiate() if S_AUTOMOUNT is set on the + inode being added. + + d_manage: called to allow the filesystem to manage the transition from a + dentry (optional). This allows autofs, for example, to hold up clients + waiting to explore behind a 'mountpoint' whilst letting the daemon go + past and construct the subtree there. 0 should be returned to let the + calling process continue. -EISDIR can be returned to tell pathwalk to + use this directory as an ordinary directory and to ignore anything + mounted on it and not to check the automount flag. Any other error + code will abort pathwalk completely. + + If the 'rcu_walk' parameter is true, then the caller is doing a + pathwalk in RCU-walk mode. Sleeping is not permitted in this mode, + and the caller can be asked to leave it and call again by returing + -ECHILD. + + This function is only used if DCACHE_MANAGE_TRANSIT is set on the + dentry being transited from. + Example : static char *pipefs_dname(struct dentry *dent, char *buffer, int buflen) @@ -903,14 +1000,11 @@ manipulate dentries: the usage count) dput: close a handle for a dentry (decrements the usage count). If - the usage count drops to 0, the "d_delete" method is called - and the dentry is placed on the unused list if the dentry is - still in its parents hash list. Putting the dentry on the - unused list just means that if the system needs some RAM, it - goes through the unused list of dentries and deallocates them. - If the dentry has already been unhashed and the usage count - drops to 0, in this case the dentry is deallocated after the - "d_delete" method is called + the usage count drops to 0, and the dentry is still in its + parent's hash, the "d_delete" method is called to check whether + it should be cached. If it should not be cached, or if the dentry + is not hashed, it is deleted. Otherwise cached dentries are put + into an LRU list to be reclaimed on memory shortage. d_drop: this unhashes a dentry from its parents hash list. A subsequent call to dput() will deallocate the dentry if its diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adm9240 b/Documentation/hwmon/adm9240 index 2c6f1fed4618..36e8ec6aa868 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/adm9240 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adm9240 @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ connected to a normally open switch. The ADM9240 provides an internal open drain on this line, and may output a 20 ms active low pulse to reset an external Chassis Intrusion latch. -Clear the CI latch by writing value 1 to the sysfs chassis_clear file. +Clear the CI latch by writing value 0 to the sysfs intrusion0_alarm file. Alarm flags reported as 16-bit word diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ads7828 b/Documentation/hwmon/ads7828 index 75bc4beaf447..2bbebe6f771f 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/ads7828 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ads7828 @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Supported chips: http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ads7828.pdf Authors: - Steve Hardy <steve@linuxrealtime.co.uk> + Steve Hardy <shardy@redhat.com> Module Parameters ----------------- diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 b/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 index fc5df7654d63..4d2935145a1c 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ Description This driver implements support for the hardware monitoring capabilities of the SMSC DME1737 and Asus A8000 (which are the same), SMSC SCH5027, SCH311x, and SCH5127 Super-I/O chips. These chips feature monitoring of 3 temp sensors -temp[1-3] (2 remote diodes and 1 internal), 7 voltages in[0-6] (6 external and +temp[1-3] (2 remote diodes and 1 internal), 8 voltages in[0-7] (7 external and 1 internal) and up to 6 fan speeds fan[1-6]. Additionally, the chips implement up to 5 PWM outputs pwm[1-3,5-6] for controlling fan speeds both manually and automatically. @@ -105,6 +105,7 @@ SCH5127: in4: V1_IN 0V - 1.5V in5: VTR (+3.3V standby) 0V - 4.38V in6: Vbat (+3.0V) 0V - 4.38V + in7: Vtrip (+1.5V) 0V - 1.99V Each voltage input has associated min and max limits which trigger an alarm when crossed. @@ -217,10 +218,10 @@ cpu0_vid RO CPU core reference voltage in vrm RW Voltage regulator module version number. -in[0-6]_input RO Measured voltage in millivolts. -in[0-6]_min RW Low limit for voltage input. -in[0-6]_max RW High limit for voltage input. -in[0-6]_alarm RO Voltage input alarm. Returns 1 if +in[0-7]_input RO Measured voltage in millivolts. +in[0-7]_min RW Low limit for voltage input. +in[0-7]_max RW High limit for voltage input. +in[0-7]_alarm RO Voltage input alarm. Returns 1 if voltage input is or went outside the associated min-max range, 0 otherwise. @@ -324,3 +325,4 @@ fan5 opt opt pwm5 opt opt fan6 opt opt pwm6 opt opt +in7 yes diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ds620 b/Documentation/hwmon/ds620 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1fbe3cd916cc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ds620 @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +Kernel driver ds620 +=================== + +Supported chips: + * Dallas Semiconductor DS620 + Prefix: 'ds620' + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website + http://www.dalsemi.com/ + +Authors: + Roland Stigge <stigge@antcom.de> + based on ds1621.c by + Christian W. Zuckschwerdt <zany@triq.net> + +Description +----------- + +The DS620 is a (one instance) digital thermometer and thermostat. It has both +high and low temperature limits which can be user defined (i.e. programmed +into non-volatile on-chip registers). Temperature range is -55 degree Celsius +to +125. Between 0 and 70 degree Celsius, accuracy is 0.5 Kelvin. The value +returned via sysfs displays post decimal positions. + +The thermostat function works as follows: When configured via platform_data +(struct ds620_platform_data) .pomode == 0 (default), the thermostat output pin +PO is always low. If .pomode == 1, the thermostat is in PO_LOW mode. I.e., the +output pin PO becomes active when the temperature falls below temp1_min and +stays active until the temperature goes above temp1_max. + +Likewise, with .pomode == 2, the thermostat is in PO_HIGH mode. I.e., the PO +output pin becomes active when the temperature goes above temp1_max and stays +active until the temperature falls below temp1_min. + +The PO output pin of the DS620 operates active-low. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg index a7952c2bd959..4d0bc70f1852 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg @@ -10,6 +10,10 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'f71862fg' Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website + * Fintek F71869F and F71869E + Prefix: 'f71869' + Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space + Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website * Fintek F71882FG and F71883FG Prefix: 'f71882fg' Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space @@ -17,6 +21,10 @@ Supported chips: * Fintek F71889FG Prefix: 'f71889fg' Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space + Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website + * Fintek F71889ED + Prefix: 'f71889ed' + Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space Datasheet: Should become available on the Fintek website soon * Fintek F8000 Prefix: 'f8000' @@ -29,9 +37,9 @@ Author: Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com> Description ----------- -Fintek F718xxFG/F8000 Super I/O chips include complete hardware monitoring -capabilities. They can monitor up to 9 voltages (3 for the F8000), 4 fans and -3 temperature sensors. +Fintek F718xx/F8000 Super I/O chips include complete hardware monitoring +capabilities. They can monitor up to 9 voltages, 4 fans and 3 temperature +sensors. These chips also have fan controlling features, using either DC or PWM, in three different modes (one manual, two automatic). @@ -99,5 +107,5 @@ Writing an unsupported mode will result in an invalid parameter error. The fan speed is regulated to keep the temp the fan is mapped to between temp#_auto_point2_temp and temp#_auto_point3_temp. -Both of the automatic modes require that pwm1 corresponds to fan1, pwm2 to +All of the automatic modes require that pwm1 corresponds to fan1, pwm2 to fan2 and pwm3 to fan3. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/jc42 b/Documentation/hwmon/jc42 index 0e76ef12e4c6..a22ecf48f255 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/jc42 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/jc42 @@ -51,7 +51,8 @@ Supported chips: * JEDEC JC 42.4 compliant temperature sensor chips Prefix: 'jc42' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1f - Datasheet: - + Datasheet: + http://www.jedec.org/sites/default/files/docs/4_01_04R19.pdf Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> @@ -60,7 +61,11 @@ Author: Description ----------- -This driver implements support for JEDEC JC 42.4 compliant temperature sensors. +This driver implements support for JEDEC JC 42.4 compliant temperature sensors, +which are used on many DDR3 memory modules for mobile devices and servers. Some +systems use the sensor to prevent memory overheating by automatically throttling +the memory controller. + The driver auto-detects the chips listed above, but can be manually instantiated to support other JC 42.4 compliant chips. @@ -81,15 +86,19 @@ limits. The chip supports only a single register to configure the hysteresis, which applies to all limits. This register can be written by writing into temp1_crit_hyst. Other hysteresis attributes are read-only. +If the BIOS has configured the sensor for automatic temperature management, it +is likely that it has locked the registers, i.e., that the temperature limits +cannot be changed. + Sysfs entries ------------- temp1_input Temperature (RO) -temp1_min Minimum temperature (RW) -temp1_max Maximum temperature (RW) -temp1_crit Critical high temperature (RW) +temp1_min Minimum temperature (RO or RW) +temp1_max Maximum temperature (RO or RW) +temp1_crit Critical high temperature (RO or RW) -temp1_crit_hyst Critical hysteresis temperature (RW) +temp1_crit_hyst Critical hysteresis temperature (RO or RW) temp1_max_hyst Maximum hysteresis temperature (RO) temp1_min_alarm Temperature low alarm diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp b/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp index 6526eee525a6..d2b56a4fd1f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp @@ -9,6 +9,8 @@ Supported chips: Socket S1G3: Athlon II, Sempron, Turion II * AMD Family 11h processors: Socket S1G2: Athlon (X2), Sempron (X2), Turion X2 (Ultra) +* AMD Family 12h processors: "Llano" +* AMD Family 14h processors: "Brazos" (C/E/G-Series) Prefix: 'k10temp' Addresses scanned: PCI space @@ -17,10 +19,14 @@ Supported chips: http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/31116.pdf BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) for AMD Family 11h Processors: http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/41256.pdf + BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) for AMD Family 14h Models 00h-0Fh Processors: + http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/43170.pdf Revision Guide for AMD Family 10h Processors: http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/41322.pdf Revision Guide for AMD Family 11h Processors: http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/41788.pdf + Revision Guide for AMD Family 14h Models 00h-0Fh Processors: + http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/47534.pdf AMD Family 11h Processor Power and Thermal Data Sheet for Notebooks: http://support.amd.com/us/Processor_TechDocs/43373.pdf AMD Family 10h Server and Workstation Processor Power and Thermal Data Sheet: @@ -34,7 +40,7 @@ Description ----------- This driver permits reading of the internal temperature sensor of AMD -Family 10h and 11h processors. +Family 10h/11h/12h/14h processors. All these processors have a sensor, but on those for Socket F or AM2+, the sensor may return inconsistent values (erratum 319). The driver diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem b/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2ba5ed126858 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +Kernel driver lineage-pem +========================= + +Supported devices: + * Lineage Compact Power Line Power Entry Modules + Prefix: 'lineage-pem' + Addresses scanned: - + Documentation: + http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/CPLI2C.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver supports various Lineage Compact Power Line DC/DC and AC/DC +converters such as CP1800, CP2000AC, CP2000DC, CP2100DC, and others. + +Lineage CPL power entry modules are nominally PMBus compliant. However, most +standard PMBus commands are not supported. Specifically, all hardware monitoring +and status reporting commands are non-standard. For this reason, a standard +PMBus driver can not be used. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not probe for Lineage CPL devices, since there is no register +which can be safely used to identify the chip. You will have to instantiate +the devices explicitly. + +Example: the following will load the driver for a Lineage PEM at address 0x40 +on I2C bus #1: +$ modprobe lineage-pem +$ echo lineage-pem 0x40 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device + +All Lineage CPL power entry modules have a built-in I2C bus master selector +(PCA9541). To ensure device access, this driver should only be used as client +driver to the pca9541 I2C master selector driver. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +All Lineage CPL devices report output voltage and device temperature as well as +alarms for output voltage, temperature, input voltage, input current, input power, +and fan status. + +Input voltage, input current, input power, and fan speed measurement is only +supported on newer devices. The driver detects if those attributes are supported, +and only creates respective sysfs entries if they are. + +in1_input Output voltage (mV) +in1_min_alarm Output undervoltage alarm +in1_max_alarm Output overvoltage alarm +in1_crit Output voltage critical alarm + +in2_input Input voltage (mV, optional) +in2_alarm Input voltage alarm + +curr1_input Input current (mA, optional) +curr1_alarm Input overcurrent alarm + +power1_input Input power (uW, optional) +power1_alarm Input power alarm + +fan1_input Fan 1 speed (rpm, optional) +fan2_input Fan 2 speed (rpm, optional) +fan3_input Fan 3 speed (rpm, optional) + +temp1_input +temp1_max +temp1_crit +temp1_alarm +temp1_crit_alarm +temp1_fault diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 index 239258a63c81..7c49feaa79d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 @@ -26,6 +26,14 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'emc6d102' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/catalog/emc6d102.html + * SMSC EMC6D103 + Prefix: 'emc6d103' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e + Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/catalog/emc6d103.html + * SMSC EMC6D103S + Prefix: 'emc6d103s' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e + Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/catalog/emc6d103s.html Authors: Philip Pokorny <ppokorny@penguincomputing.com>, @@ -122,9 +130,11 @@ to be register compatible. The EMC6D100 offers all the features of the EMC6D101 plus additional voltage monitoring and system control features. Unfortunately it is not possible to distinguish between the package versions on register level so these additional voltage inputs may read -zero. The EMC6D102 features addtional ADC bits thus extending precision +zero. EMC6D102 and EMC6D103 feature additional ADC bits thus extending precision of voltage and temperature channels. +SMSC EMC6D103S is similar to EMC6D103, but does not support pwm#_auto_pwm_minctl +and temp#_auto_temp_off. Hardware Configurations ----------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm93 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm93 index 7a10616d0b44..f3b2ad2ceb01 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm93 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm93 @@ -6,6 +6,10 @@ Supported chips: Prefix 'lm93' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c-0x2e Datasheet: http://www.national.com/ds.cgi/LM/LM93.pdf + * National Semiconductor LM94 + Prefix 'lm94' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c-0x2e + Datasheet: http://www.national.com/ds.cgi/LM/LM94.pdf Authors: Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com> @@ -56,6 +60,9 @@ previous motherboard management ASICs and uses some of the LM85's features for dynamic Vccp monitoring and PROCHOT. It is designed to monitor a dual processor Xeon class motherboard with a minimum of external components. +LM94 is also supported in LM93 compatible mode. Extra sensors and features of +LM94 are not supported. + User Interface -------------- diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4151 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4151 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..43c667e6677a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4151 @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +Kernel driver ltc4151 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Linear Technology LTC4151 + Prefix: 'ltc4151' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: + http://www.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/4151fc.pdf + +Author: Per Dalen <per.dalen@appeartv.com> + + +Description +----------- + +The LTC4151 is a High Voltage I2C Current and Voltage Monitor. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not probe for LTC4151 devices, since there is no register +which can be safely used to identify the chip. You will have to instantiate +the devices explicitly. + +Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC4151 at address 0x6f +on I2C bus #0: +# modprobe ltc4151 +# echo ltc4151 0x6f > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-0/new_device + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +Voltage readings provided by this driver are reported as obtained from the ADIN +and VIN registers. + +Current reading provided by this driver is reported as obtained from the Current +Sense register. The reported value assumes that a 1 mOhm sense resistor is +installed. + +in1_input VDIN voltage (mV) + +in2_input ADIN voltage (mV) + +curr1_input SENSE current (mA) diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max6639 b/Documentation/hwmon/max6639 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dc49f8be7167 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max6639 @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +Kernel driver max6639 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Maxim MAX6639 + Prefix: 'max6639' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2e, 0x2f + Datasheet: http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6639.pdf + +Authors: + He Changqing <hechangqing@semptian.com> + Roland Stigge <stigge@antcom.de> + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the Maxim MAX6639. This chip is a 2-channel +temperature monitor with dual PWM fan speed controller. It can monitor its own +temperature and one external diode-connected transistor or two external +diode-connected transistors. + +The following device attributes are implemented via sysfs: + +Attribute R/W Contents +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +temp1_input R Temperature channel 1 input (0..150 C) +temp2_input R Temperature channel 2 input (0..150 C) +temp1_fault R Temperature channel 1 diode fault +temp2_fault R Temperature channel 2 diode fault +temp1_max RW Set THERM temperature for input 1 + (in C, see datasheet) +temp2_max RW Set THERM temperature for input 2 +temp1_crit RW Set ALERT temperature for input 1 +temp2_crit RW Set ALERT temperature for input 2 +temp1_emergency RW Set OT temperature for input 1 + (in C, see datasheet) +temp2_emergency RW Set OT temperature for input 2 +pwm1 RW Fan 1 target duty cycle (0..255) +pwm2 RW Fan 2 target duty cycle (0..255) +fan1_input R TACH1 fan tachometer input (in RPM) +fan2_input R TACH2 fan tachometer input (in RPM) +fan1_fault R Fan 1 fault +fan2_fault R Fan 2 fault +temp1_max_alarm R Alarm on THERM temperature on channel 1 +temp2_max_alarm R Alarm on THERM temperature on channel 2 +temp1_crit_alarm R Alarm on ALERT temperature on channel 1 +temp2_crit_alarm R Alarm on ALERT temperature on channel 2 +temp1_emergency_alarm R Alarm on OT temperature on channel 1 +temp2_emergency_alarm R Alarm on OT temperature on channel 2 diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f2d42e8bdf48 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus @@ -0,0 +1,215 @@ +Kernel driver pmbus +==================== + +Supported chips: + * Ericsson BMR45X series + DC/DC Converter + Prefixes: 'bmr450', 'bmr451', 'bmr453', 'bmr454' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: + http://archive.ericsson.net/service/internet/picov/get?DocNo=28701-EN/LZT146395 + * Linear Technology LTC2978 + Octal PMBus Power Supply Monitor and Controller + Prefix: 'ltc2978' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/2978fa.pdf + * Maxim MAX16064 + Quad Power-Supply Controller + Prefix: 'max16064' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16064.pdf + * Maxim MAX34440 + PMBus 6-Channel Power-Supply Manager + Prefixes: 'max34440' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX34440.pdf + * Maxim MAX34441 + PMBus 5-Channel Power-Supply Manager and Intelligent Fan Controller + Prefixes: 'max34441' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX34441.pdf + * Maxim MAX8688 + Digital Power-Supply Controller/Monitor + Prefix: 'max8688' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX8688.pdf + * Generic PMBus devices + Prefix: 'pmbus' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: n.a. + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver supports hardware montoring for various PMBus compliant devices. +It supports voltage, current, power, and temperature sensors as supported +by the device. + +Each monitored channel has its own high and low limits, plus a critical +limit. + +Fan support will be added in a later version of this driver. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not probe for PMBus devices, since there is no register +which can be safely used to identify the chip (The MFG_ID register is not +supported by all chips), and since there is no well defined address range for +PMBus devices. You will have to instantiate the devices explicitly. + +Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC2978 at address 0x60 +on I2C bus #1: +$ modprobe pmbus +$ echo ltc2978 0x60 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device + + +Platform data support +--------------------- + +Support for additional PMBus chips can be added by defining chip parameters in +a new chip specific driver file. For example, (untested) code to add support for +Emerson DS1200 power modules might look as follows. + +static struct pmbus_driver_info ds1200_info = { + .pages = 1, + /* Note: All other sensors are in linear mode */ + .direct[PSC_VOLTAGE_OUT] = true, + .direct[PSC_TEMPERATURE] = true, + .direct[PSC_CURRENT_OUT] = true, + .m[PSC_VOLTAGE_IN] = 1, + .b[PSC_VOLTAGE_IN] = 0, + .R[PSC_VOLTAGE_IN] = 3, + .m[PSC_VOLTAGE_OUT] = 1, + .b[PSC_VOLTAGE_OUT] = 0, + .R[PSC_VOLTAGE_OUT] = 3, + .m[PSC_TEMPERATURE] = 1, + .b[PSC_TEMPERATURE] = 0, + .R[PSC_TEMPERATURE] = 3, + .func[0] = PMBUS_HAVE_VIN | PMBUS_HAVE_IIN | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_INPUT + | PMBUS_HAVE_VOUT | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_VOUT + | PMBUS_HAVE_IOUT | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_IOUT + | PMBUS_HAVE_PIN | PMBUS_HAVE_POUT + | PMBUS_HAVE_TEMP | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_TEMP + | PMBUS_HAVE_FAN12 | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_FAN12, +}; + +static int ds1200_probe(struct i2c_client *client, + const struct i2c_device_id *id) +{ + return pmbus_do_probe(client, id, &ds1200_info); +} + +static int ds1200_remove(struct i2c_client *client) +{ + return pmbus_do_remove(client); +} + +static const struct i2c_device_id ds1200_id[] = { + {"ds1200", 0}, + {} +}; + +MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(i2c, ds1200_id); + +/* This is the driver that will be inserted */ +static struct i2c_driver ds1200_driver = { + .driver = { + .name = "ds1200", + }, + .probe = ds1200_probe, + .remove = ds1200_remove, + .id_table = ds1200_id, +}; + +static int __init ds1200_init(void) +{ + return i2c_add_driver(&ds1200_driver); +} + +static void __exit ds1200_exit(void) +{ + i2c_del_driver(&ds1200_driver); +} + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +When probing the chip, the driver identifies which PMBus registers are +supported, and determines available sensors from this information. +Attribute files only exist if respective sensors are suported by the chip. +Labels are provided to inform the user about the sensor associated with +a given sysfs entry. + +The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other +attributes are read-only. + +inX_input Measured voltage. From READ_VIN or READ_VOUT register. +inX_min Minumum Voltage. + From VIN_UV_WARN_LIMIT or VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register. +inX_max Maximum voltage. + From VIN_OV_WARN_LIMIT or VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register. +inX_lcrit Critical minumum Voltage. + From VIN_UV_FAULT_LIMIT or VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +inX_crit Critical maximum voltage. + From VIN_OV_FAULT_LIMIT or VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +inX_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status. +inX_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status. +inX_lcrit_alarm Voltage critical low alarm. + From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT status. +inX_crit_alarm Voltage critical high alarm. + From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT status. +inX_label "vin", "vcap", or "voutY" + +currX_input Measured current. From READ_IIN or READ_IOUT register. +currX_max Maximum current. + From IIN_OC_WARN_LIMIT or IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. +currX_lcrit Critical minumum output current. + From IOUT_UC_FAULT_LIMIT register. +currX_crit Critical maximum current. + From IIN_OC_FAULT_LIMIT or IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register. +currX_alarm Current high alarm. + From IIN_OC_WARNING or IOUT_OC_WARNING status. +currX_lcrit_alarm Output current critical low alarm. + From IOUT_UC_FAULT status. +currX_crit_alarm Current critical high alarm. + From IIN_OC_FAULT or IOUT_OC_FAULT status. +currX_label "iin" or "vinY" + +powerX_input Measured power. From READ_PIN or READ_POUT register. +powerX_cap Output power cap. From POUT_MAX register. +powerX_max Power limit. From PIN_OP_WARN_LIMIT or + POUT_OP_WARN_LIMIT register. +powerX_crit Critical output power limit. + From POUT_OP_FAULT_LIMIT register. +powerX_alarm Power high alarm. + From PIN_OP_WARNING or POUT_OP_WARNING status. +powerX_crit_alarm Output power critical high alarm. + From POUT_OP_FAULT status. +powerX_label "pin" or "poutY" + +tempX_input Measured tempererature. + From READ_TEMPERATURE_X register. +tempX_min Mimimum tempererature. From UT_WARN_LIMIT register. +tempX_max Maximum tempererature. From OT_WARN_LIMIT register. +tempX_lcrit Critical low tempererature. + From UT_FAULT_LIMIT register. +tempX_crit Critical high tempererature. + From OT_FAULT_LIMIT register. +tempX_min_alarm Chip temperature low alarm. Set by comparing + READ_TEMPERATURE_X with UT_WARN_LIMIT if + TEMP_UT_WARNING status is set. +tempX_max_alarm Chip temperature high alarm. Set by comparing + READ_TEMPERATURE_X with OT_WARN_LIMIT if + TEMP_OT_WARNING status is set. +tempX_lcrit_alarm Chip temperature critical low alarm. Set by comparing + READ_TEMPERATURE_X with UT_FAULT_LIMIT if + TEMP_UT_FAULT status is set. +tempX_crit_alarm Chip temperature critical high alarm. Set by comparing + READ_TEMPERATURE_X with OT_FAULT_LIMIT if + TEMP_OT_FAULT status is set. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sht21 b/Documentation/hwmon/sht21 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..db17fda45c3e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sht21 @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +Kernel driver sht21 +=================== + +Supported chips: + * Sensirion SHT21 + Prefix: 'sht21' + Addresses scanned: none + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Sensirion website + http://www.sensirion.com/en/pdf/product_information/Datasheet-humidity-sensor-SHT21.pdf + + * Sensirion SHT25 + Prefix: 'sht21' + Addresses scanned: none + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Sensirion website + http://www.sensirion.com/en/pdf/product_information/Datasheet-humidity-sensor-SHT25.pdf + +Author: + Urs Fleisch <urs.fleisch@sensirion.com> + +Description +----------- + +The SHT21 and SHT25 are humidity and temperature sensors in a DFN package of +only 3 x 3 mm footprint and 1.1 mm height. The difference between the two +devices is the higher level of precision of the SHT25 (1.8% relative humidity, +0.2 degree Celsius) compared with the SHT21 (2.0% relative humidity, +0.3 degree Celsius). + +The devices communicate with the I2C protocol. All sensors are set to the same +I2C address 0x40, so an entry with I2C_BOARD_INFO("sht21", 0x40) can be used +in the board setup code. + +sysfs-Interface +--------------- + +temp1_input - temperature input +humidity1_input - humidity input + +Notes +----- + +The driver uses the default resolution settings of 12 bit for humidity and 14 +bit for temperature, which results in typical measurement times of 22 ms for +humidity and 66 ms for temperature. To keep self heating below 0.1 degree +Celsius, the device should not be active for more than 10% of the time, +e.g. maximum two measurements per second at the given resolution. + +Different resolutions, the on-chip heater, using the CRC checksum and reading +the serial number are not supported yet. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface index 645699010551..83a698773ade 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface @@ -187,6 +187,17 @@ fan[1-*]_div Fan divisor. Note that this is actually an internal clock divisor, which affects the measurable speed range, not the read value. +fan[1-*]_pulses Number of tachometer pulses per fan revolution. + Integer value, typically between 1 and 4. + RW + This value is a characteristic of the fan connected to the + device's input, so it has to be set in accordance with the fan + model. + Should only be created if the chip has a register to configure + the number of pulses. In the absence of such a register (and + thus attribute) the value assumed by all devices is 2 pulses + per fan revolution. + fan[1-*]_target Desired fan speed Unit: revolution/min (RPM) @@ -384,10 +395,20 @@ curr[1-*]_min Current min value. Unit: milliampere RW +curr[1-*]_lcrit Current critical low value + Unit: milliampere + RW + +curr[1-*]_crit Current critical high value. + Unit: milliampere + RW + curr[1-*]_input Current input value Unit: milliampere RO +Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with currents. + ********* * Power * ********* @@ -450,13 +471,6 @@ power[1-*]_accuracy Accuracy of the power meter. Unit: Percent RO -power[1-*]_alarm 1 if the system is drawing more power than the - cap allows; 0 otherwise. A poll notification is - sent to this file when the power use exceeds the - cap. This file only appears if the cap is known - to be enforced by hardware. - RO - power[1-*]_cap If power use rises above this limit, the system should take action to reduce power use. A poll notification is sent to this file if the @@ -479,6 +493,20 @@ power[1-*]_cap_min Minimum cap that can be set. Unit: microWatt RO +power[1-*]_max Maximum power. + Unit: microWatt + RW + +power[1-*]_crit Critical maximum power. + If power rises to or above this limit, the + system is expected take drastic action to reduce + power consumption, such as a system shutdown or + a forced powerdown of some devices. + Unit: microWatt + RW + +Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with power readings. + ********** * Energy * ********** @@ -488,6 +516,15 @@ energy[1-*]_input Cumulative energy use RO +************ +* Humidity * +************ + +humidity[1-*]_input Humidity + Unit: milli-percent (per cent mille, pcm) + RO + + ********** * Alarms * ********** @@ -501,6 +538,7 @@ implementation. in[0-*]_alarm curr[1-*]_alarm +power[1-*]_alarm fan[1-*]_alarm temp[1-*]_alarm Channel alarm @@ -512,12 +550,20 @@ OR in[0-*]_min_alarm in[0-*]_max_alarm +in[0-*]_lcrit_alarm +in[0-*]_crit_alarm curr[1-*]_min_alarm curr[1-*]_max_alarm +curr[1-*]_lcrit_alarm +curr[1-*]_crit_alarm +power[1-*]_cap_alarm +power[1-*]_max_alarm +power[1-*]_crit_alarm fan[1-*]_min_alarm fan[1-*]_max_alarm temp[1-*]_min_alarm temp[1-*]_max_alarm +temp[1-*]_lcrit_alarm temp[1-*]_crit_alarm temp[1-*]_emergency_alarm Limit alarm diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf index 13d556112fc0..76ffef94ed75 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf @@ -5,13 +5,11 @@ Supported chips: * Winbond W83627EHF/EHG (ISA access ONLY) Prefix: 'w83627ehf' Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers - Datasheet: - http://www.nuvoton.com.tw/NR/rdonlyres/A6A258F0-F0C9-4F97-81C0-C4D29E7E943E/0/W83627EHF.pdf + Datasheet: not available * Winbond W83627DHG Prefix: 'w83627dhg' Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers - Datasheet: - http://www.nuvoton.com.tw/NR/rdonlyres/7885623D-A487-4CF9-A47F-30C5F73D6FE6/0/W83627DHG.pdf + Datasheet: not available * Winbond W83627DHG-P Prefix: 'w83627dhg' Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers @@ -24,6 +22,14 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'w83667hg' Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request + * Nuvoton NCT6775F/W83667HG-I + Prefix: 'nct6775' + Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers + Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request + * Nuvoton NCT6776F + Prefix: 'nct6776' + Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers + Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request Authors: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> @@ -36,19 +42,28 @@ Description ----------- This driver implements support for the Winbond W83627EHF, W83627EHG, -W83627DHG, W83627DHG-P, W83667HG and W83667HG-B super I/O chips. -We will refer to them collectively as Winbond chips. - -The chips implement three temperature sensors, five fan rotation -speed sensors, ten analog voltage sensors (only nine for the 627DHG), one -VID (6 pins for the 627EHF/EHG, 8 pins for the 627DHG and 667HG), alarms -with beep warnings (control unimplemented), and some automatic fan -regulation strategies (plus manual fan control mode). +W83627DHG, W83627DHG-P, W83667HG, W83667HG-B, W83667HG-I (NCT6775F), +and NCT6776F super I/O chips. We will refer to them collectively as +Winbond chips. + +The chips implement three temperature sensors (up to four for 667HG-B, and nine +for NCT6775F and NCT6776F), five fan rotation speed sensors, ten analog voltage +sensors (only nine for the 627DHG), one VID (6 pins for the 627EHF/EHG, 8 pins +for the 627DHG and 667HG), alarms with beep warnings (control unimplemented), +and some automatic fan regulation strategies (plus manual fan control mode). + +The temperature sensor sources on W82677HG-B, NCT6775F, and NCT6776F are +configurable. temp4 and higher attributes are only reported if its temperature +source differs from the temperature sources of the already reported temperature +sensors. The configured source for each of the temperature sensors is provided +in tempX_label. Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius and measurement resolution is 1 -degC for temp1 and 0.5 degC for temp2 and temp3. An alarm is triggered when -the temperature gets higher than high limit; it stays on until the temperature -falls below the hysteresis value. +degC for temp1 and and 0.5 degC for temp2 and temp3. For temp4 and higher, +resolution is 1 degC for W83667HG-B and 0.0 degC for NCT6775F and NCT6776F. +An alarm is triggered when the temperature gets higher than high limit; +it stays on until the temperature falls below the hysteresis value. +Alarms are only supported for temp1, temp2, and temp3. Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan @@ -80,7 +95,8 @@ prog -> pwm4 (not on 667HG and 667HG-B; the programmable setting is not name - this is a standard hwmon device entry. For the W83627EHF and W83627EHG, it is set to "w83627ehf", for the W83627DHG it is set to "w83627dhg", - and for the W83667HG it is set to "w83667hg". + for the W83667HG and W83667HG-B it is set to "w83667hg", for NCT6775F it + is set to "nct6775", and for NCT6776F it is set to "nct6776". pwm[1-4] - this file stores PWM duty cycle or DC value (fan speed) in range: 0 (stop) to 255 (full) @@ -90,6 +106,18 @@ pwm[1-4]_enable - this file controls mode of fan/temperature control: * 2 "Thermal Cruise" mode * 3 "Fan Speed Cruise" mode * 4 "Smart Fan III" mode + * 5 "Smart Fan IV" mode + + SmartFan III mode is not supported on NCT6776F. + + SmartFan IV mode is configurable only if it was configured at system + startup, and is only supported for W83677HG-B, NCT6775F, and NCT6776F. + SmartFan IV operational parameters can not be configured at this time, + and the various pwm attributes are not used in SmartFan IV mode. + The attributes can be written to, which is useful if you plan to + configure the system for a different pwm mode. However, the information + returned when reading pwm attributes is unrelated to SmartFan IV + operation. pwm[1-4]_mode - controls if output is PWM or DC level * 0 DC output (0 - 12v) diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf index fb145e5e722a..8432e1118173 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf @@ -91,3 +91,25 @@ isaset -y -f 0x2e 0xaa The above sequence assumes a Super-I/O config space at 0x2e/0x2f, but 0x4e/0x4f is also possible. + +Voltage pin mapping +------------------- + +Here is a summary of the voltage pin mapping for the W83627THF. This +can be useful to convert data provided by board manufacturers into +working libsensors configuration statements. + + W83627THF | + Pin | Name | Register | Sysfs attribute +----------------------------------------------------- + 100 | CPUVCORE | 20h | in0 + 99 | VIN0 | 21h | in1 + 98 | VIN1 | 22h | in2 + 97 | VIN2 | 24h | in4 + 114 | AVCC | 23h | in3 + 61 | 5VSB | 50h (bank 5) | in7 + 74 | VBAT | 51h (bank 5) | in8 + +For other supported devices, you'll have to take the hard path and +look up the information in the datasheet yourself (and then add it +to this document please.) diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83793 b/Documentation/hwmon/w83793 index 51171a83165b..6cc5f639b721 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83793 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83793 @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ This driver implements support for Winbond W83793G/W83793R chips. * Chassis If the case open alarm triggers, it will stay in this state unless cleared - by any write to the sysfs file "chassis". + by writing 0 to the sysfs file "intrusion0_alarm". * VID and VRM The VRM version is detected automatically, don't modify the it unless you diff --git a/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt b/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7dcd1a4e726c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt @@ -0,0 +1,293 @@ +Hardware Spinlock Framework + +1. Introduction + +Hardware spinlock modules provide hardware assistance for synchronization +and mutual exclusion between heterogeneous processors and those not operating +under a single, shared operating system. + +For example, OMAP4 has dual Cortex-A9, dual Cortex-M3 and a C64x+ DSP, +each of which is running a different Operating System (the master, A9, +is usually running Linux and the slave processors, the M3 and the DSP, +are running some flavor of RTOS). + +A generic hwspinlock framework allows platform-independent drivers to use +the hwspinlock device in order to access data structures that are shared +between remote processors, that otherwise have no alternative mechanism +to accomplish synchronization and mutual exclusion operations. + +This is necessary, for example, for Inter-processor communications: +on OMAP4, cpu-intensive multimedia tasks are offloaded by the host to the +remote M3 and/or C64x+ slave processors (by an IPC subsystem called Syslink). + +To achieve fast message-based communications, a minimal kernel support +is needed to deliver messages arriving from a remote processor to the +appropriate user process. + +This communication is based on simple data structures that is shared between +the remote processors, and access to it is synchronized using the hwspinlock +module (remote processor directly places new messages in this shared data +structure). + +A common hwspinlock interface makes it possible to have generic, platform- +independent, drivers. + +2. User API + + struct hwspinlock *hwspin_lock_request(void); + - dynamically assign an hwspinlock and return its address, or NULL + in case an unused hwspinlock isn't available. Users of this + API will usually want to communicate the lock's id to the remote core + before it can be used to achieve synchronization. + Can be called from an atomic context (this function will not sleep) but + not from within interrupt context. + + struct hwspinlock *hwspin_lock_request_specific(unsigned int id); + - assign a specific hwspinlock id and return its address, or NULL + if that hwspinlock is already in use. Usually board code will + be calling this function in order to reserve specific hwspinlock + ids for predefined purposes. + Can be called from an atomic context (this function will not sleep) but + not from within interrupt context. + + int hwspin_lock_free(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); + - free a previously-assigned hwspinlock; returns 0 on success, or an + appropriate error code on failure (e.g. -EINVAL if the hwspinlock + is already free). + Can be called from an atomic context (this function will not sleep) but + not from within interrupt context. + + int hwspin_lock_timeout(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned int timeout); + - lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock with a timeout limit (specified in + msecs). If the hwspinlock is already taken, the function will busy loop + waiting for it to be released, but give up when the timeout elapses. + Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled so + the caller must not sleep, and is advised to release the hwspinlock as + soon as possible, in order to minimize remote cores polling on the + hardware interconnect. + Returns 0 when successful and an appropriate error code otherwise (most + notably -ETIMEDOUT if the hwspinlock is still busy after timeout msecs). + The function will never sleep. + + int hwspin_lock_timeout_irq(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned int timeout); + - lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock with a timeout limit (specified in + msecs). If the hwspinlock is already taken, the function will busy loop + waiting for it to be released, but give up when the timeout elapses. + Upon a successful return from this function, preemption and the local + interrupts are disabled, so the caller must not sleep, and is advised to + release the hwspinlock as soon as possible. + Returns 0 when successful and an appropriate error code otherwise (most + notably -ETIMEDOUT if the hwspinlock is still busy after timeout msecs). + The function will never sleep. + + int hwspin_lock_timeout_irqsave(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned int to, + unsigned long *flags); + - lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock with a timeout limit (specified in + msecs). If the hwspinlock is already taken, the function will busy loop + waiting for it to be released, but give up when the timeout elapses. + Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled, + local interrupts are disabled and their previous state is saved at the + given flags placeholder. The caller must not sleep, and is advised to + release the hwspinlock as soon as possible. + Returns 0 when successful and an appropriate error code otherwise (most + notably -ETIMEDOUT if the hwspinlock is still busy after timeout msecs). + The function will never sleep. + + int hwspin_trylock(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); + - attempt to lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock, but immediately fail if + it is already taken. + Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled so + caller must not sleep, and is advised to release the hwspinlock as soon as + possible, in order to minimize remote cores polling on the hardware + interconnect. + Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise (most + notably -EBUSY if the hwspinlock was already taken). + The function will never sleep. + + int hwspin_trylock_irq(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); + - attempt to lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock, but immediately fail if + it is already taken. + Upon a successful return from this function, preemption and the local + interrupts are disabled so caller must not sleep, and is advised to + release the hwspinlock as soon as possible. + Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise (most + notably -EBUSY if the hwspinlock was already taken). + The function will never sleep. + + int hwspin_trylock_irqsave(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned long *flags); + - attempt to lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock, but immediately fail if + it is already taken. + Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled, + the local interrupts are disabled and their previous state is saved + at the given flags placeholder. The caller must not sleep, and is advised + to release the hwspinlock as soon as possible. + Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise (most + notably -EBUSY if the hwspinlock was already taken). + The function will never sleep. + + void hwspin_unlock(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); + - unlock a previously-locked hwspinlock. Always succeed, and can be called + from any context (the function never sleeps). Note: code should _never_ + unlock an hwspinlock which is already unlocked (there is no protection + against this). + + void hwspin_unlock_irq(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); + - unlock a previously-locked hwspinlock and enable local interrupts. + The caller should _never_ unlock an hwspinlock which is already unlocked. + Doing so is considered a bug (there is no protection against this). + Upon a successful return from this function, preemption and local + interrupts are enabled. This function will never sleep. + + void + hwspin_unlock_irqrestore(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned long *flags); + - unlock a previously-locked hwspinlock. + The caller should _never_ unlock an hwspinlock which is already unlocked. + Doing so is considered a bug (there is no protection against this). + Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is reenabled, + and the state of the local interrupts is restored to the state saved at + the given flags. This function will never sleep. + + int hwspin_lock_get_id(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); + - retrieve id number of a given hwspinlock. This is needed when an + hwspinlock is dynamically assigned: before it can be used to achieve + mutual exclusion with a remote cpu, the id number should be communicated + to the remote task with which we want to synchronize. + Returns the hwspinlock id number, or -EINVAL if hwlock is null. + +3. Typical usage + +#include <linux/hwspinlock.h> +#include <linux/err.h> + +int hwspinlock_example1(void) +{ + struct hwspinlock *hwlock; + int ret; + + /* dynamically assign a hwspinlock */ + hwlock = hwspin_lock_request(); + if (!hwlock) + ... + + id = hwspin_lock_get_id(hwlock); + /* probably need to communicate id to a remote processor now */ + + /* take the lock, spin for 1 sec if it's already taken */ + ret = hwspin_lock_timeout(hwlock, 1000); + if (ret) + ... + + /* + * we took the lock, do our thing now, but do NOT sleep + */ + + /* release the lock */ + hwspin_unlock(hwlock); + + /* free the lock */ + ret = hwspin_lock_free(hwlock); + if (ret) + ... + + return ret; +} + +int hwspinlock_example2(void) +{ + struct hwspinlock *hwlock; + int ret; + + /* + * assign a specific hwspinlock id - this should be called early + * by board init code. + */ + hwlock = hwspin_lock_request_specific(PREDEFINED_LOCK_ID); + if (!hwlock) + ... + + /* try to take it, but don't spin on it */ + ret = hwspin_trylock(hwlock); + if (!ret) { + pr_info("lock is already taken\n"); + return -EBUSY; + } + + /* + * we took the lock, do our thing now, but do NOT sleep + */ + + /* release the lock */ + hwspin_unlock(hwlock); + + /* free the lock */ + ret = hwspin_lock_free(hwlock); + if (ret) + ... + + return ret; +} + + +4. API for implementors + + int hwspin_lock_register(struct hwspinlock *hwlock); + - to be called from the underlying platform-specific implementation, in + order to register a new hwspinlock instance. Can be called from an atomic + context (this function will not sleep) but not from within interrupt + context. Returns 0 on success, or appropriate error code on failure. + + struct hwspinlock *hwspin_lock_unregister(unsigned int id); + - to be called from the underlying vendor-specific implementation, in order + to unregister an existing (and unused) hwspinlock instance. + Can be called from an atomic context (will not sleep) but not from + within interrupt context. + Returns the address of hwspinlock on success, or NULL on error (e.g. + if the hwspinlock is sill in use). + +5. struct hwspinlock + +This struct represents an hwspinlock instance. It is registered by the +underlying hwspinlock implementation using the hwspin_lock_register() API. + +/** + * struct hwspinlock - vendor-specific hwspinlock implementation + * + * @dev: underlying device, will be used with runtime PM api + * @ops: vendor-specific hwspinlock handlers + * @id: a global, unique, system-wide, index of the lock. + * @lock: initialized and used by hwspinlock core + * @owner: underlying implementation module, used to maintain module ref count + */ +struct hwspinlock { + struct device *dev; + const struct hwspinlock_ops *ops; + int id; + spinlock_t lock; + struct module *owner; +}; + +The underlying implementation is responsible to assign the dev, ops, id and +owner members. The lock member, OTOH, is initialized and used by the hwspinlock +core. + +6. Implementation callbacks + +There are three possible callbacks defined in 'struct hwspinlock_ops': + +struct hwspinlock_ops { + int (*trylock)(struct hwspinlock *lock); + void (*unlock)(struct hwspinlock *lock); + void (*relax)(struct hwspinlock *lock); +}; + +The first two callbacks are mandatory: + +The ->trylock() callback should make a single attempt to take the lock, and +return 0 on failure and 1 on success. This callback may _not_ sleep. + +The ->unlock() callback releases the lock. It always succeed, and it, too, +may _not_ sleep. + +The ->relax() callback is optional. It is called by hwspinlock core while +spinning on a lock, and can be used by the underlying implementation to force +a delay between two successive invocations of ->trylock(). It may _not_ sleep. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 index 93fe76e56522..6df69765ccb7 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 @@ -16,8 +16,9 @@ Supported adapters: * Intel EP80579 (Tolapai) * Intel 82801JI (ICH10) * Intel 5/3400 Series (PCH) - * Intel Cougar Point (PCH) + * Intel 6 Series (PCH) * Intel Patsburg (PCH) + * Intel DH89xxCC (PCH) Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website On Intel Patsburg and later chipsets, both the normal host SMBus controller diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices b/Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices index 87da405a8597..9edb75d8c9b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices +++ b/Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ static int __devinit usb_hcd_pnx4008_probe(struct platform_device *pdev) (...) i2c_adap = i2c_get_adapter(2); memset(&i2c_info, 0, sizeof(struct i2c_board_info)); - strlcpy(i2c_info.name, "isp1301_pnx", I2C_NAME_SIZE); + strlcpy(i2c_info.type, "isp1301_pnx", I2C_NAME_SIZE); isp1301_i2c_client = i2c_new_probed_device(i2c_adap, &i2c_info, normal_i2c, NULL); i2c_put_adapter(i2c_adap); diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/muxes/gpio-i2cmux b/Documentation/i2c/muxes/gpio-i2cmux new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..811cd78d4cdc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/muxes/gpio-i2cmux @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +Kernel driver gpio-i2cmux + +Author: Peter Korsgaard <peter.korsgaard@barco.com> + +Description +----------- + +gpio-i2cmux is an i2c mux driver providing access to I2C bus segments +from a master I2C bus and a hardware MUX controlled through GPIO pins. + +E.G.: + + ---------- ---------- Bus segment 1 - - - - - + | | SCL/SDA | |-------------- | | + | |------------| | + | | | | Bus segment 2 | | + | Linux | GPIO 1..N | MUX |--------------- Devices + | |------------| | | | + | | | | Bus segment M + | | | |---------------| | + ---------- ---------- - - - - - + +SCL/SDA of the master I2C bus is multiplexed to bus segment 1..M +according to the settings of the GPIO pins 1..N. + +Usage +----- + +gpio-i2cmux uses the platform bus, so you need to provide a struct +platform_device with the platform_data pointing to a struct +gpio_i2cmux_platform_data with the I2C adapter number of the master +bus, the number of bus segments to create and the GPIO pins used +to control it. See include/linux/gpio-i2cmux.h for details. + +E.G. something like this for a MUX providing 4 bus segments +controlled through 3 GPIO pins: + +#include <linux/gpio-i2cmux.h> +#include <linux/platform_device.h> + +static const unsigned myboard_gpiomux_gpios[] = { + AT91_PIN_PC26, AT91_PIN_PC25, AT91_PIN_PC24 +}; + +static const unsigned myboard_gpiomux_values[] = { + 0, 1, 2, 3 +}; + +static struct gpio_i2cmux_platform_data myboard_i2cmux_data = { + .parent = 1, + .base_nr = 2, /* optional */ + .values = myboard_gpiomux_values, + .n_values = ARRAY_SIZE(myboard_gpiomux_values), + .gpios = myboard_gpiomux_gpios, + .n_gpios = ARRAY_SIZE(myboard_gpiomux_gpios), + .idle = 4, /* optional */ +}; + +static struct platform_device myboard_i2cmux = { + .name = "gpio-i2cmux", + .id = 0, + .dev = { + .platform_data = &myboard_i2cmux_data, + }, +}; diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients b/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients index 9a45f9bb6a25..d6991625c407 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients +++ b/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ static int example_attach(struct i2c_adapter *adap, int addr, int kind) return 0; } -static int __devexit example_detach(struct i2c_client *client) +static int example_detach(struct i2c_client *client) { struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client); @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { .name = "example", }, .attach_adapter = example_attach_adapter, - .detach_client = __devexit_p(example_detach), + .detach_client = example_detach, .suspend = example_suspend, .resume = example_resume, }; @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Updating the client The new style binding model will check against a list of supported devices and their associated address supplied by the code registering the busses. This means that the driver .attach_adapter and -.detach_adapter methods can be removed, along with the addr_data, +.detach_client methods can be removed, along with the addr_data, as follows: - static struct i2c_driver example_driver; @@ -110,14 +110,14 @@ as follows: static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { - .attach_adapter = example_attach_adapter, -- .detach_client = __devexit_p(example_detach), +- .detach_client = example_detach, } Add the probe and remove methods to the i2c_driver, as so: static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { + .probe = example_probe, -+ .remove = __devexit_p(example_remove), ++ .remove = example_remove, } Change the example_attach method to accept the new parameters @@ -199,8 +199,8 @@ to delete the i2c_detach_client call. It is possible that you can also remove the ret variable as it is not not needed for any of the core functions. -- static int __devexit example_detach(struct i2c_client *client) -+ static int __devexit example_remove(struct i2c_client *client) +- static int example_detach(struct i2c_client *client) ++ static int example_remove(struct i2c_client *client) { struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client); @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ static int example_probe(struct i2c_client *client, return 0; } -static int __devexit example_remove(struct i2c_client *client) +static int example_remove(struct i2c_client *client) { struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client); @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { }, .id_table = example_idtable, .probe = example_probe, - .remove = __devexit_p(example_remove), + .remove = example_remove, .suspend = example_suspend, .resume = example_resume, }; diff --git a/Documentation/input/cma3000_d0x.txt b/Documentation/input/cma3000_d0x.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..29d088db4afd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/input/cma3000_d0x.txt @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +Kernel driver for CMA3000-D0x +============================ + +Supported chips: +* VTI CMA3000-D0x +Datasheet: + CMA3000-D0X Product Family Specification 8281000A.02.pdf + <http://www.vti.fi/en/> + +Author: Hemanth V <hemanthv@ti.com> + + +Description +----------- +CMA3000 Tri-axis accelerometer supports Motion detect, Measurement and +Free fall modes. + +Motion Detect Mode: Its the low power mode where interrupts are generated only +when motion exceeds the defined thresholds. + +Measurement Mode: This mode is used to read the acceleration data on X,Y,Z +axis and supports 400, 100, 40 Hz sample frequency. + +Free fall Mode: This mode is intended to save system resources. + +Threshold values: Chip supports defining threshold values for above modes +which includes time and g value. Refer product specifications for more details. + +CMA3000 chip supports mutually exclusive I2C and SPI interfaces for +communication, currently the driver supports I2C based communication only. +Initial configuration for bus mode is set in non volatile memory and can later +be modified through bus interface command. + +Driver reports acceleration data through input subsystem. It generates ABS_MISC +event with value 1 when free fall is detected. + +Platform data need to be configured for initial default values. + +Platform Data +------------- +fuzz_x: Noise on X Axis + +fuzz_y: Noise on Y Axis + +fuzz_z: Noise on Z Axis + +g_range: G range in milli g i.e 2000 or 8000 + +mode: Default Operating mode + +mdthr: Motion detect g range threshold value + +mdfftmr: Motion detect and free fall time threshold value + +ffthr: Free fall g range threshold value + +Input Interface +-------------- +Input driver version is 1.0.0 +Input device ID: bus 0x18 vendor 0x0 product 0x0 version 0x0 +Input device name: "cma3000-accelerometer" +Supported events: + Event type 0 (Sync) + Event type 3 (Absolute) + Event code 0 (X) + Value 47 + Min -8000 + Max 8000 + Fuzz 200 + Event code 1 (Y) + Value -28 + Min -8000 + Max 8000 + Fuzz 200 + Event code 2 (Z) + Value 905 + Min -8000 + Max 8000 + Fuzz 200 + Event code 40 (Misc) + Value 0 + Min 0 + Max 1 + Event type 4 (Misc) + + +Register/Platform parameters Description +---------------------------------------- + +mode: + 0: power down mode + 1: 100 Hz Measurement mode + 2: 400 Hz Measurement mode + 3: 40 Hz Measurement mode + 4: Motion Detect mode (default) + 5: 100 Hz Free fall mode + 6: 40 Hz Free fall mode + 7: Power off mode + +grange: + 2000: 2000 mg or 2G Range + 8000: 8000 mg or 8G Range + +mdthr: + X: X * 71mg (8G Range) + X: X * 18mg (2G Range) + +mdfftmr: + X: (X & 0x70) * 100 ms (MDTMR) + (X & 0x0F) * 2.5 ms (FFTMR 400 Hz) + (X & 0x0F) * 10 ms (FFTMR 100 Hz) + +ffthr: + X: (X >> 2) * 18mg (2G Range) + X: (X & 0x0F) * 71 mg (8G Range) diff --git a/Documentation/input/ff.txt b/Documentation/input/ff.txt index ded4d5f53109..b3867bf49f8f 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/ff.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/ff.txt @@ -49,7 +49,9 @@ This information is subject to change. #include <linux/input.h> #include <sys/ioctl.h> -unsigned long features[1 + FF_MAX/sizeof(unsigned long)]; +#define BITS_TO_LONGS(x) \ + (((x) + 8 * sizeof (unsigned long) - 1) / (8 * sizeof (unsigned long))) +unsigned long features[BITS_TO_LONGS(FF_CNT)]; int ioctl(int file_descriptor, int request, unsigned long *features); "request" must be EVIOCGBIT(EV_FF, size of features array in bytes ) diff --git a/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt b/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt index bdcba154b83e..71536e78406f 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Multi-touch (MT) Protocol ------------------------- - Copyright (C) 2009 Henrik Rydberg <rydberg@euromail.se> + Copyright (C) 2009-2010 Henrik Rydberg <rydberg@euromail.se> Introduction @@ -161,19 +161,24 @@ against the glass. The inner region will increase, and in general, the ratio ABS_MT_TOUCH_MAJOR / ABS_MT_WIDTH_MAJOR, which is always smaller than unity, is related to the contact pressure. For pressure-based devices, ABS_MT_PRESSURE may be used to provide the pressure on the contact area -instead. +instead. Devices capable of contact hovering can use ABS_MT_DISTANCE to +indicate the distance between the contact and the surface. In addition to the MAJOR parameters, the oval shape of the contact can be described by adding the MINOR parameters, such that MAJOR and MINOR are the major and minor axis of an ellipse. Finally, the orientation of the oval shape can be describe with the ORIENTATION parameter. +For type A devices, further specification of the touch shape is possible +via ABS_MT_BLOB_ID. + The ABS_MT_TOOL_TYPE may be used to specify whether the touching tool is a -contact or a pen or something else. Devices with more granular information -may specify general shapes as blobs, i.e., as a sequence of rectangular -shapes grouped together by an ABS_MT_BLOB_ID. Finally, for the few devices -that currently support it, the ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID event may be used to -report contact tracking from hardware [5]. +finger or a pen or something else. Finally, the ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID event +may be used to track identified contacts over time [5]. + +In the type B protocol, ABS_MT_TOOL_TYPE and ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID are +implicitly handled by input core; drivers should instead call +input_mt_report_slot_state(). Event Semantics @@ -213,6 +218,12 @@ The pressure, in arbitrary units, on the contact area. May be used instead of TOUCH and WIDTH for pressure-based devices or any device with a spatial signal intensity distribution. +ABS_MT_DISTANCE + +The distance, in surface units, between the contact and the surface. Zero +distance means the contact is touching the surface. A positive number means +the contact is hovering above the surface. + ABS_MT_ORIENTATION The orientation of the ellipse. The value should describe a signed quarter @@ -240,21 +251,24 @@ ABS_MT_TOOL_TYPE The type of approaching tool. A lot of kernel drivers cannot distinguish between different tool types, such as a finger or a pen. In such cases, the event should be omitted. The protocol currently supports MT_TOOL_FINGER and -MT_TOOL_PEN [2]. +MT_TOOL_PEN [2]. For type B devices, this event is handled by input core; +drivers should instead use input_mt_report_slot_state(). ABS_MT_BLOB_ID The BLOB_ID groups several packets together into one arbitrarily shaped -contact. This is a low-level anonymous grouping for type A devices, and +contact. The sequence of points forms a polygon which defines the shape of +the contact. This is a low-level anonymous grouping for type A devices, and should not be confused with the high-level trackingID [5]. Most type A devices do not have blob capability, so drivers can safely omit this event. ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID The TRACKING_ID identifies an initiated contact throughout its life cycle -[5]. This event is mandatory for type B devices. The value range of the -TRACKING_ID should be large enough to ensure unique identification of a -contact maintained over an extended period of time. +[5]. The value range of the TRACKING_ID should be large enough to ensure +unique identification of a contact maintained over an extended period of +time. For type B devices, this event is handled by input core; drivers +should instead use input_mt_report_slot_state(). Event Computation @@ -301,18 +315,19 @@ and with ORIENTATION, one can detect twisting of fingers. Notes ----- -In order to stay compatible with existing applications, the data -reported in a finger packet must not be recognized as single-touch -events. In addition, all finger data must bypass input filtering, -since subsequent events of the same type refer to different fingers. +In order to stay compatible with existing applications, the data reported +in a finger packet must not be recognized as single-touch events. + +For type A devices, all finger data bypasses input filtering, since +subsequent events of the same type refer to different fingers. -The first kernel driver to utilize the MT protocol is the bcm5974 driver, -where examples can be found. +For example usage of the type A protocol, see the bcm5974 driver. For +example usage of the type B protocol, see the hid-egalax driver. [1] With the extension ABS_MT_APPROACH_X and ABS_MT_APPROACH_Y, the difference between the contact position and the approaching tool position could be used to derive tilt. [2] The list can of course be extended. -[3] Multitouch X driver project: http://bitmath.org/code/multitouch/. +[3] The mtdev project: http://bitmath.org/code/mtdev/. [4] See the section on event computation. [5] See the section on finger tracking. diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt index 63ffd78824d8..e68543f767d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt @@ -133,6 +133,7 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 'H' C0-DF net/bluetooth/hidp/hidp.h conflict! 'H' C0-DF net/bluetooth/cmtp/cmtp.h conflict! 'H' C0-DF net/bluetooth/bnep/bnep.h conflict! +'H' F1 linux/hid-roccat.h <mailto:erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> 'I' all linux/isdn.h conflict! 'I' 00-0F drivers/isdn/divert/isdn_divert.h conflict! 'I' 40-4F linux/mISDNif.h conflict! @@ -155,7 +156,6 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 'Q' all linux/soundcard.h 'R' 00-1F linux/random.h conflict! 'R' 01 linux/rfkill.h conflict! -'R' 01-0F media/rds.h conflict! 'R' C0-DF net/bluetooth/rfcomm.h 'S' all linux/cdrom.h conflict! 'S' 80-81 scsi/scsi_ioctl.h conflict! @@ -194,7 +194,6 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments <http://lrcwww.epfl.ch/> 'b' 00-FF conflict! bit3 vme host bridge <mailto:natalia@nikhefk.nikhef.nl> -'b' 00-0F media/bt819.h conflict! 'c' all linux/cm4000_cs.h conflict! 'c' 00-7F linux/comstats.h conflict! 'c' 00-7F linux/coda.h conflict! @@ -249,7 +248,7 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 'p' 40-7F linux/nvram.h 'p' 80-9F linux/ppdev.h user-space parport <mailto:tim@cyberelk.net> -'p' A1-A4 linux/pps.h LinuxPPS +'p' A1-A5 linux/pps.h LinuxPPS <mailto:giometti@linux.it> 'q' 00-1F linux/serio.h 'q' 80-FF linux/telephony.h Internet PhoneJACK, Internet LineJACK @@ -260,14 +259,11 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 't' 80-8F linux/isdn_ppp.h 't' 90 linux/toshiba.h 'u' 00-1F linux/smb_fs.h gone -'v' all linux/videodev.h conflict! 'v' 00-1F linux/ext2_fs.h conflict! 'v' 00-1F linux/fs.h conflict! 'v' 00-0F linux/sonypi.h conflict! -'v' C0-CF drivers/media/video/ov511.h conflict! 'v' C0-DF media/pwc-ioctl.h conflict! 'v' C0-FF linux/meye.h conflict! -'v' C0-CF drivers/media/video/zoran/zoran.h conflict! 'v' D0-DF drivers/media/video/cpia2/cpia2dev.h conflict! 'w' all CERN SCI driver 'y' 00-1F packet based user level communications @@ -278,7 +274,6 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments <mailto:oe@port.de> 'z' 10-4F drivers/s390/crypto/zcrypt_api.h conflict! 0x80 00-1F linux/fb.h -0x88 00-3F media/ovcamchip.h 0x89 00-06 arch/x86/include/asm/sockios.h 0x89 0B-DF linux/sockios.h 0x89 E0-EF linux/sockios.h SIOCPROTOPRIVATE range diff --git a/Documentation/iostats.txt b/Documentation/iostats.txt index 59a69ec67c40..f6dece5b7014 100644 --- a/Documentation/iostats.txt +++ b/Documentation/iostats.txt @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Field 9 -- # of I/Os currently in progress The only field that should go to zero. Incremented as requests are given to appropriate struct request_queue and decremented as they finish. Field 10 -- # of milliseconds spent doing I/Os - This field is increases so long as field 9 is nonzero. + This field increases so long as field 9 is nonzero. Field 11 -- weighted # of milliseconds spent doing I/Os This field is incremented at each I/O start, I/O completion, I/O merge, or read of these stats by the number of I/Os in progress diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt index 1e5165aa9e4e..8f63b224ab09 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt @@ -73,6 +73,14 @@ Specify the output directory when building the kernel. The output directory can also be specified using "O=...". Setting "O=..." takes precedence over KBUILD_OUTPUT. +KBUILD_DEBARCH +-------------------------------------------------- +For the deb-pkg target, allows overriding the normal heuristics deployed by +deb-pkg. Normally deb-pkg attempts to guess the right architecture based on +the UTS_MACHINE variable, and on some architectures also the kernel config. +The value of KBUILD_DEBARCH is assumed (not checked) to be a valid Debian +architecture. + ARCH -------------------------------------------------- Set ARCH to the architecture to be built. @@ -138,7 +146,7 @@ INSTALL_MOD_STRIP INSTALL_MOD_STRIP, if defined, will cause modules to be stripped after they are installed. If INSTALL_MOD_STRIP is '1', then the default option --strip-debug will be used. Otherwise, -INSTALL_MOD_STRIP will used as the options to the strip command. +INSTALL_MOD_STRIP value will be used as the options to the strip command. INSTALL_FW_PATH -------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt index 2fe93ca7c77c..b507d61fd41c 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt @@ -112,7 +112,6 @@ applicable everywhere (see syntax). (no prompts anywhere) and for symbols with no dependencies. That will limit the usefulness but on the other hand avoid the illegal configurations all over. - kconfig should one day warn about such things. - numerical ranges: "range" <symbol> <symbol> ["if" <expr>] This allows to limit the range of possible input values for int @@ -268,7 +267,7 @@ separate list of options. choices: - "choice" + "choice" [symbol] <choice options> <choice block> "endchoice" @@ -282,6 +281,10 @@ single driver can be compiled/loaded into the kernel, but all drivers can be compiled as modules. A choice accepts another option "optional", which allows to set the choice to 'n' and no entry needs to be selected. +If no [symbol] is associated with a choice, then you can not have multiple +definitions of that choice. If a [symbol] is associated to the choice, +then you may define the same choice (ie. with the same entries) in another +place. comment: diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt index 0ef00bd6e54d..5d145bb443c0 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt @@ -1136,6 +1136,21 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly): resulting in the target file being recompiled for no obvious reason. + dtc + Create flattend device tree blob object suitable for linking + into vmlinux. Device tree blobs linked into vmlinux are placed + in an init section in the image. Platform code *must* copy the + blob to non-init memory prior to calling unflatten_device_tree(). + + Example: + #arch/x86/platform/ce4100/Makefile + clean-files := *dtb.S + + DTC_FLAGS := -p 1024 + obj-y += foo.dtb.o + + $(obj)/%.dtb: $(src)/%.dts + $(call cmd,dtc) --- 6.7 Custom kbuild commands @@ -1310,7 +1325,8 @@ The top Makefile exports the following variables: If this variable is specified, will cause modules to be stripped after they are installed. If INSTALL_MOD_STRIP is '1', then the default option --strip-debug will be used. Otherwise, - INSTALL_MOD_STRIP will used as the option(s) to the strip command. + INSTALL_MOD_STRIP value will be used as the option(s) to the strip + command. === 9 Makefile language diff --git a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt index cab61d842259..7a9e0b4b2903 100644 --- a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt +++ b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt @@ -65,18 +65,21 @@ Install kexec-tools 2) Download the kexec-tools user-space package from the following URL: -http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/kexec-tools.tar.gz +http://kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/kexec/kexec-tools.tar.gz This is a symlink to the latest version. The latest kexec-tools git tree is available at: -git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools.git -or -http://www.kernel.org/git/?p=linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools.git +git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/kernel/kexec/kexec-tools.git +and +http://www.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/kernel/kexec/kexec-tools.git + +There is also a gitweb interface available at +http://www.kernel.org/git/?p=utils/kernel/kexec/kexec-tools.git More information about kexec-tools can be found at -http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/README.html +http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/kexec/README.html 3) Unpack the tarball with the tar command, as follows: @@ -439,6 +442,6 @@ To Do Contact ======= -Vivek Goyal (vgoyal@in.ibm.com) +Vivek Goyal (vgoyal@redhat.com) Maneesh Soni (maneesh@in.ibm.com) diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt b/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt index 715eaaf1519d..9a8674629a07 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt @@ -537,7 +537,7 @@ Notes: Further information in http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/linuxdrive2/ - * Title: "Linux Device Drivers, 3nd Edition" + * Title: "Linux Device Drivers, 3rd Edition" Authors: Jonathan Corbet, Alessandro Rubini, and Greg Kroah-Hartman Publisher: O'Reilly & Associates. Date: 2005. @@ -592,14 +592,6 @@ Pages: 600. ISBN: 0-13-101908-2 - * Title: "The Design and Implementation of the 4.4 BSD UNIX - Operating System" - Author: Marshall Kirk McKusick, Keith Bostic, Michael J. Karels, - John S. Quarterman. - Publisher: Addison-Wesley. - Date: 1996. - ISBN: 0-201-54979-4 - * Title: "Programming for the real world - POSIX.4" Author: Bill O. Gallmeister. Publisher: O'Reilly & Associates, Inc.. @@ -610,28 +602,13 @@ POSIX. Good reference. * Title: "UNIX Systems for Modern Architectures: Symmetric - Multiprocesssing and Caching for Kernel Programmers" + Multiprocessing and Caching for Kernel Programmers" Author: Curt Schimmel. Publisher: Addison Wesley. Date: June, 1994. Pages: 432. ISBN: 0-201-63338-8 - * Title: "The Design and Implementation of the 4.3 BSD UNIX - Operating System" - Author: Samuel J. Leffler, Marshall Kirk McKusick, Michael J. - Karels, John S. Quarterman. - Publisher: Addison-Wesley. - Date: 1989 (reprinted with corrections on October, 1990). - ISBN: 0-201-06196-1 - - * Title: "The Design of the UNIX Operating System" - Author: Maurice J. Bach. - Publisher: Prentice Hall. - Date: 1986. - Pages: 471. - ISBN: 0-13-201757-1 - MISCELLANEOUS: * Name: linux/Documentation diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index cdd2a6e8a3b7..d18a9e12152a 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -43,11 +43,11 @@ parameter is applicable: AVR32 AVR32 architecture is enabled. AX25 Appropriate AX.25 support is enabled. BLACKFIN Blackfin architecture is enabled. + DRM Direct Rendering Management support is enabled. + DYNAMIC_DEBUG Build in debug messages and enable them at runtime EDD BIOS Enhanced Disk Drive Services (EDD) is enabled EFI EFI Partitioning (GPT) is enabled EIDE EIDE/ATAPI support is enabled. - DRM Direct Rendering Management support is enabled. - DYNAMIC_DEBUG Build in debug messages and enable them at runtime FB The frame buffer device is enabled. GCOV GCOV profiling is enabled. HW Appropriate hardware is enabled. @@ -144,6 +144,11 @@ a fixed number of characters. This limit depends on the architecture and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file ./include/asm/setup.h as COMMAND_LINE_SIZE. +Finally, the [KMG] suffix is commonly described after a number of kernel +parameter values. These 'K', 'M', and 'G' letters represent the _binary_ +multipliers 'Kilo', 'Mega', and 'Giga', equalling 2^10, 2^20, and 2^30 +bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. + acpi= [HW,ACPI,X86] Advanced Configuration and Power Interface @@ -199,11 +204,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file unusable. The "log_buf_len" parameter may be useful if you need to capture more output. - acpi_display_output= [HW,ACPI] - acpi_display_output=vendor - acpi_display_output=video - See above. - acpi_irq_balance [HW,ACPI] ACPI will balance active IRQs default in APIC mode @@ -403,6 +403,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file bttv.pll= See Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Insmod-options bttv.tuner= and Documentation/video4linux/bttv/CARDLIST + bulk_remove=off [PPC] This parameter disables the use of the pSeries + firmware feature for flushing multiple hpte entries + at a time. + c101= [NET] Moxa C101 synchronous serial card cachesize= [BUGS=X86-32] Override level 2 CPU cache size detection. @@ -546,16 +550,20 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file Format: <first_slot>,<last_slot>,<port>,<enum_bit>[,<debug>] - crashkernel=nn[KMG]@ss[KMG] - [KNL] Reserve a chunk of physical memory to - hold a kernel to switch to with kexec on panic. + crashkernel=size[KMG][@offset[KMG]] + [KNL] Using kexec, Linux can switch to a 'crash kernel' + upon panic. This parameter reserves the physical + memory region [offset, offset + size] for that kernel + image. If '@offset' is omitted, then a suitable offset + is selected automatically. Check + Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt for further details. crashkernel=range1:size1[,range2:size2,...][@offset] [KNL] Same as above, but depends on the memory in the running system. The syntax of range is start-[end] where start and end are both a memory unit (amount[KMG]). See also - Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt for a example. + Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt for an example. cs89x0_dma= [HW,NET] Format: <dma> @@ -618,6 +626,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file disable= [IPV6] See Documentation/networking/ipv6.txt. + disable_ddw [PPC/PSERIES] + Disable Dynamic DMA Window support. Use this if + to workaround buggy firmware. + disable_ipv6= [IPV6] See Documentation/networking/ipv6.txt. @@ -655,11 +667,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file dscc4.setup= [NET] - dynamic_printk Enables pr_debug()/dev_dbg() calls if - CONFIG_DYNAMIC_PRINTK_DEBUG has been enabled. - These can also be switched on/off via - <debugfs>/dynamic_printk/modules - earlycon= [KNL] Output early console device and options. uart[8250],io,<addr>[,options] uart[8250],mmio,<addr>[,options] @@ -884,6 +891,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file controller i8042.nopnp [HW] Don't use ACPIPnP / PnPBIOS to discover KBD/AUX controllers + i8042.notimeout [HW] Ignore timeout condition signalled by conroller i8042.reset [HW] Reset the controller during init and cleanup i8042.unlock [HW] Unlock (ignore) the keylock @@ -1267,10 +1275,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file 6 (KERN_INFO) informational 7 (KERN_DEBUG) debug-level messages - log_buf_len=n Sets the size of the printk ring buffer, in bytes. - Format: { n | nk | nM } - n must be a power of two. The default size - is set in the kernel config file. + log_buf_len=n[KMG] Sets the size of the printk ring buffer, + in bytes. n must be a power of two. The default + size is set in the kernel config file. logo.nologo [FB] Disables display of the built-in Linux logo. This may be used to provide more screen space for @@ -1490,6 +1497,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file mtdparts= [MTD] See drivers/mtd/cmdlinepart.c. + multitce=off [PPC] This parameter disables the use of the pSeries + firmware feature for updating multiple TCE entries + at a time. + onenand.bdry= [HW,MTD] Flex-OneNAND Boundary Configuration Format: [die0_boundary][,die0_lock][,die1_boundary][,die1_lock] @@ -1573,26 +1584,26 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file of returning the full 64-bit number. The default is to return 64-bit inode numbers. + nfs.nfs4_disable_idmapping= + [NFSv4] When set, this option disables the NFSv4 + idmapper on the client, but only if the mount + is using the 'sec=sys' security flavour. This may + make migration from legacy NFSv2/v3 systems easier + provided that the server has the appropriate support. + The default is to always enable NFSv4 idmapping. + nmi_debug= [KNL,AVR32,SH] Specify one or more actions to take when a NMI is triggered. Format: [state][,regs][,debounce][,die] nmi_watchdog= [KNL,BUGS=X86] Debugging features for SMP kernels Format: [panic,][num] - Valid num: 0,1,2 + Valid num: 0 0 - turn nmi_watchdog off - 1 - use the IO-APIC timer for the NMI watchdog - 2 - use the local APIC for the NMI watchdog using - a performance counter. Note: This will use one - performance counter and the local APIC's performance - vector. When panic is specified, panic when an NMI watchdog timeout occurs. This is useful when you use a panic=... timeout and need the box quickly up again. - Instead of 1 and 2 it is possible to use the following - symbolic names: lapic and ioapic - Example: nmi_watchdog=2 or nmi_watchdog=panic,lapic netpoll.carrier_timeout= [NET] Specifies amount of time (in seconds) that @@ -1622,6 +1633,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file noapic [SMP,APIC] Tells the kernel to not make use of any IOAPICs that may be present in the system. + noautogroup Disable scheduler automatic task group creation. + nobats [PPC] Do not use BATs for mapping kernel lowmem on "Classic" PPC cores. @@ -1707,6 +1720,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file no-kvmclock [X86,KVM] Disable paravirtualized KVM clock driver + no-kvmapf [X86,KVM] Disable paravirtualized asynchronous page + fault handling. + nolapic [X86-32,APIC] Do not enable or use the local APIC. nolapic_timer [X86-32,APIC] Do not use the local APIC timer. @@ -1759,7 +1775,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nousb [USB] Disable the USB subsystem - nowatchdog [KNL] Disable the lockup detector. + nowatchdog [KNL] Disable the lockup detector (NMI watchdog). nowb [ARM] @@ -2175,11 +2191,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file reset_devices [KNL] Force drivers to reset the underlying device during initialization. - resource_alloc_from_bottom - Allocate new resources from the beginning of available - space, not the end. If you need to use this, please - report a bug. - resume= [SWSUSP] Specify the partition device for software suspend @@ -2445,6 +2456,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file <deci-seconds>: poll all this frequency 0: no polling (default) + threadirqs [KNL] + Force threading of all interrupt handlers except those + marked explicitely IRQF_NO_THREAD. + topology= [S390] Format: {off | on} Specify if the kernel should make use of the cpu @@ -2472,12 +2487,13 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file to facilitate early boot debugging. See also Documentation/trace/events.txt - tsc= Disable clocksource-must-verify flag for TSC. + tsc= Disable clocksource stability checks for TSC. Format: <string> [x86] reliable: mark tsc clocksource as reliable, this - disables clocksource verification at runtime. - Used to enable high-resolution timer mode on older - hardware, and in virtualized environment. + disables clocksource verification at runtime, as well + as the stability checks done at bootup. Used to enable + high-resolution timer mode on older hardware, and in + virtualized environment. [x86] noirqtime: Do not use TSC to do irq accounting. Used to run time disable IRQ_TIME_ACCOUNTING on any platforms where RDTSC is slow and this accounting diff --git a/Documentation/keys-request-key.txt b/Documentation/keys-request-key.txt index 09b55e461740..69686ad12c66 100644 --- a/Documentation/keys-request-key.txt +++ b/Documentation/keys-request-key.txt @@ -127,14 +127,15 @@ This is because process A's keyrings can't simply be attached to of them, and (b) it requires the same UID/GID/Groups all the way through. -====================== -NEGATIVE INSTANTIATION -====================== +==================================== +NEGATIVE INSTANTIATION AND REJECTION +==================================== Rather than instantiating a key, it is possible for the possessor of an authorisation key to negatively instantiate a key that's under construction. This is a short duration placeholder that causes any attempt at re-requesting -the key whilst it exists to fail with error ENOKEY. +the key whilst it exists to fail with error ENOKEY if negated or the specified +error if rejected. This is provided to prevent excessive repeated spawning of /sbin/request-key processes for a key that will never be obtainable. diff --git a/Documentation/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt b/Documentation/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8fb79bc1ac4b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ + Trusted and Encrypted Keys + +Trusted and Encrypted Keys are two new key types added to the existing kernel +key ring service. Both of these new types are variable length symmetic keys, +and in both cases all keys are created in the kernel, and user space sees, +stores, and loads only encrypted blobs. Trusted Keys require the availability +of a Trusted Platform Module (TPM) chip for greater security, while Encrypted +Keys can be used on any system. All user level blobs, are displayed and loaded +in hex ascii for convenience, and are integrity verified. + +Trusted Keys use a TPM both to generate and to seal the keys. Keys are sealed +under a 2048 bit RSA key in the TPM, and optionally sealed to specified PCR +(integrity measurement) values, and only unsealed by the TPM, if PCRs and blob +integrity verifications match. A loaded Trusted Key can be updated with new +(future) PCR values, so keys are easily migrated to new pcr values, such as +when the kernel and initramfs are updated. The same key can have many saved +blobs under different PCR values, so multiple boots are easily supported. + +By default, trusted keys are sealed under the SRK, which has the default +authorization value (20 zeros). This can be set at takeownership time with the +trouser's utility: "tpm_takeownership -u -z". + +Usage: + keyctl add trusted name "new keylen [options]" ring + keyctl add trusted name "load hex_blob [pcrlock=pcrnum]" ring + keyctl update key "update [options]" + keyctl print keyid + + options: + keyhandle= ascii hex value of sealing key default 0x40000000 (SRK) + keyauth= ascii hex auth for sealing key default 0x00...i + (40 ascii zeros) + blobauth= ascii hex auth for sealed data default 0x00... + (40 ascii zeros) + blobauth= ascii hex auth for sealed data default 0x00... + (40 ascii zeros) + pcrinfo= ascii hex of PCR_INFO or PCR_INFO_LONG (no default) + pcrlock= pcr number to be extended to "lock" blob + migratable= 0|1 indicating permission to reseal to new PCR values, + default 1 (resealing allowed) + +"keyctl print" returns an ascii hex copy of the sealed key, which is in standard +TPM_STORED_DATA format. The key length for new keys are always in bytes. +Trusted Keys can be 32 - 128 bytes (256 - 1024 bits), the upper limit is to fit +within the 2048 bit SRK (RSA) keylength, with all necessary structure/padding. + +Encrypted keys do not depend on a TPM, and are faster, as they use AES for +encryption/decryption. New keys are created from kernel generated random +numbers, and are encrypted/decrypted using a specified 'master' key. The +'master' key can either be a trusted-key or user-key type. The main +disadvantage of encrypted keys is that if they are not rooted in a trusted key, +they are only as secure as the user key encrypting them. The master user key +should therefore be loaded in as secure a way as possible, preferably early in +boot. + +Usage: + keyctl add encrypted name "new key-type:master-key-name keylen" ring + keyctl add encrypted name "load hex_blob" ring + keyctl update keyid "update key-type:master-key-name" + +where 'key-type' is either 'trusted' or 'user'. + +Examples of trusted and encrypted key usage: + +Create and save a trusted key named "kmk" of length 32 bytes: + + $ keyctl add trusted kmk "new 32" @u + 440502848 + + $ keyctl show + Session Keyring + -3 --alswrv 500 500 keyring: _ses + 97833714 --alswrv 500 -1 \_ keyring: _uid.500 + 440502848 --alswrv 500 500 \_ trusted: kmk + + $ keyctl print 440502848 + 0101000000000000000001005d01b7e3f4a6be5709930f3b70a743cbb42e0cc95e18e915 + 3f60da455bbf1144ad12e4f92b452f966929f6105fd29ca28e4d4d5a031d068478bacb0b + 27351119f822911b0a11ba3d3498ba6a32e50dac7f32894dd890eb9ad578e4e292c83722 + a52e56a097e6a68b3f56f7a52ece0cdccba1eb62cad7d817f6dc58898b3ac15f36026fec + d568bd4a706cb60bb37be6d8f1240661199d640b66fb0fe3b079f97f450b9ef9c22c6d5d + dd379f0facd1cd020281dfa3c70ba21a3fa6fc2471dc6d13ecf8298b946f65345faa5ef0 + f1f8fff03ad0acb083725535636addb08d73dedb9832da198081e5deae84bfaf0409c22b + e4a8aea2b607ec96931e6f4d4fe563ba + + $ keyctl pipe 440502848 > kmk.blob + +Load a trusted key from the saved blob: + + $ keyctl add trusted kmk "load `cat kmk.blob`" @u + 268728824 + + $ keyctl print 268728824 + 0101000000000000000001005d01b7e3f4a6be5709930f3b70a743cbb42e0cc95e18e915 + 3f60da455bbf1144ad12e4f92b452f966929f6105fd29ca28e4d4d5a031d068478bacb0b + 27351119f822911b0a11ba3d3498ba6a32e50dac7f32894dd890eb9ad578e4e292c83722 + a52e56a097e6a68b3f56f7a52ece0cdccba1eb62cad7d817f6dc58898b3ac15f36026fec + d568bd4a706cb60bb37be6d8f1240661199d640b66fb0fe3b079f97f450b9ef9c22c6d5d + dd379f0facd1cd020281dfa3c70ba21a3fa6fc2471dc6d13ecf8298b946f65345faa5ef0 + f1f8fff03ad0acb083725535636addb08d73dedb9832da198081e5deae84bfaf0409c22b + e4a8aea2b607ec96931e6f4d4fe563ba + +Reseal a trusted key under new pcr values: + + $ keyctl update 268728824 "update pcrinfo=`cat pcr.blob`" + $ keyctl print 268728824 + 010100000000002c0002800093c35a09b70fff26e7a98ae786c641e678ec6ffb6b46d805 + 77c8a6377aed9d3219c6dfec4b23ffe3000001005d37d472ac8a44023fbb3d18583a4f73 + d3a076c0858f6f1dcaa39ea0f119911ff03f5406df4f7f27f41da8d7194f45c9f4e00f2e + df449f266253aa3f52e55c53de147773e00f0f9aca86c64d94c95382265968c354c5eab4 + 9638c5ae99c89de1e0997242edfb0b501744e11ff9762dfd951cffd93227cc513384e7e6 + e782c29435c7ec2edafaa2f4c1fe6e7a781b59549ff5296371b42133777dcc5b8b971610 + 94bc67ede19e43ddb9dc2baacad374a36feaf0314d700af0a65c164b7082401740e489c9 + 7ef6a24defe4846104209bf0c3eced7fa1a672ed5b125fc9d8cd88b476a658a4434644ef + df8ae9a178e9f83ba9f08d10fa47e4226b98b0702f06b3b8 + +Create and save an encrypted key "evm" using the above trusted key "kmk": + + $ keyctl add encrypted evm "new trusted:kmk 32" @u + 159771175 + + $ keyctl print 159771175 + trusted:kmk 32 2375725ad57798846a9bbd240de8906f006e66c03af53b1b382dbbc55 + be2a44616e4959430436dc4f2a7a9659aa60bb4652aeb2120f149ed197c564e024717c64 + 5972dcb82ab2dde83376d82b2e3c09ffc + + $ keyctl pipe 159771175 > evm.blob + +Load an encrypted key "evm" from saved blob: + + $ keyctl add encrypted evm "load `cat evm.blob`" @u + 831684262 + + $ keyctl print 831684262 + trusted:kmk 32 2375725ad57798846a9bbd240de8906f006e66c03af53b1b382dbbc55 + be2a44616e4959430436dc4f2a7a9659aa60bb4652aeb2120f149ed197c564e024717c64 + 5972dcb82ab2dde83376d82b2e3c09ffc + + +The initial consumer of trusted keys is EVM, which at boot time needs a high +quality symmetric key for HMAC protection of file metadata. The use of a +trusted key provides strong guarantees that the EVM key has not been +compromised by a user level problem, and when sealed to specific boot PCR +values, protects against boot and offline attacks. Other uses for trusted and +encrypted keys, such as for disk and file encryption are anticipated. diff --git a/Documentation/keys.txt b/Documentation/keys.txt index e4dbbdb1bd96..6523a9e6f293 100644 --- a/Documentation/keys.txt +++ b/Documentation/keys.txt @@ -637,6 +637,9 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are: long keyctl(KEYCTL_INSTANTIATE, key_serial_t key, const void *payload, size_t plen, key_serial_t keyring); + long keyctl(KEYCTL_INSTANTIATE_IOV, key_serial_t key, + const struct iovec *payload_iov, unsigned ioc, + key_serial_t keyring); If the kernel calls back to userspace to complete the instantiation of a key, userspace should use this call to supply data for the key before the @@ -652,11 +655,16 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are: The payload and plen arguments describe the payload data as for add_key(). + The payload_iov and ioc arguments describe the payload data in an iovec + array instead of a single buffer. + (*) Negatively instantiate a partially constructed key. long keyctl(KEYCTL_NEGATE, key_serial_t key, unsigned timeout, key_serial_t keyring); + long keyctl(KEYCTL_REJECT, key_serial_t key, + unsigned timeout, unsigned error, key_serial_t keyring); If the kernel calls back to userspace to complete the instantiation of a key, userspace should use this call mark the key as negative before the @@ -669,6 +677,10 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are: that keyring, however all the constraints applying in KEYCTL_LINK apply in this case too. + If the key is rejected, future searches for it will return the specified + error code until the rejected key expires. Negating the key is the same + as rejecting the key with ENOKEY as the error code. + (*) Set the default request-key destination keyring. @@ -1062,6 +1074,13 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory: viable. + (*) int (*vet_description)(const char *description); + + This optional method is called to vet a key description. If the key type + doesn't approve of the key description, it may return an error, otherwise + it should return 0. + + (*) int (*instantiate)(struct key *key, const void *data, size_t datalen); This method is called to attach a payload to a key during construction. @@ -1231,10 +1250,11 @@ hand the request off to (perhaps a path held in placed in another key by, for example, the KDE desktop manager). The program (or whatever it calls) should finish construction of the key by -calling KEYCTL_INSTANTIATE, which also permits it to cache the key in one of -the keyrings (probably the session ring) before returning. Alternatively, the -key can be marked as negative with KEYCTL_NEGATE; this also permits the key to -be cached in one of the keyrings. +calling KEYCTL_INSTANTIATE or KEYCTL_INSTANTIATE_IOV, which also permits it to +cache the key in one of the keyrings (probably the session ring) before +returning. Alternatively, the key can be marked as negative with KEYCTL_NEGATE +or KEYCTL_REJECT; this also permits the key to be cached in one of the +keyrings. If it returns with the key remaining in the unconstructed state, the key will be marked as being negative, it will be added to the session keyring, and an diff --git a/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO b/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO index e3a55b6091e9..ab5189ae3428 100644 --- a/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/ko_KR/HOWTO @@ -391,8 +391,8 @@ bugme-new 메일링 리스트나(새로운 버그 리포트들만이 이곳에 bugme-janitor 메일링 리스트(bugzilla에 모든 변화들이 여기서 메일로 전해진다) 에 등록하면 된다. - http://lists.osdl.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new - http://lists.osdl.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors + https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new + https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors diff --git a/Documentation/kprobes.txt b/Documentation/kprobes.txt index 741fe66d6eca..0cfb00fd86ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/kprobes.txt +++ b/Documentation/kprobes.txt @@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ a 5-byte jump instruction. So there are several limitations. a) The instructions in DCR must be relocatable. b) The instructions in DCR must not include a call instruction. c) JTPR must not be targeted by any jump or call instruction. -d) DCR must not straddle the border betweeen functions. +d) DCR must not straddle the border between functions. Anyway, these limitations are checked by the in-kernel instruction decoder, so you don't need to worry about that. diff --git a/Documentation/kref.txt b/Documentation/kref.txt index ae203f91ee9b..48ba715d5a63 100644 --- a/Documentation/kref.txt +++ b/Documentation/kref.txt @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ static struct my_data *get_entry() struct my_data *entry = NULL; mutex_lock(&mutex); if (!list_empty(&q)) { - entry = container_of(q.next, struct my_q_entry, link); + entry = container_of(q.next, struct my_data, link); kref_get(&entry->refcount); } mutex_unlock(&mutex); diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/kvm/api.txt index b336266bea5e..9bef4e4cec50 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/kvm/api.txt @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error This ioctl is obsolete and has been removed. -4.6 KVM_CREATE_VCPU +4.7 KVM_CREATE_VCPU Capability: basic Architectures: all @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Returns: vcpu fd on success, -1 on error This API adds a vcpu to a virtual machine. The vcpu id is a small integer in the range [0, max_vcpus). -4.7 KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG (vm ioctl) +4.8 KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG (vm ioctl) Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ since the last call to this ioctl. Bit 0 is the first page in the memory slot. Ensure the entire structure is cleared to avoid padding issues. -4.8 KVM_SET_MEMORY_ALIAS +4.9 KVM_SET_MEMORY_ALIAS Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ Returns: 0 (success), -1 (error) This ioctl is obsolete and has been removed. -4.9 KVM_RUN +4.10 KVM_RUN Capability: basic Architectures: all @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ obtained by mmap()ing the vcpu fd at offset 0, with the size given by KVM_GET_VCPU_MMAP_SIZE. The parameter block is formatted as a 'struct kvm_run' (see below). -4.10 KVM_GET_REGS +4.11 KVM_GET_REGS Capability: basic Architectures: all @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ struct kvm_regs { __u64 rip, rflags; }; -4.11 KVM_SET_REGS +4.12 KVM_SET_REGS Capability: basic Architectures: all @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Writes the general purpose registers into the vcpu. See KVM_GET_REGS for the data structure. -4.12 KVM_GET_SREGS +4.13 KVM_GET_SREGS Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ interrupt_bitmap is a bitmap of pending external interrupts. At most one bit may be set. This interrupt has been acknowledged by the APIC but not yet injected into the cpu core. -4.13 KVM_SET_SREGS +4.14 KVM_SET_SREGS Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error Writes special registers into the vcpu. See KVM_GET_SREGS for the data structures. -4.14 KVM_TRANSLATE +4.15 KVM_TRANSLATE Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ struct kvm_translation { __u8 pad[5]; }; -4.15 KVM_INTERRUPT +4.16 KVM_INTERRUPT Capability: basic Architectures: x86, ppc @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ c) KVM_INTERRUPT_SET_LEVEL Note that any value for 'irq' other than the ones stated above is invalid and incurs unexpected behavior. -4.16 KVM_DEBUG_GUEST +4.17 KVM_DEBUG_GUEST Capability: basic Architectures: none @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ Returns: -1 on error Support for this has been removed. Use KVM_SET_GUEST_DEBUG instead. -4.17 KVM_GET_MSRS +4.18 KVM_GET_MSRS Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ Application code should set the 'nmsrs' member (which indicates the size of the entries array) and the 'index' member of each array entry. kvm will fill in the 'data' member. -4.18 KVM_SET_MSRS +4.19 KVM_SET_MSRS Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ Application code should set the 'nmsrs' member (which indicates the size of the entries array), and the 'index' and 'data' members of each array entry. -4.19 KVM_SET_CPUID +4.20 KVM_SET_CPUID Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ struct kvm_cpuid { struct kvm_cpuid_entry entries[0]; }; -4.20 KVM_SET_SIGNAL_MASK +4.21 KVM_SET_SIGNAL_MASK Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ struct kvm_signal_mask { __u8 sigset[0]; }; -4.21 KVM_GET_FPU +4.22 KVM_GET_FPU Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ struct kvm_fpu { __u32 pad2; }; -4.22 KVM_SET_FPU +4.23 KVM_SET_FPU Capability: basic Architectures: x86 @@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ struct kvm_fpu { __u32 pad2; }; -4.23 KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP +4.24 KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP Architectures: x86, ia64 @@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ ioapic, a virtual PIC (two PICs, nested), and sets up future vcpus to have a local APIC. IRQ routing for GSIs 0-15 is set to both PIC and IOAPIC; GSI 16-23 only go to the IOAPIC. On ia64, a IOSAPIC is created. -4.24 KVM_IRQ_LINE +4.25 KVM_IRQ_LINE Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP Architectures: x86, ia64 @@ -552,7 +552,7 @@ struct kvm_irq_level { __u32 level; /* 0 or 1 */ }; -4.25 KVM_GET_IRQCHIP +4.26 KVM_GET_IRQCHIP Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP Architectures: x86, ia64 @@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ struct kvm_irqchip { } chip; }; -4.26 KVM_SET_IRQCHIP +4.27 KVM_SET_IRQCHIP Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP Architectures: x86, ia64 @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ struct kvm_irqchip { } chip; }; -4.27 KVM_XEN_HVM_CONFIG +4.28 KVM_XEN_HVM_CONFIG Capability: KVM_CAP_XEN_HVM Architectures: x86 @@ -618,7 +618,7 @@ struct kvm_xen_hvm_config { __u8 pad2[30]; }; -4.27 KVM_GET_CLOCK +4.29 KVM_GET_CLOCK Capability: KVM_CAP_ADJUST_CLOCK Architectures: x86 @@ -636,7 +636,7 @@ struct kvm_clock_data { __u32 pad[9]; }; -4.28 KVM_SET_CLOCK +4.30 KVM_SET_CLOCK Capability: KVM_CAP_ADJUST_CLOCK Architectures: x86 @@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ struct kvm_clock_data { __u32 pad[9]; }; -4.29 KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS +4.31 KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS Extended by: KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW @@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ struct kvm_vcpu_events { KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SHADOW may be set in the flags field to signal that interrupt.shadow contains a valid state. Otherwise, this field is undefined. -4.30 KVM_SET_VCPU_EVENTS +4.32 KVM_SET_VCPU_EVENTS Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS Extended by: KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW @@ -719,7 +719,7 @@ If KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW is available, KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SHADOW can be set in the flags field to signal that interrupt.shadow contains a valid state and shall be written into the VCPU. -4.32 KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS +4.33 KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS Capability: KVM_CAP_DEBUGREGS Architectures: x86 @@ -737,7 +737,7 @@ struct kvm_debugregs { __u64 reserved[9]; }; -4.33 KVM_SET_DEBUGREGS +4.34 KVM_SET_DEBUGREGS Capability: KVM_CAP_DEBUGREGS Architectures: x86 @@ -750,7 +750,7 @@ Writes debug registers into the vcpu. See KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS for the data structure. The flags field is unused yet and must be cleared on entry. -4.34 KVM_SET_USER_MEMORY_REGION +4.35 KVM_SET_USER_MEMORY_REGION Capability: KVM_CAP_USER_MEM Architectures: all @@ -796,7 +796,7 @@ It is recommended to use this API instead of the KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION ioctl. The KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION does not allow fine grained control over memory allocation and is deprecated. -4.35 KVM_SET_TSS_ADDR +4.36 KVM_SET_TSS_ADDR Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_TSS_ADDR Architectures: x86 @@ -814,7 +814,7 @@ This ioctl is required on Intel-based hosts. This is needed on Intel hardware because of a quirk in the virtualization implementation (see the internals documentation when it pops into existence). -4.36 KVM_ENABLE_CAP +4.37 KVM_ENABLE_CAP Capability: KVM_CAP_ENABLE_CAP Architectures: ppc @@ -849,7 +849,7 @@ function properly, this is the place to put them. __u8 pad[64]; }; -4.37 KVM_GET_MP_STATE +4.38 KVM_GET_MP_STATE Capability: KVM_CAP_MP_STATE Architectures: x86, ia64 @@ -874,12 +874,12 @@ Possible values are: - KVM_MP_STATE_HALTED: the vcpu has executed a HLT instruction and is waiting for an interrupt - KVM_MP_STATE_SIPI_RECEIVED: the vcpu has just received a SIPI (vector - accesible via KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS) + accessible via KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS) This ioctl is only useful after KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP. Without an in-kernel irqchip, the multiprocessing state must be maintained by userspace. -4.38 KVM_SET_MP_STATE +4.39 KVM_SET_MP_STATE Capability: KVM_CAP_MP_STATE Architectures: x86, ia64 @@ -893,7 +893,7 @@ arguments. This ioctl is only useful after KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP. Without an in-kernel irqchip, the multiprocessing state must be maintained by userspace. -4.39 KVM_SET_IDENTITY_MAP_ADDR +4.40 KVM_SET_IDENTITY_MAP_ADDR Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_IDENTITY_MAP_ADDR Architectures: x86 @@ -911,7 +911,7 @@ This ioctl is required on Intel-based hosts. This is needed on Intel hardware because of a quirk in the virtualization implementation (see the internals documentation when it pops into existence). -4.40 KVM_SET_BOOT_CPU_ID +4.41 KVM_SET_BOOT_CPU_ID Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_BOOT_CPU_ID Architectures: x86, ia64 @@ -923,7 +923,7 @@ Define which vcpu is the Bootstrap Processor (BSP). Values are the same as the vcpu id in KVM_CREATE_VCPU. If this ioctl is not called, the default is vcpu 0. -4.41 KVM_GET_XSAVE +4.42 KVM_GET_XSAVE Capability: KVM_CAP_XSAVE Architectures: x86 @@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ struct kvm_xsave { This ioctl would copy current vcpu's xsave struct to the userspace. -4.42 KVM_SET_XSAVE +4.43 KVM_SET_XSAVE Capability: KVM_CAP_XSAVE Architectures: x86 @@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ struct kvm_xsave { This ioctl would copy userspace's xsave struct to the kernel. -4.43 KVM_GET_XCRS +4.44 KVM_GET_XCRS Capability: KVM_CAP_XCRS Architectures: x86 @@ -974,7 +974,7 @@ struct kvm_xcrs { This ioctl would copy current vcpu's xcrs to the userspace. -4.44 KVM_SET_XCRS +4.45 KVM_SET_XCRS Capability: KVM_CAP_XCRS Architectures: x86 @@ -997,7 +997,7 @@ struct kvm_xcrs { This ioctl would set vcpu's xcr to the value userspace specified. -4.45 KVM_GET_SUPPORTED_CPUID +4.46 KVM_GET_SUPPORTED_CPUID Capability: KVM_CAP_EXT_CPUID Architectures: x86 @@ -1062,7 +1062,7 @@ emulate them efficiently. The fields in each entry are defined as follows: eax, ebx, ecx, edx: the values returned by the cpuid instruction for this function/index combination -4.46 KVM_PPC_GET_PVINFO +4.47 KVM_PPC_GET_PVINFO Capability: KVM_CAP_PPC_GET_PVINFO Architectures: ppc @@ -1085,6 +1085,184 @@ of 4 instructions that make up a hypercall. If any additional field gets added to this structure later on, a bit for that additional piece of information will be set in the flags bitmap. +4.48 KVM_ASSIGN_PCI_DEVICE + +Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_ASSIGNMENT +Architectures: x86 ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_assigned_pci_dev (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Assigns a host PCI device to the VM. + +struct kvm_assigned_pci_dev { + __u32 assigned_dev_id; + __u32 busnr; + __u32 devfn; + __u32 flags; + __u32 segnr; + union { + __u32 reserved[11]; + }; +}; + +The PCI device is specified by the triple segnr, busnr, and devfn. +Identification in succeeding service requests is done via assigned_dev_id. The +following flags are specified: + +/* Depends on KVM_CAP_IOMMU */ +#define KVM_DEV_ASSIGN_ENABLE_IOMMU (1 << 0) + +4.49 KVM_DEASSIGN_PCI_DEVICE + +Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_DEASSIGNMENT +Architectures: x86 ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_assigned_pci_dev (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Ends PCI device assignment, releasing all associated resources. + +See KVM_CAP_DEVICE_ASSIGNMENT for the data structure. Only assigned_dev_id is +used in kvm_assigned_pci_dev to identify the device. + +4.50 KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ + +Capability: KVM_CAP_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ +Architectures: x86 ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_assigned_irq (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Assigns an IRQ to a passed-through device. + +struct kvm_assigned_irq { + __u32 assigned_dev_id; + __u32 host_irq; + __u32 guest_irq; + __u32 flags; + union { + struct { + __u32 addr_lo; + __u32 addr_hi; + __u32 data; + } guest_msi; + __u32 reserved[12]; + }; +}; + +The following flags are defined: + +#define KVM_DEV_IRQ_HOST_INTX (1 << 0) +#define KVM_DEV_IRQ_HOST_MSI (1 << 1) +#define KVM_DEV_IRQ_HOST_MSIX (1 << 2) + +#define KVM_DEV_IRQ_GUEST_INTX (1 << 8) +#define KVM_DEV_IRQ_GUEST_MSI (1 << 9) +#define KVM_DEV_IRQ_GUEST_MSIX (1 << 10) + +It is not valid to specify multiple types per host or guest IRQ. However, the +IRQ type of host and guest can differ or can even be null. + +4.51 KVM_DEASSIGN_DEV_IRQ + +Capability: KVM_CAP_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ +Architectures: x86 ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_assigned_irq (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Ends an IRQ assignment to a passed-through device. + +See KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ for the data structure. The target device is specified +by assigned_dev_id, flags must correspond to the IRQ type specified on +KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ. Partial deassignment of host or guest IRQ is allowed. + +4.52 KVM_SET_GSI_ROUTING + +Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQ_ROUTING +Architectures: x86 ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_irq_routing (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Sets the GSI routing table entries, overwriting any previously set entries. + +struct kvm_irq_routing { + __u32 nr; + __u32 flags; + struct kvm_irq_routing_entry entries[0]; +}; + +No flags are specified so far, the corresponding field must be set to zero. + +struct kvm_irq_routing_entry { + __u32 gsi; + __u32 type; + __u32 flags; + __u32 pad; + union { + struct kvm_irq_routing_irqchip irqchip; + struct kvm_irq_routing_msi msi; + __u32 pad[8]; + } u; +}; + +/* gsi routing entry types */ +#define KVM_IRQ_ROUTING_IRQCHIP 1 +#define KVM_IRQ_ROUTING_MSI 2 + +No flags are specified so far, the corresponding field must be set to zero. + +struct kvm_irq_routing_irqchip { + __u32 irqchip; + __u32 pin; +}; + +struct kvm_irq_routing_msi { + __u32 address_lo; + __u32 address_hi; + __u32 data; + __u32 pad; +}; + +4.53 KVM_ASSIGN_SET_MSIX_NR + +Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_MSIX +Architectures: x86 ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_assigned_msix_nr (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Set the number of MSI-X interrupts for an assigned device. This service can +only be called once in the lifetime of an assigned device. + +struct kvm_assigned_msix_nr { + __u32 assigned_dev_id; + __u16 entry_nr; + __u16 padding; +}; + +#define KVM_MAX_MSIX_PER_DEV 256 + +4.54 KVM_ASSIGN_SET_MSIX_ENTRY + +Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_MSIX +Architectures: x86 ia64 +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_assigned_msix_entry (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Specifies the routing of an MSI-X assigned device interrupt to a GSI. Setting +the GSI vector to zero means disabling the interrupt. + +struct kvm_assigned_msix_entry { + __u32 assigned_dev_id; + __u32 gsi; + __u16 entry; /* The index of entry in the MSI-X table */ + __u16 padding[3]; +}; + 5. The kvm_run structure Application code obtains a pointer to the kvm_run structure by diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/cpuid.txt b/Documentation/kvm/cpuid.txt index 14a12ea92b7f..882068538c9c 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/cpuid.txt +++ b/Documentation/kvm/cpuid.txt @@ -36,6 +36,9 @@ KVM_FEATURE_MMU_OP || 2 || deprecated. KVM_FEATURE_CLOCKSOURCE2 || 3 || kvmclock available at msrs || || 0x4b564d00 and 0x4b564d01 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +KVM_FEATURE_ASYNC_PF || 4 || async pf can be enabled by + || || writing to msr 0x4b564d02 +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ KVM_FEATURE_CLOCKSOURCE_STABLE_BIT || 24 || host will warn if no guest-side || || per-cpu warps are expected in || || kvmclock. diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/locking.txt b/Documentation/kvm/locking.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3b4cd3bf5631 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/kvm/locking.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +KVM Lock Overview +================= + +1. Acquisition Orders +--------------------- + +(to be written) + +2. Reference +------------ + +Name: kvm_lock +Type: raw_spinlock +Arch: any +Protects: - vm_list + - hardware virtualization enable/disable +Comment: 'raw' because hardware enabling/disabling must be atomic /wrt + migration. + +Name: kvm_arch::tsc_write_lock +Type: raw_spinlock +Arch: x86 +Protects: - kvm_arch::{last_tsc_write,last_tsc_nsec,last_tsc_offset} + - tsc offset in vmcb +Comment: 'raw' because updating the tsc offsets must not be preempted. diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/msr.txt b/Documentation/kvm/msr.txt index 8ddcfe84c09a..d079aed27e03 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/msr.txt +++ b/Documentation/kvm/msr.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Glauber Costa <glommer@redhat.com>, Red Hat Inc, 2010 ===================================================== KVM makes use of some custom MSRs to service some requests. -At present, this facility is only used by kvmclock. Custom MSRs have a range reserved for them, that goes from 0x4b564d00 to 0x4b564dff. There are MSRs outside this area, @@ -151,3 +150,38 @@ MSR_KVM_SYSTEM_TIME: 0x12 return PRESENT; } else return NON_PRESENT; + +MSR_KVM_ASYNC_PF_EN: 0x4b564d02 + data: Bits 63-6 hold 64-byte aligned physical address of a + 64 byte memory area which must be in guest RAM and must be + zeroed. Bits 5-2 are reserved and should be zero. Bit 0 is 1 + when asynchronous page faults are enabled on the vcpu 0 when + disabled. Bit 2 is 1 if asynchronous page faults can be injected + when vcpu is in cpl == 0. + + First 4 byte of 64 byte memory location will be written to by + the hypervisor at the time of asynchronous page fault (APF) + injection to indicate type of asynchronous page fault. Value + of 1 means that the page referred to by the page fault is not + present. Value 2 means that the page is now available. Disabling + interrupt inhibits APFs. Guest must not enable interrupt + before the reason is read, or it may be overwritten by another + APF. Since APF uses the same exception vector as regular page + fault guest must reset the reason to 0 before it does + something that can generate normal page fault. If during page + fault APF reason is 0 it means that this is regular page + fault. + + During delivery of type 1 APF cr2 contains a token that will + be used to notify a guest when missing page becomes + available. When page becomes available type 2 APF is sent with + cr2 set to the token associated with the page. There is special + kind of token 0xffffffff which tells vcpu that it should wake + up all processes waiting for APFs and no individual type 2 APFs + will be sent. + + If APF is disabled while there are outstanding APFs, they will + not be delivered. + + Currently type 2 APF will be always delivered on the same vcpu as + type 1 was, but guest should not rely on that. diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c index dc73bc54cc4e..d9da7e148538 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c +++ b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c @@ -39,6 +39,9 @@ #include <limits.h> #include <stddef.h> #include <signal.h> +#include <pwd.h> +#include <grp.h> + #include <linux/virtio_config.h> #include <linux/virtio_net.h> #include <linux/virtio_blk.h> @@ -298,20 +301,27 @@ static void *map_zeroed_pages(unsigned int num) /* * We use a private mapping (ie. if we write to the page, it will be - * copied). + * copied). We allocate an extra two pages PROT_NONE to act as guard + * pages against read/write attempts that exceed allocated space. */ - addr = mmap(NULL, getpagesize() * num, - PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE|PROT_EXEC, MAP_PRIVATE, fd, 0); + addr = mmap(NULL, getpagesize() * (num+2), + PROT_NONE, MAP_PRIVATE, fd, 0); + if (addr == MAP_FAILED) err(1, "Mmapping %u pages of /dev/zero", num); + if (mprotect(addr + getpagesize(), getpagesize() * num, + PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE) == -1) + err(1, "mprotect rw %u pages failed", num); + /* * One neat mmap feature is that you can close the fd, and it * stays mapped. */ close(fd); - return addr; + /* Return address after PROT_NONE page */ + return addr + getpagesize(); } /* Get some more pages for a device. */ @@ -343,7 +353,7 @@ static void map_at(int fd, void *addr, unsigned long offset, unsigned long len) * done to it. This allows us to share untouched memory between * Guests. */ - if (mmap(addr, len, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE|PROT_EXEC, + if (mmap(addr, len, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_FIXED|MAP_PRIVATE, fd, offset) != MAP_FAILED) return; @@ -573,10 +583,10 @@ static void *_check_pointer(unsigned long addr, unsigned int size, unsigned int line) { /* - * We have to separately check addr and addr+size, because size could - * be huge and addr + size might wrap around. + * Check if the requested address and size exceeds the allocated memory, + * or addr + size wraps around. */ - if (addr >= guest_limit || addr + size >= guest_limit) + if ((addr + size) > guest_limit || (addr + size) < addr) errx(1, "%s:%i: Invalid address %#lx", __FILE__, line, addr); /* * We return a pointer for the caller's convenience, now we know it's @@ -1872,6 +1882,8 @@ static struct option opts[] = { { "block", 1, NULL, 'b' }, { "rng", 0, NULL, 'r' }, { "initrd", 1, NULL, 'i' }, + { "username", 1, NULL, 'u' }, + { "chroot", 1, NULL, 'c' }, { NULL }, }; static void usage(void) @@ -1894,6 +1906,12 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) /* If they specify an initrd file to load. */ const char *initrd_name = NULL; + /* Password structure for initgroups/setres[gu]id */ + struct passwd *user_details = NULL; + + /* Directory to chroot to */ + char *chroot_path = NULL; + /* Save the args: we "reboot" by execing ourselves again. */ main_args = argv; @@ -1950,6 +1968,14 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) case 'i': initrd_name = optarg; break; + case 'u': + user_details = getpwnam(optarg); + if (!user_details) + err(1, "getpwnam failed, incorrect username?"); + break; + case 'c': + chroot_path = optarg; + break; default: warnx("Unknown argument %s", argv[optind]); usage(); @@ -2021,6 +2047,37 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) /* If we exit via err(), this kills all the threads, restores tty. */ atexit(cleanup_devices); + /* If requested, chroot to a directory */ + if (chroot_path) { + if (chroot(chroot_path) != 0) + err(1, "chroot(\"%s\") failed", chroot_path); + + if (chdir("/") != 0) + err(1, "chdir(\"/\") failed"); + + verbose("chroot done\n"); + } + + /* If requested, drop privileges */ + if (user_details) { + uid_t u; + gid_t g; + + u = user_details->pw_uid; + g = user_details->pw_gid; + + if (initgroups(user_details->pw_name, g) != 0) + err(1, "initgroups failed"); + + if (setresgid(g, g, g) != 0) + err(1, "setresgid failed"); + + if (setresuid(u, u, u) != 0) + err(1, "setresuid failed"); + + verbose("Dropping privileges completed\n"); + } + /* Finally, run the Guest. This doesn't return. */ run_guest(); } diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.txt b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.txt index efb3a6a045a2..dad99978a6a8 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.txt +++ b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.txt @@ -111,8 +111,16 @@ Running Lguest: Then use --tunnet=bridge:lg0 when launching the guest. - See http://linux-net.osdl.org/index.php/Bridge for general information - on how to get bridging working. + See: + + http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/networking/bridge + + for general information on how to get bridging to work. + +- Random number generation. Using the --rng option will provide a + /dev/hwrng in the guest that will read from the host's /dev/random. + Use this option in conjunction with rng-tools (see ../hw_random.txt) + to provide entropy to the guest kernel's /dev/random. There is a helpful mailing list at http://ozlabs.org/mailman/listinfo/lguest diff --git a/Documentation/magic-number.txt b/Documentation/magic-number.txt index 505f19607542..4b12abcb2ad3 100644 --- a/Documentation/magic-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/magic-number.txt @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ NBD_REPLY_MAGIC 0x96744668 nbd_reply include/linux/nbd.h STL_BOARDMAGIC 0xa2267f52 stlbrd include/linux/stallion.h ENI155_MAGIC 0xa54b872d midway_eprom drivers/atm/eni.h SCI_MAGIC 0xbabeface gs_port drivers/char/sh-sci.h -CODA_MAGIC 0xC0DAC0DA coda_file_info include/linux/coda_fs_i.h +CODA_MAGIC 0xC0DAC0DA coda_file_info fs/coda/coda_fs_i.h DPMEM_MAGIC 0xc0ffee11 gdt_pci_sram drivers/scsi/gdth.h STLI_PORTMAGIC 0xe671c7a1 stliport include/linux/istallion.h YAM_MAGIC 0xF10A7654 yam_port drivers/net/hamradio/yam.c diff --git a/Documentation/make/headers_install.txt b/Documentation/make/headers_install.txt index f2481cabffcb..951eb9f1e040 100644 --- a/Documentation/make/headers_install.txt +++ b/Documentation/make/headers_install.txt @@ -39,8 +39,9 @@ INSTALL_HDR_PATH indicates where to install the headers. It defaults to The command "make headers_install_all" exports headers for all architectures simultaneously. (This is mostly of interest to distribution maintainers, who create an architecture-independent tarball from the resulting include -directory.) Remember to provide the appropriate linux/asm directory via "mv" -or "ln -s" before building a C library with headers exported this way. +directory.) You also can use HDR_ARCH_LIST to specify list of architectures. +Remember to provide the appropriate linux/asm directory via "mv" or "ln -s" +before building a C library with headers exported this way. The kernel header export infrastructure is maintained by David Woodhouse <dwmw2@infradead.org>. diff --git a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt index 631ad2f1b229..f0d3a8026a56 100644 --- a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt +++ b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt @@ -21,6 +21,7 @@ Contents: - SMP barrier pairing. - Examples of memory barrier sequences. - Read memory barriers vs load speculation. + - Transitivity (*) Explicit kernel barriers. @@ -959,6 +960,63 @@ the speculation will be cancelled and the value reloaded: retrieved : : +-------+ +TRANSITIVITY +------------ + +Transitivity is a deeply intuitive notion about ordering that is not +always provided by real computer systems. The following example +demonstrates transitivity (also called "cumulativity"): + + CPU 1 CPU 2 CPU 3 + ======================= ======================= ======================= + { X = 0, Y = 0 } + STORE X=1 LOAD X STORE Y=1 + <general barrier> <general barrier> + LOAD Y LOAD X + +Suppose that CPU 2's load from X returns 1 and its load from Y returns 0. +This indicates that CPU 2's load from X in some sense follows CPU 1's +store to X and that CPU 2's load from Y in some sense preceded CPU 3's +store to Y. The question is then "Can CPU 3's load from X return 0?" + +Because CPU 2's load from X in some sense came after CPU 1's store, it +is natural to expect that CPU 3's load from X must therefore return 1. +This expectation is an example of transitivity: if a load executing on +CPU A follows a load from the same variable executing on CPU B, then +CPU A's load must either return the same value that CPU B's load did, +or must return some later value. + +In the Linux kernel, use of general memory barriers guarantees +transitivity. Therefore, in the above example, if CPU 2's load from X +returns 1 and its load from Y returns 0, then CPU 3's load from X must +also return 1. + +However, transitivity is -not- guaranteed for read or write barriers. +For example, suppose that CPU 2's general barrier in the above example +is changed to a read barrier as shown below: + + CPU 1 CPU 2 CPU 3 + ======================= ======================= ======================= + { X = 0, Y = 0 } + STORE X=1 LOAD X STORE Y=1 + <read barrier> <general barrier> + LOAD Y LOAD X + +This substitution destroys transitivity: in this example, it is perfectly +legal for CPU 2's load from X to return 1, its load from Y to return 0, +and CPU 3's load from X to return 0. + +The key point is that although CPU 2's read barrier orders its pair +of loads, it does not guarantee to order CPU 1's store. Therefore, if +this example runs on a system where CPUs 1 and 2 share a store buffer +or a level of cache, CPU 2 might have early access to CPU 1's writes. +General barriers are therefore required to ensure that all CPUs agree +on the combined order of CPU 1's and CPU 2's accesses. + +To reiterate, if your code requires transitivity, use general barriers +throughout. + + ======================== EXPLICIT KERNEL BARRIERS ======================== diff --git a/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt index 57e7e9cc1870..8f485d72cf25 100644 --- a/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt +++ b/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt @@ -126,36 +126,51 @@ config options. -------------------------------- 4 sysfs files for memory hotplug -------------------------------- -All sections have their device information under /sys/devices/system/memory as +All sections have their device information in sysfs. Each section is part of +a memory block under /sys/devices/system/memory as /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX -(XXX is section id.) +(XXX is the section id.) -Now, XXX is defined as start_address_of_section / section_size. +Now, XXX is defined as (start_address_of_section / section_size) of the first +section contained in the memory block. The files 'phys_index' and +'end_phys_index' under each directory report the beginning and end section id's +for the memory block covered by the sysfs directory. It is expected that all +memory sections in this range are present and no memory holes exist in the +range. Currently there is no way to determine if there is a memory hole, but +the existence of one should not affect the hotplug capabilities of the memory +block. For example, assume 1GiB section size. A device for a memory starting at 0x100000000 is /sys/device/system/memory/memory4 (0x100000000 / 1Gib = 4) This device covers address range [0x100000000 ... 0x140000000) -Under each section, you can see 4 files. +Under each section, you can see 4 or 5 files, the end_phys_index file being +a recent addition and not present on older kernels. -/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_index +/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/start_phys_index +/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/end_phys_index /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_device /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/removable -'phys_index' : read-only and contains section id, same as XXX. -'state' : read-write - at read: contains online/offline state of memory. - at write: user can specify "online", "offline" command -'phys_device': read-only: designed to show the name of physical memory device. - This is not well implemented now. -'removable' : read-only: contains an integer value indicating - whether the memory section is removable or not - removable. A value of 1 indicates that the memory - section is removable and a value of 0 indicates that - it is not removable. +'phys_index' : read-only and contains section id of the first section + in the memory block, same as XXX. +'end_phys_index' : read-only and contains section id of the last section + in the memory block. +'state' : read-write + at read: contains online/offline state of memory. + at write: user can specify "online", "offline" command + which will be performed on al sections in the block. +'phys_device' : read-only: designed to show the name of physical memory + device. This is not well implemented now. +'removable' : read-only: contains an integer value indicating + whether the memory block is removable or not + removable. A value of 1 indicates that the memory + block is removable and a value of 0 indicates that + it is not removable. A memory block is removable only if + every section in the block is removable. NOTE: These directories/files appear after physical memory hotplug phase. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX index fe5c099b8fc8..4edd78dfb362 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX @@ -40,8 +40,6 @@ decnet.txt - info on using the DECnet networking layer in Linux. depca.txt - the Digital DEPCA/EtherWORKS DE1?? and DE2?? LANCE Ethernet driver -dgrs.txt - - the Digi International RightSwitch SE-X Ethernet driver dmfe.txt - info on the Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver. e100.txt @@ -50,8 +48,6 @@ e1000.txt - info on Intel's E1000 line of gigabit ethernet boards eql.txt - serial IP load balancing -ethertap.txt - - the Ethertap user space packet reception and transmission driver ewrk3.txt - the Digital EtherWORKS 3 DE203/4/5 Ethernet driver filter.txt @@ -104,8 +100,6 @@ tuntap.txt - TUN/TAP device driver, allowing user space Rx/Tx of packets. vortex.txt - info on using 3Com Vortex (3c590, 3c592, 3c595, 3c597) Ethernet cards. -wavelan.txt - - AT&T GIS (nee NCR) WaveLAN card: An Ethernet-like radio transceiver x25.txt - general info on X.25 development. x25-iface.txt diff --git a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..29ad4b106420 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic @@ -0,0 +1,327 @@ +Copyright (c) 2009-2010 QLogic Corporation +QLogic Linux qlcnic NIC Driver + +This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be +distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file. +You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the +GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as +Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2). + +You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file +under the following terms: + + 1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable), + must retain the above copyright notice, this list of + conditions and the following disclaimer. + + 2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above + copyright notice, this list of conditions and the + following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other + materials provided with the distribution. + + 3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to + endorse or promote products derived from this software + without specific prior written permission + +REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE, +THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY +EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE +IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR +BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, +EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED +TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, +DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON +ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, +OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY +OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. + +USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT +CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR +OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT, +TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN +ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN +COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM. + + +EXHIBIT A + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 + + Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + + 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + + 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices + stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in + whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any + part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third + parties under the terms of this License. + + c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively + when run, you must cause it, when started running for such + interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an + announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a + notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide + a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under + these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this + License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but + does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on + the Program is not required to print an announcement.) + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + + 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + + a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable + source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections + 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + + b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three + years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your + cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete + machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be + distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium + customarily used for software interchange; or, + + c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer + to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is + allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you + received the program in object code or executable form with such + an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + + 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + + 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + + 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + + 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any +later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + + 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + + NO WARRANTY + + 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/Makefile b/Documentation/networking/Makefile index 5aba7a33aeeb..24c308dd3fd1 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/networking/Makefile @@ -4,6 +4,8 @@ obj- := dummy.o # List of programs to build hostprogs-y := ifenslave +HOSTCFLAGS_ifenslave.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include + # Tell kbuild to always build the programs always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..18afcd8afd51 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt @@ -0,0 +1,240 @@ +[state: 27-01-2011] + +BATMAN-ADV +---------- + +Batman advanced is a new approach to wireless networking which +does no longer operate on the IP basis. Unlike the batman daemon, +which exchanges information using UDP packets and sets routing +tables, batman-advanced operates on ISO/OSI Layer 2 only and uses +and routes (or better: bridges) Ethernet Frames. It emulates a +virtual network switch of all nodes participating. Therefore all +nodes appear to be link local, thus all higher operating proto- +cols won't be affected by any changes within the network. You can +run almost any protocol above batman advanced, prominent examples +are: IPv4, IPv6, DHCP, IPX. + +Batman advanced was implemented as a Linux kernel driver to re- +duce the overhead to a minimum. It does not depend on any (other) +network driver, and can be used on wifi as well as ethernet lan, +vpn, etc ... (anything with ethernet-style layer 2). + +CONFIGURATION +------------- + +Load the batman-adv module into your kernel: + +# insmod batman-adv.ko + +The module is now waiting for activation. You must add some in- +terfaces on which batman can operate. After loading the module +batman advanced will scan your systems interfaces to search for +compatible interfaces. Once found, it will create subfolders in +the /sys directories of each supported interface, e.g. + +# ls /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/ +# iface_status mesh_iface + +If an interface does not have the "batman_adv" subfolder it prob- +ably is not supported. Not supported interfaces are: loopback, +non-ethernet and batman's own interfaces. + +Note: After the module was loaded it will continuously watch for +new interfaces to verify the compatibility. There is no need to +reload the module if you plug your USB wifi adapter into your ma- +chine after batman advanced was initially loaded. + +To activate a given interface simply write "bat0" into its +"mesh_iface" file inside the batman_adv subfolder: + +# echo bat0 > /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/mesh_iface + +Repeat this step for all interfaces you wish to add. Now batman +starts using/broadcasting on this/these interface(s). + +By reading the "iface_status" file you can check its status: + +# cat /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/iface_status +# active + +To deactivate an interface you have to write "none" into its +"mesh_iface" file: + +# echo none > /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/mesh_iface + + +All mesh wide settings can be found in batman's own interface +folder: + +# ls /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/ +# aggregated_ogms gw_bandwidth hop_penalty +# bonding gw_mode orig_interval +# fragmentation gw_sel_class vis_mode + + +There is a special folder for debugging informations: + +# ls /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/ +# gateways socket transtable_global vis_data +# originators softif_neigh transtable_local + + +Some of the files contain all sort of status information regard- +ing the mesh network. For example, you can view the table of +originators (mesh participants) with: + +# cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/originators + +Other files allow to change batman's behaviour to better fit your +requirements. For instance, you can check the current originator +interval (value in milliseconds which determines how often batman +sends its broadcast packets): + +# cat /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/orig_interval +# 1000 + +and also change its value: + +# echo 3000 > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/orig_interval + +In very mobile scenarios, you might want to adjust the originator +interval to a lower value. This will make the mesh more respon- +sive to topology changes, but will also increase the overhead. + + +USAGE +----- + +To make use of your newly created mesh, batman advanced provides +a new interface "bat0" which you should use from this point on. +All interfaces added to batman advanced are not relevant any +longer because batman handles them for you. Basically, one "hands +over" the data by using the batman interface and batman will make +sure it reaches its destination. + +The "bat0" interface can be used like any other regular inter- +face. It needs an IP address which can be either statically con- +figured or dynamically (by using DHCP or similar services): + +# NodeA: ifconfig bat0 192.168.0.1 +# NodeB: ifconfig bat0 192.168.0.2 +# NodeB: ping 192.168.0.1 + +Note: In order to avoid problems remove all IP addresses previ- +ously assigned to interfaces now used by batman advanced, e.g. + +# ifconfig eth0 0.0.0.0 + + +VISUALIZATION +------------- + +If you want topology visualization, at least one mesh node must +be configured as VIS-server: + +# echo "server" > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/vis_mode + +Each node is either configured as "server" or as "client" (de- +fault: "client"). Clients send their topology data to the server +next to them, and server synchronize with other servers. If there +is no server configured (default) within the mesh, no topology +information will be transmitted. With these "synchronizing +servers", there can be 1 or more vis servers sharing the same (or +at least very similar) data. + +When configured as server, you can get a topology snapshot of +your mesh: + +# cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/vis_data + +This raw output is intended to be easily parsable and convertable +with other tools. Have a look at the batctl README if you want a +vis output in dot or json format for instance and how those out- +puts could then be visualised in an image. + +The raw format consists of comma separated values per entry where +each entry is giving information about a certain source inter- +face. Each entry can/has to have the following values: +-> "mac" - mac address of an originator's source interface + (each line begins with it) +-> "TQ mac value" - src mac's link quality towards mac address + of a neighbor originator's interface which + is being used for routing +-> "HNA mac" - HNA announced by source mac +-> "PRIMARY" - this is a primary interface +-> "SEC mac" - secondary mac address of source + (requires preceding PRIMARY) + +The TQ value has a range from 4 to 255 with 255 being the best. +The HNA entries are showing which hosts are connected to the mesh +via bat0 or being bridged into the mesh network. The PRIMARY/SEC +values are only applied on primary interfaces + + +LOGGING/DEBUGGING +----------------- + +All error messages, warnings and information messages are sent to +the kernel log. Depending on your operating system distribution +this can be read in one of a number of ways. Try using the com- +mands: dmesg, logread, or looking in the files /var/log/kern.log +or /var/log/syslog. All batman-adv messages are prefixed with +"batman-adv:" So to see just these messages try + +# dmesg | grep batman-adv + +When investigating problems with your mesh network it is some- +times necessary to see more detail debug messages. This must be +enabled when compiling the batman-adv module. When building bat- +man-adv as part of kernel, use "make menuconfig" and enable the +option "B.A.T.M.A.N. debugging". + +Those additional debug messages can be accessed using a special +file in debugfs + +# cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/log + +The additional debug output is by default disabled. It can be en- +abled during run time. Following log_levels are defined: + +0 - All debug output disabled +1 - Enable messages related to routing / flooding / broadcasting +2 - Enable route or hna added / changed / deleted +3 - Enable all messages + +The debug output can be changed at runtime using the file +/sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level. e.g. + +# echo 2 > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level + +will enable debug messages for when routes or HNAs change. + + +BATCTL +------ + +As batman advanced operates on layer 2 all hosts participating in +the virtual switch are completely transparent for all protocols +above layer 2. Therefore the common diagnosis tools do not work +as expected. To overcome these problems batctl was created. At +the moment the batctl contains ping, traceroute, tcpdump and +interfaces to the kernel module settings. + +For more information, please see the manpage (man batctl). + +batctl is available on http://www.open-mesh.org/ + + +CONTACT +------- + +Please send us comments, experiences, questions, anything :) + +IRC: #batman on irc.freenode.org +Mailing-list: b.a.t.m.a.n@open-mesh.org (optional subscription + at https://lists.open-mesh.org/mm/listinfo/b.a.t.m.a.n) + +You can also contact the Authors: + +Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt index 5dc638791d97..b36e741e94db 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt @@ -49,7 +49,8 @@ Table of Contents 3.3 Configuring Bonding Manually with Ifenslave 3.3.1 Configuring Multiple Bonds Manually 3.4 Configuring Bonding Manually via Sysfs -3.5 Overriding Configuration for Special Cases +3.5 Configuration with Interfaces Support +3.6 Overriding Configuration for Special Cases 4. Querying Bonding Configuration 4.1 Bonding Configuration @@ -161,8 +162,8 @@ onwards) do not have /usr/include/linux symbolically linked to the default kernel source include directory. SECOND IMPORTANT NOTE: - If you plan to configure bonding using sysfs, you do not need -to use ifenslave. + If you plan to configure bonding using sysfs or using the +/etc/network/interfaces file, you do not need to use ifenslave. 2. Bonding Driver Options ========================= @@ -779,22 +780,26 @@ resend_igmp You can configure bonding using either your distro's network initialization scripts, or manually using either ifenslave or the -sysfs interface. Distros generally use one of two packages for the -network initialization scripts: initscripts or sysconfig. Recent -versions of these packages have support for bonding, while older +sysfs interface. Distros generally use one of three packages for the +network initialization scripts: initscripts, sysconfig or interfaces. +Recent versions of these packages have support for bonding, while older versions do not. We will first describe the options for configuring bonding for -distros using versions of initscripts and sysconfig with full or -partial support for bonding, then provide information on enabling +distros using versions of initscripts, sysconfig and interfaces with full +or partial support for bonding, then provide information on enabling bonding without support from the network initialization scripts (i.e., older versions of initscripts or sysconfig). - If you're unsure whether your distro uses sysconfig or -initscripts, or don't know if it's new enough, have no fear. + If you're unsure whether your distro uses sysconfig, +initscripts or interfaces, or don't know if it's new enough, have no fear. Determining this is fairly straightforward. - First, issue the command: + First, look for a file called interfaces in /etc/network directory. +If this file is present in your system, then your system use interfaces. See +Configuration with Interfaces Support. + + Else, issue the command: $ rpm -qf /sbin/ifup @@ -1327,8 +1332,62 @@ echo 2000 > /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/arp_interval echo +eth2 > /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/slaves echo +eth3 > /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/slaves -3.5 Overriding Configuration for Special Cases +3.5 Configuration with Interfaces Support +----------------------------------------- + + This section applies to distros which use /etc/network/interfaces file +to describe network interface configuration, most notably Debian and it's +derivatives. + + The ifup and ifdown commands on Debian don't support bonding out of +the box. The ifenslave-2.6 package should be installed to provide bonding +support. Once installed, this package will provide bond-* options to be used +into /etc/network/interfaces. + + Note that ifenslave-2.6 package will load the bonding module and use +the ifenslave command when appropriate. + +Example Configurations +---------------------- + +In /etc/network/interfaces, the following stanza will configure bond0, in +active-backup mode, with eth0 and eth1 as slaves. + +auto bond0 +iface bond0 inet dhcp + bond-slaves eth0 eth1 + bond-mode active-backup + bond-miimon 100 + bond-primary eth0 eth1 + +If the above configuration doesn't work, you might have a system using +upstart for system startup. This is most notably true for recent +Ubuntu versions. The following stanza in /etc/network/interfaces will +produce the same result on those systems. + +auto bond0 +iface bond0 inet dhcp + bond-slaves none + bond-mode active-backup + bond-miimon 100 + +auto eth0 +iface eth0 inet manual + bond-master bond0 + bond-primary eth0 eth1 + +auto eth1 +iface eth1 inet manual + bond-master bond0 + bond-primary eth0 eth1 + +For a full list of bond-* supported options in /etc/network/interfaces and some +more advanced examples tailored to you particular distros, see the files in +/usr/share/doc/ifenslave-2.6. + +3.6 Overriding Configuration for Special Cases ---------------------------------------------- + When using the bonding driver, the physical port which transmits a frame is typically selected by the bonding driver, and is not relevant to the user or system administrator. The output port is simply selected using the policies of @@ -2499,18 +2558,15 @@ enslaved. 16. Resources and Links ======================= -The latest version of the bonding driver can be found in the latest + The latest version of the bonding driver can be found in the latest version of the linux kernel, found on http://kernel.org -The latest version of this document can be found in either the latest -kernel source (named Documentation/networking/bonding.txt), or on the -bonding sourceforge site: - -http://www.sourceforge.net/projects/bonding + The latest version of this document can be found in the latest kernel +source (named Documentation/networking/bonding.txt). -Discussions regarding the bonding driver take place primarily on the -bonding-devel mailing list, hosted at sourceforge.net. If you have -questions or problems, post them to the list. The list address is: + Discussions regarding the usage of the bonding driver take place on the +bonding-devel mailing list, hosted at sourceforge.net. If you have questions or +problems, post them to the list. The list address is: bonding-devel@lists.sourceforge.net @@ -2519,6 +2575,17 @@ be found at: https://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/bonding-devel + Discussions regarding the developpement of the bonding driver take place +on the main Linux network mailing list, hosted at vger.kernel.org. The list +address is: + +netdev@vger.kernel.org + + The administrative interface (to subscribe or unsubscribe) can +be found at: + +http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#netdev + Donald Becker's Ethernet Drivers and diag programs may be found at : - http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://www.scyld.com/network/ diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt b/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt index bec69a8a1697..a7ba5e4e2c91 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ In order to use the Ethernet bridging functionality, you'll need the userspace tools. These programs and documentation are available -at http://www.linux-foundation.org/en/Net:Bridge. The download page is +at http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/Net:Bridge. The download page is http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/bridge. If you still have questions, don't hesitate to post to the mailing list -(more info http://lists.osdl.org/mailman/listinfo/bridge). +(more info https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bridge). diff --git a/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt b/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt index 61d7c9247453..0cb8cb9098f4 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ the physical hardware, both with regard to SPI and to GPIOs. This function is called by the CAIF SPI interface to give you a chance to set up your hardware to be ready to receive a stream of data from the master. The xfer structure contains - both physical and logical adresses, as well as the total length + both physical and logical addresses, as well as the total length of the transfer in both directions.The dev parameter can be used to map to different CAIF SPI slave devices. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index 271d524a4c8d..d718bc2ff1cf 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -38,15 +38,35 @@ The Linux DCCP implementation does not currently support all the features that a specified in RFCs 4340...42. The known bugs are at: - http://linux-net.osdl.org/index.php/TODO#DCCP + http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/networking/todo#DCCP For more up-to-date versions of the DCCP implementation, please consider using the experimental DCCP test tree; instructions for checking this out are on: -http://linux-net.osdl.org/index.php/DCCP_Testing#Experimental_DCCP_source_tree +http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/networking/dccp_testing#Experimental_DCCP_source_tree Socket options ============== +DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_ID sets the dequeuing policy for outgoing packets. It takes +a policy ID as argument and can only be set before the connection (i.e. changes +during an established connection are not supported). Currently, two policies are +defined: the "simple" policy (DCCPQ_POLICY_SIMPLE), which does nothing special, +and a priority-based variant (DCCPQ_POLICY_PRIO). The latter allows to pass an +u32 priority value as ancillary data to sendmsg(), where higher numbers indicate +a higher packet priority (similar to SO_PRIORITY). This ancillary data needs to +be formatted using a cmsg(3) message header filled in as follows: + cmsg->cmsg_level = SOL_DCCP; + cmsg->cmsg_type = DCCP_SCM_PRIORITY; + cmsg->cmsg_len = CMSG_LEN(sizeof(uint32_t)); /* or CMSG_LEN(4) */ + +DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_TXQLEN sets the maximum length of the output queue. A zero +value is always interpreted as unbounded queue length. If different from zero, +the interpretation of this parameter depends on the current dequeuing policy +(see above): the "simple" policy will enforce a fixed queue size by returning +EAGAIN, whereas the "prio" policy enforces a fixed queue length by dropping the +lowest-priority packet first. The default value for this parameter is +initialised from /proc/sys/net/dccp/default/tx_qlen. + DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVICE sets the service. The specification mandates use of service codes (RFC 4340, sec. 8.1.2); if this socket option is not set, the socket will fall back to 0 (which means that no meaningful service code @@ -147,6 +167,7 @@ rx_ccid = 2 seq_window = 100 The initial sequence window (sec. 7.5.2) of the sender. This influences the local ackno validity and the remote seqno validity windows (7.5.1). + Values in the range Wmin = 32 (RFC 4340, 7.5.2) up to 2^32-1 can be set. tx_qlen = 5 The size of the transmit buffer in packets. A value of 0 corresponds diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dns_resolver.txt b/Documentation/networking/dns_resolver.txt index aefd1e681804..04ca06325b08 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dns_resolver.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dns_resolver.txt @@ -61,7 +61,6 @@ before the more general line given above as the first match is the one taken. create dns_resolver foo:* * /usr/sbin/dns.foo %k - ===== USAGE ===== @@ -104,6 +103,14 @@ implemented in the module can be called after doing: returned also. +=============================== +READING DNS KEYS FROM USERSPACE +=============================== + +Keys of dns_resolver type can be read from userspace using keyctl_read() or +"keyctl read/print/pipe". + + ========= MECHANISM ========= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e100.txt b/Documentation/networking/e100.txt index 944aa55e79f8..162f323a7a1f 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/e100.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/e100.txt @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Tx Descriptors: Number of transmit descriptors. A transmit descriptor is a data ethtool -G eth? tx n, where n is the number of desired tx descriptors. Speed/Duplex: The driver auto-negotiates the link speed and duplex settings by - default. Ethtool can be used as follows to force speed/duplex. + default. The ethtool utility can be used as follows to force speed/duplex. ethtool -s eth? autoneg off speed {10|100} duplex {full|half} @@ -126,30 +126,21 @@ Additional Configurations ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. Ethtool + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. The latest release of ethtool can be found from - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. - - NOTE: Ethtool 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. Support - for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by upgrading - ethtool to ethtool-1.8.1. - + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) --------------------------- - WoL is provided through the Ethtool* utility. Ethtool is included with Red - Hat* 8.0. For other Linux distributions, download and install Ethtool from - the following website: http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. - - For instructions on enabling WoL with Ethtool, refer to the Ethtool man page. + WoL is provided through the ethtool* utility. For instructions on enabling + WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page. WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e100 driver must be loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system. - NAPI ---- diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt index d9271e74e488..71ca95855671 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ InterruptThrottleRate --------------------- (not supported on Intel(R) 82542, 82543 or 82544-based adapters) Valid Range: 0,1,3,4,100-100000 (0=off, 1=dynamic, 3=dynamic conservative, - 4=simplified balancing) + 4=simplified balancing) Default Value: 3 The driver can limit the amount of interrupts per second that the adapter @@ -124,8 +124,8 @@ InterruptThrottleRate is set to mode 1. In this mode, which operates the same as mode 3, the InterruptThrottleRate will be increased stepwise to 70000 for traffic in class "Lowest latency". -In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of Tx and -Rx traffic. If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the +In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of TX and +RX traffic. If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the interrupt rate will drop as low as 2000 interrupts per second. If the traffic is mostly transmit or mostly receive, the interrupt rate could be as high as 8000. @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ NOTE: Depending on the available system resources, the request for a TxDescriptorStep ---------------- Valid Range: 1 (use every Tx Descriptor) - 4 (use every 4th Tx Descriptor) + 4 (use every 4th Tx Descriptor) Default Value: 1 (use every Tx Descriptor) @@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ Valid Range: 0-xxxxxxx (0=off) Default Value: 256 Usage: insmod e1000.ko copybreak=128 -Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh Rx +Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh RX buffer before handing it up the stack. This parameter is different than other parameters, in that it is a @@ -431,15 +431,15 @@ Additional Configurations Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. Ethtool + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. The latest release of ethtool can be found from - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) --------------------------- - WoL is configured through the Ethtool* utility. + WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility. WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000 driver must be diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt b/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt index 6aa048badf32..97b5ba942ebf 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Linux* Driver for Intel(R) Network Connection -=============================================================== +============================================= Intel Gigabit Linux driver. Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation. @@ -61,6 +61,12 @@ per second, even if more packets have come in. This reduces interrupt load on the system and can lower CPU utilization under heavy load, but will increase latency as packets are not processed as quickly. +The default behaviour of the driver previously assumed a static +InterruptThrottleRate value of 8000, providing a good fallback value for +all traffic types, but lacking in small packet performance and latency. +The hardware can handle many more small packets per second however, and +for this reason an adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm was implemented. + The driver has two adaptive modes (setting 1 or 3) in which it dynamically adjusts the InterruptThrottleRate value based on the traffic that it receives. After determining the type of incoming traffic in the last @@ -86,8 +92,8 @@ InterruptThrottleRate is set to mode 1. In this mode, which operates the same as mode 3, the InterruptThrottleRate will be increased stepwise to 70000 for traffic in class "Lowest latency". -In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of Tx and -Rx traffic. If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal the +In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of TX and +RX traffic. If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the interrupt rate will drop as low as 2000 interrupts per second. If the traffic is mostly transmit or mostly receive, the interrupt rate could be as high as 8000. @@ -177,7 +183,7 @@ Copybreak Valid Range: 0-xxxxxxx (0=off) Default Value: 256 -Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh Rx +Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh RX buffer before handing it up the stack. This parameter is different than other parameters, in that it is a @@ -223,17 +229,17 @@ loading or enabling the driver, try disabling this feature. WriteProtectNVM --------------- -Valid Range: 0-1 -Default Value: 1 (enabled) - -Set the hardware to ignore all write/erase cycles to the GbE region in the -ICHx NVM (non-volatile memory). This feature can be disabled by the -WriteProtectNVM module parameter (enabled by default) only after a hardware -reset, but the machine must be power cycled before trying to enable writes. - -Note: the kernel boot option iomem=relaxed may need to be set if the kernel -config option CONFIG_STRICT_DEVMEM=y, if the root user wants to write the -NVM from user space via ethtool. +Valid Range: 0,1 +Default Value: 1 + +If set to 1, configure the hardware to ignore all write/erase cycles to the +GbE region in the ICHx NVM (in order to prevent accidental corruption of the +NVM). This feature can be disabled by setting the parameter to 0 during initial +driver load. +NOTE: The machine must be power cycled (full off/on) when enabling NVM writes +via setting the parameter to zero. Once the NVM has been locked (via the +parameter at 1 when the driver loads) it cannot be unlocked except via power +cycle. Additional Configurations ========================= @@ -259,32 +265,30 @@ Additional Configurations - Some adapters limit Jumbo Frames sized packets to a maximum of 4096 bytes and some adapters do not support Jumbo Frames. - Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. We - strongly recommend downloading the latest version of Ethtool at: + strongly recommend downloading the latest version of ethtool at: - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ Speed and Duplex ---------------- - Speed and Duplex are configured through the Ethtool* utility. For - instructions, refer to the Ethtool man page. + Speed and Duplex are configured through the ethtool* utility. For + instructions, refer to the ethtool man page. Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) --------------------------- - WoL is configured through the Ethtool* utility. For instructions on - enabling WoL with Ethtool, refer to the Ethtool man page. + WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility. For instructions on + enabling WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page. WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000e driver must be loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system. In most cases Wake On LAN is only supported on port A for multiple port - adapters. To verify if a port supports Wake on LAN run ethtool eth<X>. - + adapters. To verify if a port supports Wake on Lan run ethtool eth<X>. Support ======= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/generic_netlink.txt b/Documentation/networking/generic_netlink.txt index d4f8b8b9b53c..3e071115ca90 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/generic_netlink.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/generic_netlink.txt @@ -1,3 +1,3 @@ A wiki document on how to use Generic Netlink can be found here: - * http://linux-net.osdl.org/index.php/Generic_Netlink_HOWTO + * http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/networking/generic_netlink_howto diff --git a/Documentation/networking/igb.txt b/Documentation/networking/igb.txt index ab2d71831892..98953c0d5342 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/igb.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/igb.txt @@ -36,6 +36,7 @@ Default Value: 0 This parameter adds support for SR-IOV. It causes the driver to spawn up to max_vfs worth of virtual function. + Additional Configurations ========================= @@ -60,15 +61,16 @@ Additional Configurations Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest + version of ethtool can be found at: - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) --------------------------- - WoL is configured through the Ethtool* utility. + WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility. - For instructions on enabling WoL with Ethtool, refer to the Ethtool man page. + For instructions on enabling WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page. WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the igb driver must be @@ -91,31 +93,6 @@ Additional Configurations REQUIREMENTS: MSI-X support is required for Multiqueue. If MSI-X is not found, the system will fallback to MSI or to Legacy interrupts. - LRO - --- - Large Receive Offload (LRO) is a technique for increasing inbound throughput - of high-bandwidth network connections by reducing CPU overhead. It works by - aggregating multiple incoming packets from a single stream into a larger - buffer before they are passed higher up the networking stack, thus reducing - the number of packets that have to be processed. LRO combines multiple - Ethernet frames into a single receive in the stack, thereby potentially - decreasing CPU utilization for receives. - - NOTE: You need to have inet_lro enabled via either the CONFIG_INET_LRO or - CONFIG_INET_LRO_MODULE kernel config option. Additionally, if - CONFIG_INET_LRO_MODULE is used, the inet_lro module needs to be loaded - before the igb driver. - - You can verify that the driver is using LRO by looking at these counters in - Ethtool: - - lro_aggregated - count of total packets that were combined - lro_flushed - counts the number of packets flushed out of LRO - lro_no_desc - counts the number of times an LRO descriptor was not available - for the LRO packet - - NOTE: IPv6 and UDP are not supported by LRO. - Support ======= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt b/Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt index 056028138d9c..cbfe4ee65533 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt @@ -58,9 +58,11 @@ Additional Configurations Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool + version 3.0 or later is required for this functionality, although we + strongly recommend downloading the latest version at: - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ Support ======= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index 3c5e465296e1..d3d653a5f9b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -11,7 +11,9 @@ ip_forward - BOOLEAN for routers) ip_default_ttl - INTEGER - default 64 + Default value of TTL field (Time To Live) for outgoing (but not + forwarded) IP packets. Should be between 1 and 255 inclusive. + Default: 64 (as recommended by RFC1700) ip_no_pmtu_disc - BOOLEAN Disable Path MTU Discovery. @@ -185,7 +187,7 @@ tcp_cookie_size - INTEGER tcp_dsack - BOOLEAN Allows TCP to send "duplicate" SACKs. -tcp_ecn - BOOLEAN +tcp_ecn - INTEGER Enable Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) in TCP. ECN is only used when both ends of the TCP flow support it. It is useful to avoid losses due to congestion (when the bottleneck router supports @@ -278,6 +280,17 @@ tcp_max_orphans - INTEGER more aggressively. Let me to remind again: each orphan eats up to ~64K of unswappable memory. +tcp_max_ssthresh - INTEGER + Limited Slow-Start for TCP with large congestion windows (cwnd) defined in + RFC3742. Limited slow-start is a mechanism to limit growth of the cwnd + on the region where cwnd is larger than tcp_max_ssthresh. TCP increases cwnd + by at most tcp_max_ssthresh segments, and by at least tcp_max_ssthresh/2 + segments per RTT when the cwnd is above tcp_max_ssthresh. + If TCP connection increased cwnd to thousands (or tens of thousands) segments, + and thousands of packets were being dropped during slow-start, you can set + tcp_max_ssthresh to improve performance for new TCP connection. + Default: 0 (off) + tcp_max_syn_backlog - INTEGER Maximal number of remembered connection requests, which are still did not receive an acknowledgment from connecting client. @@ -708,10 +721,28 @@ igmp_max_memberships - INTEGER Change the maximum number of multicast groups we can subscribe to. Default: 20 -conf/interface/* changes special settings per interface (where "interface" is - the name of your network interface) -conf/all/* is special, changes the settings for all interfaces + Theoretical maximum value is bounded by having to send a membership + report in a single datagram (i.e. the report can't span multiple + datagrams, or risk confusing the switch and leaving groups you don't + intend to). + + The number of supported groups 'M' is bounded by the number of group + report entries you can fit into a single datagram of 65535 bytes. + + M = 65536-sizeof (ip header)/(sizeof(Group record)) + + Group records are variable length, with a minimum of 12 bytes. + So net.ipv4.igmp_max_memberships should not be set higher than: + + (65536-24) / 12 = 5459 + + The value 5459 assumes no IP header options, so in practice + this number may be lower. + + conf/interface/* changes special settings per interface (where + "interface" is the name of your network interface) + conf/all/* is special, changes the settings for all interfaces log_martians - BOOLEAN Log packets with impossible addresses to kernel log. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt b/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt index a0d0ffb5e584..e196f16df313 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt @@ -309,15 +309,15 @@ Additional Configurations Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. Ethtool + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. The latest release of ethtool can be found from - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ - NOTE: Ethtool 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. Support - for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by upgrading - to the latest version. + NOTE: The ethtool version 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. + Support for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by + upgrading to the latest version. NAPI diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt b/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt index eeb68685c788..af77ed3c4172 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt @@ -1,107 +1,126 @@ Linux Base Driver for 10 Gigabit PCI Express Intel(R) Network Connection ======================================================================== -March 10, 2009 - +Intel Gigabit Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation. Contents ======== -- In This Release - Identifying Your Adapter -- Building and Installation - Additional Configurations +- Performance Tuning +- Known Issues - Support +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== +The driver in this release is compatible with 82598 and 82599-based Intel +Network Connections. -In This Release -=============== +For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter & +Driver ID Guide at: -This file describes the ixgbe Linux Base Driver for the 10 Gigabit PCI -Express Intel(R) Network Connection. This driver includes support for -Itanium(R)2-based systems. + http://support.intel.com/support/network/sb/CS-012904.htm -For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation -supplied with your 10 Gigabit adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply -to use with Linux. +SFP+ Devices with Pluggable Optics +---------------------------------- -The following features are available in this kernel: - - Native VLANs - - Channel Bonding (teaming) - - SNMP - - Generic Receive Offload - - Data Center Bridging +82599-BASED ADAPTERS -Channel Bonding documentation can be found in the Linux kernel source: -/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +NOTES: If your 82599-based Intel(R) Network Adapter came with Intel optics, or +is an Intel(R) Ethernet Server Adapter X520-2, then it only supports Intel +optics and/or the direct attach cables listed below. -Ethtool, lspci, and ifconfig can be used to display device and driver -specific information. +When 82599-based SFP+ devices are connected back to back, they should be set to +the same Speed setting via ethtool. Results may vary if you mix speed settings. +82598-based adapters support all passive direct attach cables that comply +with SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications. Active direct attach +cables are not supported. +Supplier Type Part Numbers -Identifying Your Adapter -======================== +SR Modules +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) FTLX8571D3BCV-IT +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) AFBR-703SDDZ-IN1 +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) AFBR-703SDZ-IN2 +LR Modules +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) FTLX1471D3BCV-IT +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) AFCT-701SDDZ-IN1 +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) AFCT-701SDZ-IN2 -This driver supports devices based on the 82598 controller and the 82599 -controller. +The following is a list of 3rd party SFP+ modules and direct attach cables that +have received some testing. Not all modules are applicable to all devices. -For specific information on identifying which adapter you have, please visit: +Supplier Type Part Numbers - http://support.intel.com/support/network/sb/CS-008441.htm +Finisar SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate FTLX8571D3BCL +Avago SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate AFBR-700SDZ +Finisar SFP+ LR bailed, 10g single rate FTLX1471D3BCL +Finisar DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (No Bail) FTLX8571D3QCV-IT +Avago DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (No Bail) AFBR-703SDZ-IN1 +Finisar DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (No Bail) FTLX1471D3QCV-IT +Avago DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (No Bail) AFCT-701SDZ-IN1 +Finistar 1000BASE-T SFP FCLF8522P2BTL +Avago 1000BASE-T SFP ABCU-5710RZ -Building and Installation -========================= +82599-based adapters support all passive and active limiting direct attach +cables that comply with SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications. -select m for "Intel(R) 10GbE PCI Express adapters support" located at: - Location: - -> Device Drivers - -> Network device support (NETDEVICES [=y]) - -> Ethernet (10000 Mbit) (NETDEV_10000 [=y]) +Laser turns off for SFP+ when ifconfig down +------------------------------------------- +"ifconfig down" turns off the laser for 82599-based SFP+ fiber adapters. +"ifconfig up" turns on the later. -1. make modules & make modules_install -2. Load the module: +82598-BASED ADAPTERS -# modprobe ixgbe +NOTES for 82598-Based Adapters: +- Intel(R) Network Adapters that support removable optical modules only support + their original module type (i.e., the Intel(R) 10 Gigabit SR Dual Port + Express Module only supports SR optical modules). If you plug in a different + type of module, the driver will not load. +- Hot Swapping/hot plugging optical modules is not supported. +- Only single speed, 10 gigabit modules are supported. +- LAN on Motherboard (LOMs) may support DA, SR, or LR modules. Other module + types are not supported. Please see your system documentation for details. - The insmod command can be used if the full - path to the driver module is specified. For example: +The following is a list of 3rd party SFP+ modules and direct attach cables that +have received some testing. Not all modules are applicable to all devices. - insmod /lib/modules/<KERNEL VERSION>/kernel/drivers/net/ixgbe/ixgbe.ko +Supplier Type Part Numbers - With 2.6 based kernels also make sure that older ixgbe drivers are - removed from the kernel, before loading the new module: +Finisar SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate FTLX8571D3BCL +Avago SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate AFBR-700SDZ +Finisar SFP+ LR bailed, 10g single rate FTLX1471D3BCL - rmmod ixgbe; modprobe ixgbe +82598-based adapters support all passive direct attach cables that comply +with SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications. Active direct attach +cables are not supported. -3. Assign an IP address to the interface by entering the following, where - x is the interface number: - ifconfig ethx <IP_address> +Flow Control +------------ +Ethernet Flow Control (IEEE 802.3x) can be configured with ethtool to enable +receiving and transmitting pause frames for ixgbe. When TX is enabled, PAUSE +frames are generated when the receive packet buffer crosses a predefined +threshold. When rx is enabled, the transmit unit will halt for the time delay +specified when a PAUSE frame is received. -4. Verify that the interface works. Enter the following, where <IP_address> - is the IP address for another machine on the same subnet as the interface - that is being tested: +Flow Control is enabled by default. If you want to disable a flow control +capable link partner, use ethtool: - ping <IP_address> + ethtool -A eth? autoneg off RX off TX off +NOTE: For 82598 backplane cards entering 1 gig mode, flow control default +behavior is changed to off. Flow control in 1 gig mode on these devices can +lead to Tx hangs. Additional Configurations ========================= - Viewing Link Messages - --------------------- - Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is - restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on - your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following: - - dmesg -n 8 - - NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. - - Jumbo Frames ------------ The driver supports Jumbo Frames for all adapters. Jumbo Frames support is @@ -123,13 +142,8 @@ Additional Configurations other protocols besides TCP. It's also safe to use with configurations that are problematic for LRO, namely bridging and iSCSI. - GRO is enabled by default in the driver. Future versions of ethtool will - support disabling and re-enabling GRO on the fly. - - Data Center Bridging, aka DCB ----------------------------- - DCB is a configuration Quality of Service implementation in hardware. It uses the VLAN priority tag (802.1p) to filter traffic. That means that there are 8 different priorities that traffic can be filtered into. @@ -163,24 +177,71 @@ Additional Configurations http://e1000.sf.net - Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. Ethtool - version 3.0 or later is required for this functionality. + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest + ethtool version is required for this functionality. The latest release of ethtool can be found from - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ - - NAPI + FCoE ---- + This release of the ixgbe driver contains new code to enable users to use + Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) and Data Center Bridging (DCB) + functionality that is supported by the 82598-based hardware. This code has + no default effect on the regular driver operation, and configuring DCB and + FCoE is outside the scope of this driver README. Refer to + http://www.open-fcoe.org/ for FCoE project information and contact + e1000-eedc@lists.sourceforge.net for DCB information. + + MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature + ---------------------------------- + When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by + the hardware and not transmitted. An interrupt is sent to the PF driver + notifying it of the spoof attempt. + + When a spoofed packet is detected the PF driver will send the following + message to the system log (displayed by the "dmesg" command): + + Spoof event(s) detected on VF (n) + + Where n=the VF that attempted to do the spoofing. + + +Performance Tuning +================== + +An excellent article on performance tuning can be found at: + +http://www.redhat.com/promo/summit/2008/downloads/pdf/Thursday/Mark_Wagner.pdf + + +Known Issues +============ + + Enabling SR-IOV in a 32-bit Microsoft* Windows* Server 2008 Guest OS using + Intel (R) 82576-based GbE or Intel (R) 82599-based 10GbE controller under KVM + ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + KVM Hypervisor/VMM supports direct assignment of a PCIe device to a VM. This + includes traditional PCIe devices, as well as SR-IOV-capable devices using + Intel 82576-based and 82599-based controllers. + + While direct assignment of a PCIe device or an SR-IOV Virtual Function (VF) + to a Linux-based VM running 2.6.32 or later kernel works fine, there is a + known issue with Microsoft Windows Server 2008 VM that results in a "yellow + bang" error. This problem is within the KVM VMM itself, not the Intel driver, + or the SR-IOV logic of the VMM, but rather that KVM emulates an older CPU + model for the guests, and this older CPU model does not support MSI-X + interrupts, which is a requirement for Intel SR-IOV. - NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the ixgbe driver. NAPI is enabled - by default in the driver. + If you wish to use the Intel 82576 or 82599-based controllers in SR-IOV mode + with KVM and a Microsoft Windows Server 2008 guest try the following + workaround. The workaround is to tell KVM to emulate a different model of CPU + when using qemu to create the KVM guest: - See www.cyberus.ca/~hadi/usenix-paper.tgz for more information on NAPI. + "-cpu qemu64,model=13" Support diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt b/Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt index 21dd5d15b6b4..5a91a41fa946 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt @@ -35,10 +35,6 @@ Driver ID Guide at: Known Issues/Troubleshooting ============================ - Unloading Physical Function (PF) Driver Causes System Reboots When VM is - Running and VF is Loaded on the VM - ------------------------------------------------------------------------ - Do not unload the PF driver (ixgbe) while VFs are assigned to guests. Support ======= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt index 24ad2adba6e5..81003581f47a 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt @@ -154,9 +154,28 @@ connections, one per accept()'d socket. write(cfd, msg, msglen); } -Connections are established between two endpoints by a "third party" -application. This means that both endpoints are passive; so connect() -is not possible. +Connections are traditionally established between two endpoints by a +"third party" application. This means that both endpoints are passive. + + +As of Linux kernel version 2.6.39, it is also possible to connect +two endpoints directly, using connect() on the active side. This is +intended to support the newer Nokia Wireless Modem API, as found in +e.g. the Nokia Slim Modem in the ST-Ericsson U8500 platform: + + struct sockaddr_spn spn; + int fd; + + fd = socket(PF_PHONET, SOCK_SEQPACKET, PN_PROTO_PIPE); + memset(&spn, 0, sizeof(spn)); + spn.spn_family = AF_PHONET; + spn.spn_obj = ...; + spn.spn_dev = ...; + spn.spn_resource = 0xD9; + connect(fd, (struct sockaddr *)&spn, sizeof(spn)); + /* normal I/O here ... */ + close(fd); + WARNING: When polling a connected pipe socket for writability, there is an @@ -181,45 +200,9 @@ The pipe protocol provides two socket options at the SOL_PNPIPE level: interface index of the network interface created by PNPIPE_ENCAP, or zero if encapsulation is off. - -Phonet Pipe-controller Implementation -------------------------------------- - -Phonet Pipe-controller is enabled by selecting the CONFIG_PHONET_PIPECTRLR Kconfig -option. It is useful when communicating with those Nokia Modems which do not -implement Pipe controller in them e.g. Nokia Slim Modem used in ST-Ericsson -U8500 platform. - -The implementation is based on the Data Connection Establishment Sequence -depicted in 'Nokia Wireless Modem API - Wireless_modem_user_guide.pdf' -document. - -It allows a phonet sequenced socket (host-pep) to initiate a Pipe connection -between itself and a remote pipe-end point (e.g. modem). - -The implementation adds socket options at SOL_PNPIPE level: - - PNPIPE_PIPE_HANDLE - It accepts an integer argument for setting value of pipe handle. - - PNPIPE_ENABLE accepts one integer value (int). If set to zero, the pipe - is disabled. If the value is non-zero, the pipe is enabled. If the pipe - is not (yet) connected, ENOTCONN is error is returned. - -The implementation also adds socket 'connect'. On calling the 'connect', pipe -will be created between the source socket and the destination, and the pipe -state will be set to PIPE_DISABLED. - -After a pipe has been created and enabled successfully, the Pipe data can be -exchanged between the host-pep and remote-pep (modem). - -User-space would typically follow below sequence with Pipe controller:- --socket --bind --setsockopt for PNPIPE_PIPE_HANDLE --connect --setsockopt for PNPIPE_ENCAP_IP --setsockopt for PNPIPE_ENABLE + PNPIPE_HANDLE is a read-only integer value. It contains the underlying + identifier ("pipe handle") of the pipe. This is only defined for + socket descriptors that are already connected or being connected. Authors diff --git a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt index 7ee770b5ef5f..80a7a3454902 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ This is the driver for the MAC 10/100/1000 on-chip Ethernet controllers (Synopsys IP blocks); it has been fully tested on STLinux platforms. Currently this network device driver is for all STM embedded MAC/GMAC -(7xxx SoCs). +(7xxx SoCs). Other platforms start using it i.e. ARM SPEAr. DWC Ether MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.41a and DWC Ether MAC 10/100 Universal version 4.0 have been used for developing the first code @@ -95,9 +95,14 @@ Several information came from the platform; please refer to the driver's Header file in include/linux directory. struct plat_stmmacenet_data { - int bus_id; - int pbl; - int has_gmac; + int bus_id; + int pbl; + int clk_csr; + int has_gmac; + int enh_desc; + int tx_coe; + int bugged_jumbo; + int pmt; void (*fix_mac_speed)(void *priv, unsigned int speed); void (*bus_setup)(unsigned long ioaddr); #ifdef CONFIG_STM_DRIVERS @@ -114,6 +119,12 @@ Where: registers (on STM platforms); - has_gmac: GMAC core is on board (get it at run-time in the next step); - bus_id: bus identifier. +- tx_coe: core is able to perform the tx csum in HW. +- enh_desc: if sets the MAC will use the enhanced descriptor structure. +- clk_csr: CSR Clock range selection. +- bugged_jumbo: some HWs are not able to perform the csum in HW for + over-sized frames due to limited buffer sizes. Setting this + flag the csum will be done in SW on JUMBO frames. struct plat_stmmacphy_data { int bus_id; @@ -131,13 +142,28 @@ Where: - interface: physical MII interface mode; - phy_reset: hook to reset HW function. +SOURCES: +- Kconfig +- Makefile +- stmmac_main.c: main network device driver; +- stmmac_mdio.c: mdio functions; +- stmmac_ethtool.c: ethtool support; +- stmmac_timer.[ch]: timer code used for mitigating the driver dma interrupts + Only tested on ST40 platforms based. +- stmmac.h: private driver structure; +- common.h: common definitions and VFTs; +- descs.h: descriptor structure definitions; +- dwmac1000_core.c: GMAC core functions; +- dwmac1000_dma.c: dma functions for the GMAC chip; +- dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the GMAC; +- dwmac100_core: MAC 100 core and dma code; +- dwmac100_dma.c: dma funtions for the MAC chip; +- dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the MAC; +- dwmac_lib.c: generic DMA functions shared among chips +- enh_desc.c: functions for handling enhanced descriptors +- norm_desc.c: functions for handling normal descriptors + TODO: -- Continue to make the driver more generic and suitable for other Synopsys - Ethernet controllers used on other architectures (i.e. ARM). -- 10G controllers are not supported. -- MAC uses Normal descriptors and GMAC uses enhanced ones. - This is a limit that should be reviewed. MAC could want to - use the enhanced structure. -- Checksumming: Rx/Tx csum is done in HW in case of GMAC only. +- XGMAC controller is not supported. - Review the timer optimisation code to use an embedded device that seems to be available in new chip generations. diff --git a/Documentation/nfc/nfc-pn544.txt b/Documentation/nfc/nfc-pn544.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2fcac9f5996e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/nfc/nfc-pn544.txt @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +Kernel driver for the NXP Semiconductors PN544 Near Field +Communication chip + +Author: Jari Vanhala +Contact: Matti Aaltonen (matti.j.aaltonen at nokia.com) + +General +------- + +The PN544 is an integrated transmission module for contactless +communication. The driver goes under drives/nfc/ and is compiled as a +module named "pn544". It registers a misc device and creates a device +file named "/dev/pn544". + +Host Interfaces: I2C, SPI and HSU, this driver supports currently only I2C. + +The Interface +------------- + +The driver offers a sysfs interface for a hardware test and an IOCTL +interface for selecting between two operating modes. There are read, +write and poll functions for transferring messages. The two operating +modes are the normal (HCI) mode and the firmware update mode. + +PN544 is controlled by sending messages from the userspace to the +chip. The main function of the driver is just to pass those messages +without caring about the message content. + + +Protocols +--------- + +In the normal (HCI) mode and in the firmware update mode read and +write functions behave a bit differently because the message formats +or the protocols are different. + +In the normal (HCI) mode the protocol used is derived from the ETSI +HCI specification. The firmware is updated using a specific protocol, +which is different from HCI. + +HCI messages consist of an eight bit header and the message body. The +header contains the message length. Maximum size for an HCI message is +33. In HCI mode sent messages are tested for a correct +checksum. Firmware update messages have the length in the second (MSB) +and third (LSB) bytes of the message. The maximum FW message length is +1024 bytes. + +For the ETSI HCI specification see +http://www.etsi.org/WebSite/Technologies/ProtocolSpecification.aspx + +The Hardware Test +----------------- + +The idea of the test is that it can performed by reading from the +corresponding sysfs file. The test is implemented in the board file +and it should test that PN544 can be put into the firmware update +mode. If the test is not implemented the sysfs file does not get +created. + +Example: +> cat /sys/module/pn544/drivers/i2c\:pn544/3-002b/nfc_test +1 + +Normal Operation +---------------- + +PN544 is powered up when the device file is opened, otherwise it's +turned off. Only one instance can use the device at a time. + +Userspace applications control PN544 with HCI messages. The hardware +sends an interrupt when data is available for reading. Data is +physically read when the read function is called by a userspace +application. Poll() checks the read interrupt state. Configuration and +self testing are also done from the userspace using read and write. + +Example platform data: + +static int rx71_pn544_nfc_request_resources(struct i2c_client *client) +{ + /* Get and setup the HW resources for the device */ +} + +static void rx71_pn544_nfc_free_resources(void) +{ + /* Release the HW resources */ +} + +static void rx71_pn544_nfc_enable(int fw) +{ + /* Turn the device on */ +} + +static int rx71_pn544_nfc_test(void) +{ + /* + * Put the device into the FW update mode + * and then back to the normal mode. + * Check the behavior and return one on success, + * zero on failure. + */ +} + +static void rx71_pn544_nfc_disable(void) +{ + /* turn the power off */ +} + +static struct pn544_nfc_platform_data rx71_nfc_data = { + .request_resources = rx71_pn544_nfc_request_resources, + .free_resources = rx71_pn544_nfc_free_resources, + .enable = rx71_pn544_nfc_enable, + .test = rx71_pn544_nfc_test, + .disable = rx71_pn544_nfc_disable, +}; diff --git a/Documentation/power/devices.txt b/Documentation/power/devices.txt index 57080cd74575..f023ba6bba62 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/devices.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Device Power Management -Copyright (c) 2010 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc. +Copyright (c) 2010-2011 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc. Copyright (c) 2010 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu> @@ -159,18 +159,18 @@ matter, and the kernel is responsible for keeping track of it. By contrast, whether or not a wakeup-capable device should issue wakeup events is a policy decision, and it is managed by user space through a sysfs attribute: the power/wakeup file. User space can write the strings "enabled" or "disabled" to -set or clear the should_wakeup flag, respectively. Reads from the file will -return the corresponding string if can_wakeup is true, but if can_wakeup is -false then reads will return an empty string, to indicate that the device -doesn't support wakeup events. (But even though the file appears empty, writes -will still affect the should_wakeup flag.) +set or clear the "should_wakeup" flag, respectively. This file is only present +for wakeup-capable devices (i.e. devices whose "can_wakeup" flags are set) +and is created (or removed) by device_set_wakeup_capable(). Reads from the +file will return the corresponding string. The device_may_wakeup() routine returns true only if both flags are set. -Drivers should check this routine when putting devices in a low-power state -during a system sleep transition, to see whether or not to enable the devices' -wakeup mechanisms. However for runtime power management, wakeup events should -be enabled whenever the device and driver both support them, regardless of the -should_wakeup flag. +This information is used by subsystems, like the PCI bus type code, to see +whether or not to enable the devices' wakeup mechanisms. If device wakeup +mechanisms are enabled or disabled directly by drivers, they also should use +device_may_wakeup() to decide what to do during a system sleep transition. +However for runtime power management, wakeup events should be enabled whenever +the device and driver both support them, regardless of the should_wakeup flag. /sys/devices/.../power/control files @@ -249,23 +249,18 @@ various phases always run after tasks have been frozen and before they are unfrozen. Furthermore, the *_noirq phases run at a time when IRQ handlers have been disabled (except for those marked with the IRQ_WAKEUP flag). -Most phases use bus, type, and class callbacks (that is, methods defined in -dev->bus->pm, dev->type->pm, and dev->class->pm). The prepare and complete -phases are exceptions; they use only bus callbacks. When multiple callbacks -are used in a phase, they are invoked in the order: <class, type, bus> during -power-down transitions and in the opposite order during power-up transitions. -For example, during the suspend phase the PM core invokes - - dev->class->pm.suspend(dev); - dev->type->pm.suspend(dev); - dev->bus->pm.suspend(dev); - -before moving on to the next device, whereas during the resume phase the core -invokes - - dev->bus->pm.resume(dev); - dev->type->pm.resume(dev); - dev->class->pm.resume(dev); +All phases use bus, type, or class callbacks (that is, methods defined in +dev->bus->pm, dev->type->pm, or dev->class->pm). These callbacks are mutually +exclusive, so if the device type provides a struct dev_pm_ops object pointed to +by its pm field (i.e. both dev->type and dev->type->pm are defined), the +callbacks included in that object (i.e. dev->type->pm) will be used. Otherwise, +if the class provides a struct dev_pm_ops object pointed to by its pm field +(i.e. both dev->class and dev->class->pm are defined), the PM core will use the +callbacks from that object (i.e. dev->class->pm). Finally, if the pm fields of +both the device type and class objects are NULL (or those objects do not exist), +the callbacks provided by the bus (that is, the callbacks from dev->bus->pm) +will be used (this allows device types to override callbacks provided by bus +types or classes if necessary). These callbacks may in turn invoke device- or driver-specific methods stored in dev->driver->pm, but they don't have to. @@ -507,6 +502,49 @@ routines. Nevertheless, different callback pointers are used in case there is a situation where it actually matters. +Device Power Domains +-------------------- +Sometimes devices share reference clocks or other power resources. In those +cases it generally is not possible to put devices into low-power states +individually. Instead, a set of devices sharing a power resource can be put +into a low-power state together at the same time by turning off the shared +power resource. Of course, they also need to be put into the full-power state +together, by turning the shared power resource on. A set of devices with this +property is often referred to as a power domain. + +Support for power domains is provided through the pwr_domain field of struct +device. This field is a pointer to an object of type struct dev_power_domain, +defined in include/linux/pm.h, providing a set of power management callbacks +analogous to the subsystem-level and device driver callbacks that are executed +for the given device during all power transitions, in addition to the respective +subsystem-level callbacks. Specifically, the power domain "suspend" callbacks +(i.e. ->runtime_suspend(), ->suspend(), ->freeze(), ->poweroff(), etc.) are +executed after the analogous subsystem-level callbacks, while the power domain +"resume" callbacks (i.e. ->runtime_resume(), ->resume(), ->thaw(), ->restore, +etc.) are executed before the analogous subsystem-level callbacks. Error codes +returned by the "suspend" and "resume" power domain callbacks are ignored. + +Power domain ->runtime_idle() callback is executed before the subsystem-level +->runtime_idle() callback and the result returned by it is not ignored. Namely, +if it returns error code, the subsystem-level ->runtime_idle() callback will not +be called and the helper function rpm_idle() executing it will return error +code. This mechanism is intended to help platforms where saving device state +is a time consuming operation and should only be carried out if all devices +in the power domain are idle, before turning off the shared power resource(s). +Namely, the power domain ->runtime_idle() callback may return error code until +the pm_runtime_idle() helper (or its asychronous version) has been called for +all devices in the power domain (it is recommended that the returned error code +be -EBUSY in those cases), preventing the subsystem-level ->runtime_idle() +callback from being run prematurely. + +The support for device power domains is only relevant to platforms needing to +use the same subsystem-level (e.g. platform bus type) and device driver power +management callbacks in many different power domain configurations and wanting +to avoid incorporating the support for power domains into the subsystem-level +callbacks. The other platforms need not implement it or take it into account +in any way. + + System Devices -------------- System devices (sysdevs) follow a slightly different API, which can be found in diff --git a/Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt b/Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt index 7f7a737f7f9f..638afdf4d6b8 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt @@ -23,10 +23,10 @@ Once you have resolved the suspend/resume-related problems with your test system without the new driver, you are ready to test it: a) Build the driver as a module, load it and try the test modes of hibernation - (see: Documents/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 1). + (see: Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 1). b) Load the driver and attempt to hibernate in the "reboot", "shutdown" and - "platform" modes (see: Documents/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 1). + "platform" modes (see: Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 1). c) Compile the driver directly into the kernel and try the test modes of hibernation. @@ -34,12 +34,12 @@ c) Compile the driver directly into the kernel and try the test modes of d) Attempt to hibernate with the driver compiled directly into the kernel in the "reboot", "shutdown" and "platform" modes. -e) Try the test modes of suspend (see: Documents/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, +e) Try the test modes of suspend (see: Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 2). [As far as the STR tests are concerned, it should not matter whether or not the driver is built as a module.] f) Attempt to suspend to RAM using the s2ram tool with the driver loaded - (see: Documents/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 2). + (see: Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 2). Each of the above tests should be repeated several times and the STD tests should be mixed with the STR tests. If any of them fails, the driver cannot be diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt index 489e9bacd165..654097b130b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Run-time Power Management Framework for I/O Devices -(C) 2009 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc. +(C) 2009-2011 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc. (C) 2010 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu> 1. Introduction @@ -44,11 +44,21 @@ struct dev_pm_ops { }; The ->runtime_suspend(), ->runtime_resume() and ->runtime_idle() callbacks are -executed by the PM core for either the bus type, or device type (if the bus -type's callback is not defined), or device class (if the bus type's and device -type's callbacks are not defined) of given device. The bus type, device type -and device class callbacks are referred to as subsystem-level callbacks in what -follows. +executed by the PM core for either the device type, or the class (if the device +type's struct dev_pm_ops object does not exist), or the bus type (if the +device type's and class' struct dev_pm_ops objects do not exist) of the given +device (this allows device types to override callbacks provided by bus types or +classes if necessary). The bus type, device type and class callbacks are +referred to as subsystem-level callbacks in what follows. + +By default, the callbacks are always invoked in process context with interrupts +enabled. However, subsystems can use the pm_runtime_irq_safe() helper function +to tell the PM core that a device's ->runtime_suspend() and ->runtime_resume() +callbacks should be invoked in atomic context with interrupts disabled +(->runtime_idle() is still invoked the default way). This implies that these +callback routines must not block or sleep, but it also means that the +synchronous helper functions listed at the end of Section 4 can be used within +an interrupt handler or in an atomic context. The subsystem-level suspend callback is _entirely_ _responsible_ for handling the suspend of the device as appropriate, which may, but need not include @@ -237,6 +247,10 @@ defined in include/linux/pm.h: Section 8); it may be modified only by the pm_runtime_no_callbacks() helper function + unsigned int irq_safe; + - indicates that the ->runtime_suspend() and ->runtime_resume() callbacks + will be invoked with the spinlock held and interrupts disabled + unsigned int use_autosuspend; - indicates that the device's driver supports delayed autosuspend (see Section 9); it may be modified only by the @@ -344,6 +358,10 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h: - decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run pm_runtime_idle(dev) and return its result + int pm_runtime_put_sync_suspend(struct device *dev); + - decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run + pm_runtime_suspend(dev) and return its result + int pm_runtime_put_sync_autosuspend(struct device *dev); - decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run pm_runtime_autosuspend(dev) and return its result @@ -379,8 +397,8 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h: zero) bool pm_runtime_suspended(struct device *dev); - - return true if the device's runtime PM status is 'suspended', or false - otherwise + - return true if the device's runtime PM status is 'suspended' and its + 'power.disable_depth' field is equal to zero, or false otherwise void pm_runtime_allow(struct device *dev); - set the power.runtime_auto flag for the device and decrease its usage @@ -397,6 +415,11 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h: PM attributes from /sys/devices/.../power (or prevent them from being added when the device is registered) + void pm_runtime_irq_safe(struct device *dev); + - set the power.irq_safe flag for the device, causing the runtime-PM + suspend and resume callbacks (but not the idle callback) to be invoked + with interrupts disabled + void pm_runtime_mark_last_busy(struct device *dev); - set the power.last_busy field to the current time @@ -438,6 +461,15 @@ pm_runtime_suspended() pm_runtime_mark_last_busy() pm_runtime_autosuspend_expiration() +If pm_runtime_irq_safe() has been called for a device then the following helper +functions may also be used in interrupt context: + +pm_runtime_suspend() +pm_runtime_autosuspend() +pm_runtime_resume() +pm_runtime_get_sync() +pm_runtime_put_sync_suspend() + 5. Run-time PM Initialization, Device Probing and Removal Initially, the run-time PM is disabled for all devices, which means that the diff --git a/Documentation/power/states.txt b/Documentation/power/states.txt index 34800cc521bf..4416b28630df 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/states.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/states.txt @@ -62,12 +62,12 @@ setup via another operating system for it to use. Despite the inconvenience, this method requires minimal work by the kernel, since the firmware will also handle restoring memory contents on resume. -For suspend-to-disk, a mechanism called swsusp called 'swsusp' (Swap -Suspend) is used to write memory contents to free swap space. -swsusp has some restrictive requirements, but should work in most -cases. Some, albeit outdated, documentation can be found in -Documentation/power/swsusp.txt. Alternatively, userspace can do most -of the actual suspend to disk work, see userland-swsusp.txt. +For suspend-to-disk, a mechanism called 'swsusp' (Swap Suspend) is used +to write memory contents to free swap space. swsusp has some restrictive +requirements, but should work in most cases. Some, albeit outdated, +documentation can be found in Documentation/power/swsusp.txt. +Alternatively, userspace can do most of the actual suspend to disk work, +see userland-swsusp.txt. Once memory state is written to disk, the system may either enter a low-power state (like ACPI S4), or it may simply power down. Powering diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX index e3960b8c8689..5620fb5ac425 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX @@ -5,8 +5,6 @@ please mail me. 00-INDEX - this file -booting-without-of.txt - - Booting the Linux/ppc kernel without Open Firmware cpu_features.txt - info on how we support a variety of CPUs with minimal compile-time options. @@ -16,8 +14,6 @@ hvcs.txt - IBM "Hypervisor Virtual Console Server" Installation Guide mpc52xx.txt - Linux 2.6.x on MPC52xx family -mpc52xx-device-tree-bindings.txt - - MPC5200 Device Tree Bindings sound.txt - info on sound support under Linux/PPC zImage_layout.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpic.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpic.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 71e39cf3215b..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpic.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -* OpenPIC and its interrupt numbers on Freescale's e500/e600 cores - -The OpenPIC specification does not specify which interrupt source has to -become which interrupt number. This is up to the software implementation -of the interrupt controller. The only requirement is that every -interrupt source has to have an unique interrupt number / vector number. -To accomplish this the current implementation assigns the number zero to -the first source, the number one to the second source and so on until -all interrupt sources have their unique number. -Usually the assigned vector number equals the interrupt number mentioned -in the documentation for a given core / CPU. This is however not true -for the e500 cores (MPC85XX CPUs) where the documentation distinguishes -between internal and external interrupt sources and starts counting at -zero for both of them. - -So what to write for external interrupt source X or internal interrupt -source Y into the device tree? Here is an example: - -The memory map for the interrupt controller in the MPC8544[0] shows, -that the first interrupt source starts at 0x5_0000 (PIC Register Address -Map-Interrupt Source Configuration Registers). This source becomes the -number zero therefore: - External interrupt 0 = interrupt number 0 - External interrupt 1 = interrupt number 1 - External interrupt 2 = interrupt number 2 - ... -Every interrupt number allocates 0x20 bytes register space. So to get -its number it is sufficient to shift the lower 16bits to right by five. -So for the external interrupt 10 we have: - 0x0140 >> 5 = 10 - -After the external sources, the internal sources follow. The in core I2C -controller on the MPC8544 for instance has the internal source number -27. Oo obtain its interrupt number we take the lower 16bits of its memory -address (0x5_0560) and shift it right: - 0x0560 >> 5 = 43 - -Therefore the I2C device node for the MPC8544 CPU has to have the -interrupt number 43 specified in the device tree. - -[0] MPC8544E PowerQUICCTM III, Integrated Host Processor Family Reference Manual - MPC8544ERM Rev. 1 10/2007 diff --git a/Documentation/pps/pps.txt b/Documentation/pps/pps.txt index 125f4ab48998..d35dcdd82ff6 100644 --- a/Documentation/pps/pps.txt +++ b/Documentation/pps/pps.txt @@ -170,3 +170,49 @@ and the run ppstest as follow: Please, note that to compile userland programs you need the file timepps.h (see Documentation/pps/). + + +Generators +---------- + +Sometimes one needs to be able not only to catch PPS signals but to produce +them also. For example, running a distributed simulation, which requires +computers' clock to be synchronized very tightly. One way to do this is to +invent some complicated hardware solutions but it may be neither necessary +nor affordable. The cheap way is to load a PPS generator on one of the +computers (master) and PPS clients on others (slaves), and use very simple +cables to deliver signals using parallel ports, for example. + +Parallel port cable pinout: +pin name master slave +1 STROBE *------ * +2 D0 * | * +3 D1 * | * +4 D2 * | * +5 D3 * | * +6 D4 * | * +7 D5 * | * +8 D6 * | * +9 D7 * | * +10 ACK * ------* +11 BUSY * * +12 PE * * +13 SEL * * +14 AUTOFD * * +15 ERROR * * +16 INIT * * +17 SELIN * * +18-25 GND *-----------* + +Please note that parallel port interrupt occurs only on high->low transition, +so it is used for PPS assert edge. PPS clear edge can be determined only +using polling in the interrupt handler which actually can be done way more +precisely because interrupt handling delays can be quite big and random. So +current parport PPS generator implementation (pps_gen_parport module) is +geared towards using the clear edge for time synchronization. + +Clear edge polling is done with disabled interrupts so it's better to select +delay between assert and clear edge as small as possible to reduce system +latencies. But if it is too small slave won't be able to capture clear edge +transition. The default of 30us should be good enough in most situations. +The delay can be selected using 'delay' pps_gen_parport module parameter. diff --git a/Documentation/rtc.txt b/Documentation/rtc.txt index 9104c1062084..250160469d83 100644 --- a/Documentation/rtc.txt +++ b/Documentation/rtc.txt @@ -178,38 +178,29 @@ RTC class framework, but can't be supported by the older driver. setting the longer alarm time and enabling its IRQ using a single request (using the same model as EFI firmware). - * RTC_UIE_ON, RTC_UIE_OFF ... if the RTC offers IRQs, it probably - also offers update IRQs whenever the "seconds" counter changes. - If needed, the RTC framework can emulate this mechanism. + * RTC_UIE_ON, RTC_UIE_OFF ... if the RTC offers IRQs, the RTC framework + will emulate this mechanism. - * RTC_PIE_ON, RTC_PIE_OFF, RTC_IRQP_SET, RTC_IRQP_READ ... another - feature often accessible with an IRQ line is a periodic IRQ, issued - at settable frequencies (usually 2^N Hz). + * RTC_PIE_ON, RTC_PIE_OFF, RTC_IRQP_SET, RTC_IRQP_READ ... these icotls + are emulated via a kernel hrtimer. In many cases, the RTC alarm can be a system wake event, used to force Linux out of a low power sleep state (or hibernation) back to a fully operational state. For example, a system could enter a deep power saving state until it's time to execute some scheduled tasks. -Note that many of these ioctls need not actually be implemented by your -driver. The common rtc-dev interface handles many of these nicely if your -driver returns ENOIOCTLCMD. Some common examples: +Note that many of these ioctls are handled by the common rtc-dev interface. +Some common examples: * RTC_RD_TIME, RTC_SET_TIME: the read_time/set_time functions will be called with appropriate values. - * RTC_ALM_SET, RTC_ALM_READ, RTC_WKALM_SET, RTC_WKALM_RD: the - set_alarm/read_alarm functions will be called. + * RTC_ALM_SET, RTC_ALM_READ, RTC_WKALM_SET, RTC_WKALM_RD: gets or sets + the alarm rtc_timer. May call the set_alarm driver function. - * RTC_IRQP_SET, RTC_IRQP_READ: the irq_set_freq function will be called - to set the frequency while the framework will handle the read for you - since the frequency is stored in the irq_freq member of the rtc_device - structure. Your driver needs to initialize the irq_freq member during - init. Make sure you check the requested frequency is in range of your - hardware in the irq_set_freq function. If it isn't, return -EINVAL. If - you cannot actually change the frequency, do not define irq_set_freq. + * RTC_IRQP_SET, RTC_IRQP_READ: These are emulated by the generic code. - * RTC_PIE_ON, RTC_PIE_OFF: the irq_set_state function will be called. + * RTC_PIE_ON, RTC_PIE_OFF: These are also emulated by the generic code. If all else fails, check out the rtc-test.c driver! diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/00-INDEX b/Documentation/scheduler/00-INDEX index 3c00c9c3219e..d2651c47ae27 100644 --- a/Documentation/scheduler/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/00-INDEX @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ sched-arch.txt - CPU Scheduler implementation hints for architecture specific code. sched-design-CFS.txt - - goals, design and implementation of the Complete Fair Scheduler. + - goals, design and implementation of the Completely Fair Scheduler. sched-domains.txt - information on scheduling domains. sched-nice-design.txt diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-stats.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-stats.txt index 01e69404ee5e..1cd5d51bc761 100644 --- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-stats.txt +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-stats.txt @@ -1,3 +1,7 @@ +Version 15 of schedstats dropped counters for some sched_yield: +yld_exp_empty, yld_act_empty and yld_both_empty. Otherwise, it is +identical to version 14. + Version 14 of schedstats includes support for sched_domains, which hit the mainline kernel in 2.6.20 although it is identical to the stats from version 12 which was in the kernel from 2.6.13-2.6.19 (version 13 never saw a kernel @@ -28,32 +32,25 @@ to write their own scripts, the fields are described here. CPU statistics -------------- -cpu<N> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 - -NOTE: In the sched_yield() statistics, the active queue is considered empty - if it has only one process in it, since obviously the process calling - sched_yield() is that process. +cpu<N> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 -First four fields are sched_yield() statistics: - 1) # of times both the active and the expired queue were empty - 2) # of times just the active queue was empty - 3) # of times just the expired queue was empty - 4) # of times sched_yield() was called +First field is a sched_yield() statistic: + 1) # of times sched_yield() was called Next three are schedule() statistics: - 5) # of times we switched to the expired queue and reused it - 6) # of times schedule() was called - 7) # of times schedule() left the processor idle + 2) # of times we switched to the expired queue and reused it + 3) # of times schedule() was called + 4) # of times schedule() left the processor idle Next two are try_to_wake_up() statistics: - 8) # of times try_to_wake_up() was called - 9) # of times try_to_wake_up() was called to wake up the local cpu + 5) # of times try_to_wake_up() was called + 6) # of times try_to_wake_up() was called to wake up the local cpu Next three are statistics describing scheduling latency: - 10) sum of all time spent running by tasks on this processor (in jiffies) - 11) sum of all time spent waiting to run by tasks on this processor (in + 7) sum of all time spent running by tasks on this processor (in jiffies) + 8) sum of all time spent waiting to run by tasks on this processor (in jiffies) - 12) # of timeslices run on this cpu + 9) # of timeslices run on this cpu Domain statistics diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc index 337c924cc81f..5e83769c6aa9 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc @@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ Changes from 20041018 to 20041123 * Backround nodev_timeout processing to DPC This enables us to unblock (stop dev_loss_tmo) when appopriate. * Fix array discovery with multiple luns. The max_luns was 0 at - the time the host structure was intialized. lpfc_cfg_params + the time the host structure was initialized. lpfc_cfg_params then set the max_luns to the correct value afterwards. * Remove unused define LPFC_MAX_LUN and set the default value of lpfc_max_lun parameter to 512. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas index 00301ed9c371..4d9ce73ff730 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas @@ -1,3 +1,48 @@ +Release Date : Thu. Feb 24, 2011 17:00:00 PST 2010 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 00.00.05.34-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.05.29-rc1 + 1. Fix some failure gotos from megasas_probe_one(), etc. + 2. Add missing check_and_restore_queue_depth() call in + complete_cmd_fusion(). + 3. Enable MSI-X before calling megasas_init_fw(). + 4. Call tasklet_schedule() even if outbound_intr_status == 0 for MFI based + boards in MSI-X mode. + 5. Fix megasas_probe_one() to clear PCI_MSIX_FLAGS_ENABLE in msi control + register in kdump kernel. + 6. Fix megasas_get_cmd() to only print "Command pool empty" if + megasas_dbg_lvl is set. + 7. Fix megasas_build_dcdb_fusion() to not filter by TYPE_DISK. + 8. Fix megasas_build_dcdb_fusion() to use io_request->LUN[1] field. + 9. Add MR_EVT_CFG_CLEARED to megasas_aen_polling(). + 10. Fix tasklet_init() in megasas_init_fw() to use instancet->tasklet. + 11. Fix fault state handling in megasas_transition_to_ready(). + 12. Fix max_sectors setting for IEEE SGL's. + 13. Fix iMR OCR support to work correctly. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Release Date : Tues. Dec 14, 2010 17:00:00 PST 2010 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 00.00.05.29-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.04.31-rc1 + 1. Rename megaraid_sas.c to megaraid_sas_base.c. + 2. Update GPL headers. + 3. Add MSI-X support and 'msix_disable' module parameter. + 4. Use lowest memory bar (for SR-IOV VF support). + 5. Add struct megasas_instance_temlate changes, and change all code to use + new instance entries: + + irqreturn_t (*service_isr )(int irq, void *devp); + void (*tasklet)(unsigned long); + u32 (*init_adapter)(struct megasas_instance *); + u32 (*build_and_issue_cmd) (struct megasas_instance *, + struct scsi_cmnd *); + void (*issue_dcmd) (struct megasas_instance *instance, + struct megasas_cmd *cmd); + + 6. Add code to support MegaRAID 9265/9285 controllers device id (0x5b). +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 Release Date : Thur. May 03, 2010 09:12:45 PST 2009 - (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) Bo Yang diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/hpsa.txt b/Documentation/scsi/hpsa.txt index dca658362cbf..891435a72fce 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/hpsa.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/hpsa.txt @@ -28,6 +28,12 @@ boot parameter "hpsa_allow_any=1" is specified, however these are not tested nor supported by HP with this driver. For older Smart Arrays, the cciss driver should still be used. +The "hpsa_simple_mode=1" boot parameter may be used to prevent the driver from +putting the controller into "performant" mode. The difference is that with simple +mode, each command completion requires an interrupt, while with "performant mode" +(the default, and ordinarily better performing) it is possible to have multiple +command completions indicated by a single interrupt. + HPSA specific entries in /sys ----------------------------- @@ -39,6 +45,8 @@ HPSA specific entries in /sys /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/rescan /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/firmware_revision + /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/resettable + /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/transport_mode the host "rescan" attribute is a write only attribute. Writing to this attribute will cause the driver to scan for new, changed, or removed devices @@ -55,6 +63,21 @@ HPSA specific entries in /sys root@host:/sys/class/scsi_host/host4# cat firmware_revision 7.14 + The transport_mode indicates whether the controller is in "performant" + or "simple" mode. This is controlled by the "hpsa_simple_mode" module + parameter. + + The "resettable" read-only attribute indicates whether a particular + controller is able to honor the "reset_devices" kernel parameter. If the + device is resettable, this file will contain a "1", otherwise, a "0". This + parameter is used by kdump, for example, to reset the controller at driver + load time to eliminate any outstanding commands on the controller and get the + controller into a known state so that the kdump initiated i/o will work right + and not be disrupted in any way by stale commands or other stale state + remaining on the controller from the previous kernel. This attribute enables + kexec tools to warn the user if they attempt to designate a device which is + unable to honor the reset_devices kernel parameter as a dump device. + HPSA specific disk attributes: ------------------------------ diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt index 570ef2b3d79b..5f17d29c59b5 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt @@ -1044,9 +1044,9 @@ Details: /** - * queuecommand - queue scsi command, invoke 'done' on completion + * queuecommand - queue scsi command, invoke scp->scsi_done on completion + * @shost: pointer to the scsi host object * @scp: pointer to scsi command object - * @done: function pointer to be invoked on completion * * Returns 0 on success. * @@ -1074,42 +1074,45 @@ Details: * * Other types of errors that are detected immediately may be * flagged by setting scp->result to an appropriate value, - * invoking the 'done' callback, and then returning 0 from this - * function. If the command is not performed immediately (and the - * LLD is starting (or will start) the given command) then this - * function should place 0 in scp->result and return 0. + * invoking the scp->scsi_done callback, and then returning 0 + * from this function. If the command is not performed + * immediately (and the LLD is starting (or will start) the given + * command) then this function should place 0 in scp->result and + * return 0. * * Command ownership. If the driver returns zero, it owns the - * command and must take responsibility for ensuring the 'done' - * callback is executed. Note: the driver may call done before - * returning zero, but after it has called done, it may not - * return any value other than zero. If the driver makes a - * non-zero return, it must not execute the command's done - * callback at any time. - * - * Locks: struct Scsi_Host::host_lock held on entry (with "irqsave") - * and is expected to be held on return. + * command and must take responsibility for ensuring the + * scp->scsi_done callback is executed. Note: the driver may + * call scp->scsi_done before returning zero, but after it has + * called scp->scsi_done, it may not return any value other than + * zero. If the driver makes a non-zero return, it must not + * execute the command's scsi_done callback at any time. + * + * Locks: up to and including 2.6.36, struct Scsi_Host::host_lock + * held on entry (with "irqsave") and is expected to be + * held on return. From 2.6.37 onwards, queuecommand is + * called without any locks held. * * Calling context: in interrupt (soft irq) or process context * - * Notes: This function should be relatively fast. Normally it will - * not wait for IO to complete. Hence the 'done' callback is invoked - * (often directly from an interrupt service routine) some time after - * this function has returned. In some cases (e.g. pseudo adapter - * drivers that manufacture the response to a SCSI INQUIRY) - * the 'done' callback may be invoked before this function returns. - * If the 'done' callback is not invoked within a certain period - * the SCSI mid level will commence error processing. - * If a status of CHECK CONDITION is placed in "result" when the - * 'done' callback is invoked, then the LLD driver should - * perform autosense and fill in the struct scsi_cmnd::sense_buffer + * Notes: This function should be relatively fast. Normally it + * will not wait for IO to complete. Hence the scp->scsi_done + * callback is invoked (often directly from an interrupt service + * routine) some time after this function has returned. In some + * cases (e.g. pseudo adapter drivers that manufacture the + * response to a SCSI INQUIRY) the scp->scsi_done callback may be + * invoked before this function returns. If the scp->scsi_done + * callback is not invoked within a certain period the SCSI mid + * level will commence error processing. If a status of CHECK + * CONDITION is placed in "result" when the scp->scsi_done + * callback is invoked, then the LLD driver should perform + * autosense and fill in the struct scsi_cmnd::sense_buffer * array. The scsi_cmnd::sense_buffer array is zeroed prior to * the mid level queuing a command to an LLD. * * Defined in: LLD **/ - int queuecommand(struct scsi_cmnd * scp, - void (*done)(struct scsi_cmnd *)) + int queuecommand(struct Scsi_Host *shost, struct scsi_cmnd * scp) /** @@ -1340,7 +1343,7 @@ Members of interest: underruns (overruns should be rare). If possible an LLD should set 'resid' prior to invoking 'done'. The most interesting case is data transfers from a SCSI target - device device (i.e. READs) that underrun. + device (e.g. READs) that underrun. underflow - LLD should place (DID_ERROR << 16) in 'result' if actual number of bytes transferred is less than this figure. Not many LLDs implement this check and some that @@ -1348,6 +1351,18 @@ Members of interest: report a DID_ERROR. Better for an LLD to implement 'resid'. +It is recommended that a LLD set 'resid' on data transfers from a SCSI +target device (e.g. READs). It is especially important that 'resid' is set +when such data transfers have sense keys of MEDIUM ERROR and HARDWARE ERROR +(and possibly RECOVERED ERROR). In these cases if a LLD is in doubt how much +data has been received then the safest approach is to indicate no bytes have +been received. For example: to indicate that no valid data has been received +a LLD might use these helpers: + scsi_set_resid(SCpnt, scsi_bufflen(SCpnt)); +where 'SCpnt' is a pointer to a scsi_cmnd object. To indicate only three 512 +bytes blocks has been received 'resid' could be set like this: + scsi_set_resid(SCpnt, scsi_bufflen(SCpnt) - (3 * 512)); + The scsi_cmnd structure is defined in include/scsi/scsi_cmnd.h diff --git a/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX b/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX index 07dcdb0d2a36..e09468ad3cb1 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX @@ -14,6 +14,8 @@ riscom8.txt - notes on using the RISCom/8 multi-port serial driver. rocket.txt - info on the Comtrol RocketPort multiport serial driver. +serial-rs485.txt + - info about RS485 structures and support in the kernel. specialix.txt - info on hardware/driver for specialix IO8+ multiport serial card. stallion.txt diff --git a/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt b/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..397f41a1f153 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +n_gsm.c GSM 0710 tty multiplexor HOWTO +=================================================== + +This line discipline implements the GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol +detailed in the following 3GPP document : +http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/07_series/07.10/0710-720.zip + +This document give some hints on how to use this driver with GPRS and 3G +modems connected to a physical serial port. + +How to use it +------------- +1- initialize the modem in 0710 mux mode (usually AT+CMUX= command) through +its serial port. Depending on the modem used, you can pass more or less +parameters to this command, +2- switch the serial line to using the n_gsm line discipline by using +TIOCSETD ioctl, +3- configure the mux using GSMIOC_GETCONF / GSMIOC_SETCONF ioctl, + +Major parts of the initialization program : +(a good starting point is util-linux-ng/sys-utils/ldattach.c) +#include <linux/gsmmux.h> +#define N_GSM0710 21 /* GSM 0710 Mux */ +#define DEFAULT_SPEED B115200 +#define SERIAL_PORT /dev/ttyS0 + + int ldisc = N_GSM0710; + struct gsm_config c; + struct termios configuration; + + /* open the serial port connected to the modem */ + fd = open(SERIAL_PORT, O_RDWR | O_NOCTTY | O_NDELAY); + + /* configure the serial port : speed, flow control ... */ + + /* send the AT commands to switch the modem to CMUX mode + and check that it's succesful (should return OK) */ + write(fd, "AT+CMUX=0\r", 10); + + /* experience showed that some modems need some time before + being able to answer to the first MUX packet so a delay + may be needed here in some case */ + sleep(3); + + /* use n_gsm line discipline */ + ioctl(fd, TIOCSETD, &ldisc); + + /* get n_gsm configuration */ + ioctl(fd, GSMIOC_GETCONF, &c); + /* we are initiator and need encoding 0 (basic) */ + c.initiator = 1; + c.encapsulation = 0; + /* our modem defaults to a maximum size of 127 bytes */ + c.mru = 127; + c.mtu = 127; + /* set the new configuration */ + ioctl(fd, GSMIOC_SETCONF, &c); + + /* and wait for ever to keep the line discipline enabled */ + daemon(0,0); + pause(); + +4- create the devices corresponding to the "virtual" serial ports (take care, +each modem has its configuration and some DLC have dedicated functions, +for example GPS), starting with minor 1 (DLC0 is reserved for the management +of the mux) + +MAJOR=`cat /proc/devices |grep gsmtty | awk '{print $1}` +for i in `seq 1 4`; do + mknod /dev/ttygsm$i c $MAJOR $i +done + +5- use these devices as plain serial ports. +for example, it's possible : +- and to use gnokii to send / receive SMS on ttygsm1 +- to use ppp to establish a datalink on ttygsm2 + +6- first close all virtual ports before closing the physical port. + +Additional Documentation +------------------------ +More practical details on the protocol and how it's supported by industrial +modems can be found in the following documents : +http://www.telit.com/module/infopool/download.php?id=616 +http://www.u-blox.com/images/downloads/Product_Docs/LEON-G100-G200-MuxImplementation_ApplicationNote_%28GSM%20G1-CS-10002%29.pdf +http://www.sierrawireless.com/Support/Downloads/AirPrime/WMP_Series/~/media/Support_Downloads/AirPrime/Application_notes/CMUX_Feature_Application_Note-Rev004.ashx +http://wm.sim.com/sim/News/photo/2010721161442.pdf + +11-03-08 - Eric Bénard - <eric@eukrea.com> diff --git a/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a4932387bbfb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS + +1. INTRODUCTION + + EIA-485, also known as TIA/EIA-485 or RS-485, is a standard defining the + electrical characteristics of drivers and receivers for use in balanced + digital multipoint systems. + This standard is widely used for communications in industrial automation + because it can be used effectively over long distances and in electrically + noisy environments. + +2. HARDWARE-RELATED CONSIDERATIONS + + Some CPUs/UARTs (e.g., Atmel AT91 or 16C950 UART) contain a built-in + half-duplex mode capable of automatically controlling line direction by + toggling RTS or DTR signals. That can be used to control external + half-duplex hardware like an RS485 transceiver or any RS232-connected + half-duplex devices like some modems. + + For these microcontrollers, the Linux driver should be made capable of + working in both modes, and proper ioctls (see later) should be made + available at user-level to allow switching from one mode to the other, and + vice versa. + +3. DATA STRUCTURES ALREADY AVAILABLE IN THE KERNEL + + The Linux kernel provides the serial_rs485 structure (see [1]) to handle + RS485 communications. This data structure is used to set and configure RS485 + parameters in the platform data and in ioctls. + + Any driver for devices capable of working both as RS232 and RS485 should + provide at least the following ioctls: + + - TIOCSRS485 (typically associated with number 0x542F). This ioctl is used + to enable/disable RS485 mode from user-space + + - TIOCGRS485 (typically associated with number 0x542E). This ioctl is used + to get RS485 mode from kernel-space (i.e., driver) to user-space. + + In other words, the serial driver should contain a code similar to the next + one: + + static struct uart_ops atmel_pops = { + /* ... */ + .ioctl = handle_ioctl, + }; + + static int handle_ioctl(struct uart_port *port, + unsigned int cmd, + unsigned long arg) + { + struct serial_rs485 rs485conf; + + switch (cmd) { + case TIOCSRS485: + if (copy_from_user(&rs485conf, + (struct serial_rs485 *) arg, + sizeof(rs485conf))) + return -EFAULT; + + /* ... */ + break; + + case TIOCGRS485: + if (copy_to_user((struct serial_rs485 *) arg, + ..., + sizeof(rs485conf))) + return -EFAULT; + /* ... */ + break; + + /* ... */ + } + } + + +4. USAGE FROM USER-LEVEL + + From user-level, RS485 configuration can be get/set using the previous + ioctls. For instance, to set RS485 you can use the following code: + + #include <linux/serial.h> + + /* Driver-specific ioctls: */ + #define TIOCGRS485 0x542E + #define TIOCSRS485 0x542F + + /* Open your specific device (e.g., /dev/mydevice): */ + int fd = open ("/dev/mydevice", O_RDWR); + if (fd < 0) { + /* Error handling. See errno. */ + } + + struct serial_rs485 rs485conf; + + /* Set RS485 mode: */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_ENABLED; + + /* Set rts delay before send, if needed: */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RTS_BEFORE_SEND; + rs485conf.delay_rts_before_send = ...; + + /* Set rts delay after send, if needed: */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RTS_AFTER_SEND; + rs485conf.delay_rts_after_send = ...; + + if (ioctl (fd, TIOCSRS485, &rs485conf) < 0) { + /* Error handling. See errno. */ + } + + /* Use read() and write() syscalls here... */ + + /* Close the device when finished: */ + if (close (fd) < 0) { + /* Error handling. See errno. */ + } + +5. REFERENCES + + [1] include/linux/serial.h diff --git a/Documentation/serial/tty.txt b/Documentation/serial/tty.txt index 7c900507279f..540db41dfd5d 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/tty.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/tty.txt @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ write_wakeup() - May be called at any point between open and close. dcd_change() - Report to the tty line the current DCD pin status changes and the relative timestamp. The timestamp - can be NULL. + cannot be NULL. Driver Access diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index d0eb696d32e8..3c1eddd9fcc7 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -974,13 +974,6 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. See hdspm.txt for details. - Module snd-hifier - ----------------- - - Module for the MediaTek/TempoTec HiFier Fantasia sound card. - - This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards. - Module snd-ice1712 ------------------ @@ -1531,15 +1524,20 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. Module snd-oxygen ----------------- - Module for sound cards based on the C-Media CMI8788 chip: + Module for sound cards based on the C-Media CMI8786/8787/8788 chip: * Asound A-8788 + * Asus Xonar DG * AuzenTech X-Meridian + * AuzenTech X-Meridian 2G * Bgears b-Enspirer * Club3D Theatron DTS * HT-Omega Claro (plus) * HT-Omega Claro halo (XT) + * Kuroutoshikou CMI8787-HG2PCI * Razer Barracuda AC-1 * Sondigo Inferno + * TempoTec HiFier Fantasia + * TempoTec HiFier Serenade This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards. @@ -2006,9 +2004,9 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. Module snd-virtuoso ------------------- - Module for sound cards based on the Asus AV100/AV200 chips, - i.e., Xonar D1, DX, D2, D2X, DS, HDAV1.3 (Deluxe), Essence ST - (Deluxe) and Essence STX. + Module for sound cards based on the Asus AV66/AV100/AV200 chips, + i.e., Xonar D1, DX, D2, D2X, DS, Essence ST (Deluxe), Essence STX, + HDAV1.3 (Deluxe), and HDAV1.3 Slim. This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards. diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index 37c6aad5e590..0caf77e59be4 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -149,7 +149,6 @@ ALC882/883/885/888/889 acer-aspire-7730g Acer Aspire 7730G acer-aspire-8930g Acer Aspire 8930G medion Medion Laptops - medion-md2 Medion MD2 targa-dig Targa/MSI targa-2ch-dig Targa/MSI with 2-channel targa-8ch-dig Targa/MSI with 8-channel (MSI GX620) @@ -297,6 +296,7 @@ Conexant 5066 ============= laptop Basic Laptop config (default) hp-laptop HP laptops, e g G60 + asus Asus K52JU, Lenovo G560 dell-laptop Dell laptops dell-vostro Dell Vostro olpc-xo-1_5 OLPC XO 1.5 diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/codec.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/codec.txt index 37ba3a72cb76..bce23a4a7875 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/codec.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/codec.txt @@ -27,42 +27,38 @@ ASoC Codec driver breakdown 1 - Codec DAI and PCM configuration ----------------------------------- -Each codec driver must have a struct snd_soc_codec_dai to define its DAI and +Each codec driver must have a struct snd_soc_dai_driver to define its DAI and PCM capabilities and operations. This struct is exported so that it can be registered with the core by your machine driver. e.g. -struct snd_soc_codec_dai wm8731_dai = { - .name = "WM8731", - /* playback capabilities */ +static struct snd_soc_dai_ops wm8731_dai_ops = { + .prepare = wm8731_pcm_prepare, + .hw_params = wm8731_hw_params, + .shutdown = wm8731_shutdown, + .digital_mute = wm8731_mute, + .set_sysclk = wm8731_set_dai_sysclk, + .set_fmt = wm8731_set_dai_fmt, +}; + +struct snd_soc_dai_driver wm8731_dai = { + .name = "wm8731-hifi", .playback = { .stream_name = "Playback", .channels_min = 1, .channels_max = 2, .rates = WM8731_RATES, .formats = WM8731_FORMATS,}, - /* capture capabilities */ .capture = { .stream_name = "Capture", .channels_min = 1, .channels_max = 2, .rates = WM8731_RATES, .formats = WM8731_FORMATS,}, - /* pcm operations - see section 4 below */ - .ops = { - .prepare = wm8731_pcm_prepare, - .hw_params = wm8731_hw_params, - .shutdown = wm8731_shutdown, - }, - /* DAI operations - see DAI.txt */ - .dai_ops = { - .digital_mute = wm8731_mute, - .set_sysclk = wm8731_set_dai_sysclk, - .set_fmt = wm8731_set_dai_fmt, - } + .ops = &wm8731_dai_ops, + .symmetric_rates = 1, }; -EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL(wm8731_dai); 2 - Codec control IO @@ -186,13 +182,14 @@ when the mute is applied or freed. i.e. -static int wm8974_mute(struct snd_soc_codec *codec, - struct snd_soc_codec_dai *dai, int mute) +static int wm8974_mute(struct snd_soc_dai *dai, int mute) { - u16 mute_reg = wm8974_read_reg_cache(codec, WM8974_DAC) & 0xffbf; - if(mute) - wm8974_write(codec, WM8974_DAC, mute_reg | 0x40); + struct snd_soc_codec *codec = dai->codec; + u16 mute_reg = snd_soc_read(codec, WM8974_DAC) & 0xffbf; + + if (mute) + snd_soc_write(codec, WM8974_DAC, mute_reg | 0x40); else - wm8974_write(codec, WM8974_DAC, mute_reg); + snd_soc_write(codec, WM8974_DAC, mute_reg); return 0; } diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt index 2524c75557df..3e2ec9cbf397 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt @@ -12,6 +12,8 @@ the following struct:- struct snd_soc_card { char *name; + ... + int (*probe)(struct platform_device *pdev); int (*remove)(struct platform_device *pdev); @@ -22,12 +24,13 @@ struct snd_soc_card { int (*resume_pre)(struct platform_device *pdev); int (*resume_post)(struct platform_device *pdev); - /* machine stream operations */ - struct snd_soc_ops *ops; + ... /* CPU <--> Codec DAI links */ struct snd_soc_dai_link *dai_link; int num_links; + + ... }; probe()/remove() @@ -42,11 +45,6 @@ of any machine audio tasks that have to be done before or after the codec, DAIs and DMA is suspended and resumed. Optional. -Machine operations ------------------- -The machine specific audio operations can be set here. Again this is optional. - - Machine DAI Configuration ------------------------- The machine DAI configuration glues all the codec and CPU DAIs together. It can @@ -61,8 +59,10 @@ struct snd_soc_dai_link is used to set up each DAI in your machine. e.g. static struct snd_soc_dai_link corgi_dai = { .name = "WM8731", .stream_name = "WM8731", - .cpu_dai = &pxa_i2s_dai, - .codec_dai = &wm8731_dai, + .cpu_dai_name = "pxa-is2-dai", + .codec_dai_name = "wm8731-hifi", + .platform_name = "pxa-pcm-audio", + .codec_name = "wm8713-codec.0-001a", .init = corgi_wm8731_init, .ops = &corgi_ops, }; @@ -77,26 +77,6 @@ static struct snd_soc_card snd_soc_corgi = { }; -Machine Audio Subsystem ------------------------ - -The machine soc device glues the platform, machine and codec driver together. -Private data can also be set here. e.g. - -/* corgi audio private data */ -static struct wm8731_setup_data corgi_wm8731_setup = { - .i2c_address = 0x1b, -}; - -/* corgi audio subsystem */ -static struct snd_soc_device corgi_snd_devdata = { - .machine = &snd_soc_corgi, - .platform = &pxa2xx_soc_platform, - .codec_dev = &soc_codec_dev_wm8731, - .codec_data = &corgi_wm8731_setup, -}; - - Machine Power Map ----------------- diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/platform.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/platform.txt index 06d835987c6a..d57efad37e0a 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/platform.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/platform.txt @@ -20,9 +20,10 @@ struct snd_soc_ops { int (*trigger)(struct snd_pcm_substream *, int); }; -The platform driver exports its DMA functionality via struct snd_soc_platform:- +The platform driver exports its DMA functionality via struct +snd_soc_platform_driver:- -struct snd_soc_platform { +struct snd_soc_platform_driver { char *name; int (*probe)(struct platform_device *pdev); @@ -34,6 +35,13 @@ struct snd_soc_platform { int (*pcm_new)(struct snd_card *, struct snd_soc_codec_dai *, struct snd_pcm *); void (*pcm_free)(struct snd_pcm *); + /* + * For platform caused delay reporting. + * Optional. + */ + snd_pcm_sframes_t (*delay)(struct snd_pcm_substream *, + struct snd_soc_dai *); + /* platform stream ops */ struct snd_pcm_ops *pcm_ops; }; diff --git a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx index 6bb916d57c95..68a4fe3818a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx +++ b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Declaring PXA2xx Master Controllers ----------------------------------- Typically a SPI master is defined in the arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c as a "platform device". The master configuration is passed to the driver via a table -found in arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h: +found in include/linux/spi/pxa2xx_spi.h: struct pxa2xx_spi_master { enum pxa_ssp_type ssp_type; @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ using the "spi_board_info" structure found in "linux/spi/spi.h". See Each slave device attached to the PXA must provide slave specific configuration information via the structure "pxa2xx_spi_chip" found in -"arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h". The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver +"include/linux/spi/pxa2xx_spi.h". The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver will uses the configuration whenever the driver communicates with the slave device. All fields are optional. diff --git a/Documentation/spinlocks.txt b/Documentation/spinlocks.txt index 178c831b907d..2e3c64b1a6a5 100644 --- a/Documentation/spinlocks.txt +++ b/Documentation/spinlocks.txt @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ to change the variables it has to get an exclusive write lock. The routines look the same as above: - rwlock_t xxx_lock = RW_LOCK_UNLOCKED; + rwlock_t xxx_lock = __RW_LOCK_UNLOCKED(xxx_lock); unsigned long flags; @@ -196,25 +196,3 @@ appropriate: For static initialization, use DEFINE_SPINLOCK() / DEFINE_RWLOCK() or __SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED() / __RW_LOCK_UNLOCKED() as appropriate. - -SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED and RW_LOCK_UNLOCKED are deprecated. These interfere -with lockdep state tracking. - -Most of the time, you can simply turn: - static spinlock_t xxx_lock = SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED; -into: - static DEFINE_SPINLOCK(xxx_lock); - -Static structure member variables go from: - - struct foo bar { - .lock = SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED; - }; - -to: - - struct foo bar { - .lock = __SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED(bar.lock); - }; - -Declaration of static rw_locks undergo a similar transformation. diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/00-INDEX b/Documentation/sysctl/00-INDEX index 1286f455992f..8cf5d493fd03 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/00-INDEX @@ -4,8 +4,6 @@ README - general information about /proc/sys/ sysctl files. abi.txt - documentation for /proc/sys/abi/*. -ctl_unnumbered.txt - - explanation of why one should not add new binary sysctl numbers. fs.txt - documentation for /proc/sys/fs/*. kernel.txt diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt index 62682500878a..4af0614147ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt @@ -88,20 +88,19 @@ you might want to raise the limit. file-max & file-nr: -The kernel allocates file handles dynamically, but as yet it -doesn't free them again. - The value in file-max denotes the maximum number of file- handles that the Linux kernel will allocate. When you get lots of error messages about running out of file handles, you might want to increase this limit. -Historically, the three values in file-nr denoted the number of -allocated file handles, the number of allocated but unused file -handles, and the maximum number of file handles. Linux 2.6 always -reports 0 as the number of free file handles -- this is not an -error, it just means that the number of allocated file handles -exactly matches the number of used file handles. +Historically,the kernel was able to allocate file handles +dynamically, but not to free them again. The three values in +file-nr denote the number of allocated file handles, the number +of allocated but unused file handles, and the maximum number of +file handles. Linux 2.6 always reports 0 as the number of free +file handles -- this is not an error, it just means that the +number of allocated file handles exactly matches the number of +used file handles. Attempts to allocate more file descriptors than file-max are reported with printk, look for "VFS: file-max limit <number> diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index 209e1584c3dc..36f007514db3 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -34,6 +34,7 @@ show up in /proc/sys/kernel: - hotplug - java-appletviewer [ binfmt_java, obsolete ] - java-interpreter [ binfmt_java, obsolete ] +- kptr_restrict - kstack_depth_to_print [ X86 only ] - l2cr [ PPC only ] - modprobe ==> Documentation/debugging-modules.txt @@ -219,7 +220,7 @@ dmesg_restrict: This toggle indicates whether unprivileged users are prevented from using dmesg(8) to view messages from the kernel's log buffer. When dmesg_restrict is set to (0) there are no restrictions. When -dmesg_restrict is set set to (1), users must have CAP_SYS_ADMIN to use +dmesg_restrict is set set to (1), users must have CAP_SYSLOG to use dmesg(8). The kernel config option CONFIG_SECURITY_DMESG_RESTRICT sets the default @@ -261,6 +262,19 @@ This flag controls the L2 cache of G3 processor boards. If ============================================================== +kptr_restrict: + +This toggle indicates whether restrictions are placed on +exposing kernel addresses via /proc and other interfaces. When +kptr_restrict is set to (0), there are no restrictions. When +kptr_restrict is set to (1), the default, kernel pointers +printed using the %pK format specifier will be replaced with 0's +unless the user has CAP_SYSLOG. When kptr_restrict is set to +(2), kernel pointers printed using %pK will be replaced with 0's +regardless of privileges. + +============================================================== + kstack_depth_to_print: (X86 only) Controls the number of words to print when dumping the raw @@ -353,7 +367,7 @@ the different loglevels. - console_loglevel: messages with a higher priority than this will be printed to the console -- default_message_level: messages without an explicit priority +- default_message_loglevel: messages without an explicit priority will be printed with this priority - minimum_console_loglevel: minimum (highest) value to which console_loglevel can be set diff --git a/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py new file mode 100755 index 000000000000..dbeb8a0d7175 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.py @@ -0,0 +1,1094 @@ +#!/usr/bin/python +# The TCM v4 multi-protocol fabric module generation script for drivers/target/$NEW_MOD +# +# Copyright (c) 2010 Rising Tide Systems +# Copyright (c) 2010 Linux-iSCSI.org +# +# Author: nab@kernel.org +# +import os, sys +import subprocess as sub +import string +import re +import optparse + +tcm_dir = "" + +fabric_ops = [] +fabric_mod_dir = "" +fabric_mod_port = "" +fabric_mod_init_port = "" + +def tcm_mod_err(msg): + print msg + sys.exit(1) + +def tcm_mod_create_module_subdir(fabric_mod_dir_var): + + if os.path.isdir(fabric_mod_dir_var) == True: + return 1 + + print "Creating fabric_mod_dir: " + fabric_mod_dir_var + ret = os.mkdir(fabric_mod_dir_var) + if ret: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to mkdir " + fabric_mod_dir_var) + + return + +def tcm_mod_build_FC_include(fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name): + global fabric_mod_port + global fabric_mod_init_port + buf = "" + + f = fabric_mod_dir_var + "/" + fabric_mod_name + "_base.h" + print "Writing file: " + f + + p = open(f, 'w'); + if not p: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to open file: " + f) + + buf = "#define " + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "_VERSION \"v0.1\"\n" + buf += "#define " + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "_NAMELEN 32\n" + buf += "\n" + buf += "struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_nacl {\n" + buf += " /* Binary World Wide unique Port Name for FC Initiator Nport */\n" + buf += " u64 nport_wwpn;\n" + buf += " /* ASCII formatted WWPN for FC Initiator Nport */\n" + buf += " char nport_name[" + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "_NAMELEN];\n" + buf += " /* Returned by " + fabric_mod_name + "_make_nodeacl() */\n" + buf += " struct se_node_acl se_node_acl;\n" + buf += "};\n" + buf += "\n" + buf += "struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg {\n" + buf += " /* FC lport target portal group tag for TCM */\n" + buf += " u16 lport_tpgt;\n" + buf += " /* Pointer back to " + fabric_mod_name + "_lport */\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_lport *lport;\n" + buf += " /* Returned by " + fabric_mod_name + "_make_tpg() */\n" + buf += " struct se_portal_group se_tpg;\n" + buf += "};\n" + buf += "\n" + buf += "struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_lport {\n" + buf += " /* SCSI protocol the lport is providing */\n" + buf += " u8 lport_proto_id;\n" + buf += " /* Binary World Wide unique Port Name for FC Target Lport */\n" + buf += " u64 lport_wwpn;\n" + buf += " /* ASCII formatted WWPN for FC Target Lport */\n" + buf += " char lport_name[" + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "_NAMELEN];\n" + buf += " /* Returned by " + fabric_mod_name + "_make_lport() */\n" + buf += " struct se_wwn lport_wwn;\n" + buf += "};\n" + + ret = p.write(buf) + if ret: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to write f: " + f) + + p.close() + + fabric_mod_port = "lport" + fabric_mod_init_port = "nport" + + return + +def tcm_mod_build_SAS_include(fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name): + global fabric_mod_port + global fabric_mod_init_port + buf = "" + + f = fabric_mod_dir_var + "/" + fabric_mod_name + "_base.h" + print "Writing file: " + f + + p = open(f, 'w'); + if not p: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to open file: " + f) + + buf = "#define " + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "_VERSION \"v0.1\"\n" + buf += "#define " + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "_NAMELEN 32\n" + buf += "\n" + buf += "struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_nacl {\n" + buf += " /* Binary World Wide unique Port Name for SAS Initiator port */\n" + buf += " u64 iport_wwpn;\n" + buf += " /* ASCII formatted WWPN for Sas Initiator port */\n" + buf += " char iport_name[" + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "_NAMELEN];\n" + buf += " /* Returned by " + fabric_mod_name + "_make_nodeacl() */\n" + buf += " struct se_node_acl se_node_acl;\n" + buf += "};\n\n" + buf += "struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg {\n" + buf += " /* SAS port target portal group tag for TCM */\n" + buf += " u16 tport_tpgt;\n" + buf += " /* Pointer back to " + fabric_mod_name + "_tport */\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tport *tport;\n" + buf += " /* Returned by " + fabric_mod_name + "_make_tpg() */\n" + buf += " struct se_portal_group se_tpg;\n" + buf += "};\n\n" + buf += "struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tport {\n" + buf += " /* SCSI protocol the tport is providing */\n" + buf += " u8 tport_proto_id;\n" + buf += " /* Binary World Wide unique Port Name for SAS Target port */\n" + buf += " u64 tport_wwpn;\n" + buf += " /* ASCII formatted WWPN for SAS Target port */\n" + buf += " char tport_name[" + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "_NAMELEN];\n" + buf += " /* Returned by " + fabric_mod_name + "_make_tport() */\n" + buf += " struct se_wwn tport_wwn;\n" + buf += "};\n" + + ret = p.write(buf) + if ret: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to write f: " + f) + + p.close() + + fabric_mod_port = "tport" + fabric_mod_init_port = "iport" + + return + +def tcm_mod_build_iSCSI_include(fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name): + global fabric_mod_port + global fabric_mod_init_port + buf = "" + + f = fabric_mod_dir_var + "/" + fabric_mod_name + "_base.h" + print "Writing file: " + f + + p = open(f, 'w'); + if not p: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to open file: " + f) + + buf = "#define " + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "_VERSION \"v0.1\"\n" + buf += "#define " + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "_NAMELEN 32\n" + buf += "\n" + buf += "struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_nacl {\n" + buf += " /* ASCII formatted InitiatorName */\n" + buf += " char iport_name[" + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "_NAMELEN];\n" + buf += " /* Returned by " + fabric_mod_name + "_make_nodeacl() */\n" + buf += " struct se_node_acl se_node_acl;\n" + buf += "};\n\n" + buf += "struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg {\n" + buf += " /* iSCSI target portal group tag for TCM */\n" + buf += " u16 tport_tpgt;\n" + buf += " /* Pointer back to " + fabric_mod_name + "_tport */\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tport *tport;\n" + buf += " /* Returned by " + fabric_mod_name + "_make_tpg() */\n" + buf += " struct se_portal_group se_tpg;\n" + buf += "};\n\n" + buf += "struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tport {\n" + buf += " /* SCSI protocol the tport is providing */\n" + buf += " u8 tport_proto_id;\n" + buf += " /* ASCII formatted TargetName for IQN */\n" + buf += " char tport_name[" + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "_NAMELEN];\n" + buf += " /* Returned by " + fabric_mod_name + "_make_tport() */\n" + buf += " struct se_wwn tport_wwn;\n" + buf += "};\n" + + ret = p.write(buf) + if ret: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to write f: " + f) + + p.close() + + fabric_mod_port = "tport" + fabric_mod_init_port = "iport" + + return + +def tcm_mod_build_base_includes(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir_val, fabric_mod_name): + + if proto_ident == "FC": + tcm_mod_build_FC_include(fabric_mod_dir_val, fabric_mod_name) + elif proto_ident == "SAS": + tcm_mod_build_SAS_include(fabric_mod_dir_val, fabric_mod_name) + elif proto_ident == "iSCSI": + tcm_mod_build_iSCSI_include(fabric_mod_dir_val, fabric_mod_name) + else: + print "Unsupported proto_ident: " + proto_ident + sys.exit(1) + + return + +def tcm_mod_build_configfs(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name): + buf = "" + + f = fabric_mod_dir_var + "/" + fabric_mod_name + "_configfs.c" + print "Writing file: " + f + + p = open(f, 'w'); + if not p: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to open file: " + f) + + buf = "#include <linux/module.h>\n" + buf += "#include <linux/moduleparam.h>\n" + buf += "#include <linux/version.h>\n" + buf += "#include <generated/utsrelease.h>\n" + buf += "#include <linux/utsname.h>\n" + buf += "#include <linux/init.h>\n" + buf += "#include <linux/slab.h>\n" + buf += "#include <linux/kthread.h>\n" + buf += "#include <linux/types.h>\n" + buf += "#include <linux/string.h>\n" + buf += "#include <linux/configfs.h>\n" + buf += "#include <linux/ctype.h>\n" + buf += "#include <asm/unaligned.h>\n\n" + buf += "#include <target/target_core_base.h>\n" + buf += "#include <target/target_core_transport.h>\n" + buf += "#include <target/target_core_fabric_ops.h>\n" + buf += "#include <target/target_core_fabric_configfs.h>\n" + buf += "#include <target/target_core_fabric_lib.h>\n" + buf += "#include <target/target_core_device.h>\n" + buf += "#include <target/target_core_tpg.h>\n" + buf += "#include <target/target_core_configfs.h>\n" + buf += "#include <target/target_core_base.h>\n" + buf += "#include <target/configfs_macros.h>\n\n" + buf += "#include <" + fabric_mod_name + "_base.h>\n" + buf += "#include <" + fabric_mod_name + "_fabric.h>\n\n" + + buf += "/* Local pointer to allocated TCM configfs fabric module */\n" + buf += "struct target_fabric_configfs *" + fabric_mod_name + "_fabric_configfs;\n\n" + + buf += "static struct se_node_acl *" + fabric_mod_name + "_make_nodeacl(\n" + buf += " struct se_portal_group *se_tpg,\n" + buf += " struct config_group *group,\n" + buf += " const char *name)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " struct se_node_acl *se_nacl, *se_nacl_new;\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_nacl *nacl;\n" + + if proto_ident == "FC" or proto_ident == "SAS": + buf += " u64 wwpn = 0;\n" + + buf += " u32 nexus_depth;\n\n" + buf += " /* " + fabric_mod_name + "_parse_wwn(name, &wwpn, 1) < 0)\n" + buf += " return ERR_PTR(-EINVAL); */\n" + buf += " se_nacl_new = " + fabric_mod_name + "_alloc_fabric_acl(se_tpg);\n" + buf += " if (!(se_nacl_new))\n" + buf += " return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);\n" + buf += "//#warning FIXME: Hardcoded nexus depth in " + fabric_mod_name + "_make_nodeacl()\n" + buf += " nexus_depth = 1;\n" + buf += " /*\n" + buf += " * se_nacl_new may be released by core_tpg_add_initiator_node_acl()\n" + buf += " * when converting a NodeACL from demo mode -> explict\n" + buf += " */\n" + buf += " se_nacl = core_tpg_add_initiator_node_acl(se_tpg, se_nacl_new,\n" + buf += " name, nexus_depth);\n" + buf += " if (IS_ERR(se_nacl)) {\n" + buf += " " + fabric_mod_name + "_release_fabric_acl(se_tpg, se_nacl_new);\n" + buf += " return se_nacl;\n" + buf += " }\n" + buf += " /*\n" + buf += " * Locate our struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_nacl and set the FC Nport WWPN\n" + buf += " */\n" + buf += " nacl = container_of(se_nacl, struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_nacl, se_node_acl);\n" + + if proto_ident == "FC" or proto_ident == "SAS": + buf += " nacl->" + fabric_mod_init_port + "_wwpn = wwpn;\n" + + buf += " /* " + fabric_mod_name + "_format_wwn(&nacl->" + fabric_mod_init_port + "_name[0], " + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "_NAMELEN, wwpn); */\n\n" + buf += " return se_nacl;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + buf += "static void " + fabric_mod_name + "_drop_nodeacl(struct se_node_acl *se_acl)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_nacl *nacl = container_of(se_acl,\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_nacl, se_node_acl);\n" + buf += " kfree(nacl);\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + + buf += "static struct se_portal_group *" + fabric_mod_name + "_make_tpg(\n" + buf += " struct se_wwn *wwn,\n" + buf += " struct config_group *group,\n" + buf += " const char *name)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_" + fabric_mod_port + "*" + fabric_mod_port + " = container_of(wwn,\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_" + fabric_mod_port + ", " + fabric_mod_port + "_wwn);\n\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg *tpg;\n" + buf += " unsigned long tpgt;\n" + buf += " int ret;\n\n" + buf += " if (strstr(name, \"tpgt_\") != name)\n" + buf += " return ERR_PTR(-EINVAL);\n" + buf += " if (strict_strtoul(name + 5, 10, &tpgt) || tpgt > UINT_MAX)\n" + buf += " return ERR_PTR(-EINVAL);\n\n" + buf += " tpg = kzalloc(sizeof(struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg), GFP_KERNEL);\n" + buf += " if (!(tpg)) {\n" + buf += " printk(KERN_ERR \"Unable to allocate struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg\");\n" + buf += " return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);\n" + buf += " }\n" + buf += " tpg->" + fabric_mod_port + " = " + fabric_mod_port + ";\n" + buf += " tpg->" + fabric_mod_port + "_tpgt = tpgt;\n\n" + buf += " ret = core_tpg_register(&" + fabric_mod_name + "_fabric_configfs->tf_ops, wwn,\n" + buf += " &tpg->se_tpg, (void *)tpg,\n" + buf += " TRANSPORT_TPG_TYPE_NORMAL);\n" + buf += " if (ret < 0) {\n" + buf += " kfree(tpg);\n" + buf += " return NULL;\n" + buf += " }\n" + buf += " return &tpg->se_tpg;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + buf += "static void " + fabric_mod_name + "_drop_tpg(struct se_portal_group *se_tpg)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg *tpg = container_of(se_tpg,\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg, se_tpg);\n\n" + buf += " core_tpg_deregister(se_tpg);\n" + buf += " kfree(tpg);\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + + buf += "static struct se_wwn *" + fabric_mod_name + "_make_" + fabric_mod_port + "(\n" + buf += " struct target_fabric_configfs *tf,\n" + buf += " struct config_group *group,\n" + buf += " const char *name)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_" + fabric_mod_port + " *" + fabric_mod_port + ";\n" + + if proto_ident == "FC" or proto_ident == "SAS": + buf += " u64 wwpn = 0;\n\n" + + buf += " /* if (" + fabric_mod_name + "_parse_wwn(name, &wwpn, 1) < 0)\n" + buf += " return ERR_PTR(-EINVAL); */\n\n" + buf += " " + fabric_mod_port + " = kzalloc(sizeof(struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_" + fabric_mod_port + "), GFP_KERNEL);\n" + buf += " if (!(" + fabric_mod_port + ")) {\n" + buf += " printk(KERN_ERR \"Unable to allocate struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_" + fabric_mod_port + "\");\n" + buf += " return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);\n" + buf += " }\n" + + if proto_ident == "FC" or proto_ident == "SAS": + buf += " " + fabric_mod_port + "->" + fabric_mod_port + "_wwpn = wwpn;\n" + + buf += " /* " + fabric_mod_name + "_format_wwn(&" + fabric_mod_port + "->" + fabric_mod_port + "_name[0], " + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "__NAMELEN, wwpn); */\n\n" + buf += " return &" + fabric_mod_port + "->" + fabric_mod_port + "_wwn;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + buf += "static void " + fabric_mod_name + "_drop_" + fabric_mod_port + "(struct se_wwn *wwn)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_" + fabric_mod_port + " *" + fabric_mod_port + " = container_of(wwn,\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_" + fabric_mod_port + ", " + fabric_mod_port + "_wwn);\n" + buf += " kfree(" + fabric_mod_port + ");\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + buf += "static ssize_t " + fabric_mod_name + "_wwn_show_attr_version(\n" + buf += " struct target_fabric_configfs *tf,\n" + buf += " char *page)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return sprintf(page, \"" + fabric_mod_name.upper() + " fabric module %s on %s/%s\"\n" + buf += " \"on \"UTS_RELEASE\"\\n\", " + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "_VERSION, utsname()->sysname,\n" + buf += " utsname()->machine);\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + buf += "TF_WWN_ATTR_RO(" + fabric_mod_name + ", version);\n\n" + buf += "static struct configfs_attribute *" + fabric_mod_name + "_wwn_attrs[] = {\n" + buf += " &" + fabric_mod_name + "_wwn_version.attr,\n" + buf += " NULL,\n" + buf += "};\n\n" + + buf += "static struct target_core_fabric_ops " + fabric_mod_name + "_ops = {\n" + buf += " .get_fabric_name = " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_name,\n" + buf += " .get_fabric_proto_ident = " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_proto_ident,\n" + buf += " .tpg_get_wwn = " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_wwn,\n" + buf += " .tpg_get_tag = " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_tag,\n" + buf += " .tpg_get_default_depth = " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_default_depth,\n" + buf += " .tpg_get_pr_transport_id = " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_pr_transport_id,\n" + buf += " .tpg_get_pr_transport_id_len = " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_pr_transport_id_len,\n" + buf += " .tpg_parse_pr_out_transport_id = " + fabric_mod_name + "_parse_pr_out_transport_id,\n" + buf += " .tpg_check_demo_mode = " + fabric_mod_name + "_check_false,\n" + buf += " .tpg_check_demo_mode_cache = " + fabric_mod_name + "_check_true,\n" + buf += " .tpg_check_demo_mode_write_protect = " + fabric_mod_name + "_check_true,\n" + buf += " .tpg_check_prod_mode_write_protect = " + fabric_mod_name + "_check_false,\n" + buf += " .tpg_alloc_fabric_acl = " + fabric_mod_name + "_alloc_fabric_acl,\n" + buf += " .tpg_release_fabric_acl = " + fabric_mod_name + "_release_fabric_acl,\n" + buf += " .tpg_get_inst_index = " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg_get_inst_index,\n" + buf += " .release_cmd_to_pool = " + fabric_mod_name + "_release_cmd,\n" + buf += " .release_cmd_direct = " + fabric_mod_name + "_release_cmd,\n" + buf += " .shutdown_session = " + fabric_mod_name + "_shutdown_session,\n" + buf += " .close_session = " + fabric_mod_name + "_close_session,\n" + buf += " .stop_session = " + fabric_mod_name + "_stop_session,\n" + buf += " .fall_back_to_erl0 = " + fabric_mod_name + "_reset_nexus,\n" + buf += " .sess_logged_in = " + fabric_mod_name + "_sess_logged_in,\n" + buf += " .sess_get_index = " + fabric_mod_name + "_sess_get_index,\n" + buf += " .sess_get_initiator_sid = NULL,\n" + buf += " .write_pending = " + fabric_mod_name + "_write_pending,\n" + buf += " .write_pending_status = " + fabric_mod_name + "_write_pending_status,\n" + buf += " .set_default_node_attributes = " + fabric_mod_name + "_set_default_node_attrs,\n" + buf += " .get_task_tag = " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_task_tag,\n" + buf += " .get_cmd_state = " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_cmd_state,\n" + buf += " .new_cmd_failure = " + fabric_mod_name + "_new_cmd_failure,\n" + buf += " .queue_data_in = " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_data_in,\n" + buf += " .queue_status = " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_status,\n" + buf += " .queue_tm_rsp = " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_tm_rsp,\n" + buf += " .get_fabric_sense_len = " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_sense_len,\n" + buf += " .set_fabric_sense_len = " + fabric_mod_name + "_set_fabric_sense_len,\n" + buf += " .is_state_remove = " + fabric_mod_name + "_is_state_remove,\n" + buf += " .pack_lun = " + fabric_mod_name + "_pack_lun,\n" + buf += " /*\n" + buf += " * Setup function pointers for generic logic in target_core_fabric_configfs.c\n" + buf += " */\n" + buf += " .fabric_make_wwn = " + fabric_mod_name + "_make_" + fabric_mod_port + ",\n" + buf += " .fabric_drop_wwn = " + fabric_mod_name + "_drop_" + fabric_mod_port + ",\n" + buf += " .fabric_make_tpg = " + fabric_mod_name + "_make_tpg,\n" + buf += " .fabric_drop_tpg = " + fabric_mod_name + "_drop_tpg,\n" + buf += " .fabric_post_link = NULL,\n" + buf += " .fabric_pre_unlink = NULL,\n" + buf += " .fabric_make_np = NULL,\n" + buf += " .fabric_drop_np = NULL,\n" + buf += " .fabric_make_nodeacl = " + fabric_mod_name + "_make_nodeacl,\n" + buf += " .fabric_drop_nodeacl = " + fabric_mod_name + "_drop_nodeacl,\n" + buf += "};\n\n" + + buf += "static int " + fabric_mod_name + "_register_configfs(void)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " struct target_fabric_configfs *fabric;\n" + buf += " int ret;\n\n" + buf += " printk(KERN_INFO \"" + fabric_mod_name.upper() + " fabric module %s on %s/%s\"\n" + buf += " \" on \"UTS_RELEASE\"\\n\"," + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "_VERSION, utsname()->sysname,\n" + buf += " utsname()->machine);\n" + buf += " /*\n" + buf += " * Register the top level struct config_item_type with TCM core\n" + buf += " */\n" + buf += " fabric = target_fabric_configfs_init(THIS_MODULE, \"" + fabric_mod_name[4:] + "\");\n" + buf += " if (!(fabric)) {\n" + buf += " printk(KERN_ERR \"target_fabric_configfs_init() failed\\n\");\n" + buf += " return -ENOMEM;\n" + buf += " }\n" + buf += " /*\n" + buf += " * Setup fabric->tf_ops from our local " + fabric_mod_name + "_ops\n" + buf += " */\n" + buf += " fabric->tf_ops = " + fabric_mod_name + "_ops;\n" + buf += " /*\n" + buf += " * Setup default attribute lists for various fabric->tf_cit_tmpl\n" + buf += " */\n" + buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_wwn_cit.ct_attrs = " + fabric_mod_name + "_wwn_attrs;\n" + buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_base_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_attrib_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_param_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_np_base_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_nacl_base_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_nacl_attrib_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_nacl_auth_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " TF_CIT_TMPL(fabric)->tfc_tpg_nacl_param_cit.ct_attrs = NULL;\n" + buf += " /*\n" + buf += " * Register the fabric for use within TCM\n" + buf += " */\n" + buf += " ret = target_fabric_configfs_register(fabric);\n" + buf += " if (ret < 0) {\n" + buf += " printk(KERN_ERR \"target_fabric_configfs_register() failed\"\n" + buf += " \" for " + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "\\n\");\n" + buf += " return ret;\n" + buf += " }\n" + buf += " /*\n" + buf += " * Setup our local pointer to *fabric\n" + buf += " */\n" + buf += " " + fabric_mod_name + "_fabric_configfs = fabric;\n" + buf += " printk(KERN_INFO \"" + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "[0] - Set fabric -> " + fabric_mod_name + "_fabric_configfs\\n\");\n" + buf += " return 0;\n" + buf += "};\n\n" + buf += "static void " + fabric_mod_name + "_deregister_configfs(void)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " if (!(" + fabric_mod_name + "_fabric_configfs))\n" + buf += " return;\n\n" + buf += " target_fabric_configfs_deregister(" + fabric_mod_name + "_fabric_configfs);\n" + buf += " " + fabric_mod_name + "_fabric_configfs = NULL;\n" + buf += " printk(KERN_INFO \"" + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "[0] - Cleared " + fabric_mod_name + "_fabric_configfs\\n\");\n" + buf += "};\n\n" + + buf += "static int __init " + fabric_mod_name + "_init(void)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " int ret;\n\n" + buf += " ret = " + fabric_mod_name + "_register_configfs();\n" + buf += " if (ret < 0)\n" + buf += " return ret;\n\n" + buf += " return 0;\n" + buf += "};\n\n" + buf += "static void " + fabric_mod_name + "_exit(void)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " " + fabric_mod_name + "_deregister_configfs();\n" + buf += "};\n\n" + + buf += "#ifdef MODULE\n" + buf += "MODULE_DESCRIPTION(\"" + fabric_mod_name.upper() + " series fabric driver\");\n" + buf += "MODULE_LICENSE(\"GPL\");\n" + buf += "module_init(" + fabric_mod_name + "_init);\n" + buf += "module_exit(" + fabric_mod_name + "_exit);\n" + buf += "#endif\n" + + ret = p.write(buf) + if ret: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to write f: " + f) + + p.close() + + return + +def tcm_mod_scan_fabric_ops(tcm_dir): + + fabric_ops_api = tcm_dir + "include/target/target_core_fabric_ops.h" + + print "Using tcm_mod_scan_fabric_ops: " + fabric_ops_api + process_fo = 0; + + p = open(fabric_ops_api, 'r') + + line = p.readline() + while line: + if process_fo == 0 and re.search('struct target_core_fabric_ops {', line): + line = p.readline() + continue + + if process_fo == 0: + process_fo = 1; + line = p.readline() + # Search for function pointer + if not re.search('\(\*', line): + continue + + fabric_ops.append(line.rstrip()) + continue + + line = p.readline() + # Search for function pointer + if not re.search('\(\*', line): + continue + + fabric_ops.append(line.rstrip()) + + p.close() + return + +def tcm_mod_dump_fabric_ops(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name): + buf = "" + bufi = "" + + f = fabric_mod_dir_var + "/" + fabric_mod_name + "_fabric.c" + print "Writing file: " + f + + p = open(f, 'w') + if not p: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to open file: " + f) + + fi = fabric_mod_dir_var + "/" + fabric_mod_name + "_fabric.h" + print "Writing file: " + fi + + pi = open(fi, 'w') + if not pi: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to open file: " + fi) + + buf = "#include <linux/slab.h>\n" + buf += "#include <linux/kthread.h>\n" + buf += "#include <linux/types.h>\n" + buf += "#include <linux/list.h>\n" + buf += "#include <linux/types.h>\n" + buf += "#include <linux/string.h>\n" + buf += "#include <linux/ctype.h>\n" + buf += "#include <asm/unaligned.h>\n" + buf += "#include <scsi/scsi.h>\n" + buf += "#include <scsi/scsi_host.h>\n" + buf += "#include <scsi/scsi_device.h>\n" + buf += "#include <scsi/scsi_cmnd.h>\n" + buf += "#include <scsi/libfc.h>\n\n" + buf += "#include <target/target_core_base.h>\n" + buf += "#include <target/target_core_transport.h>\n" + buf += "#include <target/target_core_fabric_ops.h>\n" + buf += "#include <target/target_core_fabric_lib.h>\n" + buf += "#include <target/target_core_device.h>\n" + buf += "#include <target/target_core_tpg.h>\n" + buf += "#include <target/target_core_configfs.h>\n" + buf += "#include <" + fabric_mod_name + "_base.h>\n" + buf += "#include <" + fabric_mod_name + "_fabric.h>\n\n" + + buf += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_check_true(struct se_portal_group *se_tpg)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 1;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_check_true(struct se_portal_group *);\n" + + buf += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_check_false(struct se_portal_group *se_tpg)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 0;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_check_false(struct se_portal_group *);\n" + + total_fabric_ops = len(fabric_ops) + i = 0 + + while i < total_fabric_ops: + fo = fabric_ops[i] + i += 1 +# print "fabric_ops: " + fo + + if re.search('get_fabric_name', fo): + buf += "char *" + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_name(void)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return \"" + fabric_mod_name[4:] + "\";\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "char *" + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_name(void);\n" + continue + + if re.search('get_fabric_proto_ident', fo): + buf += "u8 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_proto_ident(struct se_portal_group *se_tpg)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg *tpg = container_of(se_tpg,\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg, se_tpg);\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_" + fabric_mod_port + " *" + fabric_mod_port + " = tpg->" + fabric_mod_port + ";\n" + buf += " u8 proto_id;\n\n" + buf += " switch (" + fabric_mod_port + "->" + fabric_mod_port + "_proto_id) {\n" + if proto_ident == "FC": + buf += " case SCSI_PROTOCOL_FCP:\n" + buf += " default:\n" + buf += " proto_id = fc_get_fabric_proto_ident(se_tpg);\n" + buf += " break;\n" + elif proto_ident == "SAS": + buf += " case SCSI_PROTOCOL_SAS:\n" + buf += " default:\n" + buf += " proto_id = sas_get_fabric_proto_ident(se_tpg);\n" + buf += " break;\n" + elif proto_ident == "iSCSI": + buf += " case SCSI_PROTOCOL_ISCSI:\n" + buf += " default:\n" + buf += " proto_id = iscsi_get_fabric_proto_ident(se_tpg);\n" + buf += " break;\n" + + buf += " }\n\n" + buf += " return proto_id;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "u8 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_proto_ident(struct se_portal_group *);\n" + + if re.search('get_wwn', fo): + buf += "char *" + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_wwn(struct se_portal_group *se_tpg)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg *tpg = container_of(se_tpg,\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg, se_tpg);\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_" + fabric_mod_port + " *" + fabric_mod_port + " = tpg->" + fabric_mod_port + ";\n\n" + buf += " return &" + fabric_mod_port + "->" + fabric_mod_port + "_name[0];\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "char *" + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_wwn(struct se_portal_group *);\n" + + if re.search('get_tag', fo): + buf += "u16 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_tag(struct se_portal_group *se_tpg)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg *tpg = container_of(se_tpg,\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg, se_tpg);\n" + buf += " return tpg->" + fabric_mod_port + "_tpgt;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "u16 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_tag(struct se_portal_group *);\n" + + if re.search('get_default_depth', fo): + buf += "u32 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_default_depth(struct se_portal_group *se_tpg)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 1;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "u32 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_default_depth(struct se_portal_group *);\n" + + if re.search('get_pr_transport_id\)\(', fo): + buf += "u32 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_pr_transport_id(\n" + buf += " struct se_portal_group *se_tpg,\n" + buf += " struct se_node_acl *se_nacl,\n" + buf += " struct t10_pr_registration *pr_reg,\n" + buf += " int *format_code,\n" + buf += " unsigned char *buf)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg *tpg = container_of(se_tpg,\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg, se_tpg);\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_" + fabric_mod_port + " *" + fabric_mod_port + " = tpg->" + fabric_mod_port + ";\n" + buf += " int ret = 0;\n\n" + buf += " switch (" + fabric_mod_port + "->" + fabric_mod_port + "_proto_id) {\n" + if proto_ident == "FC": + buf += " case SCSI_PROTOCOL_FCP:\n" + buf += " default:\n" + buf += " ret = fc_get_pr_transport_id(se_tpg, se_nacl, pr_reg,\n" + buf += " format_code, buf);\n" + buf += " break;\n" + elif proto_ident == "SAS": + buf += " case SCSI_PROTOCOL_SAS:\n" + buf += " default:\n" + buf += " ret = sas_get_pr_transport_id(se_tpg, se_nacl, pr_reg,\n" + buf += " format_code, buf);\n" + buf += " break;\n" + elif proto_ident == "iSCSI": + buf += " case SCSI_PROTOCOL_ISCSI:\n" + buf += " default:\n" + buf += " ret = iscsi_get_pr_transport_id(se_tpg, se_nacl, pr_reg,\n" + buf += " format_code, buf);\n" + buf += " break;\n" + + buf += " }\n\n" + buf += " return ret;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "u32 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_pr_transport_id(struct se_portal_group *,\n" + bufi += " struct se_node_acl *, struct t10_pr_registration *,\n" + bufi += " int *, unsigned char *);\n" + + if re.search('get_pr_transport_id_len\)\(', fo): + buf += "u32 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_pr_transport_id_len(\n" + buf += " struct se_portal_group *se_tpg,\n" + buf += " struct se_node_acl *se_nacl,\n" + buf += " struct t10_pr_registration *pr_reg,\n" + buf += " int *format_code)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg *tpg = container_of(se_tpg,\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg, se_tpg);\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_" + fabric_mod_port + " *" + fabric_mod_port + " = tpg->" + fabric_mod_port + ";\n" + buf += " int ret = 0;\n\n" + buf += " switch (" + fabric_mod_port + "->" + fabric_mod_port + "_proto_id) {\n" + if proto_ident == "FC": + buf += " case SCSI_PROTOCOL_FCP:\n" + buf += " default:\n" + buf += " ret = fc_get_pr_transport_id_len(se_tpg, se_nacl, pr_reg,\n" + buf += " format_code);\n" + buf += " break;\n" + elif proto_ident == "SAS": + buf += " case SCSI_PROTOCOL_SAS:\n" + buf += " default:\n" + buf += " ret = sas_get_pr_transport_id_len(se_tpg, se_nacl, pr_reg,\n" + buf += " format_code);\n" + buf += " break;\n" + elif proto_ident == "iSCSI": + buf += " case SCSI_PROTOCOL_ISCSI:\n" + buf += " default:\n" + buf += " ret = iscsi_get_pr_transport_id_len(se_tpg, se_nacl, pr_reg,\n" + buf += " format_code);\n" + buf += " break;\n" + + + buf += " }\n\n" + buf += " return ret;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "u32 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_pr_transport_id_len(struct se_portal_group *,\n" + bufi += " struct se_node_acl *, struct t10_pr_registration *,\n" + bufi += " int *);\n" + + if re.search('parse_pr_out_transport_id\)\(', fo): + buf += "char *" + fabric_mod_name + "_parse_pr_out_transport_id(\n" + buf += " struct se_portal_group *se_tpg,\n" + buf += " const char *buf,\n" + buf += " u32 *out_tid_len,\n" + buf += " char **port_nexus_ptr)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg *tpg = container_of(se_tpg,\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg, se_tpg);\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_" + fabric_mod_port + " *" + fabric_mod_port + " = tpg->" + fabric_mod_port + ";\n" + buf += " char *tid = NULL;\n\n" + buf += " switch (" + fabric_mod_port + "->" + fabric_mod_port + "_proto_id) {\n" + if proto_ident == "FC": + buf += " case SCSI_PROTOCOL_FCP:\n" + buf += " default:\n" + buf += " tid = fc_parse_pr_out_transport_id(se_tpg, buf, out_tid_len,\n" + buf += " port_nexus_ptr);\n" + elif proto_ident == "SAS": + buf += " case SCSI_PROTOCOL_SAS:\n" + buf += " default:\n" + buf += " tid = sas_parse_pr_out_transport_id(se_tpg, buf, out_tid_len,\n" + buf += " port_nexus_ptr);\n" + elif proto_ident == "iSCSI": + buf += " case SCSI_PROTOCOL_ISCSI:\n" + buf += " default:\n" + buf += " tid = iscsi_parse_pr_out_transport_id(se_tpg, buf, out_tid_len,\n" + buf += " port_nexus_ptr);\n" + + buf += " }\n\n" + buf += " return tid;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "char *" + fabric_mod_name + "_parse_pr_out_transport_id(struct se_portal_group *,\n" + bufi += " const char *, u32 *, char **);\n" + + if re.search('alloc_fabric_acl\)\(', fo): + buf += "struct se_node_acl *" + fabric_mod_name + "_alloc_fabric_acl(struct se_portal_group *se_tpg)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_nacl *nacl;\n\n" + buf += " nacl = kzalloc(sizeof(struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_nacl), GFP_KERNEL);\n" + buf += " if (!(nacl)) {\n" + buf += " printk(KERN_ERR \"Unable to alocate struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_nacl\\n\");\n" + buf += " return NULL;\n" + buf += " }\n\n" + buf += " return &nacl->se_node_acl;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "struct se_node_acl *" + fabric_mod_name + "_alloc_fabric_acl(struct se_portal_group *);\n" + + if re.search('release_fabric_acl\)\(', fo): + buf += "void " + fabric_mod_name + "_release_fabric_acl(\n" + buf += " struct se_portal_group *se_tpg,\n" + buf += " struct se_node_acl *se_nacl)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_nacl *nacl = container_of(se_nacl,\n" + buf += " struct " + fabric_mod_name + "_nacl, se_node_acl);\n" + buf += " kfree(nacl);\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "void " + fabric_mod_name + "_release_fabric_acl(struct se_portal_group *,\n" + bufi += " struct se_node_acl *);\n" + + if re.search('tpg_get_inst_index\)\(', fo): + buf += "u32 " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg_get_inst_index(struct se_portal_group *se_tpg)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 1;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "u32 " + fabric_mod_name + "_tpg_get_inst_index(struct se_portal_group *);\n" + + if re.search('release_cmd_to_pool', fo): + buf += "void " + fabric_mod_name + "_release_cmd(struct se_cmd *se_cmd)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "void " + fabric_mod_name + "_release_cmd(struct se_cmd *);\n" + + if re.search('shutdown_session\)\(', fo): + buf += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_shutdown_session(struct se_session *se_sess)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 0;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_shutdown_session(struct se_session *);\n" + + if re.search('close_session\)\(', fo): + buf += "void " + fabric_mod_name + "_close_session(struct se_session *se_sess)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "void " + fabric_mod_name + "_close_session(struct se_session *);\n" + + if re.search('stop_session\)\(', fo): + buf += "void " + fabric_mod_name + "_stop_session(struct se_session *se_sess, int sess_sleep , int conn_sleep)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "void " + fabric_mod_name + "_stop_session(struct se_session *, int, int);\n" + + if re.search('fall_back_to_erl0\)\(', fo): + buf += "void " + fabric_mod_name + "_reset_nexus(struct se_session *se_sess)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "void " + fabric_mod_name + "_reset_nexus(struct se_session *);\n" + + if re.search('sess_logged_in\)\(', fo): + buf += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_sess_logged_in(struct se_session *se_sess)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 0;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_sess_logged_in(struct se_session *);\n" + + if re.search('sess_get_index\)\(', fo): + buf += "u32 " + fabric_mod_name + "_sess_get_index(struct se_session *se_sess)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 0;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "u32 " + fabric_mod_name + "_sess_get_index(struct se_session *);\n" + + if re.search('write_pending\)\(', fo): + buf += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_write_pending(struct se_cmd *se_cmd)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 0;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_write_pending(struct se_cmd *);\n" + + if re.search('write_pending_status\)\(', fo): + buf += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_write_pending_status(struct se_cmd *se_cmd)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 0;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_write_pending_status(struct se_cmd *);\n" + + if re.search('set_default_node_attributes\)\(', fo): + buf += "void " + fabric_mod_name + "_set_default_node_attrs(struct se_node_acl *nacl)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "void " + fabric_mod_name + "_set_default_node_attrs(struct se_node_acl *);\n" + + if re.search('get_task_tag\)\(', fo): + buf += "u32 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_task_tag(struct se_cmd *se_cmd)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 0;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "u32 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_task_tag(struct se_cmd *);\n" + + if re.search('get_cmd_state\)\(', fo): + buf += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_cmd_state(struct se_cmd *se_cmd)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 0;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_cmd_state(struct se_cmd *);\n" + + if re.search('new_cmd_failure\)\(', fo): + buf += "void " + fabric_mod_name + "_new_cmd_failure(struct se_cmd *se_cmd)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "void " + fabric_mod_name + "_new_cmd_failure(struct se_cmd *);\n" + + if re.search('queue_data_in\)\(', fo): + buf += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_data_in(struct se_cmd *se_cmd)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 0;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_data_in(struct se_cmd *);\n" + + if re.search('queue_status\)\(', fo): + buf += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_status(struct se_cmd *se_cmd)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 0;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_status(struct se_cmd *);\n" + + if re.search('queue_tm_rsp\)\(', fo): + buf += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_tm_rsp(struct se_cmd *se_cmd)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 0;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_queue_tm_rsp(struct se_cmd *);\n" + + if re.search('get_fabric_sense_len\)\(', fo): + buf += "u16 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_sense_len(void)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 0;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "u16 " + fabric_mod_name + "_get_fabric_sense_len(void);\n" + + if re.search('set_fabric_sense_len\)\(', fo): + buf += "u16 " + fabric_mod_name + "_set_fabric_sense_len(struct se_cmd *se_cmd, u32 sense_length)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 0;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "u16 " + fabric_mod_name + "_set_fabric_sense_len(struct se_cmd *, u32);\n" + + if re.search('is_state_remove\)\(', fo): + buf += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_is_state_remove(struct se_cmd *se_cmd)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " return 0;\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "int " + fabric_mod_name + "_is_state_remove(struct se_cmd *);\n" + + if re.search('pack_lun\)\(', fo): + buf += "u64 " + fabric_mod_name + "_pack_lun(unsigned int lun)\n" + buf += "{\n" + buf += " WARN_ON(lun >= 256);\n" + buf += " /* Caller wants this byte-swapped */\n" + buf += " return cpu_to_le64((lun & 0xff) << 8);\n" + buf += "}\n\n" + bufi += "u64 " + fabric_mod_name + "_pack_lun(unsigned int);\n" + + + ret = p.write(buf) + if ret: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to write f: " + f) + + p.close() + + ret = pi.write(bufi) + if ret: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to write fi: " + fi) + + pi.close() + return + +def tcm_mod_build_kbuild(fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name): + + buf = "" + f = fabric_mod_dir_var + "/Kbuild" + print "Writing file: " + f + + p = open(f, 'w') + if not p: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to open file: " + f) + + buf = "EXTRA_CFLAGS += -I$(srctree)/drivers/target/ -I$(srctree)/include/ -I$(srctree)/drivers/scsi/ -I$(srctree)/include/scsi/ -I$(srctree)/drivers/target/" + fabric_mod_name + "\n\n" + buf += fabric_mod_name + "-objs := " + fabric_mod_name + "_fabric.o \\\n" + buf += " " + fabric_mod_name + "_configfs.o\n" + buf += "obj-$(CONFIG_" + fabric_mod_name.upper() + ") += " + fabric_mod_name + ".o\n" + + ret = p.write(buf) + if ret: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to write f: " + f) + + p.close() + return + +def tcm_mod_build_kconfig(fabric_mod_dir_var, fabric_mod_name): + + buf = "" + f = fabric_mod_dir_var + "/Kconfig" + print "Writing file: " + f + + p = open(f, 'w') + if not p: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to open file: " + f) + + buf = "config " + fabric_mod_name.upper() + "\n" + buf += " tristate \"" + fabric_mod_name.upper() + " fabric module\"\n" + buf += " depends on TARGET_CORE && CONFIGFS_FS\n" + buf += " default n\n" + buf += " ---help---\n" + buf += " Say Y here to enable the " + fabric_mod_name.upper() + " fabric module\n" + + ret = p.write(buf) + if ret: + tcm_mod_err("Unable to write f: " + f) + + p.close() + return + +def tcm_mod_add_kbuild(tcm_dir, fabric_mod_name): + buf = "obj-$(CONFIG_" + fabric_mod_name.upper() + ") += " + fabric_mod_name.lower() + "/\n" + kbuild = tcm_dir + "/drivers/target/Kbuild" + + f = open(kbuild, 'a') + f.write(buf) + f.close() + return + +def tcm_mod_add_kconfig(tcm_dir, fabric_mod_name): + buf = "source \"drivers/target/" + fabric_mod_name.lower() + "/Kconfig\"\n" + kconfig = tcm_dir + "/drivers/target/Kconfig" + + f = open(kconfig, 'a') + f.write(buf) + f.close() + return + +def main(modname, proto_ident): +# proto_ident = "FC" +# proto_ident = "SAS" +# proto_ident = "iSCSI" + + tcm_dir = os.getcwd(); + tcm_dir += "/../../" + print "tcm_dir: " + tcm_dir + fabric_mod_name = modname + fabric_mod_dir = tcm_dir + "drivers/target/" + fabric_mod_name + print "Set fabric_mod_name: " + fabric_mod_name + print "Set fabric_mod_dir: " + fabric_mod_dir + print "Using proto_ident: " + proto_ident + + if proto_ident != "FC" and proto_ident != "SAS" and proto_ident != "iSCSI": + print "Unsupported proto_ident: " + proto_ident + sys.exit(1) + + ret = tcm_mod_create_module_subdir(fabric_mod_dir) + if ret: + print "tcm_mod_create_module_subdir() failed because module already exists!" + sys.exit(1) + + tcm_mod_build_base_includes(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir, fabric_mod_name) + tcm_mod_scan_fabric_ops(tcm_dir) + tcm_mod_dump_fabric_ops(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir, fabric_mod_name) + tcm_mod_build_configfs(proto_ident, fabric_mod_dir, fabric_mod_name) + tcm_mod_build_kbuild(fabric_mod_dir, fabric_mod_name) + tcm_mod_build_kconfig(fabric_mod_dir, fabric_mod_name) + + input = raw_input("Would you like to add " + fabric_mod_name + "to drivers/target/Kbuild..? [yes,no]: ") + if input == "yes" or input == "y": + tcm_mod_add_kbuild(tcm_dir, fabric_mod_name) + + input = raw_input("Would you like to add " + fabric_mod_name + "to drivers/target/Kconfig..? [yes,no]: ") + if input == "yes" or input == "y": + tcm_mod_add_kconfig(tcm_dir, fabric_mod_name) + + return + +parser = optparse.OptionParser() +parser.add_option('-m', '--modulename', help='Module name', dest='modname', + action='store', nargs=1, type='string') +parser.add_option('-p', '--protoident', help='Protocol Ident', dest='protoident', + action='store', nargs=1, type='string') + +(opts, args) = parser.parse_args() + +mandatories = ['modname', 'protoident'] +for m in mandatories: + if not opts.__dict__[m]: + print "mandatory option is missing\n" + parser.print_help() + exit(-1) + +if __name__ == "__main__": + + main(str(opts.modname), opts.protoident) diff --git a/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.txt b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..84533d8e747f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.txt @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ +>>>>>>>>>> The TCM v4 fabric module script generator <<<<<<<<<< + +Greetings all, + +This document is intended to be a mini-HOWTO for using the tcm_mod_builder.py +script to generate a brand new functional TCM v4 fabric .ko module of your very own, +that once built can be immediately be loaded to start access the new TCM/ConfigFS +fabric skeleton, by simply using: + + modprobe $TCM_NEW_MOD + mkdir -p /sys/kernel/config/target/$TCM_NEW_MOD + +This script will create a new drivers/target/$TCM_NEW_MOD/, and will do the following + + *) Generate new API callers for drivers/target/target_core_fabric_configs.c logic + ->make_nodeacl(), ->drop_nodeacl(), ->make_tpg(), ->drop_tpg() + ->make_wwn(), ->drop_wwn(). These are created into $TCM_NEW_MOD/$TCM_NEW_MOD_configfs.c + *) Generate basic infrastructure for loading/unloading LKMs and TCM/ConfigFS fabric module + using a skeleton struct target_core_fabric_ops API template. + *) Based on user defined T10 Proto_Ident for the new fabric module being built, + the TransportID / Initiator and Target WWPN related handlers for + SPC-3 persistent reservation are automatically generated in $TCM_NEW_MOD/$TCM_NEW_MOD_fabric.c + using drivers/target/target_core_fabric_lib.c logic. + *) NOP API calls for all other Data I/O path and fabric dependent attribute logic + in $TCM_NEW_MOD/$TCM_NEW_MOD_fabric.c + +tcm_mod_builder.py depends upon the mandatory '-p $PROTO_IDENT' and '-m +$FABRIC_MOD_name' parameters, and actually running the script looks like: + +target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target# python tcm_mod_builder.py -p iSCSI -m tcm_nab5000 +tcm_dir: /mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../ +Set fabric_mod_name: tcm_nab5000 +Set fabric_mod_dir: +/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000 +Using proto_ident: iSCSI +Creating fabric_mod_dir: +/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000 +Writing file: +/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/tcm_nab5000_base.h +Using tcm_mod_scan_fabric_ops: +/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../include/target/target_core_fabric_ops.h +Writing file: +/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/tcm_nab5000_fabric.c +Writing file: +/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/tcm_nab5000_fabric.h +Writing file: +/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/tcm_nab5000_configfs.c +Writing file: +/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/Kbuild +Writing file: +/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/Kconfig +Would you like to add tcm_nab5000to drivers/target/Kbuild..? [yes,no]: yes +Would you like to add tcm_nab5000to drivers/target/Kconfig..? [yes,no]: yes + +At the end of tcm_mod_builder.py. the script will ask to add the following +line to drivers/target/Kbuild: + + obj-$(CONFIG_TCM_NAB5000) += tcm_nab5000/ + +and the same for drivers/target/Kconfig: + + source "drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/Kconfig" + +*) Run 'make menuconfig' and select the new CONFIG_TCM_NAB5000 item: + + <M> TCM_NAB5000 fabric module + +*) Build using 'make modules', once completed you will have: + +target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# ls -la drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/ +total 1348 +drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 4096 2010-10-05 03:23 . +drwxr-xr-x 9 root root 4096 2010-10-05 03:22 .. +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 282 2010-10-05 03:22 Kbuild +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 171 2010-10-05 03:22 Kconfig +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 49 2010-10-05 03:23 modules.order +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 738 2010-10-05 03:22 tcm_nab5000_base.h +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 9096 2010-10-05 03:22 tcm_nab5000_configfs.c +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 191200 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000_configfs.o +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 40504 2010-10-05 03:23 .tcm_nab5000_configfs.o.cmd +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 5414 2010-10-05 03:22 tcm_nab5000_fabric.c +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 2016 2010-10-05 03:22 tcm_nab5000_fabric.h +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 190932 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000_fabric.o +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 40713 2010-10-05 03:23 .tcm_nab5000_fabric.o.cmd +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 401861 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000.ko +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 265 2010-10-05 03:23 .tcm_nab5000.ko.cmd +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 459 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000.mod.c +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 23896 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000.mod.o +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 22655 2010-10-05 03:23 .tcm_nab5000.mod.o.cmd +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 379022 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000.o +-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 211 2010-10-05 03:23 .tcm_nab5000.o.cmd + +*) Load the new module, create a lun_0 configfs group, and add new TCM Core + IBLOCK backstore symlink to port: + +target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# insmod drivers/target/tcm_nab5000.ko +target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# mkdir -p /sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/iqn.foo/tpgt_1/lun/lun_0 +target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# cd /sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/iqn.foo/tpgt_1/lun/lun_0/ +target:/sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/iqn.foo/tpgt_1/lun/lun_0# ln -s /sys/kernel/config/target/core/iblock_0/lvm_test0 nab5000_port + +target:/sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/iqn.foo/tpgt_1/lun/lun_0# cd - +target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# tree /sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/ +/sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/ +|-- discovery_auth +|-- iqn.foo +| `-- tpgt_1 +| |-- acls +| |-- attrib +| |-- lun +| | `-- lun_0 +| | |-- alua_tg_pt_gp +| | |-- alua_tg_pt_offline +| | |-- alua_tg_pt_status +| | |-- alua_tg_pt_write_md +| | `-- nab5000_port -> ../../../../../../target/core/iblock_0/lvm_test0 +| |-- np +| `-- param +`-- version + +target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# lsmod +Module Size Used by +tcm_nab5000 3935 4 +iscsi_target_mod 193211 0 +target_core_stgt 8090 0 +target_core_pscsi 11122 1 +target_core_file 9172 2 +target_core_iblock 9280 1 +target_core_mod 228575 31 +tcm_nab5000,iscsi_target_mod,target_core_stgt,target_core_pscsi,target_core_file,target_core_iblock +libfc 73681 0 +scsi_debug 56265 0 +scsi_tgt 8666 1 target_core_stgt +configfs 20644 2 target_core_mod + +---------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Future TODO items: + + *) Add more T10 proto_idents + *) Make tcm_mod_dump_fabric_ops() smarter and generate function pointer + defs directly from include/target/target_core_fabric_ops.h:struct target_core_fabric_ops + structure members. + +October 5th, 2010 +Nicholas A. Bellinger <nab@linux-iscsi.org> diff --git a/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt b/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt index cb3d15bc1aeb..b61e46f449aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt +++ b/Documentation/thermal/sysfs-api.txt @@ -278,3 +278,15 @@ method, the sys I/F structure will be built like this: |---name: acpitz |---temp1_input: 37000 |---temp1_crit: 100000 + +4. Event Notification + +The framework includes a simple notification mechanism, in the form of a +netlink event. Netlink socket initialization is done during the _init_ +of the framework. Drivers which intend to use the notification mechanism +just need to call generate_netlink_event() with two arguments viz +(originator, event). Typically the originator will be an integer assigned +to a thermal_zone_device when it registers itself with the framework. The +event will be one of:{THERMAL_AUX0, THERMAL_AUX1, THERMAL_CRITICAL, +THERMAL_DEV_FAULT}. Notification can be sent when the current temperature +crosses any of the configured thresholds. diff --git a/Documentation/timers/timer_stats.txt b/Documentation/timers/timer_stats.txt index 9bd00fc2e823..8abd40b22b7f 100644 --- a/Documentation/timers/timer_stats.txt +++ b/Documentation/timers/timer_stats.txt @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Linux system over a sample period: - the pid of the task(process) which initialized the timer - the name of the process which initialized the timer -- the function where the timer was intialized +- the function where the timer was initialized - the callback function which is associated to the timer - the number of events (callbacks) diff --git a/Documentation/trace/events-power.txt b/Documentation/trace/events-power.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..96d87b67fe37 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/trace/events-power.txt @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + Subsystem Trace Points: power + +The power tracing system captures events related to power transitions +within the kernel. Broadly speaking there are three major subheadings: + + o Power state switch which reports events related to suspend (S-states), + cpuidle (C-states) and cpufreq (P-states) + o System clock related changes + o Power domains related changes and transitions + +This document describes what each of the tracepoints is and why they +might be useful. + +Cf. include/trace/events/power.h for the events definitions. + +1. Power state switch events +============================ + +1.1 New trace API +----------------- + +A 'cpu' event class gathers the CPU-related events: cpuidle and +cpufreq. + +cpu_idle "state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" +cpu_frequency "state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" + +A suspend event is used to indicate the system going in and out of the +suspend mode: + +machine_suspend "state=%lu" + + +Note: the value of '-1' or '4294967295' for state means an exit from the current state, +i.e. trace_cpu_idle(4, smp_processor_id()) means that the system +enters the idle state 4, while trace_cpu_idle(PWR_EVENT_EXIT, smp_processor_id()) +means that the system exits the previous idle state. + +The event which has 'state=4294967295' in the trace is very important to the user +space tools which are using it to detect the end of the current state, and so to +correctly draw the states diagrams and to calculate accurate statistics etc. + +1.2 DEPRECATED trace API +------------------------ + +A new Kconfig option CONFIG_EVENT_POWER_TRACING_DEPRECATED with the default value of +'y' has been created. This allows the legacy trace power API to be used conjointly +with the new trace API. +The Kconfig option, the old trace API (in include/trace/events/power.h) and the +old trace points will disappear in a future release (namely 2.6.41). + +power_start "type=%lu state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" +power_frequency "type=%lu state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" +power_end "cpu_id=%lu" + +The 'type' parameter takes one of those macros: + . POWER_NONE = 0, + . POWER_CSTATE = 1, /* C-State */ + . POWER_PSTATE = 2, /* Fequency change or DVFS */ + +The 'state' parameter is set depending on the type: + . Target C-state for type=POWER_CSTATE, + . Target frequency for type=POWER_PSTATE, + +power_end is used to indicate the exit of a state, corresponding to the latest +power_start event. + +2. Clocks events +================ +The clock events are used for clock enable/disable and for +clock rate change. + +clock_enable "%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" +clock_disable "%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" +clock_set_rate "%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" + +The first parameter gives the clock name (e.g. "gpio1_iclk"). +The second parameter is '1' for enable, '0' for disable, the target +clock rate for set_rate. + +3. Power domains events +======================= +The power domain events are used for power domains transitions + +power_domain_target "%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" + +The first parameter gives the power domain name (e.g. "mpu_pwrdm"). +The second parameter is the power domain target state. + diff --git a/Documentation/trace/events.txt b/Documentation/trace/events.txt index 09bd8e902989..b510564aac7e 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/events.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/events.txt @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ is the size of the data item, in bytes. For example, here's the information displayed for the 'sched_wakeup' event: -# cat /debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup/format +# cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup/format name: sched_wakeup ID: 60 @@ -201,19 +201,19 @@ to the 'filter' file for the given event. For example: -# cd /debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup +# cd /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup # echo "common_preempt_count > 4" > filter A slightly more involved example: -# cd /debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_signal_send +# cd /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/signal/signal_generate # echo "((sig >= 10 && sig < 15) || sig == 17) && comm != bash" > filter If there is an error in the expression, you'll get an 'Invalid argument' error when setting it, and the erroneous string along with an error message can be seen by looking at the filter e.g.: -# cd /debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_signal_send +# cd /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/signal/signal_generate # echo "((sig >= 10 && sig < 15) || dsig == 17) && comm != bash" > filter -bash: echo: write error: Invalid argument # cat filter diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace-design.txt b/Documentation/trace/ftrace-design.txt index dc52bd442c92..79fcafc7fd64 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/ftrace-design.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace-design.txt @@ -247,6 +247,13 @@ You need very few things to get the syscalls tracing in an arch. - Support the TIF_SYSCALL_TRACEPOINT thread flags. - Put the trace_sys_enter() and trace_sys_exit() tracepoints calls from ptrace in the ptrace syscalls tracing path. +- If the system call table on this arch is more complicated than a simple array + of addresses of the system calls, implement an arch_syscall_addr to return + the address of a given system call. +- If the symbol names of the system calls do not match the function names on + this arch, define ARCH_HAS_SYSCALL_MATCH_SYM_NAME in asm/ftrace.h and + implement arch_syscall_match_sym_name with the appropriate logic to return + true if the function name corresponds with the symbol name. - Tag this arch as HAVE_SYSCALL_TRACEPOINTS. diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt index 557c1edeccaf..1ebc24cf9a55 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt @@ -80,11 +80,11 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: tracers listed here can be configured by echoing their name into current_tracer. - tracing_enabled: + tracing_on: - This sets or displays whether the current_tracer - is activated and tracing or not. Echo 0 into this - file to disable the tracer or 1 to enable it. + This sets or displays whether writing to the trace + ring buffer is enabled. Echo 0 into this file to disable + the tracer or 1 to enable it. trace: @@ -202,10 +202,6 @@ Here is the list of current tracers that may be configured. to draw a graph of function calls similar to C code source. - "sched_switch" - - Traces the context switches and wakeups between tasks. - "irqsoff" Traces the areas that disable interrupts and saves @@ -273,39 +269,6 @@ format, the function name that was traced "path_put" and the parent function that called this function "path_walk". The timestamp is the time at which the function was entered. -The sched_switch tracer also includes tracing of task wakeups -and context switches. - - ksoftirqd/1-7 [01] 1453.070013: 7:115:R + 2916:115:S - ksoftirqd/1-7 [01] 1453.070013: 7:115:R + 10:115:S - ksoftirqd/1-7 [01] 1453.070013: 7:115:R ==> 10:115:R - events/1-10 [01] 1453.070013: 10:115:S ==> 2916:115:R - kondemand/1-2916 [01] 1453.070013: 2916:115:S ==> 7:115:R - ksoftirqd/1-7 [01] 1453.070013: 7:115:S ==> 0:140:R - -Wake ups are represented by a "+" and the context switches are -shown as "==>". The format is: - - Context switches: - - Previous task Next Task - - <pid>:<prio>:<state> ==> <pid>:<prio>:<state> - - Wake ups: - - Current task Task waking up - - <pid>:<prio>:<state> + <pid>:<prio>:<state> - -The prio is the internal kernel priority, which is the inverse -of the priority that is usually displayed by user-space tools. -Zero represents the highest priority (99). Prio 100 starts the -"nice" priorities with 100 being equal to nice -20 and 139 being -nice 19. The prio "140" is reserved for the idle task which is -the lowest priority thread (pid 0). - - Latency trace format -------------------- @@ -491,78 +454,10 @@ x494] <- /root/a.out[+0x4a8] <- /lib/libc-2.7.so[+0x1e1a6] latencies, as described in "Latency trace format". -sched_switch ------------- - -This tracer simply records schedule switches. Here is an example -of how to use it. - - # echo sched_switch > current_tracer - # echo 1 > tracing_enabled - # sleep 1 - # echo 0 > tracing_enabled - # cat trace - -# tracer: sched_switch -# -# TASK-PID CPU# TIMESTAMP FUNCTION -# | | | | | - bash-3997 [01] 240.132281: 3997:120:R + 4055:120:R - bash-3997 [01] 240.132284: 3997:120:R ==> 4055:120:R - sleep-4055 [01] 240.132371: 4055:120:S ==> 3997:120:R - bash-3997 [01] 240.132454: 3997:120:R + 4055:120:S - bash-3997 [01] 240.132457: 3997:120:R ==> 4055:120:R - sleep-4055 [01] 240.132460: 4055:120:D ==> 3997:120:R - bash-3997 [01] 240.132463: 3997:120:R + 4055:120:D - bash-3997 [01] 240.132465: 3997:120:R ==> 4055:120:R - <idle>-0 [00] 240.132589: 0:140:R + 4:115:S - <idle>-0 [00] 240.132591: 0:140:R ==> 4:115:R - ksoftirqd/0-4 [00] 240.132595: 4:115:S ==> 0:140:R - <idle>-0 [00] 240.132598: 0:140:R + 4:115:S - <idle>-0 [00] 240.132599: 0:140:R ==> 4:115:R - ksoftirqd/0-4 [00] 240.132603: 4:115:S ==> 0:140:R - sleep-4055 [01] 240.133058: 4055:120:S ==> 3997:120:R - [...] - - -As we have discussed previously about this format, the header -shows the name of the trace and points to the options. The -"FUNCTION" is a misnomer since here it represents the wake ups -and context switches. - -The sched_switch file only lists the wake ups (represented with -'+') and context switches ('==>') with the previous task or -current task first followed by the next task or task waking up. -The format for both of these is PID:KERNEL-PRIO:TASK-STATE. -Remember that the KERNEL-PRIO is the inverse of the actual -priority with zero (0) being the highest priority and the nice -values starting at 100 (nice -20). Below is a quick chart to map -the kernel priority to user land priorities. - - Kernel Space User Space - =============================================================== - 0(high) to 98(low) user RT priority 99(high) to 1(low) - with SCHED_RR or SCHED_FIFO - --------------------------------------------------------------- - 99 sched_priority is not used in scheduling - decisions(it must be specified as 0) - --------------------------------------------------------------- - 100(high) to 139(low) user nice -20(high) to 19(low) - --------------------------------------------------------------- - 140 idle task priority - --------------------------------------------------------------- - -The task states are: - - R - running : wants to run, may not actually be running - S - sleep : process is waiting to be woken up (handles signals) - D - disk sleep (uninterruptible sleep) : process must be woken up - (ignores signals) - T - stopped : process suspended - t - traced : process is being traced (with something like gdb) - Z - zombie : process waiting to be cleaned up - X - unknown - + overwrite - This controls what happens when the trace buffer is + full. If "1" (default), the oldest events are + discarded and overwritten. If "0", then the newest + events are discarded. ftrace_enabled -------------- @@ -607,10 +502,10 @@ an example: # echo irqsoff > current_tracer # echo latency-format > trace_options # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency - # echo 1 > tracing_enabled + # echo 1 > tracing_on # ls -ltr [...] - # echo 0 > tracing_enabled + # echo 0 > tracing_on # cat trace # tracer: irqsoff # @@ -715,10 +610,10 @@ is much like the irqsoff tracer. # echo preemptoff > current_tracer # echo latency-format > trace_options # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency - # echo 1 > tracing_enabled + # echo 1 > tracing_on # ls -ltr [...] - # echo 0 > tracing_enabled + # echo 0 > tracing_on # cat trace # tracer: preemptoff # @@ -863,10 +758,10 @@ tracers. # echo preemptirqsoff > current_tracer # echo latency-format > trace_options # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency - # echo 1 > tracing_enabled + # echo 1 > tracing_on # ls -ltr [...] - # echo 0 > tracing_enabled + # echo 0 > tracing_on # cat trace # tracer: preemptirqsoff # @@ -1026,9 +921,9 @@ Instead of performing an 'ls', we will run 'sleep 1' under # echo wakeup > current_tracer # echo latency-format > trace_options # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency - # echo 1 > tracing_enabled + # echo 1 > tracing_on # chrt -f 5 sleep 1 - # echo 0 > tracing_enabled + # echo 0 > tracing_on # cat trace # tracer: wakeup # @@ -1140,9 +1035,9 @@ ftrace_enabled is set; otherwise this tracer is a nop. # sysctl kernel.ftrace_enabled=1 # echo function > current_tracer - # echo 1 > tracing_enabled + # echo 1 > tracing_on # usleep 1 - # echo 0 > tracing_enabled + # echo 0 > tracing_on # cat trace # tracer: function # @@ -1180,7 +1075,7 @@ int trace_fd; [...] int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { [...] - trace_fd = open(tracing_file("tracing_enabled"), O_WRONLY); + trace_fd = open(tracing_file("tracing_on"), O_WRONLY); [...] if (condition_hit()) { write(trace_fd, "0", 1); @@ -1631,9 +1526,9 @@ If I am only interested in sys_nanosleep and hrtimer_interrupt: # echo sys_nanosleep hrtimer_interrupt \ > set_ftrace_filter # echo function > current_tracer - # echo 1 > tracing_enabled + # echo 1 > tracing_on # usleep 1 - # echo 0 > tracing_enabled + # echo 0 > tracing_on # cat trace # tracer: ftrace # @@ -1879,9 +1774,9 @@ different. The trace is live. # echo function > current_tracer # cat trace_pipe > /tmp/trace.out & [1] 4153 - # echo 1 > tracing_enabled + # echo 1 > tracing_on # usleep 1 - # echo 0 > tracing_enabled + # echo 0 > tracing_on # cat trace # tracer: function # diff --git a/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt b/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt index 5f77d94598dd..6d27ab8d6e9f 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt @@ -42,11 +42,25 @@ Synopsis of kprobe_events +|-offs(FETCHARG) : Fetch memory at FETCHARG +|- offs address.(**) NAME=FETCHARG : Set NAME as the argument name of FETCHARG. FETCHARG:TYPE : Set TYPE as the type of FETCHARG. Currently, basic types - (u8/u16/u32/u64/s8/s16/s32/s64) and string are supported. + (u8/u16/u32/u64/s8/s16/s32/s64), "string" and bitfield + are supported. (*) only for return probe. (**) this is useful for fetching a field of data structures. +Types +----- +Several types are supported for fetch-args. Kprobe tracer will access memory +by given type. Prefix 's' and 'u' means those types are signed and unsigned +respectively. Traced arguments are shown in decimal (signed) or hex (unsigned). +String type is a special type, which fetches a "null-terminated" string from +kernel space. This means it will fail and store NULL if the string container +has been paged out. +Bitfield is another special type, which takes 3 parameters, bit-width, bit- +offset, and container-size (usually 32). The syntax is; + + b<bit-width>@<bit-offset>/<container-size> + Per-Probe Event Filtering ------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl b/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl index b3e73ddb1567..12cecc83cd91 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl +++ b/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl @@ -373,9 +373,18 @@ EVENT_PROCESS: print " $regex_lru_isolate/o\n"; next; } + my $isolate_mode = $1; my $nr_scanned = $4; my $nr_contig_dirty = $7; - $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_SCANNED} += $nr_scanned; + + # To closer match vmstat scanning statistics, only count isolate_both + # and isolate_inactive as scanning. isolate_active is rotation + # isolate_inactive == 0 + # isolate_active == 1 + # isolate_both == 2 + if ($isolate_mode != 1) { + $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_SCANNED} += $nr_scanned; + } $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_CONTIG_DIRTY} += $nr_contig_dirty; } elsif ($tracepoint eq "mm_vmscan_lru_shrink_inactive") { $details = $5; diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt index b29d8e56cf28..c9ffa9ced7ee 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu> - December 11, 2009 + October 28, 2010 @@ -107,9 +107,14 @@ allowed to issue dynamic suspends. The user interface for controlling dynamic PM is located in the power/ subdirectory of each USB device's sysfs directory, that is, in /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/ where "..." is the device's ID. The -relevant attribute files are: wakeup, control, and autosuspend. -(There may also be a file named "level"; this file was deprecated -as of the 2.6.35 kernel and replaced by the "control" file.) +relevant attribute files are: wakeup, control, and +autosuspend_delay_ms. (There may also be a file named "level"; this +file was deprecated as of the 2.6.35 kernel and replaced by the +"control" file. In 2.6.38 the "autosuspend" file will be deprecated +and replaced by the "autosuspend_delay_ms" file. The only difference +is that the newer file expresses the delay in milliseconds whereas the +older file uses seconds. Confusingly, both files are present in 2.6.37 +but only "autosuspend" works.) power/wakeup @@ -140,33 +145,36 @@ as of the 2.6.35 kernel and replaced by the "control" file.) suspended and autoresume was not allowed. This setting is no longer supported.) - power/autosuspend + power/autosuspend_delay_ms This file contains an integer value, which is the - number of seconds the device should remain idle before - the kernel will autosuspend it (the idle-delay time). - The default is 2. 0 means to autosuspend as soon as - the device becomes idle, and negative values mean - never to autosuspend. You can write a number to the - file to change the autosuspend idle-delay time. - -Writing "-1" to power/autosuspend and writing "on" to power/control do -essentially the same thing -- they both prevent the device from being -autosuspended. Yes, this is a redundancy in the API. + number of milliseconds the device should remain idle + before the kernel will autosuspend it (the idle-delay + time). The default is 2000. 0 means to autosuspend + as soon as the device becomes idle, and negative + values mean never to autosuspend. You can write a + number to the file to change the autosuspend + idle-delay time. + +Writing "-1" to power/autosuspend_delay_ms and writing "on" to +power/control do essentially the same thing -- they both prevent the +device from being autosuspended. Yes, this is a redundancy in the +API. (In 2.6.21 writing "0" to power/autosuspend would prevent the device from being autosuspended; the behavior was changed in 2.6.22. The power/autosuspend attribute did not exist prior to 2.6.21, and the power/level attribute did not exist prior to 2.6.22. power/control -was added in 2.6.34.) +was added in 2.6.34, and power/autosuspend_delay_ms was added in +2.6.37 but did not become functional until 2.6.38.) Changing the default idle-delay time ------------------------------------ -The default autosuspend idle-delay time is controlled by a module -parameter in usbcore. You can specify the value when usbcore is -loaded. For example, to set it to 5 seconds instead of 2 you would +The default autosuspend idle-delay time (in seconds) is controlled by +a module parameter in usbcore. You can specify the value when usbcore +is loaded. For example, to set it to 5 seconds instead of 2 you would do: modprobe usbcore autosuspend=5 @@ -234,25 +242,23 @@ every device. If a driver knows that its device has proper suspend/resume support, it can enable autosuspend all by itself. For example, the video -driver for a laptop's webcam might do this, since these devices are -rarely used and so should normally be autosuspended. +driver for a laptop's webcam might do this (in recent kernels they +do), since these devices are rarely used and so should normally be +autosuspended. Sometimes it turns out that even when a device does work okay with -autosuspend there are still problems. For example, there are -experimental patches adding autosuspend support to the usbhid driver, -which manages keyboards and mice, among other things. Tests with a -number of keyboards showed that typing on a suspended keyboard, while -causing the keyboard to do a remote wakeup all right, would -nonetheless frequently result in lost keystrokes. Tests with mice -showed that some of them would issue a remote-wakeup request in -response to button presses but not to motion, and some in response to -neither. +autosuspend there are still problems. For example, the usbhid driver, +which manages keyboards and mice, has autosuspend support. Tests with +a number of keyboards show that typing on a suspended keyboard, while +causing the keyboard to do a remote wakeup all right, will nonetheless +frequently result in lost keystrokes. Tests with mice show that some +of them will issue a remote-wakeup request in response to button +presses but not to motion, and some in response to neither. The kernel will not prevent you from enabling autosuspend on devices that can't handle it. It is even possible in theory to damage a -device by suspending it at the wrong time -- for example, suspending a -USB hard disk might cause it to spin down without parking the heads. -(Highly unlikely, but possible.) Take care. +device by suspending it at the wrong time. (Highly unlikely, but +possible.) Take care. The driver interface for Power Management @@ -336,10 +342,6 @@ autosuspend the interface's device. When the usage counter is = 0 then the interface is considered to be idle, and the kernel may autosuspend the device. -(There is a similar usage counter field in struct usb_device, -associated with the device itself rather than any of its interfaces. -This counter is used only by the USB core.) - Drivers need not be concerned about balancing changes to the usage counter; the USB core will undo any remaining "get"s when a driver is unbound from its interface. As a corollary, drivers must not call @@ -409,11 +411,11 @@ during autosuspend. For example, there's not much point autosuspending a keyboard if the user can't cause the keyboard to do a remote wakeup by typing on it. If the driver sets intf->needs_remote_wakeup to 1, the kernel won't autosuspend the -device if remote wakeup isn't available or has been disabled through -the power/wakeup attribute. (If the device is already autosuspended, -though, setting this flag won't cause the kernel to autoresume it. -Normally a driver would set this flag in its probe method, at which -time the device is guaranteed not to be autosuspended.) +device if remote wakeup isn't available. (If the device is already +autosuspended, though, setting this flag won't cause the kernel to +autoresume it. Normally a driver would set this flag in its probe +method, at which time the device is guaranteed not to be +autosuspended.) If a driver does its I/O asynchronously in interrupt context, it should call usb_autopm_get_interface_async() before starting output and @@ -422,20 +424,19 @@ it receives an input event, it should call usb_mark_last_busy(struct usb_device *udev); -in the event handler. This sets udev->last_busy to the current time. -udev->last_busy is the field used for idle-delay calculations; -updating it will cause any pending autosuspend to be moved back. Most -of the usb_autopm_* routines will also set the last_busy field to the -current time. +in the event handler. This tells the PM core that the device was just +busy and therefore the next autosuspend idle-delay expiration should +be pushed back. Many of the usb_autopm_* routines also make this call, +so drivers need to worry only when interrupt-driven input arrives. Asynchronous operation is always subject to races. For example, a -driver may call one of the usb_autopm_*_interface_async() routines at -a time when the core has just finished deciding the device has been -idle for long enough but not yet gotten around to calling the driver's -suspend method. The suspend method must be responsible for -synchronizing with the output request routine and the URB completion -handler; it should cause autosuspends to fail with -EBUSY if the -driver needs to use the device. +driver may call the usb_autopm_get_interface_async() routine at a time +when the core has just finished deciding the device has been idle for +long enough but not yet gotten around to calling the driver's suspend +method. The suspend method must be responsible for synchronizing with +the I/O request routine and the URB completion handler; it should +cause autosuspends to fail with -EBUSY if the driver needs to use the +device. External suspend calls should never be allowed to fail in this way, only autosuspend calls. The driver can tell them apart by checking @@ -472,7 +473,9 @@ Firstly, a device may already be autosuspended when a system suspend occurs. Since system suspends are supposed to be as transparent as possible, the device should remain suspended following the system resume. But this theory may not work out well in practice; over time -the kernel's behavior in this regard has changed. +the kernel's behavior in this regard has changed. As of 2.6.37 the +policy is to resume all devices during a system resume and let them +handle their own runtime suspends afterward. Secondly, a dynamic power-management event may occur as a system suspend is underway. The window for this is short, since system diff --git a/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt b/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt index 66f92d1194c1..a4efa0462f05 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt @@ -12,6 +12,10 @@ Controller Drivers (HCD). So, if HCD is buggy, the traces reported by usbmon may not correspond to bus transactions precisely. This is the same situation as with tcpdump. +Two APIs are currently implemented: "text" and "binary". The binary API +is available through a character device in /dev namespace and is an ABI. +The text API is deprecated since 2.6.35, but available for convenience. + * How to use usbmon to collect raw text traces Unlike the packet socket, usbmon has an interface which provides traces @@ -162,39 +166,11 @@ Here is the list of words, from left to right: not machine words, but really just a byte stream split into words to make it easier to read. Thus, the last word may contain from one to four bytes. The length of collected data is limited and can be less than the data length - report in Data Length word. - -Here is an example of code to read the data stream in a well known programming -language: - -class ParsedLine { - int data_len; /* Available length of data */ - byte data[]; - - void parseData(StringTokenizer st) { - int availwords = st.countTokens(); - data = new byte[availwords * 4]; - data_len = 0; - while (st.hasMoreTokens()) { - String data_str = st.nextToken(); - int len = data_str.length() / 2; - int i; - int b; // byte is signed, apparently?! XXX - for (i = 0; i < len; i++) { - // data[data_len] = Byte.parseByte( - // data_str.substring(i*2, i*2 + 2), - // 16); - b = Integer.parseInt( - data_str.substring(i*2, i*2 + 2), - 16); - if (b >= 128) - b *= -1; - data[data_len] = (byte) b; - data_len++; - } - } - } -} + reported in the Data Length word. In the case of an Isochronous input (Zi) + completion where the received data is sparse in the buffer, the length of + the collected data can be greater than the Data Length value (because Data + Length counts only the bytes that were received whereas the Data words + contain the entire transfer buffer). Examples: diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index ac2616a62fc3..31b485723bc5 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ 0 -> Unknown EM2800 video grabber (em2800) [eb1a:2800] - 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2710,eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2862,eb1a:2863,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883,eb1a:2868] + 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2710,eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2862,eb1a:2863,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883,eb1a:2868,eb1a:2875] 2 -> Terratec Cinergy 250 USB (em2820/em2840) [0ccd:0036] 3 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2304:0208] 4 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2040:4200,2040:4201] @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ 8 -> Kworld USB2800 (em2800) 9 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 90/100/101/107 / Kaiser Baas Video to DVD maker (em2820/em2840) [1b80:e302,1b80:e304,2304:0207,2304:021a] 10 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 900 (em2880) [2040:6500] - 11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2880) [0ccd:0042] + 11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2880) 12 -> Kworld PVR TV 2800 RF (em2820/em2840) 13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS (em2880) [0ccd:0047] 14 -> SIIG AVTuner-PVR / Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ 52 -> DNT DA2 Hybrid (em2881) 53 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (em2881) 54 -> Kworld VS-DVB-T 323UR (em2882) [eb1a:e323] - 55 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2882) (em2882) [0ccd:005e] + 55 -> Terratec Cinnergy Hybrid T USB XS (em2882) (em2882) [0ccd:005e,0ccd:0042] 56 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (2) (em2882) [2304:0226] 57 -> Kworld PlusTV HD Hybrid 330 (em2883) [eb1a:a316] 58 -> Compro VideoMate ForYou/Stereo (em2820/em2840) [185b:2041] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index 8d9afc7d8014..6b4c72d8862d 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -180,3 +180,5 @@ 179 -> Beholder BeholdTV A7 [5ace:7090] 180 -> Avermedia PCI M733A [1461:4155,1461:4255] 181 -> TechoTrend TT-budget T-3000 [13c2:2804] +182 -> Kworld PCI SBTVD/ISDB-T Full-Seg Hybrid [17de:b136] +183 -> Compro VideoMate Vista M1F [185b:c900] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile b/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile deleted file mode 100644 index 1ed0e98d057d..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. -obj- := dummy.o - -# List of programs to build -hostprogs-y := v4lgrab - -# Tell kbuild to always build the programs -always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/README.cpia b/Documentation/video4linux/README.cpia deleted file mode 100644 index 8a747fee661f..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/README.cpia +++ /dev/null @@ -1,191 +0,0 @@ -This is a driver for the CPiA PPC2 driven parallel connected -Camera. For example the Creative WebcamII is CPiA driven. - - ) [1]Peter Pregler, Linz 2000, published under the [2]GNU GPL - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- - -USAGE: - -General: -======== - -1) Make sure you have created the video devices (/dev/video*): - -- if you have a recent MAKEDEV do a 'cd /dev;./MAKEDEV video' -- otherwise do a: - -cd /dev -mknod video0 c 81 0 -ln -s video0 video - -2) Compile the kernel (see below for the list of options to use), - configure your parport and reboot. - -3) If all worked well you should get messages similar - to the following (your versions may be different) on the console: - -V4L-Driver for Vision CPiA based cameras v0.7.4 -parport0: read2 timeout. -parport0: Multimedia device, VLSI Vision Ltd PPC2 -Parallel port driver for Vision CPiA based camera - CPIA Version: 1.20 (2.0) - CPIA PnP-ID: 0553:0002:0100 - VP-Version: 1.0 0100 - 1 camera(s) found - - -As modules: -=========== - -Make sure you have selected the following kernel options (you can -select all stuff as modules): - -The cpia-stuff is in the section 'Character devices -> Video For Linux'. - -CONFIG_PARPORT=m -CONFIG_PARPORT_PC=m -CONFIG_PARPORT_PC_FIFO=y -CONFIG_PARPORT_1284=y -CONFIG_VIDEO_DEV=m -CONFIG_VIDEO_CPIA=m -CONFIG_VIDEO_CPIA_PP=m - -For autoloading of all those modules you need to tell module-init-tools -some stuff. Add the following line to your module-init-tools config-file -(e.g. /etc/modprobe.conf or wherever your distribution does store that -stuff): - -options parport_pc io=0x378 irq=7 dma=3 -alias char-major-81 cpia_pp - -The first line tells the dma/irq channels to use. Those _must_ match -the settings of your BIOS. Do NOT simply use the values above. See -Documentation/parport.txt for more information about this. The second -line associates the video-device file with the driver. Of cause you -can also load the modules once upon boot (usually done in /etc/modules). - -Linked into the kernel: -======================= - -Make sure you have selected the following kernel options. Note that -you cannot compile the parport-stuff as modules and the cpia-driver -statically (the other way round is okay though). - -The cpia-stuff is in the section 'Character devices -> Video For Linux'. - -CONFIG_PARPORT=y -CONFIG_PARPORT_PC=y -CONFIG_PARPORT_PC_FIFO=y -CONFIG_PARPORT_1284=y -CONFIG_VIDEO_DEV=y -CONFIG_VIDEO_CPIA=y -CONFIG_VIDEO_CPIA_PP=y - -To use DMA/irq you will need to tell the kernel upon boot time the -hardware configuration of the parport. You can give the boot-parameter -at the LILO-prompt or specify it in lilo.conf. I use the following -append-line in lilo.conf: - - append="parport=0x378,7,3" - -See Documentation/parport.txt for more information about the -configuration of the parport and the values given above. Do not simply -use the values given above. - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -FEATURES: - -- mmap/read v4l-interface (but no overlay) -- image formats: CIF/QCIF, SIF/QSIF, various others used by isabel; - note: all sizes except CIF/QCIF are implemented by clipping, i.e. - pixels are not uploaded from the camera -- palettes: VIDEO_PALETTE_GRAY, VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB565, VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB555, - VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24, VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB32, VIDEO_PALETTE_YUYV, - VIDEO_PALETTE_UYVY, VIDEO_PALETTE_YUV422 -- state information (color balance, exposure, ...) is preserved between - device opens -- complete control over camera via proc-interface (_all_ camera settings are - supported), there is also a python-gtk application available for this [3] -- works under SMP (but the driver is completely serialized and synchronous) - so you get no benefit from SMP, but at least it does not crash your box -- might work for non-Intel architecture, let us know about this - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -TESTED APPLICATIONS: - -- a simple test application based on Xt is available at [3] -- another test-application based on gqcam-0.4 (uses GTK) -- gqcam-0.6 should work -- xawtv-3.x (also the webcam software) -- xawtv-2.46 -- w3cam (cgi-interface and vidcat, e.g. you may try out 'vidcat |xv - -maxpect -root -quit +noresetroot -rmode 5 -') -- vic, the MBONE video conferencing tool (version 2.8ucl4-1) -- isabel 3R4beta (barely working, but AFAICT all the problems are on - their side) -- camserv-0.40 - -See [3] for pointers to v4l-applications. - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -KNOWN PROBLEMS: - -- some applications do not handle the image format correctly, you will - see strange horizontal stripes instead of a nice picture -> make sure - your application does use a supported image size or queries the driver - for the actually used size (reason behind this: the camera cannot - provide any image format, so if size NxM is requested the driver will - use a format to the closest fitting N1xM1, the application should now - query for this granted size, most applications do not). -- all the todo ;) -- if there is not enough light and the picture is too dark try to - adjust the SetSensorFPS setting, automatic frame rate adjustment - has its price -- do not try out isabel 3R4beta (built 135), you will be disappointed - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -TODO: - -- multiple camera support (struct camera or something) - This should work, - but hasn't been tested yet. -- architecture independence? -- SMP-safe asynchronous mmap interface -- nibble mode for old parport interfaces -- streaming capture, this should give a performance gain - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -IMPLEMENTATION NOTES: - -The camera can act in two modes, streaming or grabbing. Right now a -polling grab-scheme is used. Maybe interrupt driven streaming will be -used for a asynchronous mmap interface in the next major release of the -driver. This might give a better frame rate. - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -THANKS (in no particular order): - -- Scott J. Bertin <sbertin@mindspring.com> for cleanups, the proc-filesystem - and much more -- Henry Bruce <whb@vvl.co.uk> for providing developers information about - the CPiA chip, I wish all companies would treat Linux as seriously -- Karoly Erdei <Karoly.Erdei@risc.uni-linz.ac.at> and RISC-Linz for being - my boss ;) resp. my employer and for providing me the hardware and - allow me to devote some working time to this project -- Manuel J. Petit de Gabriel <mpetit@dit.upm.es> for providing help - with Isabel (http://isabel.dit.upm.es/) -- Bas Huisman <bhuism@cs.utwente.nl> for writing the initial parport code -- Jarl Totland <Jarl.Totland@bdc.no> for setting up the mailing list - and maintaining the web-server[3] -- Chris Whiteford <Chris@informinteractive.com> for fixes related to the - 1.02 firmware -- special kudos to all the tester whose machines crashed and/or - will crash. :) - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -REFERENCES - - 1. http://www.risc.uni-linz.ac.at/ - mailto:Peter_Pregler@email.com - 2. see the file COPYING in the top directory of the kernel tree - 3. http://webcam.sourceforge.net/ diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran b/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran index 00e3f9267814..c40e3bab08fa 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Card number: 4 Note: No module for the mse3000 is available yet Note: No module for the vpx3224 is available yet -Note: use encoder=X or decoder=X for non-default i2c chips (see i2c-id.h) +Note: use encoder=X or decoder=X for non-default i2c chips =========================== @@ -322,76 +322,11 @@ your IRQs and make sure the card has its own interrupts. 4. Programming interface -This driver conforms to video4linux and video4linux2, both can be used to -use the driver. Since video4linux didn't provide adequate calls to fully -use the cards' features, we've introduced several programming extensions, -which are currently officially accepted in the 2.4.x branch of the kernel. -These extensions are known as the v4l/mjpeg extensions. See zoran.h for -details (structs/ioctls). - -Information - video4linux: -http://linux.bytesex.org/v4l2/API.html -Documentation/video4linux/API.html -/usr/include/linux/videodev.h - -Information - video4linux/mjpeg extensions: -./zoran.h -(also see below) - -Information - video4linux2: -http://linuxtv.org -http://v4l2spec.bytesex.org/ -/usr/include/linux/videodev2.h - -More information on the video4linux/mjpeg extensions, by Serguei -Miridonovi and Rainer Johanni: --- -The ioctls for that interface are as follows: - -BUZIOC_G_PARAMS -BUZIOC_S_PARAMS - -Get and set the parameters of the buz. The user should always do a -BUZIOC_G_PARAMS (with a struct buz_params) to obtain the default -settings, change what he likes and then make a BUZIOC_S_PARAMS call. - -BUZIOC_REQBUFS - -Before being able to capture/playback, the user has to request -the buffers he is wanting to use. Fill the structure -zoran_requestbuffers with the size (recommended: 256*1024) and -the number (recommended 32 up to 256). There are no such restrictions -as for the Video for Linux buffers, you should LEAVE SUFFICIENT -MEMORY for your system however, else strange things will happen .... -On return, the zoran_requestbuffers structure contains number and -size of the actually allocated buffers. -You should use these numbers for doing a mmap of the buffers -into the user space. -The BUZIOC_REQBUFS ioctl also makes it happen, that the next mmap -maps the MJPEG buffer instead of the V4L buffers. - -BUZIOC_QBUF_CAPT -BUZIOC_QBUF_PLAY - -Queue a buffer for capture or playback. The first call also starts -streaming capture. When streaming capture is going on, you may -only queue further buffers or issue syncs until streaming -capture is switched off again with a argument of -1 to -a BUZIOC_QBUF_CAPT/BUZIOC_QBUF_PLAY ioctl. - -BUZIOC_SYNC - -Issue this ioctl when all buffers are queued. This ioctl will -block until the first buffer becomes free for saving its -data to disk (after BUZIOC_QBUF_CAPT) or for reuse (after BUZIOC_QBUF_PLAY). - -BUZIOC_G_STATUS - -Get the status of the input lines (video source connected/norm). +This driver conforms to video4linux2. Support for V4L1 and for the custom +zoran ioctls has been removed in kernel 2.6.38. For programming example, please, look at lavrec.c and lavplay.c code in -lavtools-1.2p2 package (URL: http://www.cicese.mx/) -and the 'examples' directory in the original Buz driver distribution. +the MJPEG-tools (http://mjpeg.sf.net/). Additional notes for software developers: @@ -402,9 +337,6 @@ Additional notes for software developers: standard is "more constant" for current country than geometry settings of a variety of TV capture cards which may work in ITU or square pixel format. --- -Please note that lavplay/lavrec are also included in the MJPEG-tools -(http://mjpeg.sf.net/). =========================== diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards index 12217fc49725..db833ced2cb8 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards @@ -464,10 +464,6 @@ Siemens ------- Multimedia eXtension Board (MXB) (SAA7146, SAA7111) -Stradis -------- - SDM275,SDM250,SDM026,SDM025 (SAA7146, IBMMPEG2): MPEG2 decoder only - Powercolor ---------- MTV878 diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 6a562eeeb4cd..261776e0c5e1 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -366,6 +366,7 @@ t613 17a1:0128 TASCORP JPEG Webcam, NGS Cyclops vc032x 17ef:4802 Lenovo Vc0323+MI1310_SOC pac207 2001:f115 D-Link DSB-C120 sq905c 2770:9050 Disney pix micro (CIF) +sq905c 2770:9051 Lego Bionicle sq905c 2770:9052 Disney pix micro 2 (VGA) sq905c 2770:905c All 11 known cameras with this ID sq905 2770:9120 All 24 known cameras with this ID diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt index bf3af5fe558f..34e2842c70ae 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt @@ -45,8 +45,6 @@ module argument syntax (<param>=<value> when passing the option to the module or meye.<param>=<value> on the kernel boot line when meye is statically linked into the kernel). Those options are: - forcev4l1: force use of V4L1 API instead of V4L2 - gbuffers: number of capture buffers, default is 2 (32 max) gbufsize: size of each capture buffer, default is 614400 @@ -79,9 +77,8 @@ Usage: Private API: ------------ - The driver supports frame grabbing with the video4linux API - (either v4l1 or v4l2), so all video4linux tools (like xawtv) - should work with this driver. + The driver supports frame grabbing with the video4linux API, + so all video4linux tools (like xawtv) should work with this driver. Besides the video4linux interface, the driver has a private interface for accessing the Motion Eye extended parameters (camera sharpness, @@ -123,7 +120,4 @@ Private API: Bugs / Todo: ------------ - - the driver could be much cleaned up by removing the v4l1 support. - However, this means all v4l1-only applications will stop working. - - 'motioneye' still uses the meye private v4l1 API extensions. diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt index 8773778d23fc..881e7f44491b 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-controls.txt @@ -285,6 +285,9 @@ implement g_volatile_ctrl like this: The 'new value' union is not used in g_volatile_ctrl. In general controls that need to implement g_volatile_ctrl are read-only controls. +Note that if one or more controls in a control cluster are marked as volatile, +then all the controls in the cluster are seen as volatile. + To mark a control as volatile you have to set the is_volatile flag: ctrl = v4l2_ctrl_new_std(&sd->ctrl_handler, ...); @@ -462,6 +465,15 @@ pointer to the v4l2_ctrl_ops struct that is used for that cluster. Obviously, all controls in the cluster array must be initialized to either a valid control or to NULL. +In rare cases you might want to know which controls of a cluster actually +were set explicitly by the user. For this you can check the 'is_new' flag of +each control. For example, in the case of a volume/mute cluster the 'is_new' +flag of the mute control would be set if the user called VIDIOC_S_CTRL for +mute only. If the user would call VIDIOC_S_EXT_CTRLS for both mute and volume +controls, then the 'is_new' flag would be 1 for both controls. + +The 'is_new' flag is always 1 when called from v4l2_ctrl_handler_setup(). + VIDIOC_LOG_STATUS Support ========================= diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4lgrab.c b/Documentation/video4linux/v4lgrab.c deleted file mode 100644 index c8ded175796e..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4lgrab.c +++ /dev/null @@ -1,201 +0,0 @@ -/* Simple Video4Linux image grabber. */ -/* - * Video4Linux Driver Test/Example Framegrabbing Program - * - * Compile with: - * gcc -s -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes v4lgrab.c -o v4lgrab - * Use as: - * v4lgrab >image.ppm - * - * Copyright (C) 1998-05-03, Phil Blundell <philb@gnu.org> - * Copied from http://www.tazenda.demon.co.uk/phil/vgrabber.c - * with minor modifications (Dave Forrest, drf5n@virginia.edu). - * - * - * For some cameras you may need to pre-load libv4l to perform - * the necessary decompression, e.g.: - * - * export LD_PRELOAD=/usr/lib/libv4l/v4l1compat.so - * ./v4lgrab >image.ppm - * - * see http://hansdegoede.livejournal.com/3636.html for details. - * - */ - -#include <unistd.h> -#include <sys/types.h> -#include <sys/stat.h> -#include <fcntl.h> -#include <stdio.h> -#include <sys/ioctl.h> -#include <stdlib.h> - -#include <linux/types.h> -#include <linux/videodev.h> - -#define VIDEO_DEV "/dev/video0" - -/* Stole this from tvset.c */ - -#define READ_VIDEO_PIXEL(buf, format, depth, r, g, b) \ -{ \ - switch (format) \ - { \ - case VIDEO_PALETTE_GREY: \ - switch (depth) \ - { \ - case 4: \ - case 6: \ - case 8: \ - (r) = (g) = (b) = (*buf++ << 8);\ - break; \ - \ - case 16: \ - (r) = (g) = (b) = \ - *((unsigned short *) buf); \ - buf += 2; \ - break; \ - } \ - break; \ - \ - \ - case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB565: \ - { \ - unsigned short tmp = *(unsigned short *)buf; \ - (r) = tmp&0xF800; \ - (g) = (tmp<<5)&0xFC00; \ - (b) = (tmp<<11)&0xF800; \ - buf += 2; \ - } \ - break; \ - \ - case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB555: \ - (r) = (buf[0]&0xF8)<<8; \ - (g) = ((buf[0] << 5 | buf[1] >> 3)&0xF8)<<8; \ - (b) = ((buf[1] << 2 ) & 0xF8)<<8; \ - buf += 2; \ - break; \ - \ - case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24: \ - (r) = buf[0] << 8; (g) = buf[1] << 8; \ - (b) = buf[2] << 8; \ - buf += 3; \ - break; \ - \ - default: \ - fprintf(stderr, \ - "Format %d not yet supported\n", \ - format); \ - } \ -} - -static int get_brightness_adj(unsigned char *image, long size, int *brightness) { - long i, tot = 0; - for (i=0;i<size*3;i++) - tot += image[i]; - *brightness = (128 - tot/(size*3))/3; - return !((tot/(size*3)) >= 126 && (tot/(size*3)) <= 130); -} - -int main(int argc, char ** argv) -{ - int fd = open(VIDEO_DEV, O_RDONLY), f; - struct video_capability cap; - struct video_window win; - struct video_picture vpic; - - unsigned char *buffer, *src; - int bpp = 24, r = 0, g = 0, b = 0; - unsigned int i, src_depth = 16; - - if (fd < 0) { - perror(VIDEO_DEV); - exit(1); - } - - if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGCAP, &cap) < 0) { - perror("VIDIOGCAP"); - fprintf(stderr, "(" VIDEO_DEV " not a video4linux device?)\n"); - close(fd); - exit(1); - } - - if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGWIN, &win) < 0) { - perror("VIDIOCGWIN"); - close(fd); - exit(1); - } - - if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGPICT, &vpic) < 0) { - perror("VIDIOCGPICT"); - close(fd); - exit(1); - } - - if (cap.type & VID_TYPE_MONOCHROME) { - vpic.depth=8; - vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_GREY; /* 8bit grey */ - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) { - vpic.depth=6; - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) { - vpic.depth=4; - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "Unable to find a supported capture format.\n"); - close(fd); - exit(1); - } - } - } - } else { - vpic.depth=24; - vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24; - - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) { - vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB565; - vpic.depth=16; - - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) { - vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB555; - vpic.depth=15; - - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) { - fprintf(stderr, "Unable to find a supported capture format.\n"); - return -1; - } - } - } - } - - buffer = malloc(win.width * win.height * bpp); - if (!buffer) { - fprintf(stderr, "Out of memory.\n"); - exit(1); - } - - do { - int newbright; - read(fd, buffer, win.width * win.height * bpp); - f = get_brightness_adj(buffer, win.width * win.height, &newbright); - if (f) { - vpic.brightness += (newbright << 8); - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) { - perror("VIDIOSPICT"); - break; - } - } - } while (f); - - fprintf(stdout, "P6\n%d %d 255\n", win.width, win.height); - - src = buffer; - - for (i = 0; i < win.width * win.height; i++) { - READ_VIDEO_PIXEL(src, vpic.palette, src_depth, r, g, b); - fputc(r>>8, stdout); - fputc(g>>8, stdout); - fputc(b>>8, stdout); - } - - close(fd); - return 0; -} diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf b/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf index 17a1f9abf260..1d00d7f15b8f 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf @@ -247,8 +247,6 @@ calls. The relevant helper functions are: int nonblocking); int videobuf_streamon(struct videobuf_queue *q); int videobuf_streamoff(struct videobuf_queue *q); - int videobuf_cgmbuf(struct videobuf_queue *q, struct video_mbuf *mbuf, - int count); So, for example, a VIDIOC_REQBUFS call turns into a call to the driver's vidioc_reqbufs() callback which, in turn, usually only needs to locate the @@ -258,10 +256,7 @@ boilerplate in a lot of V4L2 drivers. The vidioc_streamon() and vidioc_streamoff() functions will be a bit more complex, of course, since they will also need to deal with starting and -stopping the capture engine. videobuf_cgmbuf(), called from the driver's -vidiocgmbuf() function, only exists if the V4L1 compatibility module has -been selected with CONFIG_VIDEO_V4L1_COMPAT, so its use must be surrounded -with #ifdef directives. +stopping the capture engine. Buffer allocation diff --git a/Documentation/vm/Makefile b/Documentation/vm/Makefile index 9dcff328b964..3fa4d0668864 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/vm/Makefile @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ obj- := dummy.o # List of programs to build -hostprogs-y := slabinfo page-types hugepage-mmap hugepage-shm map_hugetlb +hostprogs-y := page-types hugepage-mmap hugepage-shm map_hugetlb # Tell kbuild to always build the programs always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/vm/slabinfo.c b/Documentation/vm/slabinfo.c deleted file mode 100644 index 92e729f4b676..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/vm/slabinfo.c +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1364 +0,0 @@ -/* - * Slabinfo: Tool to get reports about slabs - * - * (C) 2007 sgi, Christoph Lameter - * - * Compile by: - * - * gcc -o slabinfo slabinfo.c - */ -#include <stdio.h> -#include <stdlib.h> -#include <sys/types.h> -#include <dirent.h> -#include <strings.h> -#include <string.h> -#include <unistd.h> -#include <stdarg.h> -#include <getopt.h> -#include <regex.h> -#include <errno.h> - -#define MAX_SLABS 500 -#define MAX_ALIASES 500 -#define MAX_NODES 1024 - -struct slabinfo { - char *name; - int alias; - int refs; - int aliases, align, cache_dma, cpu_slabs, destroy_by_rcu; - int hwcache_align, object_size, objs_per_slab; - int sanity_checks, slab_size, store_user, trace; - int order, poison, reclaim_account, red_zone; - unsigned long partial, objects, slabs, objects_partial, objects_total; - unsigned long alloc_fastpath, alloc_slowpath; - unsigned long free_fastpath, free_slowpath; - unsigned long free_frozen, free_add_partial, free_remove_partial; - unsigned long alloc_from_partial, alloc_slab, free_slab, alloc_refill; - unsigned long cpuslab_flush, deactivate_full, deactivate_empty; - unsigned long deactivate_to_head, deactivate_to_tail; - unsigned long deactivate_remote_frees, order_fallback; - int numa[MAX_NODES]; - int numa_partial[MAX_NODES]; -} slabinfo[MAX_SLABS]; - -struct aliasinfo { - char *name; - char *ref; - struct slabinfo *slab; -} aliasinfo[MAX_ALIASES]; - -int slabs = 0; -int actual_slabs = 0; -int aliases = 0; -int alias_targets = 0; -int highest_node = 0; - -char buffer[4096]; - -int show_empty = 0; -int show_report = 0; -int show_alias = 0; -int show_slab = 0; -int skip_zero = 1; -int show_numa = 0; -int show_track = 0; -int show_first_alias = 0; -int validate = 0; -int shrink = 0; -int show_inverted = 0; -int show_single_ref = 0; -int show_totals = 0; -int sort_size = 0; -int sort_active = 0; -int set_debug = 0; -int show_ops = 0; -int show_activity = 0; - -/* Debug options */ -int sanity = 0; -int redzone = 0; -int poison = 0; -int tracking = 0; -int tracing = 0; - -int page_size; - -regex_t pattern; - -static void fatal(const char *x, ...) -{ - va_list ap; - - va_start(ap, x); - vfprintf(stderr, x, ap); - va_end(ap); - exit(EXIT_FAILURE); -} - -static void usage(void) -{ - printf("slabinfo 5/7/2007. (c) 2007 sgi.\n\n" - "slabinfo [-ahnpvtsz] [-d debugopts] [slab-regexp]\n" - "-a|--aliases Show aliases\n" - "-A|--activity Most active slabs first\n" - "-d<options>|--debug=<options> Set/Clear Debug options\n" - "-D|--display-active Switch line format to activity\n" - "-e|--empty Show empty slabs\n" - "-f|--first-alias Show first alias\n" - "-h|--help Show usage information\n" - "-i|--inverted Inverted list\n" - "-l|--slabs Show slabs\n" - "-n|--numa Show NUMA information\n" - "-o|--ops Show kmem_cache_ops\n" - "-s|--shrink Shrink slabs\n" - "-r|--report Detailed report on single slabs\n" - "-S|--Size Sort by size\n" - "-t|--tracking Show alloc/free information\n" - "-T|--Totals Show summary information\n" - "-v|--validate Validate slabs\n" - "-z|--zero Include empty slabs\n" - "-1|--1ref Single reference\n" - "\nValid debug options (FZPUT may be combined)\n" - "a / A Switch on all debug options (=FZUP)\n" - "- Switch off all debug options\n" - "f / F Sanity Checks (SLAB_DEBUG_FREE)\n" - "z / Z Redzoning\n" - "p / P Poisoning\n" - "u / U Tracking\n" - "t / T Tracing\n" - ); -} - -static unsigned long read_obj(const char *name) -{ - FILE *f = fopen(name, "r"); - - if (!f) - buffer[0] = 0; - else { - if (!fgets(buffer, sizeof(buffer), f)) - buffer[0] = 0; - fclose(f); - if (buffer[strlen(buffer)] == '\n') - buffer[strlen(buffer)] = 0; - } - return strlen(buffer); -} - - -/* - * Get the contents of an attribute - */ -static unsigned long get_obj(const char *name) -{ - if (!read_obj(name)) - return 0; - - return atol(buffer); -} - -static unsigned long get_obj_and_str(const char *name, char **x) -{ - unsigned long result = 0; - char *p; - - *x = NULL; - - if (!read_obj(name)) { - x = NULL; - return 0; - } - result = strtoul(buffer, &p, 10); - while (*p == ' ') - p++; - if (*p) - *x = strdup(p); - return result; -} - -static void set_obj(struct slabinfo *s, const char *name, int n) -{ - char x[100]; - FILE *f; - - snprintf(x, 100, "%s/%s", s->name, name); - f = fopen(x, "w"); - if (!f) - fatal("Cannot write to %s\n", x); - - fprintf(f, "%d\n", n); - fclose(f); -} - -static unsigned long read_slab_obj(struct slabinfo *s, const char *name) -{ - char x[100]; - FILE *f; - size_t l; - - snprintf(x, 100, "%s/%s", s->name, name); - f = fopen(x, "r"); - if (!f) { - buffer[0] = 0; - l = 0; - } else { - l = fread(buffer, 1, sizeof(buffer), f); - buffer[l] = 0; - fclose(f); - } - return l; -} - - -/* - * Put a size string together - */ -static int store_size(char *buffer, unsigned long value) -{ - unsigned long divisor = 1; - char trailer = 0; - int n; - - if (value > 1000000000UL) { - divisor = 100000000UL; - trailer = 'G'; - } else if (value > 1000000UL) { - divisor = 100000UL; - trailer = 'M'; - } else if (value > 1000UL) { - divisor = 100; - trailer = 'K'; - } - - value /= divisor; - n = sprintf(buffer, "%ld",value); - if (trailer) { - buffer[n] = trailer; - n++; - buffer[n] = 0; - } - if (divisor != 1) { - memmove(buffer + n - 2, buffer + n - 3, 4); - buffer[n-2] = '.'; - n++; - } - return n; -} - -static void decode_numa_list(int *numa, char *t) -{ - int node; - int nr; - - memset(numa, 0, MAX_NODES * sizeof(int)); - - if (!t) - return; - - while (*t == 'N') { - t++; - node = strtoul(t, &t, 10); - if (*t == '=') { - t++; - nr = strtoul(t, &t, 10); - numa[node] = nr; - if (node > highest_node) - highest_node = node; - } - while (*t == ' ') - t++; - } -} - -static void slab_validate(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0) - return; - - set_obj(s, "validate", 1); -} - -static void slab_shrink(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0) - return; - - set_obj(s, "shrink", 1); -} - -int line = 0; - -static void first_line(void) -{ - if (show_activity) - printf("Name Objects Alloc Free %%Fast Fallb O\n"); - else - printf("Name Objects Objsize Space " - "Slabs/Part/Cpu O/S O %%Fr %%Ef Flg\n"); -} - -/* - * Find the shortest alias of a slab - */ -static struct aliasinfo *find_one_alias(struct slabinfo *find) -{ - struct aliasinfo *a; - struct aliasinfo *best = NULL; - - for(a = aliasinfo;a < aliasinfo + aliases; a++) { - if (a->slab == find && - (!best || strlen(best->name) < strlen(a->name))) { - best = a; - if (strncmp(a->name,"kmall", 5) == 0) - return best; - } - } - return best; -} - -static unsigned long slab_size(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - return s->slabs * (page_size << s->order); -} - -static unsigned long slab_activity(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - return s->alloc_fastpath + s->free_fastpath + - s->alloc_slowpath + s->free_slowpath; -} - -static void slab_numa(struct slabinfo *s, int mode) -{ - int node; - - if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0) - return; - - if (!highest_node) { - printf("\n%s: No NUMA information available.\n", s->name); - return; - } - - if (skip_zero && !s->slabs) - return; - - if (!line) { - printf("\n%-21s:", mode ? "NUMA nodes" : "Slab"); - for(node = 0; node <= highest_node; node++) - printf(" %4d", node); - printf("\n----------------------"); - for(node = 0; node <= highest_node; node++) - printf("-----"); - printf("\n"); - } - printf("%-21s ", mode ? "All slabs" : s->name); - for(node = 0; node <= highest_node; node++) { - char b[20]; - - store_size(b, s->numa[node]); - printf(" %4s", b); - } - printf("\n"); - if (mode) { - printf("%-21s ", "Partial slabs"); - for(node = 0; node <= highest_node; node++) { - char b[20]; - - store_size(b, s->numa_partial[node]); - printf(" %4s", b); - } - printf("\n"); - } - line++; -} - -static void show_tracking(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - printf("\n%s: Kernel object allocation\n", s->name); - printf("-----------------------------------------------------------------------\n"); - if (read_slab_obj(s, "alloc_calls")) - printf(buffer); - else - printf("No Data\n"); - - printf("\n%s: Kernel object freeing\n", s->name); - printf("------------------------------------------------------------------------\n"); - if (read_slab_obj(s, "free_calls")) - printf(buffer); - else - printf("No Data\n"); - -} - -static void ops(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0) - return; - - if (read_slab_obj(s, "ops")) { - printf("\n%s: kmem_cache operations\n", s->name); - printf("--------------------------------------------\n"); - printf(buffer); - } else - printf("\n%s has no kmem_cache operations\n", s->name); -} - -static const char *onoff(int x) -{ - if (x) - return "On "; - return "Off"; -} - -static void slab_stats(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - unsigned long total_alloc; - unsigned long total_free; - unsigned long total; - - if (!s->alloc_slab) - return; - - total_alloc = s->alloc_fastpath + s->alloc_slowpath; - total_free = s->free_fastpath + s->free_slowpath; - - if (!total_alloc) - return; - - printf("\n"); - printf("Slab Perf Counter Alloc Free %%Al %%Fr\n"); - printf("--------------------------------------------------\n"); - printf("Fastpath %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n", - s->alloc_fastpath, s->free_fastpath, - s->alloc_fastpath * 100 / total_alloc, - s->free_fastpath * 100 / total_free); - printf("Slowpath %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n", - total_alloc - s->alloc_fastpath, s->free_slowpath, - (total_alloc - s->alloc_fastpath) * 100 / total_alloc, - s->free_slowpath * 100 / total_free); - printf("Page Alloc %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n", - s->alloc_slab, s->free_slab, - s->alloc_slab * 100 / total_alloc, - s->free_slab * 100 / total_free); - printf("Add partial %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n", - s->deactivate_to_head + s->deactivate_to_tail, - s->free_add_partial, - (s->deactivate_to_head + s->deactivate_to_tail) * 100 / total_alloc, - s->free_add_partial * 100 / total_free); - printf("Remove partial %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n", - s->alloc_from_partial, s->free_remove_partial, - s->alloc_from_partial * 100 / total_alloc, - s->free_remove_partial * 100 / total_free); - - printf("RemoteObj/SlabFrozen %8lu %8lu %3lu %3lu\n", - s->deactivate_remote_frees, s->free_frozen, - s->deactivate_remote_frees * 100 / total_alloc, - s->free_frozen * 100 / total_free); - - printf("Total %8lu %8lu\n\n", total_alloc, total_free); - - if (s->cpuslab_flush) - printf("Flushes %8lu\n", s->cpuslab_flush); - - if (s->alloc_refill) - printf("Refill %8lu\n", s->alloc_refill); - - total = s->deactivate_full + s->deactivate_empty + - s->deactivate_to_head + s->deactivate_to_tail; - - if (total) - printf("Deactivate Full=%lu(%lu%%) Empty=%lu(%lu%%) " - "ToHead=%lu(%lu%%) ToTail=%lu(%lu%%)\n", - s->deactivate_full, (s->deactivate_full * 100) / total, - s->deactivate_empty, (s->deactivate_empty * 100) / total, - s->deactivate_to_head, (s->deactivate_to_head * 100) / total, - s->deactivate_to_tail, (s->deactivate_to_tail * 100) / total); -} - -static void report(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0) - return; - - printf("\nSlabcache: %-20s Aliases: %2d Order : %2d Objects: %lu\n", - s->name, s->aliases, s->order, s->objects); - if (s->hwcache_align) - printf("** Hardware cacheline aligned\n"); - if (s->cache_dma) - printf("** Memory is allocated in a special DMA zone\n"); - if (s->destroy_by_rcu) - printf("** Slabs are destroyed via RCU\n"); - if (s->reclaim_account) - printf("** Reclaim accounting active\n"); - - printf("\nSizes (bytes) Slabs Debug Memory\n"); - printf("------------------------------------------------------------------------\n"); - printf("Object : %7d Total : %7ld Sanity Checks : %s Total: %7ld\n", - s->object_size, s->slabs, onoff(s->sanity_checks), - s->slabs * (page_size << s->order)); - printf("SlabObj: %7d Full : %7ld Redzoning : %s Used : %7ld\n", - s->slab_size, s->slabs - s->partial - s->cpu_slabs, - onoff(s->red_zone), s->objects * s->object_size); - printf("SlabSiz: %7d Partial: %7ld Poisoning : %s Loss : %7ld\n", - page_size << s->order, s->partial, onoff(s->poison), - s->slabs * (page_size << s->order) - s->objects * s->object_size); - printf("Loss : %7d CpuSlab: %7d Tracking : %s Lalig: %7ld\n", - s->slab_size - s->object_size, s->cpu_slabs, onoff(s->store_user), - (s->slab_size - s->object_size) * s->objects); - printf("Align : %7d Objects: %7d Tracing : %s Lpadd: %7ld\n", - s->align, s->objs_per_slab, onoff(s->trace), - ((page_size << s->order) - s->objs_per_slab * s->slab_size) * - s->slabs); - - ops(s); - show_tracking(s); - slab_numa(s, 1); - slab_stats(s); -} - -static void slabcache(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - char size_str[20]; - char dist_str[40]; - char flags[20]; - char *p = flags; - - if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0) - return; - - if (actual_slabs == 1) { - report(s); - return; - } - - if (skip_zero && !show_empty && !s->slabs) - return; - - if (show_empty && s->slabs) - return; - - store_size(size_str, slab_size(s)); - snprintf(dist_str, 40, "%lu/%lu/%d", s->slabs - s->cpu_slabs, - s->partial, s->cpu_slabs); - - if (!line++) - first_line(); - - if (s->aliases) - *p++ = '*'; - if (s->cache_dma) - *p++ = 'd'; - if (s->hwcache_align) - *p++ = 'A'; - if (s->poison) - *p++ = 'P'; - if (s->reclaim_account) - *p++ = 'a'; - if (s->red_zone) - *p++ = 'Z'; - if (s->sanity_checks) - *p++ = 'F'; - if (s->store_user) - *p++ = 'U'; - if (s->trace) - *p++ = 'T'; - - *p = 0; - if (show_activity) { - unsigned long total_alloc; - unsigned long total_free; - - total_alloc = s->alloc_fastpath + s->alloc_slowpath; - total_free = s->free_fastpath + s->free_slowpath; - - printf("%-21s %8ld %10ld %10ld %3ld %3ld %5ld %1d\n", - s->name, s->objects, - total_alloc, total_free, - total_alloc ? (s->alloc_fastpath * 100 / total_alloc) : 0, - total_free ? (s->free_fastpath * 100 / total_free) : 0, - s->order_fallback, s->order); - } - else - printf("%-21s %8ld %7d %8s %14s %4d %1d %3ld %3ld %s\n", - s->name, s->objects, s->object_size, size_str, dist_str, - s->objs_per_slab, s->order, - s->slabs ? (s->partial * 100) / s->slabs : 100, - s->slabs ? (s->objects * s->object_size * 100) / - (s->slabs * (page_size << s->order)) : 100, - flags); -} - -/* - * Analyze debug options. Return false if something is amiss. - */ -static int debug_opt_scan(char *opt) -{ - if (!opt || !opt[0] || strcmp(opt, "-") == 0) - return 1; - - if (strcasecmp(opt, "a") == 0) { - sanity = 1; - poison = 1; - redzone = 1; - tracking = 1; - return 1; - } - - for ( ; *opt; opt++) - switch (*opt) { - case 'F' : case 'f': - if (sanity) - return 0; - sanity = 1; - break; - case 'P' : case 'p': - if (poison) - return 0; - poison = 1; - break; - - case 'Z' : case 'z': - if (redzone) - return 0; - redzone = 1; - break; - - case 'U' : case 'u': - if (tracking) - return 0; - tracking = 1; - break; - - case 'T' : case 't': - if (tracing) - return 0; - tracing = 1; - break; - default: - return 0; - } - return 1; -} - -static int slab_empty(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - if (s->objects > 0) - return 0; - - /* - * We may still have slabs even if there are no objects. Shrinking will - * remove them. - */ - if (s->slabs != 0) - set_obj(s, "shrink", 1); - - return 1; -} - -static void slab_debug(struct slabinfo *s) -{ - if (strcmp(s->name, "*") == 0) - return; - - if (sanity && !s->sanity_checks) { - set_obj(s, "sanity", 1); - } - if (!sanity && s->sanity_checks) { - if (slab_empty(s)) - set_obj(s, "sanity", 0); - else - fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot disable sanity checks\n", s->name); - } - if (redzone && !s->red_zone) { - if (slab_empty(s)) - set_obj(s, "red_zone", 1); - else - fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot enable redzoning\n", s->name); - } - if (!redzone && s->red_zone) { - if (slab_empty(s)) - set_obj(s, "red_zone", 0); - else - fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot disable redzoning\n", s->name); - } - if (poison && !s->poison) { - if (slab_empty(s)) - set_obj(s, "poison", 1); - else - fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot enable poisoning\n", s->name); - } - if (!poison && s->poison) { - if (slab_empty(s)) - set_obj(s, "poison", 0); - else - fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot disable poisoning\n", s->name); - } - if (tracking && !s->store_user) { - if (slab_empty(s)) - set_obj(s, "store_user", 1); - else - fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot enable tracking\n", s->name); - } - if (!tracking && s->store_user) { - if (slab_empty(s)) - set_obj(s, "store_user", 0); - else - fprintf(stderr, "%s not empty cannot disable tracking\n", s->name); - } - if (tracing && !s->trace) { - if (slabs == 1) - set_obj(s, "trace", 1); - else - fprintf(stderr, "%s can only enable trace for one slab at a time\n", s->name); - } - if (!tracing && s->trace) - set_obj(s, "trace", 1); -} - -static void totals(void) -{ - struct slabinfo *s; - - int used_slabs = 0; - char b1[20], b2[20], b3[20], b4[20]; - unsigned long long max = 1ULL << 63; - - /* Object size */ - unsigned long long min_objsize = max, max_objsize = 0, avg_objsize; - - /* Number of partial slabs in a slabcache */ - unsigned long long min_partial = max, max_partial = 0, - avg_partial, total_partial = 0; - - /* Number of slabs in a slab cache */ - unsigned long long min_slabs = max, max_slabs = 0, - avg_slabs, total_slabs = 0; - - /* Size of the whole slab */ - unsigned long long min_size = max, max_size = 0, - avg_size, total_size = 0; - - /* Bytes used for object storage in a slab */ - unsigned long long min_used = max, max_used = 0, - avg_used, total_used = 0; - - /* Waste: Bytes used for alignment and padding */ - unsigned long long min_waste = max, max_waste = 0, - avg_waste, total_waste = 0; - /* Number of objects in a slab */ - unsigned long long min_objects = max, max_objects = 0, - avg_objects, total_objects = 0; - /* Waste per object */ - unsigned long long min_objwaste = max, - max_objwaste = 0, avg_objwaste, - total_objwaste = 0; - - /* Memory per object */ - unsigned long long min_memobj = max, - max_memobj = 0, avg_memobj, - total_objsize = 0; - - /* Percentage of partial slabs per slab */ - unsigned long min_ppart = 100, max_ppart = 0, - avg_ppart, total_ppart = 0; - - /* Number of objects in partial slabs */ - unsigned long min_partobj = max, max_partobj = 0, - avg_partobj, total_partobj = 0; - - /* Percentage of partial objects of all objects in a slab */ - unsigned long min_ppartobj = 100, max_ppartobj = 0, - avg_ppartobj, total_ppartobj = 0; - - - for (s = slabinfo; s < slabinfo + slabs; s++) { - unsigned long long size; - unsigned long used; - unsigned long long wasted; - unsigned long long objwaste; - unsigned long percentage_partial_slabs; - unsigned long percentage_partial_objs; - - if (!s->slabs || !s->objects) - continue; - - used_slabs++; - - size = slab_size(s); - used = s->objects * s->object_size; - wasted = size - used; - objwaste = s->slab_size - s->object_size; - - percentage_partial_slabs = s->partial * 100 / s->slabs; - if (percentage_partial_slabs > 100) - percentage_partial_slabs = 100; - - percentage_partial_objs = s->objects_partial * 100 - / s->objects; - - if (percentage_partial_objs > 100) - percentage_partial_objs = 100; - - if (s->object_size < min_objsize) - min_objsize = s->object_size; - if (s->partial < min_partial) - min_partial = s->partial; - if (s->slabs < min_slabs) - min_slabs = s->slabs; - if (size < min_size) - min_size = size; - if (wasted < min_waste) - min_waste = wasted; - if (objwaste < min_objwaste) - min_objwaste = objwaste; - if (s->objects < min_objects) - min_objects = s->objects; - if (used < min_used) - min_used = used; - if (s->objects_partial < min_partobj) - min_partobj = s->objects_partial; - if (percentage_partial_slabs < min_ppart) - min_ppart = percentage_partial_slabs; - if (percentage_partial_objs < min_ppartobj) - min_ppartobj = percentage_partial_objs; - if (s->slab_size < min_memobj) - min_memobj = s->slab_size; - - if (s->object_size > max_objsize) - max_objsize = s->object_size; - if (s->partial > max_partial) - max_partial = s->partial; - if (s->slabs > max_slabs) - max_slabs = s->slabs; - if (size > max_size) - max_size = size; - if (wasted > max_waste) - max_waste = wasted; - if (objwaste > max_objwaste) - max_objwaste = objwaste; - if (s->objects > max_objects) - max_objects = s->objects; - if (used > max_used) - max_used = used; - if (s->objects_partial > max_partobj) - max_partobj = s->objects_partial; - if (percentage_partial_slabs > max_ppart) - max_ppart = percentage_partial_slabs; - if (percentage_partial_objs > max_ppartobj) - max_ppartobj = percentage_partial_objs; - if (s->slab_size > max_memobj) - max_memobj = s->slab_size; - - total_partial += s->partial; - total_slabs += s->slabs; - total_size += size; - total_waste += wasted; - - total_objects += s->objects; - total_used += used; - total_partobj += s->objects_partial; - total_ppart += percentage_partial_slabs; - total_ppartobj += percentage_partial_objs; - - total_objwaste += s->objects * objwaste; - total_objsize += s->objects * s->slab_size; - } - - if (!total_objects) { - printf("No objects\n"); - return; - } - if (!used_slabs) { - printf("No slabs\n"); - return; - } - - /* Per slab averages */ - avg_partial = total_partial / used_slabs; - avg_slabs = total_slabs / used_slabs; - avg_size = total_size / used_slabs; - avg_waste = total_waste / used_slabs; - - avg_objects = total_objects / used_slabs; - avg_used = total_used / used_slabs; - avg_partobj = total_partobj / used_slabs; - avg_ppart = total_ppart / used_slabs; - avg_ppartobj = total_ppartobj / used_slabs; - - /* Per object object sizes */ - avg_objsize = total_used / total_objects; - avg_objwaste = total_objwaste / total_objects; - avg_partobj = total_partobj * 100 / total_objects; - avg_memobj = total_objsize / total_objects; - - printf("Slabcache Totals\n"); - printf("----------------\n"); - printf("Slabcaches : %3d Aliases : %3d->%-3d Active: %3d\n", - slabs, aliases, alias_targets, used_slabs); - - store_size(b1, total_size);store_size(b2, total_waste); - store_size(b3, total_waste * 100 / total_used); - printf("Memory used: %6s # Loss : %6s MRatio:%6s%%\n", b1, b2, b3); - - store_size(b1, total_objects);store_size(b2, total_partobj); - store_size(b3, total_partobj * 100 / total_objects); - printf("# Objects : %6s # PartObj: %6s ORatio:%6s%%\n", b1, b2, b3); - - printf("\n"); - printf("Per Cache Average Min Max Total\n"); - printf("---------------------------------------------------------\n"); - - store_size(b1, avg_objects);store_size(b2, min_objects); - store_size(b3, max_objects);store_size(b4, total_objects); - printf("#Objects %10s %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - - store_size(b1, avg_slabs);store_size(b2, min_slabs); - store_size(b3, max_slabs);store_size(b4, total_slabs); - printf("#Slabs %10s %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - - store_size(b1, avg_partial);store_size(b2, min_partial); - store_size(b3, max_partial);store_size(b4, total_partial); - printf("#PartSlab %10s %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - store_size(b1, avg_ppart);store_size(b2, min_ppart); - store_size(b3, max_ppart); - store_size(b4, total_partial * 100 / total_slabs); - printf("%%PartSlab%10s%% %10s%% %10s%% %10s%%\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - - store_size(b1, avg_partobj);store_size(b2, min_partobj); - store_size(b3, max_partobj); - store_size(b4, total_partobj); - printf("PartObjs %10s %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - - store_size(b1, avg_ppartobj);store_size(b2, min_ppartobj); - store_size(b3, max_ppartobj); - store_size(b4, total_partobj * 100 / total_objects); - printf("%% PartObj%10s%% %10s%% %10s%% %10s%%\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - - store_size(b1, avg_size);store_size(b2, min_size); - store_size(b3, max_size);store_size(b4, total_size); - printf("Memory %10s %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - - store_size(b1, avg_used);store_size(b2, min_used); - store_size(b3, max_used);store_size(b4, total_used); - printf("Used %10s %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - - store_size(b1, avg_waste);store_size(b2, min_waste); - store_size(b3, max_waste);store_size(b4, total_waste); - printf("Loss %10s %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3, b4); - - printf("\n"); - printf("Per Object Average Min Max\n"); - printf("---------------------------------------------\n"); - - store_size(b1, avg_memobj);store_size(b2, min_memobj); - store_size(b3, max_memobj); - printf("Memory %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3); - store_size(b1, avg_objsize);store_size(b2, min_objsize); - store_size(b3, max_objsize); - printf("User %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3); - - store_size(b1, avg_objwaste);store_size(b2, min_objwaste); - store_size(b3, max_objwaste); - printf("Loss %10s %10s %10s\n", - b1, b2, b3); -} - -static void sort_slabs(void) -{ - struct slabinfo *s1,*s2; - - for (s1 = slabinfo; s1 < slabinfo + slabs; s1++) { - for (s2 = s1 + 1; s2 < slabinfo + slabs; s2++) { - int result; - - if (sort_size) - result = slab_size(s1) < slab_size(s2); - else if (sort_active) - result = slab_activity(s1) < slab_activity(s2); - else - result = strcasecmp(s1->name, s2->name); - - if (show_inverted) - result = -result; - - if (result > 0) { - struct slabinfo t; - - memcpy(&t, s1, sizeof(struct slabinfo)); - memcpy(s1, s2, sizeof(struct slabinfo)); - memcpy(s2, &t, sizeof(struct slabinfo)); - } - } - } -} - -static void sort_aliases(void) -{ - struct aliasinfo *a1,*a2; - - for (a1 = aliasinfo; a1 < aliasinfo + aliases; a1++) { - for (a2 = a1 + 1; a2 < aliasinfo + aliases; a2++) { - char *n1, *n2; - - n1 = a1->name; - n2 = a2->name; - if (show_alias && !show_inverted) { - n1 = a1->ref; - n2 = a2->ref; - } - if (strcasecmp(n1, n2) > 0) { - struct aliasinfo t; - - memcpy(&t, a1, sizeof(struct aliasinfo)); - memcpy(a1, a2, sizeof(struct aliasinfo)); - memcpy(a2, &t, sizeof(struct aliasinfo)); - } - } - } -} - -static void link_slabs(void) -{ - struct aliasinfo *a; - struct slabinfo *s; - - for (a = aliasinfo; a < aliasinfo + aliases; a++) { - - for (s = slabinfo; s < slabinfo + slabs; s++) - if (strcmp(a->ref, s->name) == 0) { - a->slab = s; - s->refs++; - break; - } - if (s == slabinfo + slabs) - fatal("Unresolved alias %s\n", a->ref); - } -} - -static void alias(void) -{ - struct aliasinfo *a; - char *active = NULL; - - sort_aliases(); - link_slabs(); - - for(a = aliasinfo; a < aliasinfo + aliases; a++) { - - if (!show_single_ref && a->slab->refs == 1) - continue; - - if (!show_inverted) { - if (active) { - if (strcmp(a->slab->name, active) == 0) { - printf(" %s", a->name); - continue; - } - } - printf("\n%-12s <- %s", a->slab->name, a->name); - active = a->slab->name; - } - else - printf("%-20s -> %s\n", a->name, a->slab->name); - } - if (active) - printf("\n"); -} - - -static void rename_slabs(void) -{ - struct slabinfo *s; - struct aliasinfo *a; - - for (s = slabinfo; s < slabinfo + slabs; s++) { - if (*s->name != ':') - continue; - - if (s->refs > 1 && !show_first_alias) - continue; - - a = find_one_alias(s); - - if (a) - s->name = a->name; - else { - s->name = "*"; - actual_slabs--; - } - } -} - -static int slab_mismatch(char *slab) -{ - return regexec(&pattern, slab, 0, NULL, 0); -} - -static void read_slab_dir(void) -{ - DIR *dir; - struct dirent *de; - struct slabinfo *slab = slabinfo; - struct aliasinfo *alias = aliasinfo; - char *p; - char *t; - int count; - - if (chdir("/sys/kernel/slab") && chdir("/sys/slab")) - fatal("SYSFS support for SLUB not active\n"); - - dir = opendir("."); - while ((de = readdir(dir))) { - if (de->d_name[0] == '.' || - (de->d_name[0] != ':' && slab_mismatch(de->d_name))) - continue; - switch (de->d_type) { - case DT_LNK: - alias->name = strdup(de->d_name); - count = readlink(de->d_name, buffer, sizeof(buffer)); - - if (count < 0) - fatal("Cannot read symlink %s\n", de->d_name); - - buffer[count] = 0; - p = buffer + count; - while (p > buffer && p[-1] != '/') - p--; - alias->ref = strdup(p); - alias++; - break; - case DT_DIR: - if (chdir(de->d_name)) - fatal("Unable to access slab %s\n", slab->name); - slab->name = strdup(de->d_name); - slab->alias = 0; - slab->refs = 0; - slab->aliases = get_obj("aliases"); - slab->align = get_obj("align"); - slab->cache_dma = get_obj("cache_dma"); - slab->cpu_slabs = get_obj("cpu_slabs"); - slab->destroy_by_rcu = get_obj("destroy_by_rcu"); - slab->hwcache_align = get_obj("hwcache_align"); - slab->object_size = get_obj("object_size"); - slab->objects = get_obj("objects"); - slab->objects_partial = get_obj("objects_partial"); - slab->objects_total = get_obj("objects_total"); - slab->objs_per_slab = get_obj("objs_per_slab"); - slab->order = get_obj("order"); - slab->partial = get_obj("partial"); - slab->partial = get_obj_and_str("partial", &t); - decode_numa_list(slab->numa_partial, t); - free(t); - slab->poison = get_obj("poison"); - slab->reclaim_account = get_obj("reclaim_account"); - slab->red_zone = get_obj("red_zone"); - slab->sanity_checks = get_obj("sanity_checks"); - slab->slab_size = get_obj("slab_size"); - slab->slabs = get_obj_and_str("slabs", &t); - decode_numa_list(slab->numa, t); - free(t); - slab->store_user = get_obj("store_user"); - slab->trace = get_obj("trace"); - slab->alloc_fastpath = get_obj("alloc_fastpath"); - slab->alloc_slowpath = get_obj("alloc_slowpath"); - slab->free_fastpath = get_obj("free_fastpath"); - slab->free_slowpath = get_obj("free_slowpath"); - slab->free_frozen= get_obj("free_frozen"); - slab->free_add_partial = get_obj("free_add_partial"); - slab->free_remove_partial = get_obj("free_remove_partial"); - slab->alloc_from_partial = get_obj("alloc_from_partial"); - slab->alloc_slab = get_obj("alloc_slab"); - slab->alloc_refill = get_obj("alloc_refill"); - slab->free_slab = get_obj("free_slab"); - slab->cpuslab_flush = get_obj("cpuslab_flush"); - slab->deactivate_full = get_obj("deactivate_full"); - slab->deactivate_empty = get_obj("deactivate_empty"); - slab->deactivate_to_head = get_obj("deactivate_to_head"); - slab->deactivate_to_tail = get_obj("deactivate_to_tail"); - slab->deactivate_remote_frees = get_obj("deactivate_remote_frees"); - slab->order_fallback = get_obj("order_fallback"); - chdir(".."); - if (slab->name[0] == ':') - alias_targets++; - slab++; - break; - default : - fatal("Unknown file type %lx\n", de->d_type); - } - } - closedir(dir); - slabs = slab - slabinfo; - actual_slabs = slabs; - aliases = alias - aliasinfo; - if (slabs > MAX_SLABS) - fatal("Too many slabs\n"); - if (aliases > MAX_ALIASES) - fatal("Too many aliases\n"); -} - -static void output_slabs(void) -{ - struct slabinfo *slab; - - for (slab = slabinfo; slab < slabinfo + slabs; slab++) { - - if (slab->alias) - continue; - - - if (show_numa) - slab_numa(slab, 0); - else if (show_track) - show_tracking(slab); - else if (validate) - slab_validate(slab); - else if (shrink) - slab_shrink(slab); - else if (set_debug) - slab_debug(slab); - else if (show_ops) - ops(slab); - else if (show_slab) - slabcache(slab); - else if (show_report) - report(slab); - } -} - -struct option opts[] = { - { "aliases", 0, NULL, 'a' }, - { "activity", 0, NULL, 'A' }, - { "debug", 2, NULL, 'd' }, - { "display-activity", 0, NULL, 'D' }, - { "empty", 0, NULL, 'e' }, - { "first-alias", 0, NULL, 'f' }, - { "help", 0, NULL, 'h' }, - { "inverted", 0, NULL, 'i'}, - { "numa", 0, NULL, 'n' }, - { "ops", 0, NULL, 'o' }, - { "report", 0, NULL, 'r' }, - { "shrink", 0, NULL, 's' }, - { "slabs", 0, NULL, 'l' }, - { "track", 0, NULL, 't'}, - { "validate", 0, NULL, 'v' }, - { "zero", 0, NULL, 'z' }, - { "1ref", 0, NULL, '1'}, - { NULL, 0, NULL, 0 } -}; - -int main(int argc, char *argv[]) -{ - int c; - int err; - char *pattern_source; - - page_size = getpagesize(); - - while ((c = getopt_long(argc, argv, "aAd::Defhil1noprstvzTS", - opts, NULL)) != -1) - switch (c) { - case '1': - show_single_ref = 1; - break; - case 'a': - show_alias = 1; - break; - case 'A': - sort_active = 1; - break; - case 'd': - set_debug = 1; - if (!debug_opt_scan(optarg)) - fatal("Invalid debug option '%s'\n", optarg); - break; - case 'D': - show_activity = 1; - break; - case 'e': - show_empty = 1; - break; - case 'f': - show_first_alias = 1; - break; - case 'h': - usage(); - return 0; - case 'i': - show_inverted = 1; - break; - case 'n': - show_numa = 1; - break; - case 'o': - show_ops = 1; - break; - case 'r': - show_report = 1; - break; - case 's': - shrink = 1; - break; - case 'l': - show_slab = 1; - break; - case 't': - show_track = 1; - break; - case 'v': - validate = 1; - break; - case 'z': - skip_zero = 0; - break; - case 'T': - show_totals = 1; - break; - case 'S': - sort_size = 1; - break; - - default: - fatal("%s: Invalid option '%c'\n", argv[0], optopt); - - } - - if (!show_slab && !show_alias && !show_track && !show_report - && !validate && !shrink && !set_debug && !show_ops) - show_slab = 1; - - if (argc > optind) - pattern_source = argv[optind]; - else - pattern_source = ".*"; - - err = regcomp(&pattern, pattern_source, REG_ICASE|REG_NOSUB); - if (err) - fatal("%s: Invalid pattern '%s' code %d\n", - argv[0], pattern_source, err); - read_slab_dir(); - if (show_alias) - alias(); - else - if (show_totals) - totals(); - else { - link_slabs(); - rename_slabs(); - sort_slabs(); - output_slabs(); - } - return 0; -} diff --git a/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt b/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0924aaca3302 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt @@ -0,0 +1,298 @@ += Transparent Hugepage Support = + +== Objective == + +Performance critical computing applications dealing with large memory +working sets are already running on top of libhugetlbfs and in turn +hugetlbfs. Transparent Hugepage Support is an alternative means of +using huge pages for the backing of virtual memory with huge pages +that supports the automatic promotion and demotion of page sizes and +without the shortcomings of hugetlbfs. + +Currently it only works for anonymous memory mappings but in the +future it can expand over the pagecache layer starting with tmpfs. + +The reason applications are running faster is because of two +factors. The first factor is almost completely irrelevant and it's not +of significant interest because it'll also have the downside of +requiring larger clear-page copy-page in page faults which is a +potentially negative effect. The first factor consists in taking a +single page fault for each 2M virtual region touched by userland (so +reducing the enter/exit kernel frequency by a 512 times factor). This +only matters the first time the memory is accessed for the lifetime of +a memory mapping. The second long lasting and much more important +factor will affect all subsequent accesses to the memory for the whole +runtime of the application. The second factor consist of two +components: 1) the TLB miss will run faster (especially with +virtualization using nested pagetables but almost always also on bare +metal without virtualization) and 2) a single TLB entry will be +mapping a much larger amount of virtual memory in turn reducing the +number of TLB misses. With virtualization and nested pagetables the +TLB can be mapped of larger size only if both KVM and the Linux guest +are using hugepages but a significant speedup already happens if only +one of the two is using hugepages just because of the fact the TLB +miss is going to run faster. + +== Design == + +- "graceful fallback": mm components which don't have transparent + hugepage knowledge fall back to breaking a transparent hugepage and + working on the regular pages and their respective regular pmd/pte + mappings + +- if a hugepage allocation fails because of memory fragmentation, + regular pages should be gracefully allocated instead and mixed in + the same vma without any failure or significant delay and without + userland noticing + +- if some task quits and more hugepages become available (either + immediately in the buddy or through the VM), guest physical memory + backed by regular pages should be relocated on hugepages + automatically (with khugepaged) + +- it doesn't require memory reservation and in turn it uses hugepages + whenever possible (the only possible reservation here is kernelcore= + to avoid unmovable pages to fragment all the memory but such a tweak + is not specific to transparent hugepage support and it's a generic + feature that applies to all dynamic high order allocations in the + kernel) + +- this initial support only offers the feature in the anonymous memory + regions but it'd be ideal to move it to tmpfs and the pagecache + later + +Transparent Hugepage Support maximizes the usefulness of free memory +if compared to the reservation approach of hugetlbfs by allowing all +unused memory to be used as cache or other movable (or even unmovable +entities). It doesn't require reservation to prevent hugepage +allocation failures to be noticeable from userland. It allows paging +and all other advanced VM features to be available on the +hugepages. It requires no modifications for applications to take +advantage of it. + +Applications however can be further optimized to take advantage of +this feature, like for example they've been optimized before to avoid +a flood of mmap system calls for every malloc(4k). Optimizing userland +is by far not mandatory and khugepaged already can take care of long +lived page allocations even for hugepage unaware applications that +deals with large amounts of memory. + +In certain cases when hugepages are enabled system wide, application +may end up allocating more memory resources. An application may mmap a +large region but only touch 1 byte of it, in that case a 2M page might +be allocated instead of a 4k page for no good. This is why it's +possible to disable hugepages system-wide and to only have them inside +MADV_HUGEPAGE madvise regions. + +Embedded systems should enable hugepages only inside madvise regions +to eliminate any risk of wasting any precious byte of memory and to +only run faster. + +Applications that gets a lot of benefit from hugepages and that don't +risk to lose memory by using hugepages, should use +madvise(MADV_HUGEPAGE) on their critical mmapped regions. + +== sysfs == + +Transparent Hugepage Support can be entirely disabled (mostly for +debugging purposes) or only enabled inside MADV_HUGEPAGE regions (to +avoid the risk of consuming more memory resources) or enabled system +wide. This can be achieved with one of: + +echo always >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/enabled +echo madvise >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/enabled +echo never >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/enabled + +It's also possible to limit defrag efforts in the VM to generate +hugepages in case they're not immediately free to madvise regions or +to never try to defrag memory and simply fallback to regular pages +unless hugepages are immediately available. Clearly if we spend CPU +time to defrag memory, we would expect to gain even more by the fact +we use hugepages later instead of regular pages. This isn't always +guaranteed, but it may be more likely in case the allocation is for a +MADV_HUGEPAGE region. + +echo always >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/defrag +echo madvise >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/defrag +echo never >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/defrag + +khugepaged will be automatically started when +transparent_hugepage/enabled is set to "always" or "madvise, and it'll +be automatically shutdown if it's set to "never". + +khugepaged runs usually at low frequency so while one may not want to +invoke defrag algorithms synchronously during the page faults, it +should be worth invoking defrag at least in khugepaged. However it's +also possible to disable defrag in khugepaged: + +echo yes >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/defrag +echo no >/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/defrag + +You can also control how many pages khugepaged should scan at each +pass: + +/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/pages_to_scan + +and how many milliseconds to wait in khugepaged between each pass (you +can set this to 0 to run khugepaged at 100% utilization of one core): + +/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/scan_sleep_millisecs + +and how many milliseconds to wait in khugepaged if there's an hugepage +allocation failure to throttle the next allocation attempt. + +/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/alloc_sleep_millisecs + +The khugepaged progress can be seen in the number of pages collapsed: + +/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/pages_collapsed + +for each pass: + +/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/full_scans + +== Boot parameter == + +You can change the sysfs boot time defaults of Transparent Hugepage +Support by passing the parameter "transparent_hugepage=always" or +"transparent_hugepage=madvise" or "transparent_hugepage=never" +(without "") to the kernel command line. + +== Need of application restart == + +The transparent_hugepage/enabled values only affect future +behavior. So to make them effective you need to restart any +application that could have been using hugepages. This also applies to +the regions registered in khugepaged. + +== get_user_pages and follow_page == + +get_user_pages and follow_page if run on a hugepage, will return the +head or tail pages as usual (exactly as they would do on +hugetlbfs). Most gup users will only care about the actual physical +address of the page and its temporary pinning to release after the I/O +is complete, so they won't ever notice the fact the page is huge. But +if any driver is going to mangle over the page structure of the tail +page (like for checking page->mapping or other bits that are relevant +for the head page and not the tail page), it should be updated to jump +to check head page instead (while serializing properly against +split_huge_page() to avoid the head and tail pages to disappear from +under it, see the futex code to see an example of that, hugetlbfs also +needed special handling in futex code for similar reasons). + +NOTE: these aren't new constraints to the GUP API, and they match the +same constrains that applies to hugetlbfs too, so any driver capable +of handling GUP on hugetlbfs will also work fine on transparent +hugepage backed mappings. + +In case you can't handle compound pages if they're returned by +follow_page, the FOLL_SPLIT bit can be specified as parameter to +follow_page, so that it will split the hugepages before returning +them. Migration for example passes FOLL_SPLIT as parameter to +follow_page because it's not hugepage aware and in fact it can't work +at all on hugetlbfs (but it instead works fine on transparent +hugepages thanks to FOLL_SPLIT). migration simply can't deal with +hugepages being returned (as it's not only checking the pfn of the +page and pinning it during the copy but it pretends to migrate the +memory in regular page sizes and with regular pte/pmd mappings). + +== Optimizing the applications == + +To be guaranteed that the kernel will map a 2M page immediately in any +memory region, the mmap region has to be hugepage naturally +aligned. posix_memalign() can provide that guarantee. + +== Hugetlbfs == + +You can use hugetlbfs on a kernel that has transparent hugepage +support enabled just fine as always. No difference can be noted in +hugetlbfs other than there will be less overall fragmentation. All +usual features belonging to hugetlbfs are preserved and +unaffected. libhugetlbfs will also work fine as usual. + +== Graceful fallback == + +Code walking pagetables but unware about huge pmds can simply call +split_huge_page_pmd(mm, pmd) where the pmd is the one returned by +pmd_offset. It's trivial to make the code transparent hugepage aware +by just grepping for "pmd_offset" and adding split_huge_page_pmd where +missing after pmd_offset returns the pmd. Thanks to the graceful +fallback design, with a one liner change, you can avoid to write +hundred if not thousand of lines of complex code to make your code +hugepage aware. + +If you're not walking pagetables but you run into a physical hugepage +but you can't handle it natively in your code, you can split it by +calling split_huge_page(page). This is what the Linux VM does before +it tries to swapout the hugepage for example. + +Example to make mremap.c transparent hugepage aware with a one liner +change: + +diff --git a/mm/mremap.c b/mm/mremap.c +--- a/mm/mremap.c ++++ b/mm/mremap.c +@@ -41,6 +41,7 @@ static pmd_t *get_old_pmd(struct mm_stru + return NULL; + + pmd = pmd_offset(pud, addr); ++ split_huge_page_pmd(mm, pmd); + if (pmd_none_or_clear_bad(pmd)) + return NULL; + +== Locking in hugepage aware code == + +We want as much code as possible hugepage aware, as calling +split_huge_page() or split_huge_page_pmd() has a cost. + +To make pagetable walks huge pmd aware, all you need to do is to call +pmd_trans_huge() on the pmd returned by pmd_offset. You must hold the +mmap_sem in read (or write) mode to be sure an huge pmd cannot be +created from under you by khugepaged (khugepaged collapse_huge_page +takes the mmap_sem in write mode in addition to the anon_vma lock). If +pmd_trans_huge returns false, you just fallback in the old code +paths. If instead pmd_trans_huge returns true, you have to take the +mm->page_table_lock and re-run pmd_trans_huge. Taking the +page_table_lock will prevent the huge pmd to be converted into a +regular pmd from under you (split_huge_page can run in parallel to the +pagetable walk). If the second pmd_trans_huge returns false, you +should just drop the page_table_lock and fallback to the old code as +before. Otherwise you should run pmd_trans_splitting on the pmd. In +case pmd_trans_splitting returns true, it means split_huge_page is +already in the middle of splitting the page. So if pmd_trans_splitting +returns true it's enough to drop the page_table_lock and call +wait_split_huge_page and then fallback the old code paths. You are +guaranteed by the time wait_split_huge_page returns, the pmd isn't +huge anymore. If pmd_trans_splitting returns false, you can proceed to +process the huge pmd and the hugepage natively. Once finished you can +drop the page_table_lock. + +== compound_lock, get_user_pages and put_page == + +split_huge_page internally has to distribute the refcounts in the head +page to the tail pages before clearing all PG_head/tail bits from the +page structures. It can do that easily for refcounts taken by huge pmd +mappings. But the GUI API as created by hugetlbfs (that returns head +and tail pages if running get_user_pages on an address backed by any +hugepage), requires the refcount to be accounted on the tail pages and +not only in the head pages, if we want to be able to run +split_huge_page while there are gup pins established on any tail +page. Failure to be able to run split_huge_page if there's any gup pin +on any tail page, would mean having to split all hugepages upfront in +get_user_pages which is unacceptable as too many gup users are +performance critical and they must work natively on hugepages like +they work natively on hugetlbfs already (hugetlbfs is simpler because +hugetlbfs pages cannot be splitted so there wouldn't be requirement of +accounting the pins on the tail pages for hugetlbfs). If we wouldn't +account the gup refcounts on the tail pages during gup, we won't know +anymore which tail page is pinned by gup and which is not while we run +split_huge_page. But we still have to add the gup pin to the head page +too, to know when we can free the compound page in case it's never +splitted during its lifetime. That requires changing not just +get_page, but put_page as well so that when put_page runs on a tail +page (and only on a tail page) it will find its respective head page, +and then it will decrease the head page refcount in addition to the +tail page refcount. To obtain a head page reliably and to decrease its +refcount without race conditions, put_page has to serialize against +__split_huge_page_refcount using a special per-page lock called +compound_lock. diff --git a/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt b/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt index 2d70d0d95108..97bae3c576c2 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt @@ -84,8 +84,7 @@ indicate that the page is being managed on the unevictable list. The PG_unevictable flag is analogous to, and mutually exclusive with, the PG_active flag in that it indicates on which LRU list a page resides when -PG_lru is set. The unevictable list is compile-time configurable based on the -UNEVICTABLE_LRU Kconfig option. +PG_lru is set. The Unevictable LRU infrastructure maintains unevictable pages on an additional LRU list for a few reasons: diff --git a/Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX b/Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX index f8101d6b07b7..75613c9ac4db 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/w1/slaves/00-INDEX @@ -2,3 +2,5 @@ - This file w1_therm - The Maxim/Dallas Semiconductor ds18*20 temperature sensor. +w1_ds2423 + - The Maxim/Dallas Semiconductor ds2423 counter device. diff --git a/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2423 b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2423 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..90a65d23cf59 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2423 @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +Kernel driver w1_ds2423 +======================= + +Supported chips: + * Maxim DS2423 based counter devices. + +supported family codes: + W1_THERM_DS2423 0x1D + +Author: Mika Laitio <lamikr@pilppa.org> + +Description +----------- + +Support is provided through the sysfs w1_slave file. Each opening and +read sequence of w1_slave file initiates the read of counters and ram +available in DS2423 pages 12 - 15. + +Result of each page is provided as an ASCII output where each counter +value and associated ram buffer is outpputed to own line. + +Each lines will contain the values of 42 bytes read from the counter and +memory page along the crc=YES or NO for indicating whether the read operation +was successfull and CRC matched. +If the operation was successfull, there is also in the end of each line +a counter value expressed as an integer after c= + +Meaning of 42 bytes represented is following: + - 1 byte from ram page + - 4 bytes for the counter value + - 4 zero bytes + - 2 bytes for crc16 which was calculated from the data read since the previous crc bytes + - 31 remaining bytes from the ram page + - crc=YES/NO indicating whether read was ok and crc matched + - c=<int> current counter value + +example from the successfull read: +00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 6d 38 00 ff ff 00 00 fe ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=YES c=2 +00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 e0 1f 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=YES c=2 +00 29 c6 5d 18 00 00 00 00 04 37 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=YES c=408798761 +00 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 8d 39 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff crc=YES c=5 + +example from the read with crc errors: +00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 6d 38 00 ff ff 00 00 fe ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=YES c=2 +00 02 00 00 22 00 00 00 00 e0 1f 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=NO +00 e1 61 5d 19 00 00 00 00 df 0b 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=NO +00 05 00 00 20 00 00 00 00 8d 39 ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff crc=NO diff --git a/Documentation/workqueue.txt b/Documentation/workqueue.txt index 996a27d9b8db..01c513fac40e 100644 --- a/Documentation/workqueue.txt +++ b/Documentation/workqueue.txt @@ -190,9 +190,9 @@ resources, scheduled and executed. * Long running CPU intensive workloads which can be better managed by the system scheduler. - WQ_FREEZEABLE + WQ_FREEZABLE - A freezeable wq participates in the freeze phase of the system + A freezable wq participates in the freeze phase of the system suspend operations. Work items on the wq are drained and no new work item starts execution until thawed. diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt index 30b43e1b2697..9b7221a86df2 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt @@ -600,6 +600,7 @@ Protocol: 2.07+ 0x00000001 lguest 0x00000002 Xen 0x00000003 Moorestown MID + 0x00000004 CE4100 TV Platform Field name: hardware_subarch_data Type: write (subarch-dependent) @@ -621,9 +622,9 @@ Protocol: 2.08+ The payload may be compressed. The format of both the compressed and uncompressed data should be determined using the standard magic numbers. The currently supported compression formats are gzip - (magic numbers 1F 8B or 1F 9E), bzip2 (magic number 42 5A) and LZMA - (magic number 5D 00). The uncompressed payload is currently always ELF - (magic number 7F 45 4C 46). + (magic numbers 1F 8B or 1F 9E), bzip2 (magic number 42 5A), LZMA + (magic number 5D 00), and XZ (magic number FD 37). The uncompressed + payload is currently always ELF (magic number 7F 45 4C 46). Field name: payload_length Type: read diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt index 7fbbaf85f5b7..48c13b8ab90c 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt @@ -189,13 +189,13 @@ ACPI PCI - pci=off Don't use PCI - pci=conf1 Use conf1 access. - pci=conf2 Use conf2 access. - pci=rom Assign ROMs. - pci=assign-busses Assign busses - pci=irqmask=MASK Set PCI interrupt mask to MASK - pci=lastbus=NUMBER Scan upto NUMBER busses, no matter what the mptable says. + pci=off Don't use PCI + pci=conf1 Use conf1 access. + pci=conf2 Use conf2 access. + pci=rom Assign ROMs. + pci=assign-busses Assign busses + pci=irqmask=MASK Set PCI interrupt mask to MASK + pci=lastbus=NUMBER Scan up to NUMBER busses, no matter what the mptable says. pci=noacpi Don't use ACPI to set up PCI interrupt routing. IOMMU (input/output memory management unit) diff --git a/Documentation/xz.txt b/Documentation/xz.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2cf3e2608de3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/xz.txt @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + +XZ data compression in Linux +============================ + +Introduction + + XZ is a general purpose data compression format with high compression + ratio and relatively fast decompression. The primary compression + algorithm (filter) is LZMA2. Additional filters can be used to improve + compression ratio even further. E.g. Branch/Call/Jump (BCJ) filters + improve compression ratio of executable data. + + The XZ decompressor in Linux is called XZ Embedded. It supports + the LZMA2 filter and optionally also BCJ filters. CRC32 is supported + for integrity checking. The home page of XZ Embedded is at + <http://tukaani.org/xz/embedded.html>, where you can find the + latest version and also information about using the code outside + the Linux kernel. + + For userspace, XZ Utils provide a zlib-like compression library + and a gzip-like command line tool. XZ Utils can be downloaded from + <http://tukaani.org/xz/>. + +XZ related components in the kernel + + The xz_dec module provides XZ decompressor with single-call (buffer + to buffer) and multi-call (stateful) APIs. The usage of the xz_dec + module is documented in include/linux/xz.h. + + The xz_dec_test module is for testing xz_dec. xz_dec_test is not + useful unless you are hacking the XZ decompressor. xz_dec_test + allocates a char device major dynamically to which one can write + .xz files from userspace. The decompressed output is thrown away. + Keep an eye on dmesg to see diagnostics printed by xz_dec_test. + See the xz_dec_test source code for the details. + + For decompressing the kernel image, initramfs, and initrd, there + is a wrapper function in lib/decompress_unxz.c. Its API is the + same as in other decompress_*.c files, which is defined in + include/linux/decompress/generic.h. + + scripts/xz_wrap.sh is a wrapper for the xz command line tool found + from XZ Utils. The wrapper sets compression options to values suitable + for compressing the kernel image. + + For kernel makefiles, two commands are provided for use with + $(call if_needed). The kernel image should be compressed with + $(call if_needed,xzkern) which will use a BCJ filter and a big LZMA2 + dictionary. It will also append a four-byte trailer containing the + uncompressed size of the file, which is needed by the boot code. + Other things should be compressed with $(call if_needed,xzmisc) + which will use no BCJ filter and 1 MiB LZMA2 dictionary. + +Notes on compression options + + Since the XZ Embedded supports only streams with no integrity check or + CRC32, make sure that you don't use some other integrity check type + when encoding files that are supposed to be decoded by the kernel. With + liblzma, you need to use either LZMA_CHECK_NONE or LZMA_CHECK_CRC32 + when encoding. With the xz command line tool, use --check=none or + --check=crc32. + + Using CRC32 is strongly recommended unless there is some other layer + which will verify the integrity of the uncompressed data anyway. + Double checking the integrity would probably be waste of CPU cycles. + Note that the headers will always have a CRC32 which will be validated + by the decoder; you can only change the integrity check type (or + disable it) for the actual uncompressed data. + + In userspace, LZMA2 is typically used with dictionary sizes of several + megabytes. The decoder needs to have the dictionary in RAM, thus big + dictionaries cannot be used for files that are intended to be decoded + by the kernel. 1 MiB is probably the maximum reasonable dictionary + size for in-kernel use (maybe more is OK for initramfs). The presets + in XZ Utils may not be optimal when creating files for the kernel, + so don't hesitate to use custom settings. Example: + + xz --check=crc32 --lzma2=dict=512KiB inputfile + + An exception to above dictionary size limitation is when the decoder + is used in single-call mode. Decompressing the kernel itself is an + example of this situation. In single-call mode, the memory usage + doesn't depend on the dictionary size, and it is perfectly fine to + use a big dictionary: for maximum compression, the dictionary should + be at least as big as the uncompressed data itself. + +Future plans + + Creating a limited XZ encoder may be considered if people think it is + useful. LZMA2 is slower to compress than e.g. Deflate or LZO even at + the fastest settings, so it isn't clear if LZMA2 encoder is wanted + into the kernel. + + Support for limited random-access reading is planned for the + decompression code. I don't know if it could have any use in the + kernel, but I know that it would be useful in some embedded projects + outside the Linux kernel. + +Conformance to the .xz file format specification + + There are a couple of corner cases where things have been simplified + at expense of detecting errors as early as possible. These should not + matter in practice all, since they don't cause security issues. But + it is good to know this if testing the code e.g. with the test files + from XZ Utils. + +Reporting bugs + + Before reporting a bug, please check that it's not fixed already + at upstream. See <http://tukaani.org/xz/embedded.html> to get the + latest code. + + Report bugs to <lasse.collin@tukaani.org> or visit #tukaani on + Freenode and talk to Larhzu. I don't actively read LKML or other + kernel-related mailing lists, so if there's something I should know, + you should email to me personally or use IRC. + + Don't bother Igor Pavlov with questions about the XZ implementation + in the kernel or about XZ Utils. While these two implementations + include essential code that is directly based on Igor Pavlov's code, + these implementations aren't maintained nor supported by him. diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/HOWTO b/Documentation/zh_CN/HOWTO index 69160779e432..faf976c0c731 100644 --- a/Documentation/zh_CN/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/HOWTO @@ -347,8 +347,8 @@ bugzilla.kernel.org是Linux内核开发者们用来跟踪内核Bug的网站。 最新bug的通知，可以订阅bugme-new邮件列表（只有新的bug报告会被寄到这里） 或者订阅bugme-janitor邮件列表（所有bugzilla的变动都会被寄到这里）。 - http://lists.osdl.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new - http://lists.osdl.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors + https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new + https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors 邮件列表 diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/SecurityBugs b/Documentation/zh_CN/SecurityBugs new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d21eb07fe943 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/SecurityBugs @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +Chinese translated version of Documentation/SecurityBugs + +If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the +original document maintainer directly. However, if you have a problem +communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for +help. Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated +or if there is a problem with the translation. + +Chinese maintainer: Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +--------------------------------------------------------------------- +Documentation/SecurityBugs 的中文翻译 + +如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接联系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文 +交流有困难的话，也可以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻 +译存在问题，请联系中文版维护者。 + +中文版维护者： 贾威威 Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +中文版翻译者： 贾威威 Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +中文版校译者： 贾威威 Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> + + +以下为正文 +--------------------------------------------------------------------- +Linux内核开发者认为安全非常重要。因此，我们想要知道当一个有关于 +安全的漏洞被发现的时候，并且它可能会被尽快的修复或者公开。请把这个安全 +漏洞报告给Linux内核安全团队。 + +1) 联系 + +linux内核安全团队可以通过email<security@kernel.org>来联系。这是 +一组独立的安全工作人员，可以帮助改善漏洞报告并且公布和取消一个修复。安 +全团队有可能会从部分的维护者那里引进额外的帮助来了解并且修复安全漏洞。 +当遇到任何漏洞，所能提供的信息越多就越能诊断和修复。如果你不清楚什么 +是有帮助的信息，那就请重温一下REPORTING-BUGS文件中的概述过程。任 +何攻击性的代码都是非常有用的，未经报告者的同意不会被取消，除非它已经 +被公布于众。 + +2) 公开 + +Linux内核安全团队的宗旨就是和漏洞提交者一起处理漏洞的解决方案直 +到公开。我们喜欢尽快地完全公开漏洞。当一个漏洞或者修复还没有被完全地理 +解，解决方案没有通过测试或者供应商协调，可以合理地延迟公开。然而，我们 +期望这些延迟尽可能的短些，是可数的几天，而不是几个星期或者几个月。公开 +日期是通过安全团队和漏洞提供者以及供应商洽谈后的结果。公开时间表是从很 +短（特殊的，它已经被公众所知道）到几个星期。作为一个基本的默认政策，我 +们所期望通知公众的日期是7天的安排。 + +3) 保密协议 + +Linux内核安全团队不是一个正式的团体，因此不能加入任何的保密协议。 diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..951415bbab0c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ +Chinese translated version of Documentation/SubmitChecklist + +If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the +original document maintainer directly. However, if you have a problem +communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for +help. Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated +or if there is a problem with the translation. + +Chinese maintainer: Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +--------------------------------------------------------------------- +Documentation/SubmitChecklist ķ + +ۻ±ĵݣֱϵԭĵάߡʹӢ +ѵĻҲİά²ʱ߷ +⣬ϵİάߡ + +İάߣ Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +İ淭ߣ Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +İУߣ Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> + + +Ϊ +--------------------------------------------------------------------- +Linuxںύ嵥 +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +һЩں˿ӦĻ飬뿴Լں˲ύ +ܵĸ졣 + +ЩdzDocumentation/SubmittingPatchesĵṩԼ +ύLinuxں˲˵ + +1ʹһô#include/ǸܵǸļ + Ҫ붨/Ǹܵͷļ + +2û߸CONFIGѡ =y=m=n + Ҫб뾯/ ҪӾ/ + +2bͨ allnoconfig, allmodconfig + +2cʹ 0=builddir ɹع + +3ͨʹñؽ빤һЩڶCPUϹ + +4ppc64 һܺõļ齻ĿܣΪѡunsigned long + 64λֵʹá + +5Documentation/CodingStyleļϸ㲹 + ʹòΥ(scripts/checkpatch.pl)Աύ + Ӧõ㲹еΥ档 + +6κθ»߸ĶCONFIGѡܴò˵ + +7еKconfigѡ¶Ҫ˵֡ + +8ѾܽصKconfigϡǺͨõ--½ + +9мԡ + +10ʹ'make checkstack''make namespacecheck'飬Ȼҵ⡣ + ע⣺ջ鲻ȷس⣬κεһڶջʹö512ֽ + Ҫġ + +11kernel-docȫںAPIsļҪ̬ĺǰҲν + ʹ'make htmldocs''make mandocs'kernel-docȻκ + ֵ⡣ + +12ѾͨCONFIG_PREEMPT, CONFIG_DEBUG_PREEMPT, + CONFIG_DEBUG_SLAB, CONFIG_DEBUG_PAGEALLOC, CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES, + CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK, CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK_SLEEPԣͬʱ + ʹܡ + +13Ѿʹû߲ʹ CONFIG_SMP CONFIG_PREEMPTִʱ䡣 + +14ӰIO/DiskȵȣѾͨʹû߲ʹ CONFIG_LBDAF ԡ + +15еcodepathsѾʹlockdepùܡ + +16е/proc¼¶ҪļDocumentation/Ŀ¼¡ + +17еں¶¼Documentation/kernel-parameters.txtļС + +18еģ¶MODULE_PARM_DESC()¼ + +19еûռӿڸ¶¼Documentation/ABI/鿴Documentation/ABI/README + ԻøϢıûռӿڵIJӦñʼlinux-api@vger.kernel.org + +20DzǶͨ`make headers_check' + +21Ѿͨslabpage-allocationʧܼ顣鿴Documentation/fault-injection/ + +22¼ԴѾͨ`gcc -W'ʹ"make EXTRA_CFLAGS=-W"롣ܶෳգ + ǶѰ©洦:"warning: comparison between signed and unsigned" + +23ϲ-mmٲԣȷǷͲеһԼVMVFS + ϵͳи仯 + +24еڴ{e.g., barrier(), rmb(), wmb()}ҪԴеһעǶǸʲô + Լԭ + +25κƵIJӣҲҪDocumentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt + +26ĸĴʹκεںAPIskconfigйϵĹܣҪ + ʹصkconfigŹرգ and/or =mѡṩ[ͬһʱ䲻õĶã + ] + + CONFIG_SMP, CONFIG_SYSFS, CONFIG_PROC_FS, CONFIG_INPUT, CONFIG_PCI, + CONFIG_BLOCK, CONFIG_PM, CONFIG_HOTPLUG, CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ, + CONFIG_NET, CONFIG_INET=n (һʹ CONFIG_NET=y) diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingDrivers b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingDrivers index c27b0f6cdd39..5889f8df6312 100644 --- a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingDrivers +++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingDrivers @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Linux 2.4: Linux 2.6: 除了遵循和 2.4 版内核同样的规则外，你还需要在 linux-kernel 邮件 列表上跟踪最新的 API 变化。向 Linux 2.6 内核提交驱动的顶级联系人 - 是 Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>。 + 是 Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>。 决定设备驱动能否被接受的条件 ---------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches index 9a1a6e1ed09e..0f4385a62a49 100644 --- a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches +++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/patch-scripts.tar.gz 将改动拆分，逻辑类似的放到同一个补丁文件里。 -例如，如果你的改动里同时有bug修正和性能优化，那么把这些改动才分到两个或 +例如，如果你的改动里同时有bug修正和性能优化，那么把这些改动拆分到两个或 者更多的补丁文件中。如果你的改动包含对API的修改，并且修改了驱动程序来适 应这些新的API，那么把这些修改分成两个补丁。 @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ pref("mailnews.display.disable_format_flowed_support", true); 些原因，修正错误，重新提交更新后的改动，是你自己的工作。 Linus不给出任何评论就“丢弃”你的补丁是常见的事情。在系统中这样的事情很 -平常。如果他没有接受你的补丁，也许是由于以下原本： +平常。如果他没有接受你的补丁，也许是由于以下原因： * 你的补丁不能在最新版本的内核上干净的打上。 * 你的补丁在 linux-kernel 邮件列表中没有得到充分的讨论。 * 风格问题（参照第2小节） diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/magic-number.txt b/Documentation/zh_CN/magic-number.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4c4ce853577b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/magic-number.txt @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ +Chinese translated version of Documentation/magic-number.txt + +If you have any comment or update to the content, please post to LKML directly. +However, if you have problem communicating in English you can also ask the +Chinese maintainer for help. Contact the Chinese maintainer, if this +translation is outdated or there is problem with translation. + +Chinese maintainer: Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +--------------------------------------------------------------------- +Documentation/magic-number.txt的中文翻译 + +如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接发信到LKML。如果你使用英文交流有困难的话，也可 +以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻译存在问题，请联系中文版维护者。 + +中文版维护者： 贾威威 Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +中文版翻译者： 贾威威 Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +中文版校译者： 贾威威 Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> + +以下为正文 +--------------------------------------------------------------------- +这个文件是有关当前使用的魔术值注册表。当你给一个结构添加了一个魔术值，你也应该把这个魔术值添加到这个文件，因为我们最好把用于各种结构的魔术值统一起来。 + +使用魔术值来保护内核数据结构是一个非常好的主意。这就允许你在运行期检查(a)一个结构是否已经被攻击，或者(b)你已经给一个例行程序通过了一个错误的结构。后一种情况特别地有用---特别是当你通过一个空指针指向结构体的时候。tty源码，例如，经常通过特定驱动使用这种方法并且反复地排列特定方面的结构。 + +使用魔术值的方法是在结构的开始处声明的，如下： + +struct tty_ldisc { + int magic; + ... +}; + +当你以后给内核添加增强功能的时候，请遵守这条规则！这样就会节省数不清的调试时间，特别是一些古怪的情况，例如，数组超出范围并且重新写了超出部分。遵守这个规则，这些情况可以被快速地，安全地避免。 + + Theodore Ts'o + 31 Mar 94 + +给当前的Linux 2.1.55添加魔术表。 + + Michael Chastain + <mailto:mec@shout.net> + 22 Sep 1997 + +现在应该最新的Linux 2.1.112.因为在特性冻结期间，不能在2.2.x前改变任何东西。这些条目被数域所排序。 + + Krzysztof G.Baranowski + <mailto: kgb@knm.org.pl> + 29 Jul 1998 + +更新魔术表到Linux 2.5.45。刚好越过特性冻结，但是有可能还会有一些新的魔术值在2.6.x之前融入到内核中。 + + Petr Baudis + <pasky@ucw.cz> + 03 Nov 2002 + +更新魔术表到Linux 2.5.74。 + + Fabian Frederick + <ffrederick@users.sourceforge.net> + 09 Jul 2003 + +魔术名 地址 结构 所在文件 +=========================================================================== +PG_MAGIC 'P' pg_{read,write}_hdr include/linux/pg.h +CMAGIC 0x0111 user include/linux/a.out.h +MKISS_DRIVER_MAGIC 0x04bf mkiss_channel drivers/net/mkiss.h +RISCOM8_MAGIC 0x0907 riscom_port drivers/char/riscom8.h +SPECIALIX_MAGIC 0x0907 specialix_port drivers/char/specialix_io8.h +HDLC_MAGIC 0x239e n_hdlc drivers/char/n_hdlc.c +APM_BIOS_MAGIC 0x4101 apm_user arch/i386/kernel/apm.c +CYCLADES_MAGIC 0x4359 cyclades_port include/linux/cyclades.h +DB_MAGIC 0x4442 fc_info drivers/net/iph5526_novram.c +DL_MAGIC 0x444d fc_info drivers/net/iph5526_novram.c +FASYNC_MAGIC 0x4601 fasync_struct include/linux/fs.h +FF_MAGIC 0x4646 fc_info drivers/net/iph5526_novram.c +ISICOM_MAGIC 0x4d54 isi_port include/linux/isicom.h +PTY_MAGIC 0x5001 drivers/char/pty.c +PPP_MAGIC 0x5002 ppp include/linux/if_pppvar.h +SERIAL_MAGIC 0x5301 async_struct include/linux/serial.h +SSTATE_MAGIC 0x5302 serial_state include/linux/serial.h +SLIP_MAGIC 0x5302 slip drivers/net/slip.h +STRIP_MAGIC 0x5303 strip drivers/net/strip.c +X25_ASY_MAGIC 0x5303 x25_asy drivers/net/x25_asy.h +SIXPACK_MAGIC 0x5304 sixpack drivers/net/hamradio/6pack.h +AX25_MAGIC 0x5316 ax_disp drivers/net/mkiss.h +ESP_MAGIC 0x53ee esp_struct drivers/char/esp.h +TTY_MAGIC 0x5401 tty_struct include/linux/tty.h +MGSL_MAGIC 0x5401 mgsl_info drivers/char/synclink.c +TTY_DRIVER_MAGIC 0x5402 tty_driver include/linux/tty_driver.h +MGSLPC_MAGIC 0x5402 mgslpc_info drivers/char/pcmcia/synclink_cs.c +TTY_LDISC_MAGIC 0x5403 tty_ldisc include/linux/tty_ldisc.h +USB_SERIAL_MAGIC 0x6702 usb_serial drivers/usb/serial/usb-serial.h +FULL_DUPLEX_MAGIC 0x6969 drivers/net/tulip/de2104x.c +USB_BLUETOOTH_MAGIC 0x6d02 usb_bluetooth drivers/usb/class/bluetty.c +RFCOMM_TTY_MAGIC 0x6d02 net/bluetooth/rfcomm/tty.c +USB_SERIAL_PORT_MAGIC 0x7301 usb_serial_port drivers/usb/serial/usb-serial.h +CG_MAGIC 0x00090255 ufs_cylinder_group include/linux/ufs_fs.h +A2232_MAGIC 0x000a2232 gs_port drivers/char/ser_a2232.h +RPORT_MAGIC 0x00525001 r_port drivers/char/rocket_int.h +LSEMAGIC 0x05091998 lse drivers/fc4/fc.c +GDTIOCTL_MAGIC 0x06030f07 gdth_iowr_str drivers/scsi/gdth_ioctl.h +RIEBL_MAGIC 0x09051990 drivers/net/atarilance.c +RIO_MAGIC 0x12345678 gs_port drivers/char/rio/rio_linux.c +SX_MAGIC 0x12345678 gs_port drivers/char/sx.h +NBD_REQUEST_MAGIC 0x12560953 nbd_request include/linux/nbd.h +RED_MAGIC2 0x170fc2a5 (any) mm/slab.c +BAYCOM_MAGIC 0x19730510 baycom_state drivers/net/baycom_epp.c +ISDN_X25IFACE_MAGIC 0x1e75a2b9 isdn_x25iface_proto_data + drivers/isdn/isdn_x25iface.h +ECP_MAGIC 0x21504345 cdkecpsig include/linux/cdk.h +LSOMAGIC 0x27091997 lso drivers/fc4/fc.c +LSMAGIC 0x2a3b4d2a ls drivers/fc4/fc.c +WANPIPE_MAGIC 0x414C4453 sdla_{dump,exec} include/linux/wanpipe.h +CS_CARD_MAGIC 0x43525553 cs_card sound/oss/cs46xx.c +LABELCL_MAGIC 0x4857434c labelcl_info_s include/asm/ia64/sn/labelcl.h +ISDN_ASYNC_MAGIC 0x49344C01 modem_info include/linux/isdn.h +CTC_ASYNC_MAGIC 0x49344C01 ctc_tty_info drivers/s390/net/ctctty.c +ISDN_NET_MAGIC 0x49344C02 isdn_net_local_s drivers/isdn/i4l/isdn_net_lib.h +SAVEKMSG_MAGIC2 0x4B4D5347 savekmsg arch/*/amiga/config.c +STLI_BOARDMAGIC 0x4bc6c825 stlibrd include/linux/istallion.h +CS_STATE_MAGIC 0x4c4f4749 cs_state sound/oss/cs46xx.c +SLAB_C_MAGIC 0x4f17a36d kmem_cache mm/slab.c +COW_MAGIC 0x4f4f4f4d cow_header_v1 arch/um/drivers/ubd_user.c +I810_CARD_MAGIC 0x5072696E i810_card sound/oss/i810_audio.c +TRIDENT_CARD_MAGIC 0x5072696E trident_card sound/oss/trident.c +ROUTER_MAGIC 0x524d4157 wan_device include/linux/wanrouter.h +SCC_MAGIC 0x52696368 gs_port drivers/char/scc.h +SAVEKMSG_MAGIC1 0x53415645 savekmsg arch/*/amiga/config.c +GDA_MAGIC 0x58464552 gda arch/mips/include/asm/sn/gda.h +RED_MAGIC1 0x5a2cf071 (any) mm/slab.c +STL_PORTMAGIC 0x5a7182c9 stlport include/linux/stallion.h +EEPROM_MAGIC_VALUE 0x5ab478d2 lanai_dev drivers/atm/lanai.c +HDLCDRV_MAGIC 0x5ac6e778 hdlcdrv_state include/linux/hdlcdrv.h +EPCA_MAGIC 0x5c6df104 channel include/linux/epca.h +PCXX_MAGIC 0x5c6df104 channel drivers/char/pcxx.h +KV_MAGIC 0x5f4b565f kernel_vars_s arch/mips/include/asm/sn/klkernvars.h +I810_STATE_MAGIC 0x63657373 i810_state sound/oss/i810_audio.c +TRIDENT_STATE_MAGIC 0x63657373 trient_state sound/oss/trident.c +M3_CARD_MAGIC 0x646e6f50 m3_card sound/oss/maestro3.c +FW_HEADER_MAGIC 0x65726F66 fw_header drivers/atm/fore200e.h +SLOT_MAGIC 0x67267321 slot drivers/hotplug/cpqphp.h +SLOT_MAGIC 0x67267322 slot drivers/hotplug/acpiphp.h +LO_MAGIC 0x68797548 nbd_device include/linux/nbd.h +OPROFILE_MAGIC 0x6f70726f super_block drivers/oprofile/oprofilefs.h +M3_STATE_MAGIC 0x734d724d m3_state sound/oss/maestro3.c +STL_PANELMAGIC 0x7ef621a1 stlpanel include/linux/stallion.h +VMALLOC_MAGIC 0x87654320 snd_alloc_track sound/core/memory.c +KMALLOC_MAGIC 0x87654321 snd_alloc_track sound/core/memory.c +PWC_MAGIC 0x89DC10AB pwc_device drivers/usb/media/pwc.h +NBD_REPLY_MAGIC 0x96744668 nbd_reply include/linux/nbd.h +STL_BOARDMAGIC 0xa2267f52 stlbrd include/linux/stallion.h +ENI155_MAGIC 0xa54b872d midway_eprom drivers/atm/eni.h +SCI_MAGIC 0xbabeface gs_port drivers/char/sh-sci.h +CODA_MAGIC 0xC0DAC0DA coda_file_info include/linux/coda_fs_i.h +DPMEM_MAGIC 0xc0ffee11 gdt_pci_sram drivers/scsi/gdth.h +STLI_PORTMAGIC 0xe671c7a1 stliport include/linux/istallion.h +YAM_MAGIC 0xF10A7654 yam_port drivers/net/hamradio/yam.c +CCB_MAGIC 0xf2691ad2 ccb drivers/scsi/ncr53c8xx.c +QUEUE_MAGIC_FREE 0xf7e1c9a3 queue_entry drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c +QUEUE_MAGIC_USED 0xf7e1cc33 queue_entry drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c +HTB_CMAGIC 0xFEFAFEF1 htb_class net/sched/sch_htb.c +NMI_MAGIC 0x48414d4d455201 nmi_s arch/mips/include/asm/sn/nmi.h + +请注意，在声音记忆管理中仍然有每一些被定义的驱动魔术值。查看include/sound/sndmagic.h来获取他们完整的列表信息。很多OSS声音驱动拥有自己从声卡PCI ID构建的魔术值-他们也没有被列在这里。 + +IrDA子系统也使用了大量的自己的魔术值，查看include/net/irda/irda.h来获取他们完整的信息。 + +HFS是另外一个比较大的使用魔术值的文件系统-你可以在fs/hfs/hfs.h中找到他们。 |